PROJECT MANUAL LONGO LEXUS TOYOTA - Amazon S3 · PROJECT MANUAL . LONGO LEXUS TOYOTA . SERVICE VEHICLE DELIVERY PAVILION . 3534 N. Peck Road . El Monte, ... 017839 Project Record

PROJECT MANUAL

LONGO LEXUS TOYOTA SERVICE VEHICLE DELIVERY PAVILION

3534 N. Peck Road El Monte, California

OWNER: PENSKE MOTOR GROUP 3534 North Peck Road El Monte, California 91731 855.902.0017 voice Contact: Doug Eroh ARCHITECT: WARE MALCOMB

10 Edelman Irvine. California 92618 949.660.9128 voice 949.863.1581 facsimile Contact: Sia Shirazi

GENERAL CONTRACTOR: DPR CONSTRUCTION 4665 Macarthur Court Newport Beach, California 92660 949.955.3771 voice OWNER’S CONSULTANTS GEOTECHNICAL ENGINEER: GEO DESIGN INC. 2121 South Towne Center Anaheim, California 92806 714.634.3701 voice Contact: Christopher J. Zadoorian ARCHITECT’S CONSULTANTS CIVIL ENGINEER: WARE MALCOMB 10 Edelman Irvine, California 92618 949.660.9128 voice Contact: Adrian Troncoso STRUCTURAL ENGINEER: GEIMM & CHEN STRUCTURAL ENGINEERING, INC. 17500 Red Hill Avenue Irvine, California 92614 949.250.3150 voice Contact: Jeff Y. Chen LANDSCAPE ARCHITECT: COLLEEN M. NOLAN 7 Roble Rancho Santa Margarita, California 92688 714.743.7915 voice Contact: Colleen M. Nolan MEP ENGINEERS: DESIGN BUILD ISSUE: 90% CD DATE: 25 MARCH 2016

ISSUED FOR 90% CD 25 MARCH 2016

Delivery Pavilion, El Monte, Ca. Ware Malcomb PN IRV15-0103-00

TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 1

SECTION 000110 - TABLE OF CONTENTS NUMBER TITLE ISSUE REVISION 000100 Title Page 000110 Table of Contents ...................................................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 00 – PROCUREMENT AND CONTRACTING REQUIREMENTS 003132 Geotech Data .........................................................................25 Mar 16 003132x Geotech Report ......................................................................25 Mar 16 007000 General Conditions ................................................................25 Mar 16 008000 Supplementary Conditions .....................................................25 Mar 16

DIVISION 01 - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 011000 Summary ..............................................................................25 Mar 16 012500 Substitution Procedures .........................................................25 Mar 16 012600 Contract Modification Procedures ..........................................25 Mar 16 012900 Payment Procedures ..............................................................25 Mar 16 013100 Project Management and Coordination ..................................25 Mar 16 013200 Construction Progress Documentation ..................................25 Mar 16 013233 Photographic Documentation .................................................25 Mar 16 013300 Submittal Procedures .............................................................25 Mar 16 014000 Quality Requirements .............................................................25 Mar 16 014200 References .............................................................................25 Mar 16 015000 Temporary Facilities and Controls..........................................25 Mar 16 05720 Indoor Air Quality During Construction ...................................25 Mar 16 016000 Product Requirements ...........................................................25 Mar 16 017300 Execution ..............................................................................25 Mar 16 017419 Construction Waste Management ..........................................25 Mar 16 017700 Closeout Procedures ..............................................................25 Mar 16 017823 Operation and Maintenance Data ..........................................25 Mar 16 017839 Project Record Documents ....................................................25 Mar 16 017900 Demonstration and Training ...................................................25 Mar 16 018113.02 Sustainable Design Requirements .........................................25 Mar 16 019113 General Commissioning Requirements .................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS – not used DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE DIVISION 04 – MASONRY – not used DIVISION 05 - METALS 054000 Cold-Formed Metal Framing ..................................................25 Mar 16 055000 Metal Fabrications .................................................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES 061053 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry ............................................25 Mar 16 061600 Sheathing .............................................................................25 Mar 16 064116 Plastic Laminate Faced Architectural Casework ....................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 07 - THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION 072100 Thermal Insulation ..................................................................25 Mar 16 072600 Under Slab Vapor Barrier .......................................................25 Mar 16 072726 Fluid-Applied Membrane Air Barrier – Vapor Permeable .......25 Mar 16 074213.23 Metal Composite Material Wall Panels ..................................25 Mar 16 075423 Thermoplastic Polyolefin (TPO) Roofing ................................25 Mar 16 076200 Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim (Formed Metal) .....................25 Mar 16 076210 Flexible Flashing ....................................................................25 Mar 16 077200 Roof Accessories ...................................................................25 Mar 16 079200 Joint Sealants .........................................................................25 Mar 16

ISSUED FOR DRAFT CD 12 FEBRUARY 2016

NUMBER TITLE ISSUE REVISION


TABLE OF CONTENTS 000110 - 2

DIVISION 08 - OPENINGS 081113 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames ............................................25 Mar 16 081216 Aluminum Frames ..................................................................25 Mar 16 081416 Flush Wood Doors .................................................................25 Mar 16 083113 Access Doors and Frames .....................................................25 Mar 16 084113 Aluminum-Framed Entrances and Storefronts .......................25 Mar 16 088000 Glazing ..............................................................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 09 - FINISHES 092216 Non-Structural Metal Framing ................................................25 Mar 16 092400 Cement Plastering ..................................................................25 Mar 16 092900 Gypsum Board .......................................................................25 Mar 16 093013 Tiling ..............................................................................25 Mar 16 095113 Acoustical Panels Ceilings .....................................................25 Mar 16 096116 Concrete Floor Sealing ..........................................................25 Mar 16 096513 Resilient Base and Accessories .............................................25 Mar 16 096519 Resilient Tile Flooring .............................................................25 Mar 16 096816 Sheet Carpeting .....................................................................25 Mar 16 097200 Wall Coverings .......................................................................25 Mar 16 098116 Acoustical Blanket Insulation .................................................25 Mar 16 099100 Painting ..............................................................................25 Mar 16 099410 Architectural Finish Films .......................................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES 101400 Signage ..............................................................................25 Mar 16 104413 Fire Protection Cabinets .........................................................25 Mar 16 104416 Fire Extinguishers...................................................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT – not used DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS 123662 Simulated Stone Countertops ................................................25 Mar 16 129313 Bicycle Racks .........................................................................25 Mar 16 DIVISION 13 - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION – not used DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING EQUIPMENT – not used DIVISION 22 – PLUMBING DIVISION 23 – HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR CONDITIONING DIVISION 26 – ELECTRICAL DIVISION 27 – COMMUNICATIONS DIVISION 28 – ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY DIVISION 31 - EARTHWORK DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS DIVISION 33 – UTILITIES

END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS

ISSUED FOR 90% CD25 MARCH 2016

DOCUMENT 003132 - GEOTECHNICAL DATA

SUMMARY1.1This document includes information pertaining to geotechnical data.A.

INVESTIGATION1.2An investigation of subsurface soil conditions at the building site was authorized by the Owner, and wasA.subsequently performed by [_______________________], project no. [_____], dated [___________].

REPORT1.3The Geotechnical Investigation Report is for information only, and is not a warranty of subsurfaceA.conditions.The Report is made available for information only, and is not a Contract Document.B.The information contained in the Report represents design criteria, recommendations, and guidelines thatC.were utilized as the basis of design for the engineering of the earthwork operations, paving design, andfoundation design indicated in the Contract Documents. No changes in this design criteria will beconsidered or permitted. Where options are indicated, the options were considered by the respectivedesign team members and implemented in the construction documents.

RESPONSIBILITY1.4Bidders are expected to examine the site and subsurface investigation reports and then decide forA.themselves the character of the materials to be encountered.The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for variations in subsoil conditions, quality, or stability,B.or for the presence, level, and extent of underground water.The Architect and Owner assume no responsibility for Bidder’s interpretation of data contained in theC.Report.

END OF DOCUMENT 003132

Delivery Pavilion, El Monte, Ca.Ware Malcomb PN IRV15-0103-00

GEOTECHNICAL DATA 003132 - 1

2121 S Towne Centre Place, Suite 300 l Anaheim, CA 92806 l 714.634.3701 www.geodesigninc.com

March 15, 2016 Tally Construction Management, LLC 5635 N Scottsdale Road #170 Scottsdale, AZ 85250 Attention: Kurt Hanson

Geotechnical Consultation Services Proposed Delivery Pavilion

3534 Peck Road El Monte, California

GeoDesign Project: TallyCM-1-01 INTRODUCTION We performed a geotechnical investigation for previously proposed developments at the existing Longo Toyota dealership located at 3534 Peck Road in El Monte, California, and summarized the results in a report dated March 23, 2011. The prior proposed site developments included new signs and an extension of the service bay canopy. It is currently proposed to construct a delivery pavilion at the location shown on Figure 1. You furnished us with plans dated February 12, 2016 prepared by Ware Malcomb that depict the currently proposed development. Based on our review, the proposed delivery pavilion will be established at-grade and will be one-story. Structural loading information for the proposed pavilion was not provided, however based on the size of the proposed building, the structural loading to be relatively light. This letter presents updated geotechnical design recommendations for the proposed delivery pavilion and associated site work. SUBSURFACE CONDITIONS We explored the site by drilling two borings (B-1 and B-2) using limited-access, hollow-stem auger drilling equipment. The borings were drilled to depths of 21.5 and 50.5 feet below ground surface (BGS) at the locations shown on Figure 1.

2 TallyCM-1-01:031516

Fill soil was encountered in both borings to a maximum depth of 2.25 feet BGS and consists of medium dense sand with silt (SP-SM) and fine sand (SP). The native soil underlying the fill consists predominantly of medium dense to dense sand with silt to the maximum depth explored. Localized layers of silt and clay ranging from 0.5 foot to 3.5 feet thick were encountered in boring B-1 at depths of 6.25 feet BGS and 40.5 feet BGS and in boring B-2 at a depth of 1.5 feet BGS. Groundwater was not encountered in the borings to the depths explored. Based on groundwater level data from nearby monitoring wells, the current depth to groundwater beneath the site is greater than 90 feet BGS. The historical high groundwater in the site vicinity is at a depth of approximately 15 feet BGS. CONCLUSIONS The data available from our prior investigation is suitable for use in the design of the proposed delivery pavilion and the proposed development is feasible from a geotechnical perspective. The proposed building may be supported on spread footings established in the medium dense to dense native soil present at depths of 2.25 feet BGS in the general site vicinity provided the recommendations presented below are followed. RECOMMENDATIONS Spread footings a minimum of 2 feet wide and established in the medium dense to dense native soil at least 2.25 feet below the lowest adjacent grade or lowest finish floor level may be designed using an allowable bearing pressure of 4,500 pounds per square foot (psf). The allowable bearing pressure may be increased by one-third when considering short-term loading. To resist lateral loading, a passive pressure of 400 psf per foot of depth may be used in combination with a coefficient of friction equal to 0.4. The passive resistance and frictional resistance may be used in combination without reduction and may also be increased by one-third when considering short-term seismic and wind loading. Seismic design for the proposed building should be based on the updated ground motion parameters presented in Table 1 that are based on the 2013 California Building Code.

3 TallyCM-1-01:031516

Table 1. Updated Acceleration Parameters

Parameter Short Period

(Ts = 0.2 second)

1 Second Period (T

1 = 1.0 second)

Maximum Considered Earthquake

Spectral Acceleration, S 2.328 g 0.808 g

Site Class D

Site Coefficient

Fa = 1.0 F

v = 1.5

Adjusted Spectral Acceleration, SM S

MS = 2.328 g S

M1 = 1.212 g

Design Spectral Response Acceleration Parameters, S

D

SDS = 1.552 g S

D1 = 0.808 g

New floor slab and flatwork should be supported on dense native soil or 12 inches of properly compacted fill material. Earthwork should be planned and executed to minimize subgrade disturbance. Soil that has been disturbed during site preparation or soft or loose zones that are identified during probing should be removed from beneath proposed foundations or slabs-on-grade. All granular fill material should be compacted to at least 95 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Cohesive fill material should be compacted to at least 90 percent of the maximum dry density, as determined by ASTM D 1557. Unless otherwise modified herein, all prior recommendations presented in our March 23, 2011 report remain applicable.

4 TallyCM-1-01:031516

We appreciate the opportunity to be of continued service to you on this project. Please call if you have questions concerning the information provided. Sincerely, GeoDesign, Inc. Eric N. Torres, P.E. Staff Engineer Christopher J. Zadoorian, G.E. Principal Engineer ENT:CJZ:kt

Attachment

One copy submitted (via email only)

Document ID: TallyCM-1-01-031516-geol.docx

© 2016 GeoDesign, Inc. All rights reserved.

Signed 03/15/2016

Signed 03/15/2016

FIGURES

B-1

B-2

S T EWA R T S T R E E T

Prin

ted B

y: m

mille

r |

Prin

t D

ate:

3/1

5/2

01

6 2

:41

:51

PM

Off

71

4.6

34

.37

01

Fa

x 7

14

.63

4.3

71

1

Anah

eim

CA

92

80

6

21

21

S T

ow

ne

Cen

tre

Plac

e -

Suit

e 3

00

File

Nam

e:

J:\S

-Z\T

ally

CM

\Tal

lyC

M-1

\Tal

lyC

M-1

-01

\Fig

ure

s\C

AD

\Tal

lyC

M-1

-01

-SP0

1.d

wg

| L

ayout:

FIG

UR

E 1

SIT

E P

LA

N

PRO

POO

SED

DEL

IVER

Y P

AV

ILIO

NEL

MO

NT

E, C

A

TA

LLYC

M-1

-01

MA

RC

H 2

01

6FIG

UR

E 1

SITE PLAN BASED ON IMAGE OBTAINED FROMWARE MALCOMB, FEBRUARY 15, 2016

0

(SCALE IN FEET)

N

40 80

LEGEND:

BORING

PROPOSED DEVELOPMENT

B-1


DOCUMENT 007000 - GENERAL CONDITIONS

GENERAL CONDITIONS1.1The "General Conditions of the Contract for Construction", AIA Document A201, Sixteenth Edition, 2007,A.Articles 1 through 15 inclusive, is a part of this Contract, and is available for review from the Architect. TheGeneral Conditions and all modifications listed hereinafter shall apply to all various subcontracts andsub-subcontractors.Refer to Document 008000 for Supplementary Conditions.B.

END OF DOCUMENT 007000


GENERAL CONDITIONS 007000 - 1


DOCUMENT 008000 - SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS

SUPPLEMENTS1.1The following supplements modify, change, delete from or add to the "General Conditions of the ContractA.for Construction", AIA Document A201, Sixteenth Edition, 2007. Where any Article of the GeneralConditions is modified or any Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause thereof is modified or deleted by thesesupplements, the unaltered provision of the Article, Paragraph, Subparagraph or Clause shall remain ineffect.

REFERENCE TO DIVISION 011.2With regard to provisions of General Conditions related to project administrative or work-relatedA.requirements of the Contract, some of those paragraphs are modified or deleted from General Conditions,and are specified in Division 01, "General Requirements" of the Specifications.

ARTICLE 1 - GENERAL PROVISIONS

Add the following new paragraphs:

MISCELLANEOUS DEFINITIONS

The term "Product" as used in these Contract Documents includes materials, systems, and equipment.

The term "provide" as used in this Project Manual means to furnish and install.

CORRELATION AND INTENT OF THE CONTRACT DOCUMENTS

Add the following new subparagraphs:

The inter-relation of the Project Manual, the Drawings and the schedules is as follows: The Project Manualdetermines the quality, nature and setting of the several materials; the Drawings establish the quantities, dimensionsand details; and the schedules give the location. The documents are to be considered as one and whatever is calledfor by any one shall be as binding as if called for by all.

Should the drawings disagree in themselves, or with the Project Manual, or if proprietary information disagrees withperformance requirements in either the Drawings or the Project Manual, the better quality or greater quantity of theWork or materials shall be estimated upon, and unless otherwise ordered by the Architect in writing, shall beperformed or furnished. Should discrepancies or doubt occur, do not proceed with the Work without clarification fromthe Architect. Contractor shall request clarification in sufficient time to avoid delays and increases in the contract sum.

ARTICLE 3 - CONTRACTOR

REVIEW OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS AND FIELD CONDITIONS BY CONTRACTOR

Add following sentences to subparagraph 3.2.2:

If a dimensional discrepancy exists, Contractor shall take field measurements required for proper fabrication andinstallation of work. Upon commencement of any item of work, Contractor shall be responsible for dimensions relatedto such item of Work and shall make any corrections necessary to make work properly fit at no additional cost toOwner.

Before ordering any material or doing any work, Contractor shall verify dimensions and check conditions in order toassure himself that they properly reflect those on the Drawings. Any inconsistency shall be brought to attention of theArchitect. In the event that discrepancies occur between ordered material and actual conditions, of which Architectwas not notified beforehand, costs to correct such discrepancies shall be borne by Contractor.

SUPERVISION AND CONSTRUCTION PROCEDURES

Supplement as provided in Division 01.

LABOR AND MATERIALS

Add the following new paragraph:


SUPPLEMENTARY CONDITIONS 008000 - 1


After the Contract has been executed, the Owner and the Architect will consider a formal request for the substitutionof products in place of those specified only under the conditions set forth in the General Requirements of theSpecifications, Division 01. Refer to Division 01 for supplemental information.

WARRANTY

Supplement as provided in Division 01.ALLOWANCES


CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULES


DOCUMENTS AND SAMPLES AT THE SITE


SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA AND SAMPLES


USE OF SITE


CUTTING AND PATCHING


CLEANING UP


ARTICLE 6 - CONSTRUCTION BY OWNER OR BY SEPARATE CONTRACTORS

Add the following new paragraph

Coordinated construction work under this Contract includes, but not be limited to, providing concealed blocking asnoted for attachment of separate contract items in locations necessary for the actual items to be installed. Providingproper dimensional coordination of separate contract supplied items for general construction work and trim that is tomeet and/or adjoin Furniture, Fixtures, Equipment and Accessories.

It is a requirement of the Contractor's work schedule to provide the cooperation, coordination and exchange ofinformation necessary for a timely execution of separate contract work.

ARTICLE 7 - CHANGES IN THE WORK

GENERAL


Add the following new paragraphs:

Except as provided in this article, no oral statement, or direction of Architect or Owner shall be treated as a ChangeOrder or entitle Contractor to an adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Unit prices shall be inclusive of all costs including mark-up for overhead and profit and shall be applied to units ofmeasure as defined in the Contract Documents for each category of Work.

ARTICLE 8 - TIME

DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME




Add the following new paragraphs

Apart from extension of time, no payment or claim for damages shall be made to Contractor as compensation fordamages for any ordinary delays or hindrances from any cause whatsoever in the progress of the Work,notwithstanding whether such delay be avoidable or unavoidable.

In order to claim an inclement weather delay day, Contractor must:

Document, in writing, that the weather on the particular day was of such nature (rain, wind, snow, ice, andsubsequent resultant effects) that it significantly impacted its ability to make progress on critical path work items.Inclement weather delay days will not be granted for weekends or holidays unless Contractor can demonstrate that ithad been and intended to work on these days.

Submit such delay claims on a weekly basis, not more than 7 days following the day of occurrence.

Summarize the number of days claimed for the entire month accompanying each month's application for payment.

ARTICLE 9 - PAYMENTS AND COMPLETION

SCHEDULE OF VALUES


APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT


Add the following new subparagraph:

Unless otherwise stated in the Owner-Contractor Agreement, the Owner will retain, until Final Payment, 10 percent ofthe amount due the Contractor on account of progress payments, payable 30 days after Substantial Completionand/or satisfactory evidence to the owner that all payments, bills, and claims have been paid.

Add following Sub-subparagraphs:

Monthly Applications for Payment shall include waivers of liens for all work included in previous months' applicationfor payment. Waiver of Liens for subcontractors and materialmen shall be total amount paid prior to previous months'application for payment.

DECISIONS TO WITHHOLD CERTIFICATIONAdd following Sub-subparagraph 9.5.1.8 to Subparagraph 9.5.Failure to submit written plan indicating action byContractor to regain time schedule for completion of Work within Contract Time.Failure to keep record documents current.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION


FINAL COMPLETION AND FINAL PAYMENT

Add the following new paragraph:

In addition to the items listed in 9.10.2, the Contractor shall deliver 4 sets of the following items to the Owner beforefinal payment will be made:

Other close-out submittals as specified in Division 01.1.Project record documents as specified in Division 01.2.Operations and maintenance data as specified in Division 01.3.All warranties as required on specific products or portions of the Work, in format outlined in Division4.01.Spare parts, overages, and maintenance materials as outlined in Division 01 and described in the5.various technical sections.Certificates of occupancy.6.Copies of all inspection tags from authorities having jurisdiction.7.Executed Certificate of Substantial Completion.8.

ARTICLE 11 - INSURANCE AND BONDS




CONTRACTOR'S LIABILITY INSURANCE

Add the following new Sub-subparagraphs:

Liability insurance shall include all major divisions of coverage and be on a comprehensive basis including:

.1 Premises Operations (including X-C-U).

.2 Independent Contractor's Protective.

.3 Products and Completed Operations.

.4 Contractual including specified provisions for the Contractor's obligations under Paragraph 3.18.

.5. Broad Form Property Damage including Completed Operations.

.6 Personal Injury Liability with Employment Exclusion Deleted.

.7 Owner's and Contractor's Protective.

.8 Excess Umbrella.

Insurance certificate(s) shall specify Owner as the certificate holder and (except for Workers' Compensation) as anadditional insured.Add the following to the first sentence after the word “law”:

“or as otherwise required by the Owner”

ARTICLE 13 - MISCELLANEOUS PROVISIONS

TESTS AND INSPECTIONS


END OF DOCUMENT




SECTION 011000 - SUMMARY

GENERALPART 1 -

RELATED DOCUMENTS1.1Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andA.other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.

SUMMARY1.2Section Includes:A.

Project information.1.Work covered by Contract Documents.2.Work by Owner.3.Owner-furnished products.4.Access to site.5.Work restrictions.6.Specification and drawing conventions.7.

PROJECT INFORMATION1.3Project Identification: Longo Lexus Toyota Service Vehicle Delivery Pavilion.A.

Project Location: 3534 N. Peck Road, El Monte, Ca..1.Owner: .B.

Owner's Representative: .1.Architect: Ware Malcomb.C.Architect's Consultants: The Architect has retained the following design professionals who have preparedD.designated portions of the Contract Documents:

Refer to Title Page.1.Original Electronic Drawings Format: Autocad.E.

WORK COVERED BY CONTRACT DOCUMENTS1.4The Work of Project is defined by the Contract Documents and consists of the following:A.

New one story service vehicle delivery pavilion for automobile dealership including associated1.sitework.

Type of Contract:B.Project will be constructed under a single prime contract.1.

WORK BY OWNER1.5General: Cooperate fully with Owner so work may be carried out smoothly, without interfering with orA.delaying work under this Contract or work by Owner. Coordinate the Work of this Contract with workperformed by Owner.

OWNER-FURNISHED PRODUCTS1.6Owner will furnish products indicated. The Work includes receiving, unloading, handling, storing,A.protecting, and installing Owner-furnished products.Owner-Furnished Products:B.

Furniture, fixtures and equipment unless noted otherwise.1.

ACCESS TO SITE1.7General: Contractor shall have full use of Project site for construction operations during constructionA.period. Contractor's use of Project site is limited only by Owner's right to perform work or to retain othercontractors on portions of Project.Use of Site: Limit use of Project site to areas within the Contract limits indicated. Do not disturb portionsB.of Project site beyond areas in which the Work is indicated.

Driveways, Walkways and Entrances: Keep driveways and entrances serving premises clear and1.available to Owner, Owner's employees, and emergency vehicles at all times. Do not use theseareas for parking or storage of materials.

Schedule deliveries to minimize use of driveways and entrances by construction operations.a.Schedule deliveries to minimize space and time requirements for storage of materials andb.equipment on-site.


SUMMARY 011000 - 1


WORK RESTRICTIONS1.8Work Restrictions, General: Comply with restrictions on construction operations.A.

Comply with limitations on use of public streets and with other requirements of authorities having1.jurisdiction.

SPECIFICATION AND DRAWING CONVENTIONS1.9Specification Content: The Specifications use certain conventions for the style of language and theA.intended meaning of certain terms, words, and phrases when used in particular situations. Theseconventions are as follows:

Imperative mood and streamlined language are generally used in the Specifications. The words1."shall," "shall be," or "shall comply with," depending on the context, are implied where a colon (:) isused within a sentence or phrase.Specification requirements are to be performed by Contractor unless specifically stated otherwise.2.

Division 01 General Requirements: Requirements of Sections in Division 01 apply to the Work of allB.Sections in the Specifications.Drawing Coordination: Requirements for materials and products identified on Drawings are described inC.detail in the Specifications. One or more of the following are used on Drawings to identify materials andproducts:

Terminology: Materials and products are identified by the typical generic terms used in the1.individual Specifications Sections.Abbreviations: Materials and products are identified by abbreviations published as part of the U.S.2.National CAD Standard and scheduled on Drawings.Keynoting: Materials and products are identified by reference keynotes referencing Specification3.Section numbers found in this Project Manual.

PRODUCTS (Not Used)PART 2 -

EXECUTION (Not Used)PART 3 -

END OF SECTION 011000


SUMMARY 011000 - 2


SECTION 012500 - SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for substitutions.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3Substitutions: Changes in products, materials, equipment, and methods of construction from thoseA.required by the Contract Documents and proposed by Contractor.

Substitutions for Cause: Changes proposed by Contractor that are required due to changed1.Project conditions, such as unavailability of product, regulatory changes, or unavailability ofrequired warranty terms.Substitutions for Convenience: Changes proposed by Contractor or Owner that are not required in2.order to meet other Project requirements but may offer advantage to Contractor or Owner.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Substitution Requests: Submit three copies of each request for consideration. Identify product orA.fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and title andDrawing numbers and titles.

Substitution Request Form: Use facsimile of form provided in Project Manual.1.Documentation: Show compliance with requirements for substitutions and the following, as2.applicable:

Statement indicating why specified product or fabrication or installation cannot be provided,a.if applicable.Coordination information, including a list of changes or revisions needed to other parts ofb.the Work and to construction performed by Owner and separate contractors, that will benecessary to accommodate proposed substitution.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed substitution with those of the Workc.specified. Include annotated copy of applicable Specification Section. Significant qualitiesmay include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability, visual effect,sustainable design characteristics, warranties, and specific features and requirementsindicated. Indicate deviations, if any, from the Work specified.Product Data, including drawings and descriptions of products and fabrication andd.installation procedures.Samples, where applicable or requested.e.Certificates and qualification data, where applicable or requested.f.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses andg.names and addresses of architects and owners.Material test reports from a qualified testing agency indicating and interpreting test resultsh.for compliance with requirements indicated.Research reports evidencing compliance with building code in effect for Project, fromi.ICC-ES or other agency approved by local authority.Detailed comparison of Contractor's construction schedule using proposed substitution withj.products specified for the Work, including effect on the overall Contract Time. If specifiedproduct or method of construction cannot be provided within the Contract Time, includeletter from manufacturer, on manufacturer's letterhead, stating date of receipt of purchaseorder, lack of availability, or delays in delivery.Cost information, including a proposal of change, if any, in the Contract Sum.k.Contractor's certification that proposed substitution complies with requirements in thel.Contract Documents except as indicated in substitution request, is compatible with relatedmaterials, and is appropriate for applications indicated.Contractor's waiver of rights to additional payment or time that may subsequently becomem.necessary because of failure of proposed substitution to produce indicated results.


SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES 012500 - 1


Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for3.evaluation within seven days of receipt of a request for substitution. Architect will notify Contractorof acceptance or rejection of proposed substitution within 15 days of receipt of request, or sevendays of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever is later.

Forms of Acceptance: Change Order, Construction Change Directive, or Architect'sa.Supplemental Instructions for minor changes in the Work.Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a proposedb.substitution within time allocated.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Compatibility of Substitutions: Investigate and document compatibility of proposed substitution with relatedA.products and materials. Engage a qualified testing agency to perform compatibility tests recommended bymanufacturers.

PROCEDURES1.6Coordination: Revise or adjust affected work as necessary to integrate work of the approved substitutions.A.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SUBSTITUTIONS2.1Substitutions for Cause: Submit requests for substitution immediately on discovery of need for change,A.but not later than 15 days prior to time required for preparation and review of related submittals.

Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following1.conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requestswithout action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will producea.indicated results.Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.b.Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.c.Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.d.Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.e.Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.f.Requested substitution provides specified warranty.g.If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has beenh.coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible withother products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.

Substitutions for Convenience: Architect will consider requests for substitution if received within 60 daysB.after commencement of the Work. Requests received after that time may be considered or rejected atdiscretion of Architect.

Conditions: Architect will consider Contractor's request for substitution when the following1.conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect will return requestswithout action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

Requested substitution offers Owner a substantial advantage in cost, time, energya.conservation, or other considerations, after deducting additional responsibilities Owner mustassume. Owner's additional responsibilities may include compensation to Architect forredesign and evaluation services, increased cost of other construction by Owner, andsimilar considerations.Requested substitution does not require extensive revisions to the Contract Documents.b.Requested substitution is consistent with the Contract Documents and will producec.indicated results.Requested substitution provides sustainable design characteristics that specified productd.provided per Section 018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."Substitution request is fully documented and properly submitted.e.Requested substitution will not adversely affect Contractor's construction schedule.f.Requested substitution has received necessary approvals of authorities having jurisdiction.g.Requested substitution is compatible with other portions of the Work.h.Requested substitution has been coordinated with other portions of the Work.i.




Requested substitution provides specified warranty.j.If requested substitution involves more than one contractor, requested substitution has beenk.coordinated with other portions of the Work, is uniform and consistent, is compatible withother products, and is acceptable to all contractors involved.






SECTION 012600 - CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for handling and processing ContractA.modifications.

MINOR CHANGES IN THE WORK1.3Architect will issue supplemental instructions authorizing minor changes in the Work, not involvingA.adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time, on AIA Document G710, "Architect's SupplementalInstructions."

PROPOSAL REQUESTS1.4Owner-Initiated Proposal Requests: will issue a detailed description of proposed changes in the Work thatA.may require adjustment to the Contract Sum or the Contract Time. If necessary, the description willinclude supplemental or revised Drawings and Specifications.

Work Change Proposal Requests issued by are not instructions either to stop work in progress or to1.execute the proposed change.Within time specified in Proposal Request or 20 days, when not otherwise specified, after receipt of2.Proposal Request, submit a quotation estimating cost adjustments to the Contract Sum and theContract Time necessary to execute the change.

Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with totala.amount of purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data tosubstantiate quantities.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of tradeb.discounts.Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.c.Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of thed.change, including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, andactivity relationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the ContractTime.Quotation Form: Use CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C,e."Proposal Worksheet Detail" or other forms acceptable to Architect.

Contractor-Initiated Proposals: If latent or changed conditions require modifications to the Contract,B.Contractor may initiate a claim by submitting a request for a change to .

Include a statement outlining reasons for the change and the effect of the change on the Work.1.Provide a complete description of the proposed change. Indicate the effect of the proposed changeon the Contract Sum and the Contract Time.Include a list of quantities of products required or eliminated and unit costs, with total amount of2.purchases and credits to be made. If requested, furnish survey data to substantiate quantities.Indicate applicable taxes, delivery charges, equipment rental, and amounts of trade discounts.3.Include costs of labor and supervision directly attributable to the change.4.Include an updated Contractor's construction schedule that indicates the effect of the change,5.including, but not limited to, changes in activity duration, start and finish times, and activityrelationship. Use available total float before requesting an extension of the Contract Time.Comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" if the proposed change6.requires substitution of one product or system for product or system specified.Proposal Request Form: Use CSI Form 13.6A, "Change Order Request (Proposal)," with7.attachments CSI Form 13.6D, "Proposal Worksheet Summary," and Form 13.6C, "ProposalWorksheet Detail" or other form acceptable to Architect.


CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 1


ADMINISTRATIVE CHANGE ORDERS1.5Allowance Adjustment: See Section 012100 "Allowances" for administrative procedures for preparation ofA.Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect actual costs of allowances.Unit-Price Adjustment: See Section 012200 "Unit Prices" for administrative procedures for preparation ofB.Change Order Proposal for adjusting the Contract Sum to reflect measured scope of unit-price work.

CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES1.6On Owner's approval of a Work Changes Proposal Request, will issue a Change Order for signatures ofA.Owner and Contractor on AIA Document G701 or other form acceptable to Architect.

CONSTRUCTION CHANGE DIRECTIVE1.7Construction Change Directive: Architect may issue a Construction Change Directive on AIA DocumentA.G714. Construction Change Directive instructs Contractor to proceed with a change in the Work, forsubsequent inclusion in a Change Order.

Construction Change Directive contains a complete description of change in the Work. It also1.designates method to be followed to determine change in the Contract Sum or the Contract Time.

Documentation: Maintain detailed records on a time and material basis of work required by theB.Construction Change Directive.

After completion of change, submit an itemized account and supporting data necessary to1.substantiate cost and time adjustments to the Contract.





CONTRACT MODIFICATION PROCEDURES 012600 - 2


SECTION 012900 - PAYMENT PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements necessary to prepare and processA.Applications for Payment.

DEFINITIONS1.3Schedule of Values: A statement furnished by Contractor allocating portions of the Contract Sum toA.various portions of the Work and used as the basis for reviewing Contractor's Applications for Payment.

SCHEDULE OF VALUES1.4Coordination: Coordinate preparation of the schedule of values with preparation of Contractor'sA.construction schedule.

Coordinate line items in the schedule of values with other required administrative forms and1.schedules, including the following:

Application for Payment forms with continuation sheets.a.Submittal schedule.b.Items required to be indicated as separate activities in Contractor's construction schedule.c.

Submit the schedule of values to Architect at earliest possible date, but no later than seven days2.before the date scheduled for submittal of initial Applications for Payment.

Format and Content: Use Project Manual table of contents as a guide to establish line items for theB.schedule of values. Provide at least one line item for each Specification Section.

Identification: Include the following Project identification on the schedule of values:1.Project name and location.a.Name of Architect.b.Architect's project number.c.Contractor's name and address.d.Date of submittal.e.

Arrange schedule of values consistent with format of AIA Document G703.2.Arrange the schedule of values in tabular form with separate columns to indicate the following for3.each item listed:

Related Specification Section or Division.a.Description of the Work.b.Name of subcontractor.c.Name of manufacturer or fabricator.d.Name of supplier.e.Change Orders (numbers) that affect value.f.Dollar value of the following, as a percentage of the Contract Sum to nearest one-hundredthg.percent, adjusted to total 100 percent.

Labor.1)Materials.2)Equipment.3)

Provide a breakdown of the Contract Sum in enough detail to facilitate continued evaluation of4.Applications for Payment and progress reports. Coordinate with Project Manual table of contents.Provide multiple line items for principal subcontract amounts in excess of five percent of theContract Sum.

Include separate line items under Contractor and principal subcontracts for [Sustainabilitya.documentation and other ]Project closeout requirements in an amount totaling five percentof the Contract Sum and subcontract amount.

Round amounts to nearest whole dollar; total shall equal the Contract Sum.5.Provide a separate line item in the schedule of values for each part of the Work where Applications6.for Payment may include materials or equipment purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yetinstalled.


PAYMENT PROCEDURES 012900 - 1


Differentiate between items stored on-site and items stored off-site. If required, includea.evidence of insurance.

Provide separate line items in the schedule of values for initial cost of materials, for each7.subsequent stage of completion, and for total installed value of that part of the Work.Each item in the schedule of values and Applications for Payment shall be complete. Include total8.cost and proportionate share of general overhead and profit for each item.

Temporary facilities and other major cost items that are not direct cost of actuala.work-in-place may be shown either as separate line items in the schedule of values ordistributed as general overhead expense, at Contractor's option.

Schedule Updating: Update and resubmit the schedule of values before the next Applications for9.Payment when Change Orders or Construction Change Directives result in a change in theContract Sum.

APPLICATIONS FOR PAYMENT1.5Each Application for Payment following the initial Application for Payment shall be consistent with previousA.applications and payments as certified by Architect and paid for by Owner.

Initial Application for Payment, Application for Payment at time of Substantial Completion, and final1.Application for Payment involve additional requirements.

Payment Application Times: The date for each progress payment is indicated in the Agreement betweenB.Owner and Contractor. The period of construction work covered by each Application for Payment is theperiod indicated in the Agreement.Application for Payment Forms: Use AIA Document G702 and AIA Document G703 as form forC.Applications for Payment.Application Preparation: Complete every entry on form. Notarize and execute by a person authorized toD.sign legal documents on behalf of Contractor. will return incomplete applications without action.

Entries shall match data on the schedule of values and Contractor's construction schedule. Use1.updated schedules if revisions were made.Include amounts for work completed following previous Application for Payment, whether or not2.payment has been received. Include only amounts for work completed at time of Application forPayment.Include amounts of Change Orders and Construction Change Directives issued before last day of3.construction period covered by application.Indicate separate amounts for work being carried out under Owner-requested project acceleration.4.

Stored Materials: Include in Application for Payment amounts applied for materials or equipmentE.purchased or fabricated and stored, but not yet installed. Differentiate between items stored on-site anditems stored off-site.

Provide certificate of insurance, evidence of transfer of title to Owner, and consent of surety to1.payment, for stored materials.Provide supporting documentation that verifies amount requested, such as paid invoices. Match2.amount requested with amounts indicated on documentation; do not include overhead and profit onstored materials.Provide summary documentation for stored materials indicating the following:3.

Value of materials previously stored and remaining stored as of date of previousa.Applications for Payment.Value of previously stored materials put in place after date of previous Application forb.Payment and on or before date of current Application for Payment.Value of materials stored since date of previous Application for Payment and remainingc.stored as of date of current Application for Payment.

Transmittal: Submit three signed and notarized original copies of each Application for Payment to by aF.method ensuring receipt within 24 hours. One copy shall include waivers of lien and similar attachments ifrequired.

Transmit each copy with a transmittal form listing attachments and recording appropriate1.information about application.

Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's lien fromG.entities lawfully entitled to file a mechanic's lien arising out of the Contract and related to the Work coveredby the payment.

Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction1.for retainage, on each item.When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.2.Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.3.Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms acceptable to Owner.4.




Waivers of Mechanic's Lien: With each Application for Payment, submit waivers of mechanic's liens fromH.subcontractors, sub-subcontractors, and suppliers for construction period covered by the previousapplication.

Submit partial waivers on each item for amount requested in previous application, after deduction1.for retainage, on each item.When an application shows completion of an item, submit conditional final or full waivers.2.Owner reserves the right to designate which entities involved in the Work must submit waivers.3.Submit final Application for Payment with or preceded by conditional final waivers from every entity4.involved with performance of the Work covered by the application who is lawfully entitled to a lien.Waiver Forms: Submit executed waivers of lien on forms, acceptable to Owner.5.

Initial Application for Payment: Administrative actions and submittals that must precede or coincide withI.submittal of first Application for Payment include the following:

List of subcontractors.1.Schedule of values.2.Contractor's construction schedule (preliminary if not final).3.Products list (preliminary if not final).4.Submittal schedule (preliminary if not final).5.List of Contractor's staff assignments.6.List of Contractor's principal consultants.7.Copies of building permits.8.Copies of authorizations and licenses from authorities having jurisdiction for performance of the9.Work.Initial progress report.10.Report of preconstruction conference.11.Certificates of insurance and insurance policies.12.Data needed to acquire Owner's insurance.13.

Application for Payment at Substantial Completion: After Architect issues the Certificate of SubstantialJ.Completion, submit an Application for Payment showing 100 percent completion for portion of the Workclaimed as substantially complete.

Include documentation supporting claim that the Work is substantially complete and a statement1.showing an accounting of changes to the Contract Sum.This application shall reflect Certificate(s) of Substantial Completion issued previously for Owner2.occupancy of designated portions of the Work.

Final Payment Application: After completing Project closeout requirements, submit final Application forK.Payment with releases and supporting documentation not previously submitted and accepted, including,but not limited, to the following:

Evidence of completion of Project closeout requirements.1.Insurance certificates for products and completed operations where required and proof that taxes,2.fees, and similar obligations were paid.Updated final statement, accounting for final changes to the Contract Sum.3.AIA Document G706, "Contractor's Affidavit of Payment of Debts and Claims."4.AIA Document G706A, "Contractor's Affidavit of Release of Liens."5.AIA Document G707, "Consent of Surety to Final Payment."6.Evidence that claims have been settled.7.Final meter readings for utilities, a measured record of stored fuel, and similar data as of date of8.Substantial Completion or when Owner took possession of and assumed responsibility forcorresponding elements of the Work.Final liquidated damages settlement statement.9.







SECTION 013100 - PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative provisions for coordinating construction operations on Project including,A.but not limited to, the following:

General coordination procedures.1.Coordination drawings.2.Requests for Information (RFIs).3.Project Web site.4.Project meetings.5.

DEFINITIONS1.3RFI: Request from Owner, Architect, or Contractor seeking information required by or clarifications of theA.Contract Documents.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Subcontract List: Prepare a written summary identifying individuals or firms proposed for each portion ofA.the Work, including those who are to furnish products or equipment fabricated to a special design. Includethe following information in tabular form:

Name, address, and telephone number of entity performing subcontract or supplying products.1.Number and title of related Specification Section(s) covered by subcontract.2.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate, covered by subcontract.3.

Key Personnel Names: Within 15 days of starting construction operations, submit a list of key personnelB.assignments, including superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site. Identifyindividuals and their duties and responsibilities; list addresses and telephone numbers, including home,office, and cellular telephone numbers and e-mail addresses. Provide names, addresses, and telephonenumbers of individuals assigned as alternates in the absence of individuals assigned to Project.

Post copies of list in project meeting room, in temporary field office, on Project Web site, and by1.each temporary telephone. Keep list current at all times.

GENERAL COORDINATION PROCEDURES1.5Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in different Sections of the Specifications toA.ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of the Work. Coordinate construction operations,included in different Sections, that depend on each other for proper installation, connection, and operation.

Schedule construction operations in sequence required to obtain the best results where installation1.of one part of the Work depends on installation of other components, before or after its owninstallation.Coordinate installation of different components to ensure maximum performance and accessibility2.for required maintenance, service, and repair.Make adequate provisions to accommodate items scheduled for later installation.3.

Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved, outlining special procedures required forB.coordination. Include such items as required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings.Conservation: Coordinate construction activities to ensure that operations are carried out withC.consideration given to conservation of energy, water, and materials. Coordinate use of temporary utilitiesto minimize waste.

Salvage materials and equipment involved in performance of, but not actually incorporated into, the1.Work. See other Sections for disposition of salvaged materials that are designated as Owner'sproperty.

COORDINATION DRAWINGS1.6Coordination Drawings, General: Prepare coordination drawings according to requirements in individualA.Sections, and additionally where installation is not completely shown on Shop Drawings, where limitedspace availability necessitates coordination, or if coordination is required to facilitate integration ofproducts and materials fabricated or installed by more than one entity.


PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION 013100 - 1


Content: Project-specific information, drawn accurately to a scale large enough to indicate and1.resolve conflicts. Do not base coordination drawings on standard printed data. Include thefollowing information, as applicable:

Use applicable Drawings as a basis for preparation of coordination drawings. Preparea.sections, elevations, and details as needed to describe relationship of various systems andcomponents.Indicate functional and spatial relationships of components of architectural, structural, civil,b.mechanical, and electrical systems.Indicate space requirements for routine maintenance and for anticipated replacement ofc.components during the life of the installation.Show location and size of access doors required for access to concealed dampers, valves,d.and other controls.Indicate required installation sequences.e.Indicate dimensions shown on the Drawings. Specifically note dimensions that appear to bef.in conflict with submitted equipment and minimum clearance requirements. Providealternate sketches to Architect indicating proposed resolution of such conflicts. Minordimension changes and difficult installations will not be considered changes to the Contract.

Coordination Drawing Organization: Organize coordination drawings as follows:B.Floor Plans and Reflected Ceiling Plans: Show architectural and structural elements, and1.mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical Work. Show locations of visibleceiling-mounted devices relative to acoustical ceiling grid. Supplement plan drawings with sectiondrawings where required to adequately represent the Work.Plenum Space: Indicate subframing for support of ceiling and wall systems, mechanical and2.electrical equipment, and related Work. Locate components within ceiling plenum to accommodatelayout of light fixtures indicated on Drawings. Indicate areas of conflict between light fixtures andother components.Mechanical Rooms: Provide coordination drawings for mechanical rooms showing plans and3.elevations of mechanical, plumbing, fire-protection, fire-alarm, and electrical equipment.Structural Penetrations: Indicate penetrations and openings required for all disciplines.4.Slab Edge and Embedded Items: Indicate slab edge locations and sizes and locations of5.embedded items for metal fabrications, sleeves, anchor bolts, bearing plates, angles, door floorclosers, slab depressions for floor finishes, curbs and housekeeping pads, and similar items.Mechanical and Plumbing Work: Show the following:6.

Sizes and bottom elevations of ductwork, piping, and conduit runs, including insulation,a.bracing, flanges, and support systems.Dimensions of major components, such as dampers, valves, diffusers, access doors,b.cleanouts and electrical distribution equipment.Fire-rated enclosures around ductwork.c.

Electrical Work: Show the following:7.Runs of vertical and horizontal conduit 1-1/4 inches in diameter and larger.a.Light fixture, exit light, emergency battery pack, smoke detector, and other fire-alarmb.locations.Panel board, switch board, switchgear, transformer, busway, generator, and motor controlc.center locations.Location of pull boxes and junction boxes, dimensioned from column center lines.d.

Fire-Protection System: Show the following:8.Locations of standpipes, mains piping, branch lines, pipe drops, and sprinkler heads.a.

Review: Architect will review coordination drawings to confirm that the Work is being coordinated,9.but not for the details of the coordination, which are Contractor's responsibility. If Architectdetermines that coordination drawings are not being prepared in sufficient scope or detail, or areotherwise deficient, Architect will so inform Contractor, who shall make changes as directed andresubmit.

REQUESTS FOR INFORMATION (RFIs)1.7General: Immediately on discovery of the need for additional information or interpretation of the ContractA.Documents, Contractor shall prepare and submit an RFI in the form specified.

Architect will return RFIs submitted to Architect by other entities controlled by Contractor with no1.response.Coordinate and submit RFIs in a prompt manner so as to avoid delays in Contractor's work or work2.of subcontractors.

Content of the RFI: Include a detailed, legible description of item needing information or interpretation andB.the following:




Project name.1.Project number.2.Date.3.Name of Contractor.4.Name of Architect.5.RFI number, numbered sequentially.6.RFI subject.7.Specification Section number and title and related paragraphs, as appropriate.8.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.9.Field dimensions and conditions, as appropriate.10.Contractor's suggested resolution. If Contractor's suggested resolution impacts the Contract Time11.or the Contract Sum, Contractor shall state impact in the RFI.Contractor's signature.12.Attachments: Include sketches, descriptions, measurements, photos, Product Data, Shop13.Drawings, coordination drawings, and other information necessary to fully describe items needinginterpretation.

Include dimensions, thicknesses, structural grid references, and details of affecteda.materials, assemblies, and attachments on attached sketches.

RFI Forms: Software-generated form with substantially the same content as indicated above, acceptableC.to Architect.

Attachments shall be electronic files in Adobe Acrobat PDF format.1.Architect's Action: Architect will review each RFI, determine action required, and respond. Allow sevenD.working days for Architect's response for each RFI. RFIs received by Architect after 1:00 p.m. will beconsidered as received the following working day.

The following Contractor-generated RFIs will be returned without action:1.Requests for approval of submittals.a.Requests for approval of substitutions.b.Requests for approval of Contractor's means and methods.c.Requests for coordination information already indicated in the Contract Documents.d.Requests for adjustments in the Contract Time or the Contract Sum.e.Requests for interpretation of Architect's actions on submittals.f.Incomplete RFIs or inaccurately prepared RFIs.g.

Architect's action may include a request for additional information, in which case Architect's time for2.response will date from time of receipt of additional information.Architect's action on RFIs that may result in a change to the Contract Time or the Contract Sum3.may be eligible for Contractor to submit Change Proposal according to Section 012600 "ContractModification Procedures."

If Contractor believes the RFI response warrants change in the Contract Time or thea.Contract Sum, notify Architect in writing within 10 days of receipt of the RFI response.

RFI Log: Prepare, maintain, and submit a tabular log of RFIs organized by the RFI number. Submit logE.weekly. Software log with not less than the following:

Project name.1.Name and address of Contractor.2.Name and address of Architect.3.RFI number including RFIs that were returned without action or withdrawn.4.RFI description.5.Date the RFI was submitted.6.Date Architect's response was received.7.

On receipt of Architect's action, update the RFI log and immediately distribute the RFI response to affectedF.parties. Review response and notify Architect within seven days if Contractor disagrees with response.

Identification of related Minor Change in the Work, Construction Change Directive, and Proposal1.Request, as appropriate.Identification of related Field Order, Work Change Directive, and Proposal Request, as appropriate.2.

PROJECT WEB SITE1.8Use Architect's Project Web site for purposes of hosting and managing project communication andA.documentation until Final Completion. Project Web site shall include the following functions:

Project directory.1.Project correspondence.2.Meeting minutes.3.Contract modifications forms and logs.4.RFI forms and logs.5.




PROJECT MEETINGS1.9General: meetings and conferences at Project site unless otherwise indicated.A.

Attendees: Inform participants and others involved, and individuals whose presence is required, of1.date and time of each meeting. Notify Owner and Architect of scheduled meeting dates and times.Agenda: Prepare the meeting agenda. Distribute the agenda to all invited attendees.2.Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record significant discussions and3.agreements achieved. Distribute the meeting minutes to everyone concerned, including Owner andArchitect, within three days of the meeting.

Preconstruction Conference: a preconstruction conference before starting construction, at a timeB.convenient to Owner and Architect, but no later than 15 days after execution of the Agreement.

Conduct the conference to review responsibilities and personnel assignments.1.Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and its2.superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend theconference. Participants at the conference shall be familiar with Project and authorized to concludematters relating to the Work.Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect progress, including the following:3.

Tentative construction schedule.a.Critical work sequencing and long-lead items.b.Designation of key personnel and their duties.c.Lines of communications.d.Procedures for processing field decisions and Change Orders.e.Procedures for RFIs.f.Procedures for testing and inspecting.g.Procedures for processing Applications for Payment.h.Distribution of the Contract Documents.i.Submittal procedures.j.Preparation of record documents.k.Use of the premises.l.Work restrictions.m.Working hours.n.Owner's occupancy requirements.o.Responsibility for temporary facilities and controls.p.Procedures for moisture and mold control.q.Procedures for disruptions and shutdowns.r.Construction waste management and recycling.s.Parking availability.t.Office, work, and storage areas.u.Equipment deliveries and priorities.v.First aid.w.Security.x.Progress cleaning.y.

Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.4.Preinstallation Conferences: Conduct a preinstallation conference at Project site before each constructionC.activity that requires coordination with other construction.

Attendees: Installer and representatives of manufacturers and fabricators involved in or affected by1.the installation and its coordination or integration with other materials and installations that havepreceded or will follow, shall attend the meeting. Advise Architect of scheduled meeting dates.Agenda: Review progress of other construction activities and preparations for the particular activity2.under consideration, including requirements for the following:

Contract Documents.a.Options.b.Related RFIs.c.Related Change Orders.d.Purchases.e.Deliveries.f.Submittals.g.Review of mockups.h.Possible conflicts.i.Compatibility requirements.j.Time schedules.k.Weather limitations.l.




Manufacturer's written instructions.m.Warranty requirements.n.Compatibility of materials.o.Acceptability of substrates.p.Temporary facilities and controls.q.Space and access limitations.r.Regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.s.Testing and inspecting requirements.t.Installation procedures.u.Coordination with other work.v.Required performance results.w.Protection of adjacent work.x.Protection of construction and personnel.y.

Record significant conference discussions, agreements, and disagreements, including required3.corrective measures and actions.Reporting: Distribute minutes of the meeting to each party present and to other parties requiring4.information.Do not proceed with installation if the conference cannot be successfully concluded. Initiate5.whatever actions are necessary to resolve impediments to performance of the Work and reconvenethe conference at earliest feasible date.

Project Closeout Conference: a project closeout conference, at a time convenient to Owner and Architect,D.but no later than 90 days prior to the scheduled date of Substantial Completion.

Conduct the conference to review requirements and responsibilities related to Project closeout.1.Attendees: Authorized representatives of Owner, Architect, and their consultants; Contractor and2.its superintendent; major subcontractors; suppliers; and other concerned parties shall attend themeeting. Participants at the meeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to concludematters relating to the Work.Agenda: Discuss items of significance that could affect or delay Project closeout, including the3.following:

Preparation of record documents.a.Procedures required prior to inspection for Substantial Completion and for final inspectionb.for acceptance.Submittal of written warranties.c.Requirements for preparing operations and maintenance data.d.Requirements for delivery of material samples, attic stock, and spare parts.e.Requirements for demonstration and training.f.Preparation of Contractor's punch list.g.Procedures for processing Applications for Payment at Substantial Completion and for finalh.payment.Submittal procedures.i.Installation of Owner's furniture, fixtures, and equipment.j.Responsibility for removing temporary facilities and controls.k.

Minutes: Entity conducting meeting will record and distribute meeting minutes.4.Progress Meetings: progress meetings at biweekly intervals.E.

Coordinate dates of meetings with preparation of payment requests.1.Attendees: In addition to representatives of Owner and Architect, each contractor, subcontractor,2.supplier, and other entity concerned with current progress or involved in planning, coordination, orperformance of future activities shall be represented at these meetings. All participants at themeeting shall be familiar with Project and authorized to conclude matters relating to the Work.Agenda: Review and correct or approve minutes of previous progress meeting. Review other3.items of significance that could affect progress. Include topics for discussion as appropriate tostatus of Project.

Contractor's Construction Schedule: Review progress since the last meeting. Determinea.whether each activity is on time, ahead of schedule, or behind schedule, in relation toContractor's construction schedule. Determine how construction behind schedule will beexpedited; secure commitments from parties involved to do so. Discuss whether schedulerevisions are required to ensure that current and subsequent activities will be completedwithin the Contract Time.

Review schedule for next period.1)Review present and future needs of each entity present, including the following:b.

Interface requirements.1)Sequence of operations.2)




Status of submittals.3)Deliveries.4)Off-site fabrication.5)Access.6)Site utilization.7)Temporary facilities and controls.8)Progress cleaning.9)Quality and work standards.10)Status of correction of deficient items.11)Field observations.12)Status of RFIs.13)Status of proposal requests.14)Pending changes.15)Status of Change Orders.16)Pending claims and disputes.17)Documentation of information for payment requests.18)

Minutes: Entity responsible for conducting the meeting will record and distribute the meeting4.minutes to each party present and to parties requiring information.

Schedule Updating: Revise Contractor's construction schedule after each progress meetinga.where revisions to the schedule have been made or recognized. Issue revised scheduleconcurrently with the report of each meeting.







SECTION 013200 - CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for documenting the progress of constructionA.during performance of the Work, including the following:

Contractor's construction schedule.1.Daily construction reports.2.Material location reports.3.Site condition reports.4.Special reports.5.

DEFINITIONS1.3Activity: A discrete part of a project that can be identified for planning, scheduling, monitoring, andA.controlling the construction project. Activities included in a construction schedule consume time andresources.

Critical Activity: An activity on the critical path that must start and finish on the planned early start1.and finish times.Predecessor Activity: An activity that precedes another activity in the network.2.Successor Activity: An activity that follows another activity in the network.3.

CPM: Critical path method, which is a method of planning and scheduling a construction project whereB.activities are arranged based on activity relationships. Network calculations determine when activities canbe performed and the critical path of Project.Critical Path: The longest connected chain of interdependent activities through the network schedule thatC.establishes the minimum overall Project duration and contains no float.Event: The starting or ending point of an activity.D.Float: The measure of leeway in starting and completing an activity.E.

Float time is not for the exclusive use or benefit of either Owner or Contractor, but is a jointly1.owned, expiring Project resource available to both parties as needed to meet schedule milestonesand Contract completion date.Free float is the amount of time an activity can be delayed without adversely affecting the early start2.of the successor activity.Total float is the measure of leeway in starting or completing an activity without adversely affecting3.the planned Project completion date.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Format for Submittals: Submit required submittals in the following format:A.

Working electronic copy of schedule file, where indicated.1.PDF electronic file.2.

Construction Schedule Updating Reports: Submit with Applications for Payment.B.Daily Construction Reports: Submit at weekly intervals.C.Material Location Reports: Submit at monthly intervals.D.Site Condition Reports: Submit at time of discovery of differing conditions.E.Special Reports: Submit at time of unusual event.F.Qualification Data: For scheduling consultant.G.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Scheduling Consultant Qualifications: An experienced specialist in CPM scheduling and reporting, withA.capability of producing CPM reports and diagrams within 24 hours of Architect's request.Prescheduling Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in SectionB.013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related to thepreliminary construction schedule and Contractor's construction schedule, including, but not limited to, thefollowing:


CONSTRUCTION PROGRESS DOCUMENTATION 013200 - 1


Review software limitations and content and format for reports.1.Verify availability of qualified personnel needed to develop and update schedule.2.Discuss constraints, including phasing work stages.3.Review delivery dates for Owner-furnished products.4.Review schedule for work of Owner's separate contracts.5.Review submittal requirements and procedures.6.Review time required for review of submittals and resubmittals.7.Review requirements for tests and inspections by independent testing and inspecting agencies.8.Review time required for Project closeout and Owner startup procedures.9.Review and finalize list of construction activities to be included in schedule.10.Review procedures for updating schedule.11.

COORDINATION1.6Coordinate Contractor's construction schedule with the schedule of values, list of subcontracts, submittalA.schedule, progress reports, payment requests, and other required schedules and reports.

Secure time commitments for performing critical elements of the Work from entities involved.1.Coordinate each construction activity in the network with other activities and schedule them in2.proper sequence.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE, GENERAL2.1Time Frame: Extend schedule from date established for commencement of the Work to date of finalA.completion.

Contract completion date shall not be changed by submission of a schedule that shows an early1.completion date, unless specifically authorized by Change Order.

Activities: Treat each story or separate area as a separate numbered activity for each main element of theB.Work. Comply with the following:

Activity Duration: Define activities so no activity is longer than 20 days, unless specifically allowed1.by Architect.Procurement Activities: Include procurement process activities for the following long lead items and2.major items, requiring a cycle of more than 60 days, as separate activities in schedule.Procurement cycle activities include, but are not limited to, submittals, approvals, purchasing,fabrication, and delivery.Submittal Review Time: Include review and resubmittal times indicated in Section 0133003."Submittal Procedures" in schedule. Coordinate submittal review times in Contractor's constructionschedule with submittal schedule.Startup and Testing Time: Include no fewer than 15 days for startup and testing.4.Substantial Completion: Indicate completion in advance of date established for Substantial5.Completion, and allow time for Architect's administrative procedures necessary for certification ofSubstantial Completion.Punch List and Final Completion: Include not more than 30 days for completion of punch list items6.and final completion.

Constraints: Include constraints and work restrictions indicated in the Contract Documents and as followsC.in schedule, and show how the sequence of the Work is affected.

Phasing: Arrange list of activities on schedule by phase.1.Work by Owner: Include a separate activity for each portion of the Work performed by Owner.2.Owner-Furnished Products: Include a separate activity for each product. Include delivery date3.indicated in Section 011000 "Summary." Delivery dates indicated stipulate the earliest possibledelivery date.Work Stages: Indicate important stages of construction for each major portion of the Work,4.including, but not limited to, the following:

Subcontract awards.a.Submittals.b.Purchases.c.Mockups.d.




Fabrication.e.Sample testing.f.Deliveries.g.Installation.h.Tests and inspections.i.Adjusting.j.Curing.k.Building flush-out.l.Startup and placement into final use and operation.m.

Construction Areas: Identify each major area of construction for each major portion of the Work.5.Indicate where each construction activity within a major area must be sequenced or integrated withother construction activities to provide for the following:

Structural completion.a.Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.b.Permanent space enclosure.c.Completion of mechanical installation.d.Completion of electrical installation.e.Substantial Completion.f.

Milestones: Include milestones indicated in the Contract Documents in schedule, including, but not limitedD.to, the Notice to Proceed, Substantial Completion, and final completion, and the following interimmilestones:

Temporary enclosure and space conditioning.1.Cost Correlation: Superimpose a cost correlation timeline, indicating planned and actual costs. On theE.line, show planned and actual dollar volume of the Work performed as of planned and actual dates usedfor preparation of payment requests.

See Section 012900 "Payment Procedures" for cost reporting and payment procedures.1.Upcoming Work Summary: Prepare summary report indicating activities scheduled to occur or commenceF.prior to submittal of next schedule update. Summarize the following issues:

Unresolved issues.1.Unanswered Requests for Information.2.Rejected or unreturned submittals.3.Notations on returned submittals.4.Pending modifications affecting the Work and Contract Time.5.

Recovery Schedule: When periodic update indicates the Work is 14 or more calendar days behind theG.current approved schedule, submit a separate recovery schedule indicating means by which Contractorintends to regain compliance with the schedule. Indicate changes to working hours, working days, crewsizes, and equipment required to achieve compliance, and date by which recovery will be accomplished.Computer Scheduling Software: Prepare schedules using current version of a program that has beenH.developed specifically to manage construction schedules.

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE (CPM SCHEDULE)2.2General: Prepare network diagrams using AON (activity-on-node) format.A.Startup Network Diagram: Submit diagram within 14 days of date established for commencement of theB.Work. Outline significant construction activities for the first 90 days of construction. Include skeletondiagram for the remainder of the Work and a cash requirement prediction based on indicated activities.CPM Schedule: Prepare Contractor's construction schedule using a cost- and resource-loaded,C.time-scaled CPM network analysis diagram for the Work.

Develop network diagram in sufficient time to submit CPM schedule so it can be accepted for use1.no later than 60 days after date established for commencement of the Work.

Failure to include any work item required for performance of this Contract shall not excusea.Contractor from completing all work within applicable completion dates, regardless ofArchitect's approval of the schedule.

Conduct educational workshops to train and inform key Project personnel, including subcontractors'2.personnel, in proper methods of providing data and using CPM schedule information.




Establish procedures for monitoring and updating CPM schedule and for reporting progress.3.Coordinate procedures with progress meeting and payment request dates.Use "one workday" as the unit of time for individual activities. Indicate nonworking days and4.holidays incorporated into the schedule in order to coordinate with the Contract Time.

CPM Schedule Preparation: Prepare a list of all activities required to complete the Work. Using theD.startup network diagram, prepare a skeleton network to identify probable critical paths.

Activities: Indicate the estimated time duration, sequence requirements, and relationship of each1.activity in relation to other activities. Include estimated time frames for the following activities:

Preparation and processing of submittals.a.Mobilization and demobilization.b.Purchase of materials.c.Delivery.d.Fabrication.e.Utility interruptions.f.Installation.g.Work by Owner that may affect or be affected by Contractor's activities.h.Testing.i.Punch list and final completion.j.Activities occurring following final completion.k.

Critical Path Activities: Identify critical path activities, including those for interim completion dates.2.Scheduled start and completion dates shall be consistent with Contract milestone dates.Processing: Process data to produce output data on a computer-drawn, time-scaled network.3.Revise data, reorganize activity sequences, and reproduce as often as necessary to produce theCPM schedule within the limitations of the Contract Time.Format: Mark the critical path. Locate the critical path near center of network; locate paths with4.most float near the edges.

Subnetworks on separate sheets are permissible for activities clearly off the critical path.a.

Cost- and Resource-Loading of CPM Schedule: Assign cost to construction activities on the CPM5.schedule. Do not assign costs to submittal activities. Obtain Architect's approval prior to assigningcosts to fabrication and delivery activities. Assign costs under main subcontracts for testing andcommissioning activities, operation and maintenance manuals, punch list activities, Project recorddocuments, and demonstration and training (if applicable), in the amount of 5 percent of theContract Sum.

Each activity cost shall reflect an appropriate value subject to approval by Architect.a.Total cost assigned to activities shall equal the total Contract Sum.b.

Contract Modifications: For each proposed contract modification and concurrent with its submission,E.prepare a time-impact analysis using a network fragment to demonstrate the effect of the proposedchange on the overall project schedule.Initial Issue of Schedule: Prepare initial network diagram from a sorted activity list indicating straight "earlyF.start-total float." Identify critical activities. Prepare tabulated reports showing the following:

Contractor or subcontractor and the Work or activity.1.Description of activity.2.Main events of activity.3.Immediate preceding and succeeding activities.4.Early and late start dates.5.Early and late finish dates.6.Activity duration in workdays.7.Total float or slack time.8.Average size of workforce.9.Dollar value of activity (coordinated with the schedule of values).10.

Schedule Updating: Concurrent with making revisions to schedule, prepare tabulated reports showing theG.following:

Identification of activities that have changed.1.




Changes in early and late start dates.2.Changes in early and late finish dates.3.Changes in activity durations in workdays.4.Changes in the critical path.5.Changes in total float or slack time.6.Changes in the Contract Time.7.

Value Summaries: Prepare two cumulative value lists, sorted by finish dates.H.

In first list, tabulate activity number, early finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.1.In second list, tabulate activity number, late finish date, dollar value, and cumulative dollar value.2.In subsequent issues of both lists, substitute actual finish dates for activities completed as of list3.date.Prepare list for ease of comparison with payment requests; coordinate timing with progress4.meetings.

In both value summary lists, tabulate "actual percent complete" and "cumulative valuea.completed" with total at bottom.

REPORTS2.3Daily Construction Reports: Prepare a daily construction report recording the following informationA.concerning events at Project site:

List of subcontractors at Project site.1.Approximate count of personnel at Project site.2.Equipment at Project site.3.Material deliveries.4.High and low temperatures and general weather conditions, including presence of rain or snow.5.Accidents.6.Meetings and significant decisions.7.Unusual events (see special reports).8.Stoppages, delays, shortages, and losses.9.Meter readings and similar recordings.10.Emergency procedures.11.Orders and requests of authorities having jurisdiction.12.Change Orders received and implemented.13.Construction Change Directives received and implemented.14.Services connected and disconnected.15.Equipment or system tests and startups.16.Substantial Completions authorized.17.

Material Location Reports: At monthly intervals, prepare and submit a comprehensive list of materialsB.delivered to and stored at Project site. List shall be cumulative, showing materials previously reported plusitems recently delivered. Include with list a statement of progress on and delivery dates for materials oritems of equipment fabricated or stored away from Project site. Indicate the following categories for storedmaterials:

Material stored prior to previous report and remaining in storage.1.Material stored prior to previous report and since removed from storage and installed.2.Material stored following previous report and remaining in storage.3.

Site Condition Reports: Immediately on discovery of a difference between site conditions and the ContractC.Documents, prepare and submit a detailed report. Submit with a Request for Information. Include adetailed description of the differing conditions, together with recommendations for changing the ContractDocuments.

SPECIAL REPORTS2.4General: Submit special reports directly to Owner within one day(s) of an occurrence. Distribute copies ofA.report to parties affected by the occurrence.Reporting Unusual Events: When an event of an unusual and significant nature occurs at Project site,B.whether or not related directly to the Work, prepare and submit a special report. List chain of events,persons participating, response by Contractor's personnel, evaluation of results or effects, and similarpertinent information. Advise Owner in advance when these events are known or predictable.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

CONTRACTOR'S CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE3.1Scheduling Consultant: Engage a consultant to provide planning, evaluation, and reporting using CPMA.scheduling.

In-House Option: Owner may waive the requirement to retain a consultant if Contractor employs1.skilled personnel with experience in CPM scheduling and reporting techniques. Submitqualifications.Meetings: Scheduling consultant shall attend all meetings related to Project progress, alleged2.delays, and time impact.

Distribution: Distribute copies of approved schedule to Architect Owner, separate contractors, testing andB.inspecting agencies, and other parties identified by Contractor with a need-to-know scheduleresponsibility.

Post copies in Project meeting rooms and temporary field offices.1.When revisions are made, distribute updated schedules to the same parties and post in the same2.locations. Delete parties from distribution when they have completed their assigned portion of theWork and are no longer involved in performance of construction activities.





SECTION 013233 - PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for the following:A.

Preconstruction photographs.1.Periodic construction photographs.2.Final completion construction photographs.3.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.3Digital Photographs: Submit image files within three days of taking photographs.A.

Digital Camera: Minimum sensor resolution of 8 megapixels.1.Format: Minimum 3200 by 2400 pixels, in unaltered original files, with same aspect ratio as the2.sensor, uncropped, date and time stamped, in folder named by date of photograph, accompaniedby key plan file.Identification: Provide the following information with each image description in file metadata tag:3.

Name of Project.a.Name and contact information for photographer.b.Name of Architect.c.Name of Contractor.d.Date photograph was taken.e.Description of vantage point, indicating location, direction (by compass point), and elevationf.or story of construction.Unique sequential identifier keyed to accompanying key plan.g.

USAGE RIGHTS1.4Obtain and transfer copyright usage rights from photographer to Owner for unlimited reproduction ofA.photographic documentation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PHOTOGRAPHIC MEDIA2.1Digital Images: Provide images in JPG format, produced by a digital camera with minimum sensor size ofA.8 megapixels, and at an image resolution of not less than 3200 by 2400 pixels.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

CONSTRUCTION PHOTOGRAPHS3.1General: Take photographs using the maximum range of depth of field, and that are in focus, to clearlyA.show the Work. Photographs with blurry or out-of-focus areas will not be accepted.

Maintain key plan with each set of construction photographs that identifies each photographic1.location.

Digital Images: Submit digital images exactly as originally recorded in the digital camera, withoutB.alteration, manipulation, editing, or modifications using image-editing software.

Date and Time: Include date and time in file name for each image.1.Field Office Images: Maintain one set of images accessible in the field office at Project site,2.available at all times for reference. Identify images in the same manner as those submitted toArchitect.

Preconstruction Photographs: Before starting construction, take photographs of Project site andC.surrounding properties, including existing items to remain during construction, from different vantagepoints, as directed by Architect.

Flag before taking construction photographs.1.Take photographs to show existing conditions adjacent to property before starting the Work.2.Take photographs of existing buildings either on or adjoining property to accurately record physical3.conditions at start of construction.


PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 1


Take additional photographs as required to record settlement or cracking of adjacent structures,4.pavements, and improvements.

Periodic Construction Photographs: Take 20 photographs monthly, coinciding with the cutoff dateD.associated with each Application for Payment. Select vantage points to show status of construction andprogress since last photographs were taken.Final Completion Construction Photographs: Take 20 color photographs after date of SubstantialE.Completion for submission as project record documents. will inform photographer of desired vantagepoints.

Do not include date stamp.1.



PHOTOGRAPHIC DOCUMENTATION 013233 - 2


SECTION 013300 - SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes requirements for the submittal schedule and administrative and procedural requirementsA.for submitting Shop Drawings, Product Data, Samples, and other submittals.

DEFINITIONS1.3Action Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that require Architect'sA.responsive action. Action submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as"action submittals."Informational Submittals: Written and graphic information and physical samples that do not requireB.Architect's responsive action. Submittals may be rejected for not complying with requirements.Informational submittals are those submittals indicated in individual Specification Sections as"informational submittals."File Transfer Protocol (FTP): Communications protocol that enables transfer of files to and from anotherC.computer over a network and that serves as the basis for standard Internet protocols. An FTP site is aportion of a network located outside of network firewalls within which internal and external users are ableto access files.Portable Document Format (PDF): An open standard file format licensed by Adobe Systems used forD.representing documents in a device-independent and display resolution-independent fixed-layoutdocument format.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Submittal Schedule: Submit a schedule of submittals, arranged in chronological order by dates requiredA.by construction schedule. Include time required for review, ordering, manufacturing, fabrication, anddelivery when establishing dates. Include additional time required for making corrections or revisions tosubmittals noted by Architect and additional time for handling and reviewing submittals required by thosecorrections.

Coordinate submittal schedule with list of subcontracts, the schedule of values, and Contractor's1.construction schedule.Initial Submittal: Submit concurrently with startup construction schedule. Include submittals2.required during the first 60 days of construction. List those submittals required to maintain orderlyprogress of the Work and those required early because of long lead time for manufacture orfabrication.Final Submittal: Submit concurrently with the first complete submittal of Contractor's construction3.schedule.

Submit revised submittal schedule to reflect changes in current status and timing fora.submittals.

Format: Arrange the following information in a tabular format:4.

Scheduled date for first submittal.a.Specification Section number and title.b.Submittal category: Action; informational.c.Name of subcontractor.d.Description of the Work covered.e.Scheduled date for Architect's final release or approval.f.Scheduled date of fabrication.g.Scheduled dates for purchasing.h.Scheduled dates for installation.i.Activity or event number.j.


SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES 013300 - 1


SUBMITTAL ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS1.5Architect's Digital Data Files: Electronic digital data files of the Contract Drawings will be provided byA.Architect for Contractor's use in preparing submittals.

Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data drawing files of the Contract Drawings for use1.in preparing Shop Drawings and Project record drawings.

Architect makes no representations as to the accuracy or completeness of digital dataa.drawing files as they relate to the Contract Drawings.Digital Drawing Software Program: The Contract Drawings are available in softwareb.program noted in Section 011000 "Summary."Contractor shall execute a data licensing agreement in the form of Agreement included inc.Project Manual.The following digital data files will by furnished for each appropriate discipline:d.

Floor plans.1)Reflected ceiling plans.2)

Coordination: Coordinate preparation and processing of submittals with performance of constructionB.activities.

Coordinate each submittal with fabrication, purchasing, testing, delivery, other submittals, and1.related activities that require sequential activity.Submit all submittal items required for each Specification Section concurrently unless partial2.submittals for portions of the Work are indicated on approved submittal schedule.Submit action submittals and informational submittals required by the same Specification Section3.as separate packages under separate transmittals.Coordinate transmittal of different types of submittals for related parts of the Work so processing4.will not be delayed because of need to review submittals concurrently for coordination.

Architect reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal requiring coordination witha.other submittals until related submittals are received.

Processing Time: Allow time for submittal review, including time for resubmittals, as follows. Time forC.review shall commence on Architect's receipt of submittal. No extension of the Contract Time will beauthorized because of failure to transmit submittals enough in advance of the Work to permit processing,including resubmittals.

Initial Review: Allow 15 days for initial review of each submittal. Allow additional time if1.coordination with subsequent submittals is required. Architect will advise Contractor when asubmittal being processed must be delayed for coordination.Intermediate Review: If intermediate submittal is necessary, process it in same manner as initial2.submittal.Resubmittal Review: Allow 15 days for review of each resubmittal.3.Sequential Review: Where sequential review of submittals by Architect's consultants, Owner, or4.other parties is indicated, allow 21 days for initial review of each submittal.

Concurrent Consultant Review: Where the Contract Documents indicate that submittals may be5.transmitted simultaneously to Architect and to Architect's consultants, allow 15 days for review ofeach submittal. Submittal will be returned to Architect before being returned to Contractor.

Electronic Submittals: Identify and incorporate information in each electronic submittal file as follows:D.

Assemble complete submittal package into a single indexed file incorporating submittal1.requirements of a single Specification Section and transmittal form with links enabling navigation toeach item.Name file with submittal number or other unique identifier, including revision identifier.2.

File name shall use project identifier and Specification Section number followed by aa.decimal point and then a sequential number (e.g., LNHS-061000.01). Resubmittals shallinclude an alphabetic suffix after another decimal point (e.g., LNHS-061000.01.A).




Provide means for insertion to permanently record Contractor's review and approval markings and3.action taken by Architect.Transmittal Form for Electronic Submittals: Use electronic form acceptable to Owner, containing4.the following information:

Project name.a.Date.b.Name and address of Architect.c.Name of Contractor.d.Name of firm or entity that prepared submittal.e.Names of subcontractor, manufacturer, and supplier.f.Category and type of submittal.g.Submittal purpose and description.h.Specification Section number and title.i.Specification paragraph number or drawing designation and generic name for each ofj.multiple items.Drawing number and detail references, as appropriate.k.Location(s) where product is to be installed, as appropriate.l.Related physical samples submitted directly.m.Indication of full or partial submittal.n.Transmittal number, numbered consecutively.o.Submittal and transmittal distribution record.p.Other necessary identification.q.Remarks.r.

Metadata: Include the following information as keywords in the electronic submittal file metadata:5.

Project name.a.Number and title of appropriate Specification Section.b.Manufacturer name.c.Product name.d.

Options: Identify options requiring selection by Architect.E.Deviations and Additional Information: On an attached separate sheet, prepared on Contractor'sF.letterhead, record relevant information, requests for data, revisions other than those requested by Architecton previous submittals, and deviations from requirements in the Contract Documents, including minorvariations and limitations. Include same identification information as related submittal.Resubmittals: Make resubmittals in same form and number of copies as initial submittal.G.

Note date and content of previous submittal.1.Note date and content of revision in label or title block and clearly indicate extent of revision.2.Resubmit submittals until they are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.3.

Distribution: Furnish copies of final submittals to manufacturers, subcontractors, suppliers, fabricators,H.installers, authorities having jurisdiction, and others as necessary for performance of constructionactivities. Show distribution on transmittal forms.Use for Construction: Retain complete copies of submittals on Project site. Use only final actionI.submittals that are marked with approval notation from Architect's action stamp.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES2.1General Submittal Procedure Requirements: Prepare and submit submittals required by individualA.Specification Sections. Types of submittals are indicated in individual Specification Sections.

Post electronic submittals as PDF electronic files directly to Architect's Info Exchange Folder1.(Newforma) specifically established for Project.

Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronica.Project record document file.

Submit electronic submittals via email as PDF electronic files.2.




Architect will return annotated file. Annotate and retain one copy of file as an electronica.Project record document file.

Action Submittals: Submit three paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.3.Architect will return two copies.Informational Submittals: Submit two paper copies of each submittal unless otherwise indicated.4.Architect will not return copies.Certificates and Certifications Submittals: Provide a statement that includes signature of entity5.responsible for preparing certification. Certificates and certifications shall be signed by an officer orother individual authorized to sign documents on behalf of that entity.

Provide a digital signature with digital certificate on electronically submitted certificates anda.certifications where indicated.

Product Data: Collect information into a single submittal for each element of construction and type ofB.product or equipment.

If information must be specially prepared for submittal because standard published data are not1.suitable for use, submit as Shop Drawings, not as Product Data.Mark each copy of each submittal to show which products and options are applicable.2.Include the following information, as applicable:3.

Manufacturer's catalog cuts.a.Manufacturer's product specifications.b.Standard color charts.c.Statement of compliance with specified referenced standards.d.Testing by recognized testing agency.e.Application of testing agency labels and seals.f.Notation of coordination requirements.g.Availability and delivery time information.h.

For equipment, include the following in addition to the above, as applicable:4.

Wiring diagrams showing factory-installed wiring.a.Printed performance curves.b.Operational range diagrams.c.Clearances required to other construction, if not indicated on accompanying Shop Drawings.d.

Submit Product Data before or concurrent with Samples.5.Submit Product Data in the following format:6.

PDF electronic file.a.Shop Drawings: Prepare Project-specific information, drawn accurately to scale. Do not base ShopC.Drawings on reproductions of the Contract Documents or standard printed data, unless submittal based onArchitect's digital data drawing files is otherwise permitted.

Preparation: Fully illustrate requirements in the Contract Documents. Include the following1.information, as applicable:

Identification of products.a.Schedules.b.Compliance with specified standards.c.Notation of coordination requirements.d.Notation of dimensions established by field measurement.e.Relationship and attachment to adjoining construction clearly indicated.f.Seal and signature of professional engineer if specified.g.

Sheet Size: Except for templates, patterns, and similar full-size drawings, submit Shop Drawings2.on sheets at least 8-1/2 by 11 inches, but no larger than 30 by 42 inches.Submit Shop Drawings in the following format:3.

PDF electronic file.a.




BIM File Incorporation: Shop Drawing files into Building Information Model established for Project.4.

Prepare Shop Drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program,a.version, and operating system as the original Drawings.Refer to Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination" for requirements forb.coordination drawings.

Samples: Submit Samples for review of kind, color, pattern, and texture for a check of theseD.characteristics with other elements and for a comparison of these characteristics between submittal andactual component as delivered and installed.

Transmit Samples that contain multiple, related components such as accessories together in one1.submittal package.Identification: Attach label on unexposed side of Samples that includes the following:2.

Generic description of Sample.a.Product name and name of manufacturer.b.Sample source.c.Number and title of applicable Specification Section.d.Specification paragraph number and generic name of each item.e.

For projects where electronic submittals are required, provide corresponding electronic submittal of3.Sample transmittal, digital image file illustrating Sample characteristics, and identificationinformation for record.Disposition: Maintain sets of approved Samples at Project site, available for quality-control4.comparisons throughout the course of construction activity. Sample sets may be used to determinefinal acceptance of construction associated with each set.

Samples that may be incorporated into the Work are indicated in individual Specificationa.Sections. Such Samples must be in an undamaged condition at time of use.Samples not incorporated into the Work, or otherwise designated as Owner's property, areb.the property of Contractor.

Samples for Initial Selection: Submit manufacturer's color charts consisting of units or sections of5.units showing the full range of colors, textures, and patterns available.

Number of Samples: Submit one full set(s) of available choices where color, pattern,a.texture, or similar characteristics are required to be selected from manufacturer's productline. Architect will return submittal with options selected.

Samples for Verification: Submit full-size units or Samples of size indicated, prepared from same6.material to be used for the Work, cured and finished in manner specified, and physically identicalwith material or product proposed for use, and that show full range of color and texture variationsexpected. Samples include, but are not limited to, the following: partial sections of manufacturedor fabricated components; small cuts or containers of materials; complete units of repetitively usedmaterials; swatches showing color, texture, and pattern; color range sets; and components used forindependent testing and inspection.

Number of Samples: Submit three sets of Samples. Architect will retain two Sample sets;a.remainder will be returned.[ Mark up and retain one returned Sample set as a project recordsample.]

Submit a single Sample where assembly details, workmanship, fabrication1)techniques, connections, operation, and other similar characteristics are to bedemonstrated.If variation in color, pattern, texture, or other characteristic is inherent in material or2)product represented by a Sample, submit at least three sets of paired units that showapproximate limits of variations.

Product Schedule: As required in individual Specification Sections, prepare a written summary indicatingE.types of products required for the Work and their intended location. Include the following information intabular form:




Type of product. Include unique identifier for each product indicated in the Contract Documents or1.assigned by Contractor if none is indicated.Manufacturer and product name, and model number if applicable.2.Number and name of room or space.3.Location within room or space.4.Submit product schedule in the following format:5.

PDF electronic file.a.Coordination Drawing Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013100 "ProjectF.Management and Coordination."Contractor's Construction Schedule: Comply with requirements specified in Section 013200 "ConstructionG.Progress Documentation."Application for Payment and Schedule of Values: Comply with requirements specified in Section 012900H."Payment Procedures."Test and Inspection Reports and Schedule of Tests and Inspections Submittals: Comply withI.requirements specified in Section 014000 "Quality Requirements."Closeout Submittals and Maintenance Material Submittals: Comply with requirements specified in SectionJ.017700 "Closeout Procedures."Maintenance Data: Comply with requirements specified in Section 017823 "Operation and MaintenanceK.Data."Qualification Data: Prepare written information that demonstrates capabilities and experience of firm orL.person. Include lists of completed projects with project names and addresses, contact information ofarchitects and owners, and other information specified.Welding Certificates: Prepare written certification that welding procedures and personnel comply withM.requirements in the Contract Documents. Submit record of Welding Procedure Specification andProcedure Qualification Record on AWS forms. Include names of firms and personnel certified.Installer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that InstallerN.complies with requirements in the Contract Documents and, where required, is authorized by manufacturerfor this specific Project.Manufacturer Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying thatO.manufacturer complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Include evidence of manufacturingexperience where required.Product Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that productP.complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.Material Certificates: Submit written statements on manufacturer's letterhead certifying that materialQ.complies with requirements in the Contract Documents.Material Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency's standardR.form, indicating and interpreting test results of material for compliance with requirements in the ContractDocuments.Product Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating that current product produced by manufacturerS.complies with requirements in the Contract Documents. Base reports on evaluation of tests performed bymanufacturer and witnessed by a qualified testing agency, or on comprehensive tests performed by aqualified testing agency.Research Reports: Submit written evidence, from a model code organization acceptable to authoritiesT.having jurisdiction, that product complies with building code in effect for Project. Include the followinginformation:

Name of evaluation organization.1.Date of evaluation.2.Time period when report is in effect.3.Product and manufacturers' names.4.Description of product.5.Test procedures and results.6.Limitations of use.7.

Preconstruction Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency'sU.standard form, indicating and interpreting results of tests performed before installation of product, forcompliance with performance requirements in the Contract Documents.Compatibility Test Reports: Submit reports written by a qualified testing agency, on testing agency'sV.standard form, indicating and interpreting results of compatibility tests performed before installation ofproduct. Include written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation needed for adhesion.




Field Test Reports: Submit written reports indicating and interpreting results of field tests performed eitherW.during installation of product or after product is installed in its final location, for compliance withrequirements in the Contract Documents.Design Data: Prepare and submit written and graphic information, including, but not limited to,X.performance and design criteria, list of applicable codes and regulations, and calculations. Include list ofassumptions and other performance and design criteria and a summary of loads. Include load diagrams ifapplicable. Provide name and version of software, if any, used for calculations. Include page numbers.

DELEGATED-DESIGN SERVICES2.2Performance and Design Criteria: Where professional design services or certifications by a designA.professional are specifically required of Contractor by the Contract Documents, provide products andsystems complying with specific performance and design criteria indicated.

If criteria indicated are not sufficient to perform services or certification required, submit a written1.request for additional information to Architect.

Delegated-Design Services Certification: In addition to Shop Drawings, Product Data, and other requiredB.submittals, submit digitally signed PDF electronic file paper copies of certificate, signed and sealed by theresponsible design professional, for each product and system specifically assigned to Contractor to bedesigned or certified by a design professional.

Indicate that products and systems comply with performance and design criteria in the Contract1.Documents. Include list of codes, loads, and other factors used in performing these services.

BIM File Incorporation: Incorporate delegated-design drawing and data files into Building InformationC.Model established for Project.

Prepare delegated-design drawings in the following format: Same digital data software program,1.version, and operating system as the original Drawings.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

CONTRACTOR'S REVIEW3.1Action and Informational Submittals: Review each submittal and check for coordination with other Work ofA.the Contract and for compliance with the Contract Documents. Note corrections and field dimensions.Mark with approval stamp before submitting to Architect.Project Closeout and Maintenance Material Submittals: See requirements in Section 017700 "CloseoutB.Procedures."Approval Stamp: Stamp each submittal with a uniform, approval stamp. Include Project name andC.location, submittal number, Specification Section title and number, name of reviewer, date of Contractor'sapproval, and statement certifying that submittal has been reviewed, checked, and approved forcompliance with the Contract Documents.

ARCHITECT'S ACTION3.2Action Submittals: Architect will review each submittal, make marks to indicate corrections or revisionsA.required, and return it. Architect will stamp each submittal with an action stamp and will mark stampappropriately to indicate action.Informational Submittals: Architect will review each submittal and will not return it, or will return it if it doesB.not comply with requirements. Architect will forward each submittal to appropriate party.Partial submittals prepared for a portion of the Work will be reviewed when use of partial submittals hasC.received prior approval from Architect.Incomplete submittals are unacceptable, will be considered nonresponsive, and will be returned forD.resubmittal without review.Submittals not required by the Contract Documents may be returned by the Architect without action.E.





SECTION 014000 - QUALITY REQUIREMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for quality assurance and quality control.A.Testing and inspecting services are required to verify compliance with requirements specified or indicated.B.These services do not relieve Contractor of responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documentrequirements.

Specific quality-assurance and -control requirements for individual construction activities are1.specified in the Sections that specify those activities. Requirements in those Sections may alsocover production of standard products.Specified tests, inspections, and related actions do not limit Contractor's other quality-assurance2.and -control procedures that facilitate compliance with the Contract Document requirements.Requirements for Contractor to provide quality-assurance and -control services required by3.Architect, Owner, or authorities having jurisdiction are not limited by provisions of this Section.Specific test and inspection requirements are not specified in this Section.4.

DEFINITIONS1.3Quality-Assurance Services: Activities, actions, and procedures performed before and during execution ofA.the Work to guard against defects and deficiencies and substantiate that proposed construction will complywith requirements.Quality-Control Services: Tests, inspections, procedures, and related actions during and after execution ofB.the Work to evaluate that actual products incorporated into the Work and completed construction complywith requirements. Services do not include contract enforcement activities performed by Architect.Mockups: Full-size physical assemblies that are constructed on-site. Mockups are constructed to verifyC.selections made under Sample submittals; to demonstrate aesthetic effects and, where indicated, qualitiesof materials and execution; to review coordination, testing, or operation; to show interface betweendissimilar materials; and to demonstrate compliance with specified installation tolerances. Mockups arenot Samples. Unless otherwise indicated, approved mockups establish the standard by which the Workwill be judged.

Integrated Exterior Mockups: Mockups of the exterior envelope erected separately from the1.building but on Project site, consisting of multiple products, assemblies, and subassemblies.Room Mockups: Mockups of typical interior spaces complete with wall, floor, and ceiling finishes,2.doors, windows, millwork, casework, specialties, furnishings and equipment, and lighting.

Preconstruction Testing: Tests and inspections performed specifically for Project before products andD.materials are incorporated into the Work, to verify performance or compliance with specified criteria.Product Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed by an NRTL, an NVLAP, or a testing agencyE.qualified to conduct product testing and acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, to establish productperformance and compliance with specified requirements.Source Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed at the source, e.g., plant, mill,F.factory, or shop.Field Quality-Control Testing: Tests and inspections that are performed on-site for installation of the WorkG.and for completed Work.Testing Agency: An entity engaged to perform specific tests, inspections, or both. Testing laboratory shallH.mean the same as testing agency.Installer/Applicator/Erector: Contractor or another entity engaged by Contractor as an employee,I.Subcontractor, or Sub-subcontractor, to perform a particular construction operation, including installation,erection, application, and similar operations.

Use of trade-specific terminology in referring to a trade or entity does not require that certain1.construction activities be performed by accredited or unionized individuals, or that requirementsspecified apply exclusively to specific trade(s).


QUALITY REQUIREMENTS 014000 - 1


Experienced: When used with an entity or individual, "experienced" means having successfully completedJ.a minimum of five previous projects similar in nature, size, and extent to this Project; being familiar withspecial requirements indicated; and having complied with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

CONFLICTING REQUIREMENTS1.4Referenced Standards: If compliance with two or more standards is specified and the standards establishA.different or conflicting requirements for minimum quantities or quality levels, comply with the most stringentrequirement. Refer conflicting requirements that are different, but apparently equal, to Architect for adecision before proceeding.Minimum Quantity or Quality Levels: The quantity or quality level shown or specified shall be the minimumB.provided or performed. The actual installation may comply exactly with the minimum quantity or qualityspecified, or it may exceed the minimum within reasonable limits. To comply with these requirements,indicated numeric values are minimum or maximum, as appropriate, for the context of requirements. Referuncertainties to Architect for a decision before proceeding.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.5Shop Drawings: For mockups, provide plans, sections, and elevations, indicating materials and size ofA.mockup construction.

Indicate manufacturer and model number of individual components.1.Provide axonometric drawings for conditions difficult to illustrate in two dimensions.2.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.6Contractor's Quality-Control Plan: For quality-assurance and quality-control activities and responsibilities.A.Qualification Data : For Contractor's quality-control personnel.B.Contractor's Statement of Responsibility: When required by authorities having jurisdiction, submit copy ofC.written statement of responsibility sent to authorities having jurisdiction before starting work on thefollowing systems:

Main wind-force-resisting system or a wind-resisting component listed in the wind-force-resisting1.system quality-assurance plan prepared by Architect.

Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agencies specified in "Quality Assurance" Article toD.demonstrate their capabilities and experience. Include proof of qualifications in the form of a recent reporton the inspection of the testing agency by a recognized authority.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare in tabular form and include the following:E.

Specification Section number and title.1.Entity responsible for performing tests and inspections.2.Description of test and inspection.3.Identification of applicable standards.4.Identification of test and inspection methods.5.Number of tests and inspections required.6.Time schedule or time span for tests and inspections.7.Requirements for obtaining samples.8.Unique characteristics of each quality-control service.9.

CONTRACTOR'S QUALITY-CONTROL PLAN1.7Quality-Control Plan, General: Submit quality-control plan within 10 days of commencement ofA.construction, and not less than five days prior to preconstruction conference. Submit in format acceptableto Architect. Identify personnel, procedures, controls, instructions, tests, records, and forms to be used tocarry out Contractor's quality-assurance and quality-control responsibilities. Coordinate with Contractor'sconstruction schedule.Quality-Control Personnel Qualifications: Engage qualified full-time personnel trained and experienced inB.managing and executing quality-assurance and quality-control procedures similar in nature and extent tothose required for Project.

Project quality-control manager may also serve as Project superintendent.1.Submittal Procedure: Describe procedures for ensuring compliance with requirements through review andC.management of submittal process. Indicate qualifications of personnel responsible for submittal review.Testing and Inspection: In quality-control plan, include a comprehensive schedule of Work requiringD.testing or inspection, including the following:




Contractor-performed tests and inspections including subcontractor-performed tests and1.inspections. Include required tests and inspections and Contractor-elected tests and inspections.Special inspections required by authorities having jurisdiction and indicated on the "Statement of2.Special Inspections."Owner-performed tests and inspections indicated in the Contract Documents.3.

Continuous Inspection of Workmanship: Describe process for continuous inspection during construction toE.identify and correct deficiencies in workmanship in addition to testing and inspection specified. Indicatetypes of corrective actions to be required to bring work into compliance with standards of workmanshipestablished by Contract requirements and approved mockups.Monitoring and Documentation: Maintain testing and inspection reports including log of approved andF.rejected results. Include work Architect has indicated as nonconforming or defective. Indicate correctiveactions taken to bring nonconforming work into compliance with requirements. Comply with requirementsof authorities having jurisdiction.

REPORTS AND DOCUMENTS1.8Test and Inspection Reports: Prepare and submit certified written reports specified in other Sections.A.Include the following:

Date of issue.1.Project title and number.2.Name, address, and telephone number of testing agency.3.Dates and locations of samples and tests or inspections.4.Names of individuals making tests and inspections.5.Description of the Work and test and inspection method.6.Identification of product and Specification Section.7.Complete test or inspection data.8.Test and inspection results and an interpretation of test results.9.Record of temperature and weather conditions at time of sample taking and testing and inspecting.10.Comments or professional opinion on whether tested or inspected Work complies with the Contract11.Document requirements.Name and signature of laboratory inspector.12.Recommendations on retesting and reinspecting.13.

Manufacturer's Technical Representative's Field Reports: Prepare written information documentingB.manufacturer's technical representative's tests and inspections specified in other Sections. Include thefollowing:

Name, address, and telephone number of technical representative making report.1.Statement on condition of substrates and their acceptability for installation of product.2.Statement that products at Project site comply with requirements.3.Summary of installation procedures being followed, whether they comply with requirements and, if4.not, what corrective action was taken.Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies5.with requirements.Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.6.Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.7.

Factory-Authorized Service Representative's Reports: Prepare written information documentingC.manufacturer's factory-authorized service representative's tests and inspections specified in otherSections. Include the following:

Name, address, and telephone number of factory-authorized service representative making report.1.Statement that equipment complies with requirements.2.Results of operational and other tests and a statement of whether observed performance complies3.with requirements.Statement whether conditions, products, and installation will affect warranty.4.Other required items indicated in individual Specification Sections.5.

Permits, Licenses, and Certificates: For Owner's records, submit copies of permits, licenses, certifications,D.inspection reports, releases, jurisdictional settlements, notices, receipts for fee payments, judgments,correspondence, records, and similar documents, established for compliance with standards andregulations bearing on performance of the Work.




QUALITY ASSURANCE1.9General: Qualifications paragraphs in this article establish the minimum qualification levels required;A.individual Specification Sections specify additional requirements.Manufacturer Qualifications: A firm experienced in manufacturing products or systems similar to thoseB.indicated for this Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficientproduction capacity to produce required units.Fabricator Qualifications: A firm experienced in producing products similar to those indicated for thisC.Project and with a record of successful in-service performance, as well as sufficient production capacity toproduce required units.Installer Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in installing, erecting, or assembling work similarD.in material, design, and extent to that indicated for this Project, whose work has resulted in constructionwith a record of successful in-service performance.Professional Engineer Qualifications: A professional engineer who is legally qualified to practice inE.jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing engineering services of the kindindicated. Engineering services are defined as those performed for installations of the system, assembly,or product that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.Specialists: Certain Specification Sections require that specific construction activities shall be performedF.by entities who are recognized experts in those operations. Specialists shall satisfy qualificationrequirements indicated and shall be engaged for the activities indicated.

Requirements of authorities having jurisdiction shall supersede requirements for specialists.1.Testing Agency Qualifications: An NRTL, an NVLAP, or an independent agency with the experience andG.capability to conduct testing and inspecting indicated, as documented according to ASTM E 329; and withadditional qualifications specified in individual Sections; and, where required by authorities havingjurisdiction, that is acceptable to authorities.

NRTL: A nationally recognized testing laboratory according to 29 CFR 1910.7.1.NVLAP: A testing agency accredited according to NIST's National Voluntary Laboratory2.Accreditation Program.

Manufacturer's Technical Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturerH.who is trained and approved by manufacturer to observe and inspect installation of manufacturer'sproducts that are similar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.Factory-Authorized Service Representative Qualifications: An authorized representative of manufacturerI.who is trained and approved by manufacturer to inspect installation of manufacturer's products that aresimilar in material, design, and extent to those indicated for this Project.Preconstruction Testing: Where testing agency is indicated to perform preconstruction testing forJ.compliance with specified requirements for performance and test methods, comply with the following:

Contractor responsibilities include the following:1.Provide test specimens representative of proposed products and construction.a.Submit specimens in a timely manner with sufficient time for testing and analyzing results tob.prevent delaying the Work.Provide sizes and configurations of test assemblies, mockups, and laboratory mockups toc.adequately demonstrate capability of products to comply with performance requirements.Build site-assembled test assemblies and mockups using installers who will perform samed.tasks for Project.When testing is complete, remove test specimens, assemblies, [and ]mockups; do note.reuse products on Project.

Testing Agency Responsibilities: Submit a certified written report of each test, inspection, and2.similar quality-assurance service to Architect, with copy to Contractor. Interpret tests andinspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected work complies with or deviatesfrom the Contract Documents.

Mockups: Before installing portions of the Work requiring mockups, build mockups for each form ofK.construction and finish required to comply with the following requirements, using materials indicated for thecompleted Work:

Build mockups in location and of size indicated or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.1.Notify Architectseven days in advance of dates and times when mockups will be constructed.2.




Employ supervisory personnel who will oversee mockup construction. Employ workers that will be3.employed during the construction at Project.Demonstrate the proposed range of aesthetic effects and workmanship.4.Obtain Architect's approval of mockups before starting work, fabrication, or construction.5.

Allow seven days for initial review and each re-review of each mockup.a.

Maintain mockups during construction in an undisturbed condition as a standard for judging the6.completed Work.Demolish and remove mockups when directed unless otherwise indicated.7.

Integrated Exterior Mockups: Construct integrated exterior mockup . Coordinate installation of exteriorL.envelope materials and products for which mockups are required in individual Specification Sections,along with supporting materials.

QUALITY CONTROL1.10Owner Responsibilities: Where quality-control services are indicated as Owner's responsibility, Owner willA.engage a qualified testing agency to perform these services.

Owner will furnish Contractor with names, addresses, and telephone numbers of testing agencies1.engaged and a description of types of testing and inspecting they are engaged to perform.Costs for retesting and reinspecting construction that replaces or is necessitated by work that failed2.to comply with the Contract Documents will be charged to Contractor, and the Contract Sum will beadjusted by Change Order.

Contractor Responsibilities: Tests and inspections not explicitly assigned to Owner are Contractor'sB.responsibility. Perform additional quality-control activities required to verify that the Work complies withrequirements, whether specified or not.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide quality-control services specified and those required by1.authorities having jurisdiction. Perform quality-control services required of Contractor by authoritieshaving jurisdiction, whether specified or not.Where services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, engage a qualified testing agency to2.perform these quality-control services.

Contractor shall not employ same entity engaged by Owner, unless agreed to in writing bya.Owner.

Notify testing agencies at least 24 hours in advance of time when Work that requires testing or3.inspecting will be performed.Where quality-control services are indicated as Contractor's responsibility, submit a certified written4.report, in duplicate, of each quality-control service.Testing and inspecting requested by Contractor and not required by the Contract Documents are5.Contractor's responsibility.Submit additional copies of each written report directly to authorities having jurisdiction, when they6.so direct.

Manufacturer's Field Services: Where indicated, engage a factory-authorized service representative toC.inspect field-assembled components and equipment installation, including service connections. Reportresults in writing as specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."Manufacturer's Technical Services: Where indicated, engage a manufacturer's technical representative toD.observe and inspect the Work. Manufacturer's technical representative's services include participation inpreinstallation conferences, examination of substrates and conditions, verification of materials, observationof Installer activities, inspection of completed portions of the Work, and submittal of written reports.Retesting/Reinspecting: Regardless of whether original tests or inspections were Contractor'sE.responsibility, provide quality-control services, including retesting and reinspecting, for construction thatreplaced Work that failed to comply with the Contract Documents.Testing Agency Responsibilities: Cooperate with Architect and Contractor in performance of duties.F.Provide qualified personnel to perform required tests and inspections.

Notify Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities or deficiencies observed in the Work during1.performance of its services.Determine the location from which test samples will be taken and in which in-situ tests are2.conducted.




Conduct and interpret tests and inspections and state in each report whether tested and inspected3.work complies with or deviates from requirements.Submit a certified written report, in duplicate, of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control4.service through Contractor.Do not release, revoke, alter, or increase the Contract Document requirements or approve or5.accept any portion of the Work.Do not perform any duties of Contractor.6.

Associated Services: Cooperate with agencies performing required tests, inspections, and similarG.quality-control services, and provide reasonable auxiliary services as requested. Notify agency sufficientlyin advance of operations to permit assignment of personnel. Provide the following:

Access to the Work.1.Incidental labor and facilities necessary to facilitate tests and inspections.2.Adequate quantities of representative samples of materials that require testing and inspecting.3.Assist agency in obtaining samples.Facilities for storage and field curing of test samples.4.Delivery of samples to testing agencies.5.Preliminary design mix proposed for use for material mixes that require control by testing agency.6.Security and protection for samples and for testing and inspecting equipment at Project site.7.

Coordination: Coordinate sequence of activities to accommodate required quality-assurance and -controlH.services with a minimum of delay and to avoid necessity of removing and replacing construction toaccommodate testing and inspecting.

Schedule times for tests, inspections, obtaining samples, and similar activities.1.Schedule of Tests and Inspections: Prepare a schedule of tests, inspections, and similar quality-controlI.services required by the Contract Documents as a component of Contractor's quality-control plan.Coordinate and submit concurrently with Contractor's construction schedule. Update as the Workprogresses.

Distribution: Distribute schedule to Owner, Architect, testing agencies, and each party involved in1.performance of portions of the Work where tests and inspections are required.

SPECIAL TESTS AND INSPECTIONS1.11Special Tests and Inspections: Owner will engage a qualified to conduct special tests and inspectionsA.required by authorities having jurisdiction as the responsibility of Owner, and as follows:Special Tests and Inspections: Conducted by a qualified as required by authorities having jurisdiction, asB.indicated in individual Specification Sections, and as follows:

Verifying that manufacturer maintains detailed fabrication and quality-control procedures and1.reviews the completeness and adequacy of those procedures to perform the Work.Notifying Architect and Contractor promptly of irregularities and deficiencies observed in the Work2.during performance of its services.Submitting a certified written report of each test, inspection, and similar quality-control service to3.Architect with copy to Contractor and to authorities having jurisdiction.Submitting a final report of special tests and inspections at Substantial Completion, which includes4.a list of unresolved deficiencies.Interpreting tests and inspections and stating in each report whether tested and inspected work5.complies with or deviates from the Contract Documents.Retesting and reinspecting corrected work.6.


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

TEST AND INSPECTION LOG3.1Test and Inspection Log: Prepare a record of tests and inspections. Include the following:A.

Date test or inspection was conducted.1.Description of the Work tested or inspected.2.Date test or inspection results were transmitted to Architect.3.Identification of testing agency or special inspector conducting test or inspection.4.




Maintain log at Project site. Post changes and revisions as they occur. Provide access to test andB.inspection log for Architect's reference during normal working hours.

REPAIR AND PROTECTION3.2General: On completion of testing, inspecting, sample taking, and similar services, repair damagedA.construction and restore substrates and finishes.

Provide materials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Specification1.Sections or matching existing substrates and finishes. Restore patched areas and extendrestoration into adjoining areas with durable seams that are as invisible as possible. Comply withthe Contract Document requirements for cutting and patching in Section 017300 "Execution."

Protect construction exposed by or for quality-control service activities.B.Repair and protection are Contractor's responsibility, regardless of the assignment of responsibility forC.quality-control services.





SECTION 014200 - REFERENCES

GENERALPART 1 -


DEFINITIONS1.2General: Basic Contract definitions are included in the Conditions of the Contract.A."Approved": When used to convey Architect's action on Contractor's submittals, applications, andB.requests, "approved" is limited to Architect's duties and responsibilities as stated in the Conditions of theContract."Directed": A command or instruction by Architect. Other terms including "requested," "authorized,"C."selected," "required," and "permitted" have the same meaning as "directed.""Indicated": Requirements expressed by graphic representations or in written form on Drawings, inD.Specifications, and in other Contract Documents. Other terms including "shown," "noted," "scheduled,"and "specified" have the same meaning as "indicated.""Regulations": Laws, ordinances, statutes, and lawful orders issued by authorities having jurisdiction, andE.rules, conventions, and agreements within the construction industry that control performance of the Work."Furnish": Supply and deliver to Project site, ready for unloading, unpacking, assembly, installation, andF.similar operations."Install": Unload, temporarily store, unpack, assemble, erect, place, anchor, apply, work to dimension,G.finish, cure, protect, clean, and similar operations at Project site."Provide": Furnish and install, complete and ready for the intended use.H."Project Site": Space available for performing construction activities. The extent of Project site is shownI.on Drawings and may or may not be identical with the description of the land on which Project is to bebuilt.

INDUSTRY STANDARDS1.3Applicability of Standards: Unless the Contract Documents include more stringent requirements,A.applicable construction industry standards have the same force and effect as if bound or copied directlyinto the Contract Documents to the extent referenced. Such standards are made a part of the ContractDocuments by reference.Publication Dates: Comply with standards in effect as of date of the Contract Documents unless otherwiseB.indicated.Copies of Standards: Each entity engaged in construction on Project should be familiar with industryC.standards applicable to its construction activity. Copies of applicable standards are not bound with theContract Documents.

Where copies of standards are needed to perform a required construction activity, obtain copies1.directly from publication source.

ABBREVIATIONS AND ACRONYMS1.4Industry Organizations: Where abbreviations and acronyms are used in Specifications or other ContractA.Documents, they shall mean the recognized name of the entities indicated in Gale's "Encyclopedia ofAssociations: National Organizations of the U.S." or in Columbia Books' "National Trade & ProfessionalAssociations of the United States."





REFERENCES 014200 - 1


SECTION 015000 - TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes requirements for temporary utilities, support facilities, and security and protectionA.facilities.

USE CHARGES1.3General: Installation and removal of and use charges for temporary facilities shall be included in theA.Contract Sum unless otherwise indicated. Allow other entities to use temporary services and facilitieswithout cost, including, but not limited to, Owner's construction forces, Architect, testing agencies, andauthorities having jurisdiction.Sewer Service: Pay sewer-service use charges for sewer usage by all entities for construction operations.B.Water Service: water-service use charges for water used by all entities for construction operations.C.Electric Power Service: Pay electric-power-service use charges for electricity used by all entities forD.construction operations.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Site Plan: Show temporary facilities, utility hookups, staging areas, and parking areas for constructionA.personnel.Erosion- and Sedimentation-Control Plan: Show compliance with requirements of EPA ConstructionB.General Permit or authorities having jurisdiction, whichever is more stringent.Fire-Safety Program: Show compliance with requirements of NFPA 241 and authorities having jurisdiction.C.Indicate Contractor personnel responsible for management of fire-prevention program.Moisture-Protection Plan: Describe procedures and controls for protecting materials and construction fromD.water absorption and damage.

Describe delivery, handling, and storage provisions for materials subject to water absorption or1.water damage.Indicate procedures for discarding water-damaged materials, protocols for mitigating water intrusion2.into completed Work, and replacing water-damaged Work.Indicate sequencing of work that requires water, such as sprayed fire-resistive materials, plastering,3.and terrazzo grinding, and describe plans for dealing with water from these operations. Showprocedures for verifying that wet construction has dried sufficiently to permit installation of finishmaterials.

Dust- and HVAC-Control Plan: Submit coordination drawing and narrative that indicates the dust- andE.HVAC-control measures proposed for use, proposed locations, and proposed time frame for theiroperation. Identify further options if proposed measures are later determined to be inadequate. Includethe following:

Locations of dust-control partitions at each phase of work.1.HVAC system isolation schematic drawing.2.Location of proposed air-filtration system discharge.3.Waste handling procedures.4.Other dust-control measures.5.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Electric Service: Comply with NECA, NEMA, and UL standards and regulations for temporary electricA.service. Install service to comply with NFPA 70.Tests and Inspections: Arrange for authorities having jurisdiction to test and inspect each temporary utilityB.before use. Obtain required certifications and permits.Accessible Temporary Egress: Comply with applicable provisions in the U.S. Architectural &C.Transportation Barriers Compliance Board's ADA-ABA Accessibility Guidelines.


TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS 015000 - 1


PROJECT CONDITIONS1.6Temporary Use of Permanent Facilities: Engage Installer of each permanent service to assumeA.responsibility for operation, maintenance, and protection of each permanent service during its use as aconstruction facility before Owner's acceptance, regardless of previously assigned responsibilities.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1Chain-Link Fencing: Minimum 2-inch, 0.148-inch- thick, galvanized-steel, chain-link fabric fencing;A.minimum 6 feet high with galvanized-steel pipe posts; minimum 2-3/8-inch- OD line posts and 2-7/8-inch-OD corner and pull posts.Dust-Control Adhesive-Surface Walk-off Mats: Provide mats minimum 36 by 60 inches.B.Insulation: Unfaced mineral-fiber blanket, manufactured from glass, slag wool, or rock wool; withC.maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively.

TEMPORARY FACILITIES2.2Field Offices, General: Prefabricated or mobile units with serviceable finishes, temperature controls, andA.foundations adequate for normal loading.Common-Use Field Office: Of sufficient size to accommodate needs of Owner, Architect, and constructionB.personnel office activities and to accommodate Project meetings specified in other Division 01 Sections.Keep office clean and orderly. Furnish and equip offices as follows:

Furniture required for Project-site documents including file cabinets, plan tables, plan racks, and1.bookcases.Conference room of sufficient size to accommodate meetings of 10 individuals. Provide electrical2.power service and 120-V ac duplex receptacles, with no fewer than one receptacle on each wall.Furnish room with conference table, chairs, and 4-foot- square tack and marker boards.Drinking water and private toilet.3.Coffee machine and supplies.4.Heating and cooling equipment necessary to maintain a uniform indoor temperature of 68 to 72 deg5.F.Lighting fixtures capable of maintaining average illumination of 20 fc at desk height.6.

Storage and Fabrication Sheds: Provide sheds sized, furnished, and equipped to accommodate materialsC.and equipment for construction operations.

Store combustible materials apart from building.1.

EQUIPMENT2.3Fire Extinguishers: Portable, UL rated; with class and extinguishing agent as required by locations andA.classes of fire exposures.HVAC Equipment: Unless Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system, provide vented,B.self-contained, liquid-propane-gas or fuel-oil heaters with individual space thermostatic control.

Use of gasoline-burning space heaters, open-flame heaters, or salamander-type heating units is1.prohibited.Heating Units: Listed and labeled for type of fuel being consumed, by a qualified testing agency2.acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and marked for intended location and application.Permanent HVAC System: If Owner authorizes use of permanent HVAC system for temporary use3.during construction, provide filter with MERV of 8 at each return-air grille in system and remove atend of construction and clean HVAC system as required in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures".

Air-Filtration Units: Primary and secondary HEPA-filter-equipped portable units with four-stage filtration.C.Provide single switch for emergency shutoff. Configure to run continuously.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.1Locate facilities where they will serve Project adequately and result in minimum interference withA.performance of the Work. Relocate and modify facilities as required by progress of the Work.

Locate facilities to limit site disturbance as specified in Section 011000 "Summary."1.Provide each facility ready for use when needed to avoid delay. Do not remove until facilities are noB.longer needed or are replaced by authorized use of completed permanent facilities.




TEMPORARY UTILITY INSTALLATION3.2General: Install temporary service or connect to existing service.A.

Arrange with utility company, Owner, and existing users for time when service can be interrupted, if1.necessary, to make connections for temporary services.

Sewers and Drainage: Provide temporary utilities to remove effluent lawfully.B.Connect temporary sewers to municipal system as directed by authorities having jurisdiction.1.

Water Service: Install water service and distribution piping in sizes and pressures adequate forC.construction.Sanitary Facilities: Provide temporary toilets, wash facilities, and drinking water for use of constructionD.personnel. Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for type, number, location,operation, and maintenance of fixtures and facilities.Heating: Provide temporary heating required by construction activities for curing or drying of completedE.installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects of low temperatures or highhumidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elements beinginstalled.Ventilation and Humidity Control: Provide temporary ventilation required by construction activities forF.curing or drying of completed installations or for protecting installed construction from adverse effects ofhigh humidity. Select equipment that will not have a harmful effect on completed installations or elementsbeing installed. Coordinate ventilation requirements to produce ambient condition required and minimizeenergy consumption.

Provide dehumidification systems when required to reduce substrate moisture levels to level1.required to allow installation or application of finishes.

Electric Power Service: Provide electric power service and distribution system of sufficient size, capacity,G.and power characteristics required for construction operations.

Install electric power service overhead unless otherwise indicated.1.Connect temporary service to Owner's existing power source, as directed by Owner.2.

Lighting: Provide temporary lighting with local switching that provides adequate illumination forH.construction operations, observations, inspections, and traffic conditions.

Install and operate temporary lighting that fulfills security and protection requirements without1.operating entire system.Install lighting for Project identification sign.2.

Telephone Service: Provide temporary telephone service in common-use facilities for use by allI.construction personnel. Install one telephone line(s) for each field office.

Provide additional telephone lines for the following:1.Provide a dedicated telephone line for each facsimile machine in each field office.a.Provide one telephone line(s) for Owner's use.b.

At each telephone, post a list of important telephone numbers.2.Police and fire departments.a.Ambulance service.b.Contractor's home office.c.Contractor's emergency after-hours telephone number.d.Architect's office.e.Engineers' offices.f.Owner's office.g.Principal subcontractors' field and home offices.h.

Provide superintendent with cellular telephone or portable two-way radio for use when away from3.field office.

Electronic Communication Service: Provide a desktop computer in the primary field r to access ProjectJ.electronic documents and maintain electronic communications. Equip computer with not less than thefollowing:

Printer: "All-in-one" unit equipped with printer server, combining color printing, photocopying,1.scanning, and faxing, or separate units for each of these three functions.Internet Service: Wireless, broadband modem, router and ISP, equipped with hardware firewall,2.providing minimum 384 Kbps upload and 1 Mbps download speeds at each computer.

SUPPORT FACILITIES INSTALLATION3.3General: Comply with the following:A.

Provide construction for temporary offices, shops, and sheds located within construction area or1.within 30 feet of building lines that is noncombustible according to ASTM E 136. Comply withNFPA 241.




Maintain support facilities until Architect schedules Substantial Completion inspection. Remove2.before Substantial Completion. Personnel remaining after Substantial Completion will be permittedto use permanent facilities, under conditions acceptable to Owner.

Temporary Roads and Paved Areas: Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areas adequateB.for construction operations. Locate temporary roads and paved areas on Drawings.

Provide dust-control treatment that is nonpolluting and nontracking. Reapply treatment as required1.to minimize dust.

Temporary Use of Permanent Roads and Paved Areas: Locate temporary roads and paved areas in sameC.location as permanent roads and paved areas. Construct and maintain temporary roads and paved areasadequate for construction operations. Extend temporary roads and paved areas, within construction limitsindicated, as necessary for construction operations.

Coordinate elevations of temporary roads and paved areas with permanent roads and paved areas.1.Prepare subgrade and install subbase and base for temporary roads and paved areas according to2.Section 312000 "Earth Moving."Recondition base after temporary use, including removing contaminated material, regrading,3.proofrolling, compacting, and testing.

Traffic Controls: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.D.Protect existing site improvements to remain including curbs, pavement, and utilities.1.Maintain access for fire-fighting equipment and access to fire hydrants.2.

Parking: Provide temporary parking areas for construction personnel.E.Dewatering Facilities and Drains: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. MaintainF.Project site, excavations, and construction free of water.

Dispose of rainwater in a lawful manner that will not result in flooding Project or adjoining properties1.or endanger permanent Work or temporary facilities.Remove snow and ice as required to minimize accumulations.2.

Project Signs: Provide Project signs as indicated. Unauthorized signs are not permitted.G.Identification Signs: Provide Project identification signs as indicated on Drawings.1.Temporary Signs: Provide other signs as indicated and as required to inform public and individuals2.seeking entrance to Project.

Provide temporary, directional signs for construction personnel and visitors.a.Maintain and touchup signs so they are legible at all times.3.

Lifts and Hoists: Provide facilities necessary for hoisting materials and personnel.H.Truck cranes and similar devices used for hoisting materials are considered "tools and equipment"1.and not temporary facilities.

Temporary Stairs: Until permanent stairs are available, provide temporary stairs where ladders are notI.adequate.Temporary Use of Permanent Stairs: Use of new stairs for construction traffic will be permitted, providedJ.stairs are protected and finishes restored to new condition at time of Substantial Completion.

SECURITY AND PROTECTION FACILITIES INSTALLATION3.4Protection of Existing Facilities: Protect existing vegetation, equipment, structures, utilities, and otherA.improvements at Project site and on adjacent properties, except those indicated to be removed or altered.Repair damage to existing facilities.Environmental Protection: Provide protection, operate temporary facilities, and conduct construction asB.required to comply with environmental regulations and that minimize possible air, waterway, and subsoilcontamination or pollution or other undesirable effects.

Comply with work restrictions specified in Section 011000 "Summary."1.Temporary Erosion and Sedimentation Control: Provide measures to prevent soil erosion and dischargeC.of soil-bearing water runoff and airborne dust to undisturbed areas and to adjacent properties andwalkways, according to .

Verify that flows of water redirected from construction areas or generated by construction activity do1.not enter or cross tree- or plant- protection zones.Inspect, repair, and maintain erosion- and sedimentation-control measures during construction until2.permanent vegetation has been established.Clean, repair, and restore adjoining properties and roads affected by erosion and sedimentation3.from Project site during the course of Project.Remove erosion and sedimentation controls and restore and stabilize areas disturbed during4.removal.

Stormwater Control: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction. Provide barriers in andD.around excavations and subgrade construction to prevent flooding by runoff of stormwater from heavyrains.




Tree and Plant Protection: Install temporary fencing located as indicated or outside the drip line of trees toE.protect vegetation from damage from construction operations. Protect tree root systems from damage,flooding, and erosion.Pest Control: Engage pest-control service to recommend practices to minimize attraction and harboring ofF.rodents, roaches, and other pests and to perform extermination and control procedures at regular intervalsso Project will be free of pests and their residues at Substantial Completion. Perform control operationslawfully, using environmentally safe materials.Site Enclosure Fence: Before construction operations begin, furnish and install site enclosure fence in aG.manner that will prevent people and animals from easily entering site except by entrance gates.

Extent of Fence: As required to enclose entire Project site or portion determined sufficient to1.accommodate construction operations.Maintain security by limiting number of keys and restricting distribution to authorized personnel.[2.Furnish one set of keys to Owner.]

Security Enclosure and Lockup: Install temporary enclosure around partially completed areas ofH.construction. Provide lockable entrances to prevent unauthorized entrance, vandalism, theft, and similarviolations of security. Lock entrances at end of each work day.Barricades, Warning Signs, and Lights: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction forI.erecting structurally adequate barricades, including warning signs and lighting.Temporary Egress: Maintain temporary egress from existing occupied facilities as indicated and asJ.required by authorities having jurisdiction.Covered Walkway: Erect protective, covered walkway for passage of individuals through or adjacent toK.Project site. Coordinate with entrance gates, other facilities, and obstructions. Comply with regulations ofauthorities having jurisdiction.

Construct covered walkways using scaffold or shoring framing.1.Provide overhead decking, protective enclosure walls, handrails, barricades, warning signs, exit2.signs, lights, safe and well-drained walkways, and similar provisions for protection and safepassage.Paint and maintain appearance of walkway for duration of the Work.3.

Temporary Enclosures: Provide temporary enclosures for protection of construction, in progress andL.completed, from exposure, foul weather, other construction operations, and similar activities. Providetemporary weathertight enclosure for building exterior.

Where heating or cooling is needed and permanent enclosure is incomplete, insulate temporary1.enclosures.

Temporary Partitions: Provide floor-to-ceiling dustproof partitions to limit dust and dirt migration and toM.separate areas occupied by Owner from fumes and noise.

Construct dustproof partitions with gypsum wallboard with joints taped on occupied side, and1.fire-retardant-treated plywood on construction operations side.Where fire-resistance-rated temporary partitions are indicated or are required by authorities having2.jurisdiction, construct partitions according to the rated assemblies.Insulate partitions to control noise transmission to occupied areas.3.Seal joints and perimeter. Equip partitions with gasketed dustproof doors and security locks where4.openings are required.Protect air-handling equipment.5.Provide walk-off mats at each entrance through temporary partition.6.

Temporary Fire Protection: Install and maintain temporary fire-protection facilities of types needed toN.protect against reasonably predictable and controllable fire losses. Comply with NFPA 241; managefire-prevention program.

Prohibit smoking in construction areas.1.Supervise welding operations, combustion-type temporary heating units, and similar sources of fire2.ignition according to requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.Develop and supervise an overall fire-prevention and -protection program for personnel at Project3.site. Review needs with local fire department and establish procedures to be followed. Instructpersonnel in methods and procedures. Post warnings and information.Provide temporary standpipes and hoses for fire protection. Hang hoses with a warning sign4.stating that hoses are for fire-protection purposes only and are not to be removed. Match hose sizewith outlet size and equip with suitable nozzles.

MOISTURE AND MOLD CONTROL3.5Contractor's Moisture-Protection Plan: Avoid trapping water in finished work. Document visible signs ofA.mold that may appear during construction.Exposed Construction Phase: Before installation of weather barriers, when materials are subject toB.wetting and exposure and to airborne mold spores, protect as follows:




Protect porous materials from water damage.1.Protect stored and installed material from flowing or standing water.2.Keep porous and organic materials from coming into prolonged contact with concrete.3.Remove standing water from decks.4.Keep deck openings covered or dammed.5.

Partially Enclosed Construction Phase: After installation of weather barriers but before full enclosure andC.conditioning of building, when installed materials are still subject to infiltration of moisture and ambientmold spores, protect as follows:

Do not load or install drywall or other porous materials or components, or items with high organic1.content, into partially enclosed building.Keep interior spaces reasonably clean and protected from water damage.2.Periodically collect and remove waste containing cellulose or other organic matter.3.Discard or replace water-damaged material.4.Do not install material that is wet.5.Discard, replace, or clean stored or installed material that begins to grow mold.6.Perform work in a sequence that allows any wet materials adequate time to dry before enclosing7.the material in drywall or other interior finishes.

Controlled Construction Phase of Construction: After completing and sealing of the building enclosure butD.prior to the full operation of permanent HVAC systems, maintain as follows:

Control moisture and humidity inside building by maintaining effective dry-in conditions.1.Use permanent HVAC system to control humidity.2.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, relative humidity, and exposure to3.water limits.

Hygroscopic materials that may support mold growth, including wood and gypsum-baseda.products, that become wet during the course of construction and remain wet for 48 hoursare considered defective.Measure moisture content of materials that have been exposed to moisture duringb.construction operations or after installation. Record readings beginning at time of exposureand continuing daily for 48 hours. Identify materials containing moisture levels higher thanallowed. Report findings in writing to Architect.Remove materials that can not be completely restored to their manufactured moisture levelc.within 48 hours.

OPERATION, TERMINATION, AND REMOVAL3.6Supervision: Enforce strict discipline in use of temporary facilities. To minimize waste and abuse, limitA.availability of temporary facilities to essential and intended uses.Maintenance: Maintain facilities in good operating condition until removal.B.

Maintain operation of temporary enclosures, heating, cooling, humidity control, ventilation, and1.similar facilities on a 24-hour basis where required to achieve indicated results and to avoidpossibility of damage.

Operate Project-identification-sign lighting daily from dusk until 12:00 midnight.C.Temporary Facility Changeover: Do not change over from using temporary security and protectionD.facilities to permanent facilities until Substantial Completion.Termination and Removal: Remove each temporary facility when need for its service has ended, when itE.has been replaced by authorized use of a permanent facility, or no later than Substantial Completion.Complete or, if necessary, restore permanent construction that may have been delayed because ofinterference with temporary facility. Repair damaged Work, clean exposed surfaces, and replaceconstruction that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.

Materials and facilities that constitute temporary facilities are property of Contractor. Owner1.reserves right to take possession of Project identification signs.At Substantial Completion, repair, renovate, and clean permanent facilities used during construction2.period. Comply with final cleaning requirements specified in Section 017700 "CloseoutProcedures."





SECTION 015720 - INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION

GENERALPART 1 -


Requirements to develop and utilize an indoor air quality plan for the construction operation as1.required by the California Green Buildings Standards Code.A sample plan applicable to all interior construction and trades.2.Reference:3.

“IAQ Guidelines for Occupied Buildings under Construction”, 2nd Edition, 2007, by the Sheeta.Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc.

TRAINING1.2Contractor shall provide copies of the plan and training to all subcontractors and appropriate personnel.A.

PRODUCTS (NOT USED)PART 2 -

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXECUTION3.1Utilize a plan to protect the indoor environments from contamination during construction and finish outA.similar to the following plan.Enforce and verify compliance by personnel and subcontractors.B.Photograph the related construction operations to verify conformance to each section of the plan. ProvideC.photographs to the Architect. Submit a minimum of 18 photographs, (six taken on three separateoccasions). Each set of photos shall be date stamped, highlighting the indoor air protection measureslisted in paragraph 3.2A1a-e below.

INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS3.2IntroductionA.

This plan outlines the processes required to assure acceptable air quality. Elements of the program1.include:

HVAC Protection and Containing the work area,a.Source Control and Modifying HVAC Operation and Reducing Emissions,b.Pathway Interruptions,c.Intensifying Housekeeping, andd.Scheduling or Relocation of Occupants.e.

THESE REQUIREMENTS APPLY TO ALL PARTIES INVOLVED IN DESIGN, CONSTRUCTION, AND3.3BUILDING MOVE IN:CONTAMINANTSA.

Air contaminants include many different materials. These may include; gases, vapors, chemicals,1.mold/fungus, pathogens, allergens, particulates and radiation. Eliminating all of these is notpossible but reducing the introduction and distribution of these contaminants is possible anddesirable. The programs outlined in the following pages is intended to reduce contaminants andprovide as clean a building as possible for the residents.The following sections outline procedures and precautions to reduce building contamination and2.meet the requirements for a healthy environment.

CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONSB.HVAC PROTECTION: The air conditioning system is the distribution method for air and potentially1.contaminants throughout the building. Keeping the system clean is a necessity.

All air handling equipment, spiral and fabricated ducts and accessories shall be kept cleana.during transportation, storage and assembly. All equipment, ductwork, and accessoriesstored on- site shall be raised off of the floor on pallets.All lined, spiral and assembled ducts shall be wrapped and protected from dirt and waterb.during transportation and storage. All equipment, ductwork, and accessories stored on siteshall be raised off of the floor or ground on pallets.


INDOOR AIR QUALITY PLAN DURING CONSTRUCTION

015720 - 1


All insulation and lined duct shall be kept dry at all times. Any insulation that has becomec.wet shall be removed and replaced.Fiberglass ductboard in the air handlers and bases shall be kept dry and clean. Exposedd.fiberglass subject to erosion shall be coated with a sealer to prevent the entry of rawfiberglass into the air stream.

Water will not be allowed to stand on any mechanical equipment.1)All open ends of installed duct and equipment shall be covered and sealed to prevent thee.entry of dirt.All zone boxes shall be wrapped and sealed from dirt and water before installation. Installedf.zone boxes shall have the openings sealed until permanently connected to the ductwork.All dampers and attenuators into open chases and ducts shall be covered to reduce dirtg.entry.The air handlers shall not be started without MERV 8 filtration in place. Upon systemh.activation, install sheet media on all return openings and filters in zone box plenumopenings. These filters must be monitored and changed as necessary to prevent the entryof dirt into the system. The temporary media shall be removed after building flush out andbefore occupancy.The return air system should not be used during sheet rock installation, sanding or paintingi.operations.The building should be kept under a positive pressure as much as possible.j.Chase dampers shall be kept closed until the system is activated.k.Complete the initial mechanical checklists at system startup.l.

Replace final filters with new filters before flush out or occupancy per design1)requirements.

SOURCE CONTROL2.No smoking or tobacco materials shall be allowed in the building.a.No gasoline or fuel fired equipment shall be used inside any enclosed building.b.Wet processes within the building shall be kept to a minimum.c.All chase and wallboard materials shall be protected from water. All damaged materialsd.shall be removed and replaced.Use low emission materials and chemicals.e.All cleaning involving chemicals shall be performed outside the building wherever possible.f.All carpet materials shall be unrolled or unboxed and aired out in a well-ventilatedg.warehouse for a minimum of three days before installation unless the carpet meets therequirements of The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green label Plus program and thecushion meets the requirements of The Carpet and Rug Institute (CRI) Green labelprogram. Carpet and cushion should be installed a minimum of three days prior toconducting indoor air quality testing, carpet materials shall be unrolled or unboxed and airedout in a well-ventilated warehouse for a minimum of three days before installation.All modular furniture shall be aired out in a well-ventilated warehouse for seven days beforeh.entry into the building unless the modular furniture is Greenguard certified.Trash shall be cleaned up and removed daily to the appropriate recycle container.i.Any mold growth shall be treated according to the procedures shown in the New York Cityj.Department of Health “Guidelines on Assessment and Remediation of Fungi in IndoorEnvironments.Clean the inside of all walls at the base track to remove excess materials and dirt with ak.vacuum cleaner before enclosing the wall. This is particularly critical on walls with plumbingor water piping included.HEPA vacuum all concrete floors before installation of floor covering materials.l.No obvious mold or chemical contamination shall be enclosed, hidden or painted.m.

PATHWAY INTERRUPTION3.Dust producing operations shall be exhausted to the outside to the extent possible.a.Exhaust fans may be installed on each floor to remove dust and contaminants.b.The air handler shall supply conditioned air to the floors. Floors with heavy dust or chemicalc.operations shall be exhausted to the outside.During rain or high humidity conditions, the air supply coming from the coils shall be cooledd.to 55 degrees F or the air handler stopped to prevent moist air entry into the building.Exhaust fans shall not draw moist air into the building. It is preferable to have little airflow tomoist air entering the building.Return air dampers and openings shall be covered with filter media during operations thate.may contaminate the system.



015720 - 2


HOUSEKEEPING4.Food or food residues shall be properly disposed after meals or breaks.a.Once the building is enclosed with finishes applied, keep dirt entry to a minimum with walkb.off mats at all entrances. Clean the mats at least daily.All sweeping shall be done with dust reducing wax-based sweeping compounds.c.All materials shall be kept clean and stored neatly on dunnage or pallets as required by thed.manufacturer.Coils, fans, and air handler chambers including return air chambers shall be inspected ande.cleaned if required before start up, final testing and commissioning, and air testing.All workers shall utilize the proper personal protective equipment per OSHA standardsf.during any operation involving chemicals and dust production.No food, drink, or smoking shall be allowed within the building after the building is enclosed.g.

SCHEDULING5.Complete all dust producing and chemical operations before the installation of “sink”a.materials such as carpet and ceiling tile.Complete the HVAC control system sufficient to allow the operation of the supply andb.exhaust systems to control pressurization and contaminants.Group contaminating operations where possible to maximize exhaust use.c.




015720 - 3


SECTION 016000 - PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for selection of products for use in Project;A.product delivery, storage, and handling; manufacturers' standard warranties on products; specialwarranties; and comparable products.

DEFINITIONS1.3Products: Items obtained for incorporating into the Work, whether purchased for Project or taken fromA.previously purchased stock. The term "product" includes the terms "material," "equipment," "system," andterms of similar intent.

Named Products: Items identified by manufacturer's product name, including make or model1.number or other designation shown or listed in manufacturer's published product literature, that iscurrent as of date of the Contract Documents.New Products: Items that have not previously been incorporated into another project or facility.2.Products salvaged or recycled from other projects are not considered new products.Comparable Product: Product that is demonstrated and approved through submittal process to3.have the indicated qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-service performance, physicalproperties, appearance, and other characteristics that equal or exceed those of specified product.

Basis-of-Design Product Specification: A specification in which a specific manufacturer's product is namedB.and accompanied by the words "basis-of-design product," including make or model number or otherdesignation, to establish the significant qualities related to type, function, dimension, in-serviceperformance, physical properties, appearance, and other characteristics for purposes of evaluatingcomparable products of additional manufacturers named in the specification.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Comparable Product Requests: Submit request for consideration of each comparable product. IdentifyA.product or fabrication or installation method to be replaced. Include Specification Section number and titleand Drawing numbers and titles.

Include data to indicate compliance with the requirements specified in "Comparable Products"1.Article.Architect's Action: If necessary, Architect will request additional information or documentation for2.evaluation within one week of receipt of a comparable product request. Architect will notifyContractor of approval or rejection of proposed comparable product request within 15 days ofreceipt of request, or seven days of receipt of additional information or documentation, whichever islater.

Form of Approval: As specified in Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures."a.Use product specified if Architect does not issue a decision on use of a comparable productb.request within time allocated.

Basis-of-Design Product Specification Submittal: Comply with requirements in Section 013300 "SubmittalB.Procedures." Show compliance with requirements.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Compatibility of Options: If Contractor is given option of selecting between two or more products for useA.on Project, select product compatible with products previously selected, even if previously selectedproducts were also options.

PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Deliver, store, and handle products using means and methods that will prevent damage, deterioration, andA.loss, including theft and vandalism. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.Delivery and Handling:B.

Schedule delivery to minimize long-term storage at Project site and to prevent overcrowding of1.construction spaces.


PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS 016000 - 1


Coordinate delivery with installation time to ensure minimum holding time for items that are2.flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to deterioration, theft, and other losses.Deliver products to Project site in an undamaged condition in manufacturer's original sealed3.container or other packaging system, complete with labels and instructions for handling, storing,unpacking, protecting, and installing.Inspect products on delivery to determine compliance with the Contract Documents and to4.determine that products are undamaged and properly protected.

Storage:C.Store products to allow for inspection and measurement of quantity or counting of units.1.Store materials in a manner that will not endanger Project structure.2.Store products that are subject to damage by the elements, under cover in a weathertight enclosure3.above ground, with ventilation adequate to prevent condensation.Protect foam plastic from exposure to sunlight, except to extent necessary for period of installation4.and concealment.Comply with product manufacturer's written instructions for temperature, humidity, ventilation, and5.weather-protection requirements for storage.Protect stored products from damage and liquids from freezing.6.Provide a secure location and enclosure at Project site for storage of materials and equipment by7.Owner's construction forces. Coordinate location with Owner.

PRODUCT WARRANTIES1.7Warranties specified in other Sections shall be in addition to, and run concurrent with, other warrantiesA.required by the Contract Documents. Manufacturer's disclaimers and limitations on product warranties donot relieve Contractor of obligations under requirements of the Contract Documents.

Manufacturer's Warranty: Written warranty furnished by individual manufacturer for a particular1.product and specifically endorsed by manufacturer to Owner.Special Warranty: Written warranty required by the Contract Documents to provide specific rights2.for Owner.

Special Warranties: Prepare a written document that contains appropriate terms and identification, readyB.for execution.

Manufacturer's Standard Form: Modified to include Project-specific information and properly1.executed.Specified Form: When specified forms are included with the Specifications, prepare a written2.document using indicated form properly executed.See other Sections for specific content requirements and particular requirements for submitting3.special warranties.

Submittal Time: Comply with requirements in Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures."C.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCT SELECTION PROCEDURES2.1General Product Requirements: Provide products that comply with the Contract Documents, areA.undamaged and, unless otherwise indicated, are new at time of installation.

Provide products complete with accessories, trim, finish, fasteners, and other items needed for a1.complete installation and indicated use and effect.Standard Products: If available, and unless custom products or nonstandard options are specified,2.provide standard products of types that have been produced and used successfully in similarsituations on other projects.Owner reserves the right to limit selection to products with warranties not in conflict with3.requirements of the Contract Documents.Where products are accompanied by the term "as selected," Architect will make selection.4.Descriptive, performance, and reference standard requirements in the Specifications establish5.salient characteristics of products.Or Equal: For products specified by name and accompanied by the term "or equal," or "or6.approved equal," or "or approved," comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article toobtain approval for use of an unnamed product.

Product Selection Procedures:B.Product: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer and product, provide the named1.product that complies with requirements. Comparable products or substitutions for Contractor'sconvenience will not be considered.




Manufacturer/Source: Where Specifications name a single manufacturer or source, provide a2.product by the named manufacturer or source that complies with requirements. Comparableproducts or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will not be considered.Products:3.

Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both manufacturers anda.products, provide one of the products listed that complies with requirements. Comparableproducts or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwiseindicated.Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of names of both availableb.manufacturers and products, provide one of the products listed, or an unnamed product,that complies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products"Article for consideration of an unnamed product.

Manufacturers:4.Restricted List: Where Specifications include a list of manufacturers' names, provide aa.product by one of the manufacturers listed that complies with requirements. Comparableproducts or substitutions for Contractor's convenience will be considered unless otherwiseindicated.Nonrestricted List: Where Specifications include a list of available manufacturers, provide ab.product by one of the manufacturers listed, or a product by an unnamed manufacturer, thatcomplies with requirements. Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article forconsideration of an unnamed manufacturer's product.

Basis-of-Design Product: Where Specifications name a product, or refer to a product indicated on5.Drawings, and include a list of manufacturers, provide the specified or indicated product or acomparable product by one of the other named manufacturers. Drawings and Specificationsindicate sizes, profiles, dimensions, and other characteristics that are based on the product named.Comply with requirements in "Comparable Products" Article for consideration of an unnamedproduct by one of the other named manufacturers.

Visual Matching Specification: Where Specifications require "match Architect's sample", provide a productC.that complies with requirements and matches Architect's sample. Architect's decision will be final onwhether a proposed product matches.

If no product available within specified category matches and complies with other specified1.requirements, comply with requirements in Section 012500 "Substitution Procedures" for proposalof product.

Visual Selection Specification: Where Specifications include the phrase "as selected by Architect fromD.manufacturer's full range" or similar phrase, select a product that complies with requirements. Architectwill select color, gloss, pattern, density, or texture from manufacturer's product line that includes bothstandard and premium items.

COMPARABLE PRODUCTS2.2Conditions for Consideration: Architect will consider Contractor's request for comparable product when theA.following conditions are satisfied. If the following conditions are not satisfied, Architect may returnrequests without action, except to record noncompliance with these requirements:

Evidence that the proposed product does not require revisions to the Contract Documents, that it is1.consistent with the Contract Documents and will produce the indicated results, and that it iscompatible with other portions of the Work.Detailed comparison of significant qualities of proposed product with those named in the2.Specifications. Significant qualities include attributes such as performance, weight, size, durability,visual effect, and specific features and requirements indicated.Evidence that proposed product provides specified warranty.3.List of similar installations for completed projects with project names and addresses and names4.and addresses of architects and owners, if requested.Samples, if requested.5.






SECTION 017300 - EXECUTION

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes general administrative and procedural requirements governing execution of the WorkA.including, but not limited to, the following:

Construction layout.1.Field engineering and surveying.2.Installation of the Work.3.Cutting and patching.4.Coordination of Owner-installed products.5.Progress cleaning.6.Starting and adjusting.7.Protection of installed construction.8.

DEFINITIONS1.3Cutting: Removal of in-place construction necessary to permit installation or performance of other work.A.Patching: Fitting and repair work required to restore construction to original conditions after installation ofB.other work.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Qualification Data: For land surveyor.A.Certificates: Submit certificate signed by land surveyor certifying that location and elevation ofB.improvements comply with requirements.Cutting and Patching Plan: Submit plan describing procedures at least 10 days prior to the time cuttingC.and patching will be performed. Include the following information:

Extent: Describe reason for and extent of each occurrence of cutting and patching.1.Changes to In-Place Construction: Describe anticipated results. Include changes to structural2.elements and operating components as well as changes in building appearance and othersignificant visual elements.Products: List products to be used for patching and firms or entities that will perform patching work.3.Dates: Indicate when cutting and patching will be performed.4.Utilities and Mechanical and Electrical Systems: List services and systems that cutting and5.patching procedures will disturb or affect. List services and systems that will be relocated andthose that will be temporarily out of service. Indicate length of time permanent services andsystems will be disrupted.

Include description of provisions for temporary services and systems during interruption ofa.permanent services and systems.

Landfill Receipts: Submit copy of receipts issued by a landfill facility, licensed to accept hazardousD.materials, for hazardous waste disposal.Certified Surveys: Submit two copies signed by land surveyor.E.Final Property Survey: Submit 10 copies showing the Work performed and record survey data.F.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Land Surveyor Qualifications: A professional land surveyor who is legally qualified to practice inA.jurisdiction where Project is located and who is experienced in providing land-surveying services of thekind indicated.Cutting and Patching: Comply with requirements for and limitations on cutting and patching of constructionB.elements.

Structural Elements: When cutting and patching structural elements, notify Architect of locations1.and details of cutting and await directions from Architect before proceeding. Shore, brace, andsupport structural elements during cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch structural elementsin a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity or increase deflection


EXECUTION 017300 - 1


Operational Elements: Do not cut and patch operating elements and related components in a2.manner that results in reducing their capacity to perform as intended or that results in increasedmaintenance or decreased operational life or safety. Operational elements include the following:

Primary operational systems and equipment.a.Fire separation assemblies.b.Air or smoke barriers.c.Fire-suppression systems.d.Mechanical systems piping and ducts.e.Control systems.f.Communication systems.g.Fire-detection and -alarm systems.h.Conveying systems.i.Electrical wiring systems.j.Operating systems of special construction.k.

Other Construction Elements: Do not cut and patch other construction elements or components in3.a manner that could change their load-carrying capacity, that results in reducing their capacity toperform as intended, or that results in increased maintenance or decreased operational life orsafety. Other construction elements include but are not limited to the following:

Water, moisture, or vapor barriers.a.Membranes and flashings.b.Exterior curtain-wall construction.c.Sprayed fire-resistive material.d.Equipment supports.e.Piping, ductwork, vessels, and equipment.f.Noise- and vibration-control elements and systems.g.

Visual Elements: Do not cut and patch construction in a manner that results in visual evidence of4.cutting and patching. Do not cut and patch exposed construction in a manner that would, inArchitect's opinion, reduce the building's aesthetic qualities. Remove and replace construction thathas been cut and patched in a visually unsatisfactory manner.

Cutting and Patching Conference: Before proceeding, meet at Project site with parties involved in cuttingC.and patching, including mechanical and electrical trades. Review areas of potential interference andconflict. Coordinate procedures and resolve potential conflicts before proceeding.Manufacturer's Installation Instructions: Obtain and maintain on-site manufacturer's writtenD.recommendations and instructions for installation of products and equipment.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1General: Comply with requirements specified in other Sections.A.In-Place Materials: Use materials for patching identical to in-place materials. For exposed surfaces, useB.materials that visually match in-place adjacent surfaces to the fullest extent possible.

If identical materials are unavailable or cannot be used, use materials that, when installed, will1.provide a match acceptable to Architect for the visual and functional performance of in-placematerials.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Existing Conditions: The existence and location of underground and other utilities and constructionA.indicated as existing are not guaranteed. Before beginning sitework, investigate and verify the existenceand location of underground utilities, mechanical and electrical systems, and other construction affectingthe Work.

Before construction, verify the location and invert elevation at points of connection of sanitary1.sewer, storm sewer, and water-service piping; underground electrical services, and other utilities.Furnish location data for work related to Project that must be performed by public utilities serving2.Project site.

Examination and Acceptance of Conditions: Before proceeding with each component of the Work,B.examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer or Applicator present where indicated, forcompliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.Record observations.

Examine roughing-in for mechanical and electrical systems to verify actual locations of connections1.before equipment and fixture installation.




Examine walls, floors, and roofs for suitable conditions where products and systems are to be2.installed.Verify compatibility with and suitability of substrates, including compatibility with existing finishes or3.primers.

Written Report: Where a written report listing conditions detrimental to performance of the Work isC.required by other Sections, include the following:

Description of the Work.1.List of detrimental conditions, including substrates.2.List of unacceptable installation tolerances.3.Recommended corrections.4.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. Proceeding with theD.Work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.

PREPARATION3.2Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit the Work properly. RecheckA.measurements before installing each product. Where portions of the Work are indicated to fit to otherconstruction, verify dimensions of other construction by field measurements before fabrication. Coordinatefabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown diagrammatically onB.Drawings.Review of Contract Documents and Field Conditions: Immediately on discovery of the need forC.clarification of the Contract Documents caused by differing field conditions outside the control ofContractor, submit a request for information to Architect according to requirements in Section 013100"Project Management and Coordination."

CONSTRUCTION LAYOUT3.3Verification: Before proceeding to lay out the Work, verify layout information shown on Drawings, inA.relation to the property survey and existing benchmarks. If discrepancies are discovered, notify Architectpromptly.General: Engage a land surveyor to lay out the Work using accepted surveying practices.B.

Establish benchmarks and control points to set lines and levels at each story of construction and1.elsewhere as needed to locate each element of Project.Establish limits on use of Project site.2.Establish dimensions within tolerances indicated. Do not scale Drawings to obtain required3.dimensions.Inform installers of lines and levels to which they must comply.4.Check the location, level and plumb, of every major element as the Work progresses.5.Notify Architect when deviations from required lines and levels exceed allowable tolerances.6.Close site surveys with an error of closure equal to or less than the standard established by7.authorities having jurisdiction.

Site Improvements: Locate and lay out site improvements, including pavements, grading, fill and topsoilC.placement, utility slopes, and rim and invert elevations.Building Lines and Levels: Locate and lay out control lines and levels for structures, building foundations,D.column grids, and floor levels, including those required for mechanical and electrical work. Transfersurvey markings and elevations for use with control lines and levels. Level foundations and piers from twoor more locations.Record Log: Maintain a log of layout control work. Record deviations from required lines and levels.E.Include beginning and ending dates and times of surveys, weather conditions, name and duty of eachsurvey party member, and types of instruments and tapes used. Make the log available for reference byArchitect.

FIELD ENGINEERING3.4Identification: Owner will identify existing benchmarks, control points, and property corners.A.Reference Points: Locate existing permanent benchmarks, control points, and similar reference pointsB.before beginning the Work. Preserve and protect permanent benchmarks and control points duringconstruction operations.

Replace lost or destroyed permanent benchmarks and control points promptly. Base replacements1.on the original survey control points.

Benchmarks: Establish and maintain a minimum of two permanent benchmarks on Project site,C.referenced to data established by survey control points. Comply with authorities having jurisdiction fortype and size of benchmark.

Record benchmark locations, with horizontal and vertical data, on Project Record Documents.1.




Where the actual location or elevation of layout points cannot be marked, provide temporary2.reference points sufficient to locate the Work.Remove temporary reference points when no longer needed. Restore marked construction to its3.original condition.

Certified Survey: On completion of foundation walls, major site improvements, and other work requiringD.field-engineering services, prepare a certified survey showing dimensions, locations, angles, andelevations of construction and sitework.Final Property Survey: Engage a land surveyor to prepare a final property survey showing significantE.features (real property) for Project. Include on the survey a certification, signed by land surveyor, thatprincipal metes, bounds, lines, and levels of Project are accurately positioned as shown on the survey.

Show boundary lines, monuments, streets, site improvements and utilities, existing improvements1.and significant vegetation, adjoining properties, acreage, grade contours, and the distance andbearing from a site corner to a legal point.Recording: At Substantial Completion, have the final property survey recorded by or with2.authorities having jurisdiction as the official "property survey."

INSTALLATION3.5General: Locate the Work and components of the Work accurately, in correct alignment and elevation, asA.indicated.

Make vertical work plumb and make horizontal work level.1.Where space is limited, install components to maximize space available for maintenance and ease2.of removal for replacement.Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated.3.Maintain minimum headroom clearance of 96 inches in occupied spaces and 90 inches in4.unoccupied spaces.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions and recommendations for installing products inB.applications indicated.Install products at the time and under conditions that will ensure the best possible results. MaintainC.conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.Conduct construction operations so no part of the Work is subjected to damaging operations or loading inD.excess of that expected during normal conditions of occupancy.Sequence the Work and allow adequate clearances to accommodate movement of construction items onE.site and placement in permanent locations.Tools and Equipment: Do not use tools or equipment that produce harmful noise levels.F.Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for work specified to be factoryG.prepared and field installed. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions aremade for locating and installing products to comply with indicated requirements.Attachment: Provide blocking and attachment plates and anchors and fasteners of adequate size andH.number to securely anchor each component in place, accurately located and aligned with other portions ofthe Work. Where size and type of attachments are not indicated, verify size and type required for loadconditions.

Mounting Heights: Where mounting heights are not indicated, mount components at heights1.directed by Architect.Allow for building movement, including thermal expansion and contraction.2.Coordinate installation of anchorages. Furnish setting drawings, templates, and directions for3.installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items with integralanchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliver such items to Project site in timefor installation.

Joints: Make joints of uniform width. Where joint locations in exposed work are not indicated, arrangeI.joints for the best visual effect. Fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints.Hazardous Materials: Use products, cleaners, and installation materials that are not consideredJ.hazardous.

CUTTING AND PATCHING3.6Cutting and Patching, General: Employ skilled workers to perform cutting and patching. Proceed withA.cutting and patching at the earliest feasible time, and complete without delay.

Cut in-place construction to provide for installation of other components or performance of other1.construction, and subsequently patch as required to restore surfaces to their original condition.

Existing Warranties: Remove, replace, patch, and repair materials and surfaces cut or damaged duringB.installation or cutting and patching operations, by methods and with materials so as not to void existingwarranties.Temporary Support: Provide temporary support of work to be cut.C.




Protection: Protect in-place construction during cutting and patching to prevent damage. ProvideD.protection from adverse weather conditions for portions of Project that might be exposed during cuttingand patching operations.Adjacent Occupied Areas: Where interference with use of adjoining areas or interruption of free passageE.to adjoining areas is unavoidable, coordinate cutting and patching according to requirements in Section011000 "Summary."Existing Utility Services and Mechanical/Electrical Systems: Where existing services/systems are requiredF.to be removed, relocated, or abandoned, bypass such services/systems before cutting to minimizeinterruption to occupied areas.Cutting: Cut in-place construction by sawing, drilling, breaking, chipping, grinding, and similar operations,G.including excavation, using methods least likely to damage elements retained or adjoining construction. Ifpossible, review proposed procedures with original Installer; comply with original Installer's writtenrecommendations.

In general, use hand or small power tools designed for sawing and grinding, not hammering and1.chopping. Cut holes and slots neatly to minimum size required, and with minimum disturbance ofadjacent surfaces. Temporarily cover openings when not in use.Finished Surfaces: Cut or drill from the exposed or finished side into concealed surfaces.2.Concrete and Masonry: Cut using a cutting machine, such as an abrasive saw or a diamond-core3.drill.Excavating and Backfilling: Comply with requirements in applicable Sections where required by4.cutting and patching operations.Mechanical and Electrical Services: Cut off pipe or conduit in walls or partitions to be removed.5.Cap, valve, or plug and seal remaining portion of pipe or conduit to prevent entrance of moisture orother foreign matter after cutting.Proceed with patching after construction operations requiring cutting are complete.6.

Patching: Patch construction by filling, repairing, refinishing, closing up, and similar operations followingH.performance of other work. Patch with durable seams that are as invisible as practicable. Providematerials and comply with installation requirements specified in other Sections, where applicable.

Inspection: Where feasible, test and inspect patched areas after completion to demonstrate1.physical integrity of installation.Exposed Finishes: Restore exposed finishes of patched areas and extend finish restoration into2.retained adjoining construction in a manner that will minimize evidence of patching and refinishing.

Clean piping, conduit, and similar features before applying paint or other finishing materials.a.Restore damaged pipe covering to its original condition.b.

Floors and Walls: Where walls or partitions that are removed extend one finished area into3.another, patch and repair floor and wall surfaces in the new space. Provide an even surface ofuniform finish, color, texture, and appearance. Remove in-place floor and wall coverings andreplace with new materials, if necessary, to achieve uniform color and appearance.

Where patching occurs in a painted surface, prepare substrate and apply primer anda.intermediate paint coats appropriate for substrate over the patch, and apply final paint coatover entire unbroken surface containing the patch. Provide additional coats until patchblends with adjacent surfaces.

Ceilings: Patch, repair, or rehang in-place ceilings as necessary to provide an even-plane surface4.of uniform appearance.Exterior Building Enclosure: Patch components in a manner that restores enclosure to a5.weathertight condition and ensures thermal and moisture integrity of building enclosure.

Cleaning: Clean areas and spaces where cutting and patching are performed. Remove paint, mortar, oils,I.putty, and similar materials from adjacent finished surfaces.

OWNER-INSTALLED PRODUCTS3.7Site Access: Provide access to Project site for Owner's construction personnel.A.Coordination: Coordinate construction and operations of the Work with work performed by Owner'sB.construction personnel.

Construction Schedule: Inform Owner of Contractor's preferred construction schedule for Owner's1.portion of the Work. Adjust construction schedule based on a mutually agreeable timetable. NotifyOwner if changes to schedule are required due to differences in actual construction progress.Preinstallation Conferences: Include Owner's construction personnel at preinstallation conferences2.covering portions of the Work that are to receive Owner's work. Attend preinstallation conferencesconducted by Owner's construction personnel if portions of the Work depend on Owner'sconstruction.




PROGRESS CLEANING3.8General: Clean Project site and work areas daily, including common areas. Enforce requirements strictly.A.Dispose of materials lawfully.

Comply with requirements in NFPA 241 for removal of combustible waste materials and debris.1.Do not hold waste materials more than seven days during normal weather or three days if the2.temperature is expected to rise above 80 deg F.Containerize hazardous and unsanitary waste materials separately from other waste. Mark3.containers appropriately and dispose of legally, according to regulations.

Use containers intended for holding waste materials of type to be stored.a.Coordinate progress cleaning for joint-use areas where Contractor and other contractors are4.working concurrently.

Site: Maintain Project site free of waste materials and debris.B.Work Areas: Clean areas where work is in progress to the level of cleanliness necessary for properC.execution of the Work.

Remove liquid spills promptly.1.Where dust would impair proper execution of the Work, broom-clean or vacuum the entire work2.area, as appropriate.

Installed Work: Keep installed work clean. Clean installed surfaces according to written instructions ofD.manufacturer or fabricator of product installed, using only cleaning materials specifically recommended. Ifspecific cleaning materials are not recommended, use cleaning materials that are not hazardous to healthor property and that will not damage exposed surfaces.Concealed Spaces: Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing the space.E.Exposed Surfaces in Finished Areas: Clean exposed surfaces and protect as necessary to ensureF.freedom from damage and deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.During handling and installation, clean and protect construction in progress and adjoining materials alreadyG.in place. Apply protective covering where required to ensure protection from damage or deterioration atSubstantial Completion.Clean and provide maintenance on completed construction as frequently as necessary through theH.remainder of the construction period. Adjust and lubricate operable components to ensure operabilitywithout damaging effects.Limiting Exposures: Supervise construction operations to assure that no part of the construction,I.completed or in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious exposureduring the construction period.

STARTING AND ADJUSTING3.9Start equipment and operating components to confirm proper operation. Remove malfunctioning units,A.replace with new units, and retest.Adjust equipment for proper operation. Adjust operating components for proper operation without binding.B.Test each piece of equipment to verify proper operation. Test and adjust controls and safeties. ReplaceC.damaged and malfunctioning controls and equipment.Manufacturer's Field Service: Comply with qualification requirements in Section 014000 "QualityD.Requirements."

PROTECTION OF INSTALLED CONSTRUCTION3.10Provide final protection and maintain conditions that ensure installed Work is without damage orA.deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for temperature and relative humidity.B.





SECTION 017419 - CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements by the California Green Buildings StandardsA.Code for the following:

Salvaging nonhazardous construction waste.1.Recycling nonhazardous construction waste.2.Disposing of nonhazardous construction waste.3.

DEFINITIONS1.3Construction Waste: Building and site improvement materials and other solid waste resulting fromA.construction, remodeling, renovation, or repair operations. Construction waste includes packaging.Demolition Waste: Building and site improvement materials resulting from demolition or selectiveB.demolition operations.Disposal: Removal off-site of demolition and construction waste and subsequent sale, recycling, reuse, orC.deposit in landfill or incinerator acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.Recycle: Recovery of demolition or construction waste for subsequent processing in preparation for reuse.D.Salvage: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent sale or reuse in another facility.E.Salvage and Reuse: Recovery of demolition or construction waste and subsequent incorporation into theF.Work.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS1.4General: Achieve end-of-Project rates for salvage/recycling of 75 percent by weight of totalA.non-hazardous solid waste generated by the Work. Practice efficient waste management in the use ofmaterials in the course of the Work. Use all reasonable means to divert construction and demolition wastefrom landfills and incinerators. Facilitate recycling and salvage of materials, including the following:

Demolition Waste:1.Asphalt paving.a.Concrete.b.Concrete reinforcing steel.c.Brick.d.Concrete masonry units.e.Wood studs.f.Wood joists.g.Plywood and oriented strand board.h.Wood paneling.i.Wood trim.j.Structural and miscellaneous steel.k.Rough hardware.l.Roofing.m.Insulation.n.Doors and frames.o.Door hardware.p.Windows.q.Glazing.r.Metal studs.s.Gypsum board.t.Acoustical tile and panels.u.Carpet.v.Carpet pad.w.Equipment.x.Cabinets.y.Plumbing fixtures.z.


CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT AND DISPOSAL 017419 - 1


Piping.aa.Supports and hangers.bb.Valves.cc.Sprinklers.dd.Mechanical equipment.ee.Refrigerants.ff.Electrical conduit.gg.Copper wiring.hh.Lighting fixtures.ii.Lamps.jj.Ballasts.kk.Electrical devices.ll.Switchgear and panelboards.mm.Transformers.nn.

Construction Waste:2.Masonry and CMU.a.Lumber.b.Wood sheet materials.c.Wood trim.d.Metals.e.Roofing.f.Insulation.g.Carpet and pad.h.Gypsum board.i.Piping.j.Electrical conduit.k.Packaging: Regardless of salvage/recycle goal indicated in "General" Paragraph above,l.salvage or recycle 100 percent of the following uncontaminated packaging materials:

Paper.1)Cardboard.2)Boxes.3)Plastic sheet and film.4)Polystyrene packaging.5)Wood crates.6)Plastic pails.7)

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.5Waste Management Plan: Submit plan within 30 days of date established for commencement of the Work.A.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.6Waste Reduction Progress Reports: Concurrent with each Application for Payment, submit report.A.Include the following information:

Material category.1.Generation point of waste.2.Total quantity of waste in tons.3.Quantity of waste salvaged, both estimated and actual in tons.4.Quantity of waste recycled, both estimated and actual in tons.5.Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) in tons.6.Total quantity of waste recovered (salvaged plus recycled) as a percentage of total waste.7.

Waste Reduction Calculations: Before request for Substantial Completion, submit calculatedB.end-of-Project rates for salvage, recycling, and disposal as a percentage of total waste generated by theWork.Recycling and Processing Facility Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of recyclable waste byC.recycling and processing facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, andinvoices.Landfill and Incinerator Disposal Records: Indicate receipt and acceptance of waste by landfills andD.incinerator facilities licensed to accept them. Include manifests, weight tickets, receipts, and invoices.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.7Regulatory Requirements: Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities having jurisdiction.A.




Waste Management Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements inB.Section 013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related towaste management including, but not limited to, the following:

Review and discuss waste management plan including responsibilities of waste management1.coordinator.Review requirements for documenting quantities of each type of waste and its disposition.2.Review and finalize procedures for materials separation and verify availability of containers and3.bins needed to avoid delays.Review procedures for periodic waste collection and transportation to recycling and disposal4.facilities.Review waste management requirements for each trade.5.

WASTE MANAGEMENT PLAN1.8General: Develop a waste management plan according to ASTM E 1609 and requirements in this Section.A.Plan shall consist of waste identification, waste reduction work plan, and cost/revenue analysis. Indicatequantities by weight or volume, but use same units of measure throughout waste management plan.Waste Identification: Indicate anticipated types and quantities of construction waste generated by theB.Work. Use attached form or comparable generated by Contractor. Include estimated quantities andassumptions for estimates.Waste Reduction Work Plan: List each type of waste and whether it will be salvaged, recycled, orC.disposed of in landfill or incinerator. Include points of waste generation, total quantity of each type ofwaste, quantity for each means of recovery, and handling and transportation procedures.

Salvaged Materials for Reuse: For materials that will be salvaged and reused in this Project,1.describe methods for preparing salvaged materials before incorporation into the Work.Salvaged Materials for Sale: For materials that will be sold to individuals and organizations, include2.list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.Salvaged Materials for Donation: For materials that will be donated to individuals and3.organizations, include list of their names, addresses, and telephone numbers.Recycled Materials: Include list of local receivers and processors and type of recycled materials4.each will accept. Include names, addresses, and telephone numbers.Disposed Materials: Indicate how and where materials will be disposed of. Include name, address,5.and telephone number of each landfill and incinerator facility.Handling and Transportation Procedures: Include method that will be used for separating6.recyclable waste including sizes of containers, container labeling, and designated location wherematerials separation will be performed.

Cost/Revenue Analysis: Indicate total cost of waste disposal as if there was no waste management planD.and net additional cost or net savings resulting from implementing waste management plan.


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PLAN IMPLEMENTATION3.1General: Implement approved waste management plan. Provide handling, containers, storage, signage,A.transportation, and other items as required to implement waste management plan during the entireduration of the Contract.

Comply with operation, termination, and removal requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary1.Facilities and Controls."

Training: Train workers, subcontractors, and suppliers on proper waste management procedures, asB.appropriate for the Work.

Distribute waste management plan to everyone concerned within three days of submittal return.1.Distribute waste management plan to entities when they first begin work on-site. Review plan2.procedures and locations established for salvage, recycling, and disposal.

Site Access and Temporary Controls: Conduct waste management operations to ensure minimumC.interference with roads, streets, walks, walkways, and other adjacent occupied and used facilities.

Designate and label specific areas on Project site necessary for separating materials that are to be1.salvaged, recycled, reused, donated, and sold.Comply with Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities and Controls" for controlling dust and dirt,2.environmental protection, and noise control.




RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE, GENERAL3.2General: Recycle paper and beverage containers used by on-site workers.A.Recycling Incentives: Revenues, savings, rebates, tax credits, and other incentives received for recyclingB.waste materials shall accrue to Contractor.Preparation of Waste: Prepare and maintain recyclable waste materials according to recycling or reuseC.facility requirements. Maintain materials free of dirt, adhesives, solvents, petroleum contamination, andother substances deleterious to the recycling process.Procedures: Separate recyclable waste from other waste materials, trash, and debris. SeparateD.recyclable waste by type at Project site to the maximum extent practical according to approvedconstruction waste management plan.

Provide appropriately marked containers or bins for controlling recyclable waste until removed from1.Project site. Include list of acceptable and unacceptable materials at each container and bin.

Inspect containers and bins for contamination and remove contaminated materials if found.a.Stockpile processed materials on-site without intermixing with other materials. Place, grade, and2.shape stockpiles to drain surface water. Cover to prevent windblown dust.Stockpile materials away from construction area. Do not store within drip line of remaining trees.3.Store components off the ground and protect from the weather.4.Remove recyclable waste from Owner's property and transport to recycling receiver or processor.5.

RECYCLING CONSTRUCTION WASTE3.3Packaging:A.

Cardboard and Boxes: Break down packaging into flat sheets. Bundle and store in a dry location.1.Polystyrene Packaging: Separate and bag materials.2.Pallets: As much as possible, require deliveries using pallets to remove pallets from Project site.3.For pallets that remain on-site, break down pallets into component wood pieces and comply withrequirements for recycling wood.Crates: Break down crates into component wood pieces and comply with requirements for4.recycling wood.

Wood Materials:B.Clean Cut-Offs of Lumber: Grind or chip into small pieces.1.Clean Sawdust: Bag sawdust that does not contain painted or treated wood.2.

Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean sawdust as organica.mulch.

Gypsum Board: Stack large clean pieces on wood pallets or in container and store in a dry location.C.Clean Gypsum Board: Grind scraps of clean gypsum board using small mobile chipper or hammer1.mill. Screen out paper after grinding.

Comply with requirements in Section 329300 "Plants" for use of clean ground gypsum boarda.as inorganic soil amendment.

DISPOSAL OF WASTE3.4General: Except for items or materials to be salvaged, recycled, or otherwise reused, remove wasteA.materials from Project site and legally dispose of them in a landfill or incinerator acceptable to authoritieshaving jurisdiction.

Except as otherwise specified, do not allow waste materials that are to be disposed of accumulate1.on-site.Remove and transport debris in a manner that will prevent spillage on adjacent surfaces and areas.2.

Burning: Do not burn waste materials.B.Burning: Burning of waste materials is permitted only at designated areas on Owner's property, providedC.required permits are obtained. Provide full-time monitoring for burning materials until fires areextinguished.Disposal: Remove waste materials and dispose of at designated spoil areas on Owner's property.D.Disposal: Remove waste materials from Owner's property and legally dispose of them.E.





SECTION 017700 - CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for contract closeout, including, but notA.limited to, the following:

Substantial Completion procedures.1.Final completion procedures.2.Warranties.3.Final cleaning.4.Repair of the Work.5.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For cleaning agents.A.Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Initial submittal at Substantial Completion.B.Certified List of Incomplete Items: Final submittal at Final Completion.C.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.4Certificates of Release: From authorities having jurisdiction.A.Certificate of Insurance: For continuing coverage.B.Field Report: For pest control inspection.C.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.5Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: For maintenance material submittal items specified in otherA.Sections.

SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES1.6Contractor's List of Incomplete Items: Prepare and submit a list of items to be completed and correctedA.(Contractor's punch list), indicating the value of each item on the list and reasons why the Work isincomplete.Submittals Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior toB.requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incompleteat time of request.

Certificates of Release: Obtain and submit releases from authorities having jurisdiction permitting1.Owner unrestricted use of the Work and access to services and utilities. Include occupancypermits, operating certificates, and similar releases.Submit closeout submittals specified in other Division 01 Sections, including project record2.documents, operation and maintenance manuals, final completion construction photographicdocumentation, damage or settlement surveys, property surveys, and similar final recordinformation.Submit closeout submittals specified in individual Sections, including specific warranties,3.workmanship bonds, maintenance service agreements, final certifications, and similar documents.Submit maintenance material submittals specified in individual Sections, including tools, spare4.parts, extra materials, and similar items, and deliver to location designated by . Label withmanufacturer's name and model number where applicable.

Schedule of Maintenance Material Items: Prepare and submit schedule of maintenancea.material submittal items, including name and quantity of each item and name and number ofrelated Specification Section. Obtain signature for receipt of submittals.

Submit test/adjust/balance records.5.Submit changeover information related to Owner's occupancy, use, operation, and maintenance.6.

Procedures Prior to Substantial Completion: Complete the following a minimum of 10 days prior toC.requesting inspection for determining date of Substantial Completion. List items below that are incompleteat time of request.

Advise Owner of pending insurance changeover requirements.1.


CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES 017700 - 1


Make final changeover of permanent locks and deliver keys to Owner. Advise Owner's personnel2.of changeover in security provisions.Complete startup and testing of systems and equipment.3.Perform preventive maintenance on equipment used prior to Substantial Completion.4.Instruct Owner's personnel in operation, adjustment, and maintenance of products, equipment, and5.systems. Submit demonstration and training video recordings specified in Section 017900"Demonstration and Training."Advise Owner of changeover in heat and other utilities.6.Participate with Owner in conducting inspection and walkthrough with local emergency responders.7.Terminate and remove temporary facilities from Project site, along with mockups, construction8.tools, and similar elements.Complete final cleaning requirements, including touchup painting.9.Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred exposed finishes to eliminate visual defects.10.

Inspection: Submit a written request for inspection to determine Substantial Completion a minimum ofD.days prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt ofrequest, Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements.Architect will prepare the Certificate of Substantial Completion after inspection or will notify Contractor ofitems, either on Contractor's list or additional items identified by Architect, that must be completed orcorrected before certificate will be issued.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as1.incomplete is completed or corrected.Results of completed inspection will form the basis of requirements for final completion.2.

FINAL COMPLETION PROCEDURES1.7Submittals Prior to Final Completion: Before requesting final inspection for determining final completion,A.complete the following:

Submit a final Application for Payment according to Section 012900 "Payment Procedures."1.Certified List of Incomplete Items: Submit certified copy of Architect's Substantial Completion2.inspection list of items to be completed or corrected (punch list), endorsed and dated by Architect.Certified copy of the list shall state that each item has been completed or otherwise resolved foracceptance.Certificate of Insurance: Submit evidence of final, continuing insurance coverage complying with3.insurance requirements.Submit pest-control final inspection report.4.

Inspection: Submit a written request for final inspection to determine acceptance a minimum of 10 daysB.prior to date the work will be completed and ready for final inspection and tests. On receipt of request,Architect will either proceed with inspection or notify Contractor of unfulfilled requirements. Architect willprepare a final Certificate for Payment after inspection or will notify Contractor of construction that must becompleted or corrected before certificate will be issued.

Reinspection: Request reinspection when the Work identified in previous inspections as1.incomplete is completed or corrected.

LIST OF INCOMPLETE ITEMS (PUNCH LIST)1.8Organization of List: Include name and identification of each space and area affected by constructionA.operations for incomplete items and items needing correction including, if necessary, areas disturbed byContractor that are outside the limits of construction.

Organize list of spaces in sequential order, starting with exterior areas first and proceeding from1.lowest floor to highest floor.Organize items applying to each space by major element, including categories for ceiling, individual2.walls, floors, equipment, and building systems.Include the following information at the top of each page:3.

Project name.a.Date.b.Name of Architect.c.Name of Contractor.d.Page number.e.

Submit list of incomplete items in the following format:4.MS Excel electronic file. Architect will return annotated file.a.




SUBMITTAL OF PROJECT WARRANTIES1.9Time of Submittal: Submit written warranties on request of Architect for designated portions of the WorkA.where commencement of warranties other than date of Substantial Completion is indicated, or when delayin submittal of warranties might limit Owner's rights under warranty.Organize warranty documents into an orderly sequence based on the table of contents of Project Manual.B.

Bind warranties and bonds in heavy-duty, three-ring, vinyl-covered, loose-leaf binders, thickness as1.necessary to accommodate contents, and sized to receive 8-1/2-by-11-inch paper.Provide heavy paper dividers with plastic-covered tabs for each separate warranty. Mark tab to2.identify the product or installation. Provide a typed description of the product or installation,including the name of the product and the name, address, and telephone number of Installer.Identify each binder on the front and spine with the typed or printed title "WARRANTIES," Project3.name, and name of Contractor.Warranty Electronic File: Scan warranties and bonds and assemble complete warranty and bond4.submittal package into a single indexed electronic PDF file with links enabling navigation to eachitem. Provide bookmarked table of contents at beginning of document.

Provide additional copies of each warranty to include in operation and maintenance manuals.C.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1Cleaning Agents: Use cleaning materials and agents recommended by manufacturer or fabricator of theA.surface to be cleaned. Do not use cleaning agents that are potentially hazardous to health or property orthat might damage finished surfaces.

Use cleaning products that comply with Green Seal's GS-37, or if GS-37 is not applicable, use1.products that comply with the California Code of Regulations maximum allowable VOC levels.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

FINAL CLEANING3.1General: Perform final cleaning. Conduct cleaning and waste-removal operations to comply with localA.laws and ordinances and Federal and local environmental and antipollution regulations.Cleaning: Employ experienced workers or professional cleaners for final cleaning. Clean each surface orB.unit to condition expected in an average commercial building cleaning and maintenance program. Complywith manufacturer's written instructions.

Complete the following cleaning operations before requesting inspection for certification of1.Substantial Completion for entire Project or for a designated portion of Project:

Clean Project site, yard, and grounds, in areas disturbed by construction activities, includinga.landscape development areas, of rubbish, waste material, litter, and other foreignsubstances.Sweep paved areas broom clean. Remove petrochemical spills, stains, and other foreignb.deposits.Rake grounds that are neither planted nor paved to a smooth, even-textured surface.c.Remove tools, construction equipment, machinery, and surplus material from Project site.d.Remove snow and ice to provide safe access to building.e.Clean exposed exterior and interior hard-surfaced finishes to a dirt-free condition, free off.stains, films, and similar foreign substances. Avoid disturbing natural weathering of exteriorsurfaces. Restore reflective surfaces to their original condition.Remove debris and surface dust from limited access spaces, including roofs, plenums,g.shafts, trenches, equipment vaults, manholes, attics, and similar spaces.Sweep concrete floors broom clean in unoccupied spaces.h.Vacuum carpet and similar soft surfaces, removing debris and excess nap; clean accordingi.to manufacturer's recommendations if visible soil or stains remain.Clean transparent materials, including mirrors and glass in doors and windows. Removej.glazing compounds and other noticeable, vision-obscuring materials. Polish mirrors andglass, taking care not to scratch surfaces.Remove labels that are not permanent.k.Wipe surfaces of mechanical and electrical equipment and similar equipment. Removel.excess lubrication, paint and mortar droppings, and other foreign substances.Clean plumbing fixtures to a sanitary condition, free of stains, including stains resulting fromm.water exposure.




Replace disposable air filters and clean permanent air filters. Clean exposed surfaces ofn.diffusers, registers, and grills.Clean ducts, blowers, and coils if units were operated without filters during construction oro.that display contamination with particulate matter on inspection.

Clean HVAC system in compliance with NADCA Standard 1992-01. Provide written1)report on completion of cleaning.

Clean light fixtures, lamps, globes, and reflectors to function with full efficiency.p.Leave Project clean and ready for occupancy.q.

Pest Control: Comply with pest control requirements in Section 015000 "Temporary Facilities andC.Controls." Prepare written report.

REPAIR OF THE WORK3.2Complete repair and restoration operations before requesting inspection for determination of SubstantialA.Completion.Repair or remove and replace defective construction. Repairing includes replacing defective parts,B.refinishing damaged surfaces, touching up with matching materials, and properly adjusting operatingequipment. Where damaged or worn items cannot be repaired or restored, provide replacements.Remove and replace operating components that cannot be repaired. Restore damaged construction andpermanent facilities used during construction to specified condition.

Remove and replace chipped, scratched, and broken glass, reflective surfaces, and other damaged1.transparent materials.Touch up and otherwise repair and restore marred or exposed finishes and surfaces. Replace2.finishes and surfaces that that already show evidence of repair or restoration.

Do not paint over "UL" and other required labels and identification, including mechanical anda.electrical nameplates. Remove paint applied to required labels and identification.

Replace parts subject to operating conditions during construction that may impede operation or3.reduce longevity.Replace burned-out bulbs, bulbs noticeably dimmed by hours of use, and defective and noisy4.starters in fluorescent and mercury vapor fixtures to comply with requirements for new fixtures.





SECTION 017823 - OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for preparing operation and maintenanceA.manuals, including the following:

Operation and maintenance documentation directory.1.Emergency manuals.2.Operation manuals for systems, subsystems, and equipment.3.Product maintenance manuals.4.Systems and equipment maintenance manuals.5.

DEFINITIONS1.3System: An organized collection of parts, equipment, or subsystems united by regular interaction.A.Subsystem: A portion of a system with characteristics similar to a system.B.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.4Manual Content: Operations and maintenance manual content is specified in individual SpecificationA.Sections to be reviewed at the time of Section submittals. Submit reviewed manual content formatted andorganized as required by this Section.

Architect will comment on whether content of operations and maintenance submittals are1.acceptable.Where applicable, clarify and update reviewed manual content to correspond to revisions and field2.conditions.

Format: Submit operations and maintenance manuals in the following format:B.PDF electronic file. Assemble each manual into a composite electronically indexed file. Submit on1.digital media acceptable to Architect.

Name each indexed document file in composite electronic index with applicable item name.a.Include a complete electronically linked operation and maintenance directory.Enable inserted reviewer comments on draft submittals.b.

Initial Manual Submittal: Submit draft copy of each manual at least 30 days before commencingC.demonstration and training. Architect will comment on whether general scope and content of manual areacceptable.Final Manual Submittal: Submit each manual in final form prior to requesting inspection for SubstantialD.Completion and at least 15 days before commencing demonstration and training. Architect will return copywith comments.

Correct or revise each manual to comply with Architect's comments. Submit copies of each1.corrected manual within 15 days of receipt of Architect's comments and prior to commencingdemonstration and training.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DOCUMENTATION DIRECTORY2.1Directory: Prepare a single, comprehensive directory of emergency, operation, and maintenance data andA.materials, listing items and their location to facilitate ready access to desired information. Include a sectionin the directory for each of the following:

List of documents.1.List of systems.2.List of equipment.3.


OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA 017823 - 1


Table of contents.4.List of Systems and Subsystems: List systems alphabetically. Include references to operation andB.maintenance manuals that contain information about each system.List of Equipment: List equipment for each system, organized alphabetically by system. For pieces ofC.equipment not part of system, list alphabetically in separate list.Tables of Contents: Include a table of contents for each emergency, operation, and maintenance manual.D.Identification: In the documentation directory and in each operation and maintenance manual, identifyE.each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment with same designation used in the Contract Documents.If no designation exists, assign a designation according to ASHRAE Guideline 4, "Preparation of Operatingand Maintenance Documentation for Building Systems."

REQUIREMENTS FOR EMERGENCY, OPERATION, AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS2.2Organization: Unless otherwise indicated, organize each manual into a separate section for each systemA.and subsystem, and a separate section for each piece of equipment not part of a system. Each manualshall contain the following materials, in the order listed:

Title page.1.Table of contents.2.Manual contents.3.

Title Page: Include the following information:B.Subject matter included in manual.1.Name and address of Project.2.Name and address of Owner.3.Date of submittal.4.Name and contact information for Contractor.5.Name and contact information for Architect.6.Names and contact information for major consultants to the Architect that designed the systems7.contained in the manuals.Cross-reference to related systems in other operation and maintenance manuals.8.

Table of Contents: List each product included in manual, identified by product name, indexed to theC.content of the volume, and cross-referenced to Specification Section number in Project Manual.

If operation or maintenance documentation requires more than one volume to accommodate data,1.include comprehensive table of contents for all volumes in each volume of the set.

Manual Contents: Organize into sets of manageable size. Arrange contents alphabetically by system,D.subsystem, and equipment. If possible, assemble instructions for subsystems, equipment, andcomponents of one system into a single binder.Manuals, Electronic Files: Submit manuals in the form of a multiple file composite electronic PDF file forE.each manual type required.

Electronic Files: Use electronic files prepared by manufacturer where available. Where scanning1.of paper documents is required, configure scanned file for minimum readable file size.File Names and Bookmarks: Enable bookmarking of individual documents based on file names.2.Name document files to correspond to system, subsystem, and equipment names used in manualdirectory and table of contents. Group documents for each system and subsystem into individualcomposite bookmarked files, then create composite manual, so that resulting bookmarks reflect thesystem, subsystem, and equipment names in a readily navigated file tree. Configure electronicmanual to display bookmark panel on opening file.

EMERGENCY MANUALS2.3Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each of the following:A.

Type of emergency.1.Emergency instructions.2.Emergency procedures.3.

Type of Emergency: Where applicable for each type of emergency indicated below, include instructionsB.and procedures for each system, subsystem, piece of equipment, and component:

Fire.1.Flood.2.Gas leak.3.




Water leak.4.Power failure.5.Water outage.6.System, subsystem, or equipment failure.7.Chemical release or spill.8.

Emergency Instructions: Describe and explain warnings, trouble indications, error messages, and similarC.codes and signals. Include responsibilities of Owner's operating personnel for notification of Installer,supplier, and manufacturer to maintain warranties.Emergency Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:D.

Instructions on stopping.1.Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.2.Operating instructions for conditions outside normal operating limits.3.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.4.Special operating instructions and procedures.5.

OPERATION MANUALS2.4Content: In addition to requirements in this Section, include operation data required in individualA.Specification Sections and the following information:

System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions. Use designations for systems and equipment1.indicated on Contract Documents.Performance and design criteria if Contractor has delegated design responsibility.2.Operating standards.3.Operating procedures.4.Operating logs.5.Wiring diagrams.6.Control diagrams.7.Piped system diagrams.8.Precautions against improper use.9.License requirements including inspection and renewal dates.10.

Descriptions: Include the following:B.

Product name and model number. Use designations for products indicated on Contract1.Documents.Manufacturer's name.2.Equipment identification with serial number of each component.3.Equipment function.4.Operating characteristics.5.Limiting conditions.6.Performance curves.7.Engineering data and tests.8.Complete nomenclature and number of replacement parts.9.

Operating Procedures: Include the following, as applicable:C.

Startup procedures.1.Equipment or system break-in procedures.2.Routine and normal operating instructions.3.Regulation and control procedures.4.Instructions on stopping.5.Normal shutdown instructions.6.Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.7.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.8.Special operating instructions and procedures.9.

Systems and Equipment Controls: Describe the sequence of operation, and diagram controls as installed.D.Piped Systems: Diagram piping as installed, and identify color-coding where required for identification.E.

PRODUCT MAINTENANCE MANUALS2.5Content: Organize manual into a separate section for each product, material, and finish. Include sourceA.information, product information, maintenance procedures, repair materials and sources, and warrantiesand bonds, as described below.




Source Information: List each product included in manual, identified by product name and arranged toB.match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address, and telephone number of Installeror supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-reference Specification Section number and title inProject Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifier where applicable.Product Information: Include the following, as applicable:C.

Product name and model number.1.Manufacturer's name.2.Color, pattern, and texture.3.Material and chemical composition.4.Reordering information for specially manufactured products.5.

Maintenance Procedures: Include manufacturer's written recommendations and the following:D.

Inspection procedures.1.Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.2.List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.3.Schedule for routine cleaning and maintenance.4.Repair instructions.5.

Repair Materials and Sources: Include lists of materials and local sources of materials and relatedE.services.Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditionsF.that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.1.

SYSTEMS AND EQUIPMENT MAINTENANCE MANUALS2.6Content: For each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system, include sourceA.information, manufacturers' maintenance documentation, maintenance procedures, maintenance andservice schedules, spare parts list and source information, maintenance service contracts, and warrantyand bond information, as described below.Source Information: List each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment included in manual, identifiedB.by product name and arranged to match manual's table of contents. For each product, list name, address,and telephone number of Installer or supplier and maintenance service agent, and cross-referenceSpecification Section number and title in Project Manual and drawing or schedule designation or identifierwhere applicable.Manufacturers' Maintenance Documentation: Manufacturers' maintenance documentation including theC.following information for each component part or piece of equipment:

Standard maintenance instructions and bulletins.1.Drawings, diagrams, and instructions required for maintenance, including disassembly and2.component removal, replacement, and assembly.Identification and nomenclature of parts and components.3.List of items recommended to be stocked as spare parts.4.

Maintenance Procedures: Include the following information and items that detail essential maintenanceD.procedures:

Test and inspection instructions.1.Troubleshooting guide.2.Precautions against improper maintenance.3.Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.4.Aligning, adjusting, and checking instructions.5.Demonstration and training video recording, if available.6.

Maintenance and Service Schedules: Include service and lubrication requirements, list of requiredE.lubricants for equipment, and separate schedules for preventive and routine maintenance and service withstandard time allotment.

Scheduled Maintenance and Service: Tabulate actions for daily, weekly, monthly, quarterly,1.semiannual, and annual frequencies.Maintenance and Service Record: Include manufacturers' forms for recording maintenance.2.




Spare Parts List and Source Information: Include lists of replacement and repair parts, with parts identifiedF.and cross-referenced to manufacturers' maintenance documentation and local sources of maintenancematerials and related services.Maintenance Service Contracts: Include copies of maintenance agreements with name and telephoneG.number of service agent.Warranties and Bonds: Include copies of warranties and bonds and lists of circumstances and conditionsH.that would affect validity of warranties or bonds.

Include procedures to follow and required notifications for warranty claims.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

MANUAL PREPARATION3.1Operation and Maintenance Documentation Directory: Prepare a separate manual that provides anA.organized reference to emergency, operation, and maintenance manuals.Emergency Manual: Assemble a complete set of emergency information indicating procedures for use byB.emergency personnel and by Owner's operating personnel for types of emergencies indicated.Product Maintenance Manual: Assemble a complete set of maintenance data indicating care andC.maintenance of each product, material, and finish incorporated into the Work.Operation and Maintenance Manuals: Assemble a complete set of operation and maintenance dataD.indicating operation and maintenance of each system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of asystem.

Engage a factory-authorized service representative to assemble and prepare information for each1.system, subsystem, and piece of equipment not part of a system.Prepare a separate manual for each system and subsystem, in the form of an instructional manual2.for use by Owner's operating personnel.

Manufacturers' Data: Where manuals contain manufacturers' standard printed data, include only sheetsE.pertinent to product or component installed. Mark each sheet to identify each product or componentincorporated into the Work. If data include more than one item in a tabular format, identify each item usingappropriate references from the Contract Documents. Identify data applicable to the Work and deletereferences to information not applicable.

Prepare supplementary text if manufacturers' standard printed data are not available and where the1.information is necessary for proper operation and maintenance of equipment or systems.

Drawings: Prepare drawings supplementing manufacturers' printed data to illustrate the relationship ofF.component parts of equipment and systems and to illustrate control sequence and flow diagrams.Coordinate these drawings with information contained in record Drawings to ensure correct illustration ofcompleted installation.

Do not use original project record documents as part of operation and maintenance manuals.1.Comply with requirements of newly prepared record Drawings in Section 017839 "Project Record2.Documents."

Comply with Section 017700 "Closeout Procedures" for schedule for submitting operation andG.maintenance documentation.





SECTION 017839 - PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for project record documents, including theA.following:

Record Drawings.1.Record Specifications.2.Record Product Data.3.Miscellaneous record submittals.4.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.3Record Drawings: Comply with the following:A.

Number of Copies: Submit one set(s) of marked-up record prints.1.Record Specifications: Submit annotated PDF electronic files of Project's Specifications, includingB.addenda and contract modifications.Record Product Data: Submit annotated PDF electronic files and directories of each submittal.C.

Where record Product Data are required as part of operation and maintenance manuals, submit1.duplicate marked-up Product Data as a component of manual.

Miscellaneous Record Submittals: See other Specification Sections for miscellaneous record-keepingD.requirements and submittals in connection with various construction activities. Submit annotated PDFelectronic files and directories of each submittal.Reports: Submit written report weekly indicating items incorporated into project record documentsE.concurrent with progress of the Work, including revisions, concealed conditions, field changes, productselections, and other notations incorporated.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

RECORD DRAWINGS2.1Record Prints: Maintain one set of marked-up paper copies of the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings,A.incorporating new and revised drawings as modifications are issued.

Preparation: Mark record prints to show the actual installation where installation varies from that1.shown originally. Require individual or entity who obtained record data, whether individual or entityis Installer, subcontractor, or similar entity, to provide information for preparation of correspondingmarked-up record prints.

Give particular attention to information on concealed elements that would be difficult toa.identify or measure and record later.Accurately record information in an acceptable drawing technique.b.Record data as soon as possible after obtaining it.c.Record and check the markup before enclosing concealed installations.d.Cross-reference record prints to corresponding archive photographic documentation.e.

Content: Types of items requiring marking include, but are not limited to, the following:2.Dimensional changes to Drawings.a.Revisions to details shown on Drawings.b.Depths of foundations below first floor.c.Locations and depths of underground utilities.d.Revisions to routing of piping and conduits.e.Revisions to electrical circuitry.f.Actual equipment locations.g.Duct size and routing.h.Locations of concealed internal utilities.i.Changes made by Change Order or Construction Change Directive.j.Changes made following Architect's written orders.k.Details not on the original Contract Drawings.l.Field records for variable and concealed conditions.m.


PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS 017839 - 1


Record information on the Work that is shown only schematically.n.Mark the Contract Drawings and Shop Drawings completely and accurately. Use personnel3.proficient at recording graphic information in production of marked-up record prints.Mark record sets with erasable, red-colored pencil. Use other colors to distinguish between4.changes for different categories of the Work at same location.Mark important additional information that was either shown schematically or omitted from original5.Drawings.Note Construction Change Directive numbers, alternate numbers, Change Order numbers, and6.similar identification, where applicable.

Record Digital Data Files: Immediately before inspection for Certificate of Substantial Completion, reviewB.marked-up record prints with Architect. When authorized, prepare a full set of corrected digital data files ofthe Contract Drawings, as follows:

Format: Same digital data software program, version, and operating system as the original1.Contract Drawings.Incorporate changes and additional information previously marked on record prints. Delete,2.redraw, and add details and notations where applicable.Refer instances of uncertainty to Architect for resolution.3.Architect will furnish Contractor one set of digital data files of the Contract Drawings for use in4.recording information.

See Section 013300 "Submittal Procedures" for requirements related to use of Architect'sa.digital data files.Architect will provide data file layer information. Record markups in separate layers.b.

Newly Prepared Record Drawings: Prepare new Drawings instead of preparing record Drawings whereC.Architect determines that neither the original Contract Drawings nor Shop Drawings are suitable to showactual installation.

New Drawings may be required when a Change Order is issued as a result of accepting an1.alternate, substitution, or other modification.Consult Architect for proper scale and scope of detailing and notations required to record the actual2.physical installation and its relation to other construction. Integrate newly prepared recordDrawings into record Drawing sets; comply with procedures for formatting, organizing, copying,binding, and submitting.

Format: Identify and date each record Drawing; include the designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWING"D.in a prominent location.

Record Prints: Organize record prints and newly prepared record Drawings into manageable sets.1.Bind each set with durable paper cover sheets. Include identification on cover sheets.Record Digital Data Files: Organize digital data information into separate electronic files that2.correspond to each sheet of the Contract Drawings. Name each file with the sheet identification.Include identification in each digital data file.Identification: As follows:3.

Project name.a.Date.b.Designation "PROJECT RECORD DRAWINGS."c.Name of Architect.d.Name of Contractor.e.

RECORD SPECIFICATIONS2.2Preparation: Mark Specifications to indicate the actual product installation where installation varies fromA.that indicated in Specifications, addenda, and contract modifications.

Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be1.readily identified and recorded later.Mark copy with the proprietary name and model number of products, materials, and equipment2.furnished, including substitutions and product options selected.Record the name of manufacturer, supplier, Installer, and other information necessary to provide a3.record of selections made.For each principal product, indicate whether record Product Data has been submitted in operation4.and maintenance manuals instead of submitted as record Product Data.Note related Change Orders, record Product Data, and record Drawings where applicable.5.

Format: Submit record Specifications as annotated PDF electronic file.B.

RECORD PRODUCT DATA2.3Preparation: Mark Product Data to indicate the actual product installation where installation variesA.substantially from that indicated in Product Data submittal.




Give particular attention to information on concealed products and installations that cannot be1.readily identified and recorded later.Include significant changes in the product delivered to Project site and changes in manufacturer's2.written instructions for installation.Note related Change Orders, record Specifications, and record Drawings where applicable.3.

Format: Submit record Product Data as annotated PDF electronic file.B.Include record Product Data directory organized by Specification Section number and title,1.electronically linked to each item of record Product Data.

MISCELLANEOUS RECORD SUBMITTALS2.4Assemble miscellaneous records required by other Specification Sections for miscellaneous recordA.keeping and submittal in connection with actual performance of the Work. Bind or file miscellaneousrecords and identify each, ready for continued use and reference.Format: Submit miscellaneous record submittals as PDF electronic file.B.

Include miscellaneous record submittals directory organized by Specification Section number and1.title, electronically linked to each item of miscellaneous record submittals.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

RECORDING AND MAINTENANCE3.1Recording: Maintain one copy of each submittal during the construction period for project recordA.document purposes. Post changes and revisions to project record documents as they occur; do not waituntil end of Project.Maintenance of Record Documents and Samples: Store record documents and Samples in the field officeB.apart from the Contract Documents used for construction. Do not use project record documents forconstruction purposes. Maintain record documents in good order and in a clean, dry, legible condition,protected from deterioration and loss. Provide access to project record documents for Architect'sreference during normal working hours.





SECTION 017900 - DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes administrative and procedural requirements for instructing Owner's personnel, includingA.the following:

Demonstration of operation of systems, subsystems, and equipment.1.Training in operation and maintenance of systems, subsystems, and equipment.2.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.3Instruction Program: Submit outline of instructional program for demonstration and training, including a listA.of training modules and a schedule of proposed dates, times, length of instruction time, and instructors'names for each training module. Include learning objective and outline for each training module.

Indicate proposed training modules using manufacturer-produced demonstration and training video1.recordings for systems, equipment, and products in lieu of video recording of live instructionalmodule.

Qualification Data: For facilitator.B.Attendance Record: For each training module, submit list of participants and length of instruction time.C.Evaluations: For each participant and for each training module, submit results and documentation ofD.performance-based test.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Facilitator Qualifications: A firm or individual experienced in training or educating maintenance personnelA.in a training program similar in content and extent to that indicated for this Project, and whose work hasresulted in training or education with a record of successful learning performance.Instructor Qualifications: A factory-authorized service representative, complying with requirements inB.Section 014000 "Quality Requirements," experienced in operation and maintenance procedures andtraining.Preinstruction Conference: Conduct conference at Project site to comply with requirements in SectionC.013100 "Project Management and Coordination." Review methods and procedures related todemonstration and training including, but not limited to, the following:

Inspect and discuss locations and other facilities required for instruction.1.Review and finalize instruction schedule and verify availability of educational materials, instructors'2.personnel, audiovisual equipment, and facilities needed to avoid delays.Review required content of instruction.3.For instruction that must occur outside, review weather and forecasted weather conditions and4.procedures to follow if conditions are unfavorable.

COORDINATION1.5Coordinate instruction schedule with Owner's operations. Adjust schedule as required to minimizeA.disrupting Owner's operations and to ensure availability of Owner's personnel.Coordinate instructors, including providing notification of dates, times, length of instruction time, andB.course content.Coordinate content of training modules with content of approved emergency, operation, and maintenanceC.manuals. Do not submit instruction program until operation and maintenance data has been reviewed andapproved by Architect.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

INSTRUCTION PROGRAM2.1Program Structure: Develop an instruction program that includes individual training modules for eachA.system and for equipment not part of a system, as required by individual Specification Sections.Training Modules: Develop a learning objective and teaching outline for each module. Include aB.description of specific skills and knowledge that participant is expected to master. For each module,include instruction for the following as applicable to the system, equipment, or component:


DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING 017900 - 1


Basis of System Design, Operational Requirements, and Criteria: Include the following:1.System, subsystem, and equipment descriptions.a.Performance and design criteria if Contractor is delegated design responsibility.b.Operating standards.c.Regulatory requirements.d.Equipment function.e.Operating characteristics.f.Limiting conditions.g.Performance curves.h.

Documentation: Review the following items in detail:2.Emergency manuals.a.Operations manuals.b.Maintenance manuals.c.Project record documents.d.Identification systems.e.Warranties and bonds.f.Maintenance service agreements and similar continuing commitments.g.

Emergencies: Include the following, as applicable:3.Instructions on meaning of warnings, trouble indications, and error messages.a.Instructions on stopping.b.Shutdown instructions for each type of emergency.c.Operating instructions for conditions outside of normal operating limits.d.Sequences for electric or electronic systems.e.Special operating instructions and procedures.f.

Operations: Include the following, as applicable:4.Startup procedures.a.Equipment or system break-in procedures.b.Routine and normal operating instructions.c.Regulation and control procedures.d.Control sequences.e.Safety procedures.f.Instructions on stopping.g.Normal shutdown instructions.h.Operating procedures for emergencies.i.Operating procedures for system, subsystem, or equipment failure.j.Seasonal and weekend operating instructions.k.Required sequences for electric or electronic systems.l.Special operating instructions and procedures.m.

Adjustments: Include the following:5.Alignments.a.Checking adjustments.b.Noise and vibration adjustments.c.Economy and efficiency adjustments.d.

Troubleshooting: Include the following:6.Diagnostic instructions.a.Test and inspection procedures.b.

Maintenance: Include the following:7.Inspection procedures.a.Types of cleaning agents to be used and methods of cleaning.b.List of cleaning agents and methods of cleaning detrimental to product.c.Procedures for routine cleaningd.Procedures for preventive maintenance.e.Procedures for routine maintenance.f.Instruction on use of special tools.g.

Repairs: Include the following:8.Diagnosis instructions.a.Repair instructions.b.Disassembly; component removal, repair, and replacement; and reassembly instructions.c.Instructions for identifying parts and components.d.Review of spare parts needed for operation and maintenance.e.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1Assemble educational materials necessary for instruction, including documentation and training module.A.Assemble training modules into a training manual organized in coordination with requirements in Section017823 "Operation and Maintenance Data."Set up instructional equipment at instruction location.B.

INSTRUCTION3.2Facilitator: Engage a qualified facilitator to prepare instruction program and training modules, toA.coordinate instructors, and to coordinate between Contractor and Owner for number of participants,instruction times, and location.Engage qualified instructors to instruct Owner's personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain systems,B.subsystems, and equipment not part of a system.Scheduling: Provide instruction at mutually agreed on times. For equipment that requires seasonalC.operation, provide similar instruction at start of each season.

Schedule training with Owner with at least seven days' advance notice.1.Training Location and Reference Material: Conduct training on-site in the completed and fully operationalD.facility using the actual equipment in-place. Conduct training using final operation and maintenance datasubmittals.Evaluation: At conclusion of each training module, assess and document each participant's mastery ofE.module by use of a written performance-based test.Cleanup: Collect used and leftover educational materials and give to Owner. Remove instructionalF.equipment. Restore systems and equipment to condition existing before initial training use.





SECTION 018113.02 - SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes general requirements and procedures for compliance with California Green BuildingsA.Standards Code requirementsRelated Sections:B.

Divisions 01 through 33 Sections for requirements specific to the work of each of these Sections.1.Division 1 Section “Construction Waste Management.”2.Division 1Section “Indoor Air Quality during Construction.”3.

SUBMITTALS1.3Provide Waste management plan complying with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste ManagementA.and Disposal".

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

LOW-EMITTING MATERIALS2.1For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use adhesives and sealants that complyA.with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to South Coast Air QualityManagement District (SCAQMD), Rule No. 1168, effective date July 1, 2005 and rule amendment dateJanuary 7, 2005.

Reference California Green Buildings Standards Code for additional maximum VOC content1.requirements.See SCAQMD Rule 1168 effective July 1, 2005 and Green Seal Standards GS-11 and GS-03 for2.items not listed:

AdhesivesVOCLimit(g/L)

AdhesivesVOCLimit(g/L)

Carpet and Carpet Pad Adhesive 50Special Purpose Contact Adhesive(vinyl wallcovering, wood veneer,melamine)

250

Wood Floor Adhesive 100 Structural Glazing Adhesive 100Rubber Floor Adhesive 60 Multipurpose Construction Adhesive 70VCT Adhesive 50 Cove Base Adhesive 50Ceramic Tile Adhesive 65 Drywall and Panel Adhesive 50

Metal to Metal Adhesive 30Porous Material Adhesive (exceptwood)

50

Sealants Sealant Primer

Architectural Sealant (includesduct and plumbing sealant)

250 Architectural, non-porous 250

Architectural, porous 775

Paints Coatings

Flat Paints and Primers 50 Clear Wood Finishes 350Non-flat Paints and Primers 150 Concrete Curing Compound 350Anti-Corrosive/Anti-Rust Paint 250 Fire Retardant Coating- Pigmented 350Sealers and Undercoaters 200 Floor Coatings 100

Waterproofing Sealers 250Waterproofing Concrete, MasonrySealers

400


SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113.02 - 1


For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use aerosol adhesives that3.comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to Green Seal Standardfor Commercial Adhesives GS-36 effective October 19, 2000.

For field applications that are inside the weatherproofing system, use paints and coatingsa.that comply with the following limits for VOC content when calculated according to GreenSeal Standard GS-11, Paints, First Edition May 20, 1993, Green Seal Standard GC-03,Anti-Corrosive Paints Second Edition, January 7, 1997, and South Coast Air QualityManagement District (SCAQMD), Rule No. 1113, Architectural Coatings, in effect onJanuary 1, 2004Urea Formaldehyde Prohibition: Do not use composite wood or agrifiber products orb.adhesives that contain urea-formaldehyde resin.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

CONSTRUCTION WASTE MANAGEMENT3.1Comply with Division 01 Section "Construction Waste Management and Disposal."A.

CONSTRUCTION INDOOR-AIR-QUALITY MANAGEMENT3.2Comply with SMACNA's "SMACNA IAQ Guideline for Occupied Buildings under Construction."A.

If Owner authorizes use of permanent heating, cooling, and ventilating systems during construction1.period as specified in Division 01 Section "Temporary Facilities and Controls," install filter mediahaving a MERV 8 according to ASHRAE 52.2 at each return-air inlet for the air-handling systemused during construction.

END OF SECTION 018113.02


SUSTAINABLE DESIGN REQUIREMENTS 018113.02 - 2


SECTION 019113 - GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS

GENERALPART 1 -

RELATED DOCUMENTS1.1Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andA.other Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.OPR and BoD documentation are included by reference for information only.B.

SUMMARY1.2Section includes general requirements that apply to implementation of commissioning without regard toA.specific systems, assemblies, or components as required by the California Green Buildings StandardsCode.

DEFINITIONS1.3BoD: Basis of Design. A document that records concepts, calculations, decisions, and product selectionsA.used to meet the OPR and to satisfy applicable regulatory requirements, standards, and guidelines. Thedocument includes both narrative descriptions and lists of individual items that support the design process.Commissioning Plan: A document that outlines the organization, schedule, allocation of resources, andB.documentation requirements of the commissioning process.CxA: Commissioning Authority.C.OPR: Owner's Project Requirements. A document that details the functional requirements of a project andD.the expectations of how it will be used and operated. These include Project goals, measurableperformance criteria, cost considerations, benchmarks, success criteria, and supporting information.Systems, Subsystems, Equipment, and Components: Where these terms are used together or separately,E.they shall mean "as-built" systems, subsystems, equipment, and components.

COMMISSIONING TEAM1.4Members Appointed by Contractor(s): Individuals, each having the authority to act on behalf of the entityA.he or she represents, explicitly organized to implement the commissioning process through coordinatedaction. The commissioning team shall consist of, but not be limited to, representatives of [each ]Contractor,including Project superintendent and subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and specialists deemedappropriate by the CxA.Members Appointed by Owner:B.

CxA: The designated person, company, or entity that plans, schedules, and coordinates the1.commissioning team to implement the commissioning process. Owner will engage the CxA under aseparate contract.Representatives of the facility user and operation and maintenance personnel.2.Architect and engineering design professionals.3.

OWNER'S RESPONSIBILITIES1.5Provide the OPR documentation to the CxA and Contractor for information and use.A.Assign operation and maintenance personnel and schedule them to participate in commissioning teamB.activities.Provide the BoD documentation, prepared by Architect and approved by Owner, to the CxA andC.Contractor for use in developing the commissioning plan, systems manual, and operation andmaintenance training plan.

CONTRACTOR'S RESPONSIBILITIES1.6Contractor shall assign representatives with expertise and authority to act on its behalf and shall scheduleA.them to participate in and perform commissioning process activities including, but not limited to, thefollowing:

Evaluate performance deficiencies identified in test reports and, in collaboration with entity1.responsible for system and equipment installation, recommend corrective action.Cooperate with the CxA for resolution of issues recorded in the Issues Log.2.Attend commissioning team meetings held on a same schedule as progress meetings.3.Integrate and coordinate commissioning process activities with construction schedule.4.Review and accept construction checklists provided by the CxA.5.Complete electronic construction checklists as Work is completed and provide to the6.Commissioning Authority on a weekly basis.


GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 1


Review and accept commissioning process test procedures provided by the Commissioning7.Authority.Complete commissioning process test procedures.8.

CxA'S RESPONSIBILITIES1.7Organize and lead the commissioning team.A.Provide commissioning plan.B.Convene commissioning team meetings.C.Provide Project-specific construction checklists and commissioning process test procedures.D.Verify the execution of commissioning process activities using random sampling. The sampling rate mayE.vary from 1 to 100 percent. Verification will include, but is not limited to, equipment submittals, constructionchecklists, training, operating and maintenance data, tests, and test reports to verify compliance with theOPR. When a random sample does not meet the requirement, the CxA will report the failure in the IssuesLog.Prepare and maintain the Issues Log.F.Prepare and maintain completed construction checklist log.G.Witness systems, assemblies, equipment, and component startup.H.Compile test data, inspection reports, and certificates; include them in the systems manual andI.commissioning process report.





GENERAL COMMISSIONING REQUIREMENTS 019113 - 2


SECTION 054000 - COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING

GENERALPART 1 -

RELATED DOCUMENTS1.1Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andA.Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.


Exterior non-load-bearing wall framing.1.Soffit framing.2.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS1.3Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each type of cold-formed steel framing product and accessory.A.Shop Drawings:B.

Include layout, spacings, sizes, thicknesses, and types of cold-formed steel framing; fabrication;1.and fastening and anchorage details, including mechanical fasteners.Indicate reinforcing channels, opening framing, supplemental framing, strapping, bracing, bridging,2.splices, accessories, connection details, and attachment to adjoining work.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Product Test Reports: For each listed product, for tests performed by manufacturer and witnessed by aA.qualified testing agency.

Steel sheet.1.Expansion anchors.2.Power-actuated anchors.3.Mechanical fasteners.4.Vertical deflection clips.5.Horizontal drift deflection clips6.Miscellaneous structural clips and accessories.7.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.6Product Tests: Mill certificates or data from a qualified independent testing agency indicating steel sheetA.complies with requirements, including base-metal thickness, yield strength, tensile strength, totalelongation, chemical requirements, and metallic-coating thickness.Comply with AISI S230 "Standard for Cold-Formed Steel Framing - Prescriptive Method for One and TwoB.Family Dwellings."

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.7Protect cold-formed steel framing from corrosion, moisture staining, deformation, and other damage duringA.delivery, storage, and handling.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

ClarkDietrich.1.MarinoWARE.2.Nuconsteel; a Nucor Company.3.Steel Network, Inc. (The).4.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.2Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "QualityA.Requirements," to design cold-formed steel framing.


COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING 054000 - 1

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=6242&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456828490~M.$M~MBA Building Supplies, Inc~$m~123456830648&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456835273&mf=04&src=wd



Structural Performance: Provide cold-formed steel framing capable of withstanding design loads withinB.limits and under conditions indicated.

Design Loads: As indicated.1.Deflection Limits: Design framing systems to withstand[ design loads] without deflections greater2.than the following:

Exterior Non-Load-Bearing Framing: Horizontal deflection of 1/240 supporting EIFS anda.ACM veneer of the wall height.

Design framing systems to provide for movement of framing members located outside the insulated3.building envelope without damage or overstressing, sheathing failure, connection failure, unduestrain on fasteners and anchors, or other detrimental effects when subject to a maximum ambienttemperature change of 120 deg F.Design framing system to maintain clearances at openings, to allow for construction tolerances,4.and to accommodate live load deflection of primary building structure as follows:

Upward and downward movement of 1 inch or as otherwise indicated on the structurala.drawings.

Design exterior non-load-bearing wall framing to accommodate horizontal deflection without regard5.for contribution of sheathing materials.

Cold-Formed Steel Framing Design Standards:C.Floor and Roof Systems: AISI S210.1.Wall Studs: AISI S211.2.Headers: AISI S212.3.Lateral Design: AISI S213.4.

AISI Specifications and Standards: Unless more stringent requirements are indicated, comply with AISID.S100 and AISI S200.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. IdentifyE.products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Indicate design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory" or from the listings of another1.qualified testing agency.

COLD-FORMED STEEL FRAMING, GENERAL2.3Recycled Content of Steel Products: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumerA.recycled content not less than 30 percent.Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content so that post-consumer recycledB.content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 30 percent.Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H, metallic coated, of grade and coatingC.weight as follows:

Grade: As required by structural performance.1.Coating: G90 or equivalent.2.

Steel Sheet for Vertical Deflection Clips: ASTM A 653/A 653M, structural steel, zinc coated, of grade andD.coating as follows:

Grade: As required by structural performance.1.Coating: G60 and G90 in coastal areas.2.

EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL FRAMING2.4Steel Studs: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel studs, of web depths indicated, punched, withA.stiffened flanges, and as follows:

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch.1.Flange Width: 1-5/8 inches.2.Section Properties: As required for span.3.

Steel Track: Manufacturer's standard U-shaped steel track, of web depths indicated, unpunched, withB.unstiffened flanges, and as follows:

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch.1.Flange Width: 1-1/4 inches.2.

Vertical Deflection Clips: Manufacturer's standard bypass clips, capable of accommodating upward andC.downward vertical displacement of primary structure through positive mechanical attachment to stud web.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.ClarkDietrich.a.MarinoWARE.b.Steel Network, Inc. (The).c.

Single Deflection Track: Manufacturer's single, deep-leg, U-shaped steel track; unpunched, withD.unstiffened flanges, of web depth to contain studs while allowing free vertical movement, with flangesdesigned to support horizontal loads and transfer them to the primary structure, and as follows:







Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch.1.Flange Width: 1 inch plus twice the design gap for other applications.2.

SOFFIT FRAMING2.5Exterior Soffit Frame: Manufacturer's standard C-shaped steel sections, of web depths indicated, withA.stiffened flanges, and as follows:

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.0538 inch 0.0966 inch.1.Flange Width: 2 inches, minimum.2.Section Properties: As required for span and loading.3.

FRAMING ACCESSORIES2.6Fabricate steel-framing accessories from steel sheet, ASTM A 1003/A 1003M, Structural Grade, Type H,A.metallic coated, of same grade and coating weight used for framing members.Provide accessories of manufacturer's standard thickness and configuration, unless otherwise indicated,B.as follows:

Supplementary framing.1.Bracing, bridging, and solid blocking.2.Web stiffeners.3.Anchor clips.4.End clips.5.Foundation clips.6.Gusset plates.7.Stud kickers and knee braces.8.Joist hangers and end closures.9.Hole reinforcing plates.10.Backer plates.11.

ANCHORS, CLIPS, AND FASTENERS2.7Steel Shapes and Clips: ASTM A 36/A 36M, zinc coated by hot-dip process according to ASTM A 123/AA.123M.Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 55, threaded carbon-steel hex-headed bolts and carbon-steel nuts;B.and flat, hardened-steel washers; zinc coated by mechanically deposition according to ASTM B 695, Class50.Expansion Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load or strength designC.capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC193 and ACI 318 greater than or equal to the design load, asdetermined by testing per ASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified testing agency.Power-Actuated Anchors: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated, fabricated fromD.corrosion-resistant materials, with allowable load capacities calculated according to ICC-ES AC70, greaterthan or equal to the design load, as determined by testing per ASTM E 1190 conducted by a qualifiedtesting agency.Mechanical Fasteners: ASTM C 1513, corrosion-resistant-coated, self-drilling, self-tapping, steel drillE.screws.

Head Type: Low-profile head beneath sheathing, manufacturer's standard elsewhere.1.Welding Electrodes: Comply with AWS standards.F.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.8Galvanizing Repair Paint: SSPC-Paint 20 or MIL-P-21035B.A.Shims: Load bearing, high-density multimonomer plastic, and nonleaching; or of cold-formed steel ofB.same grade and coating as framing members supported by shims.Sealer Gaskets: Closed-cell neoprene foam, 1/4 inch thick, selected from manufacturer's standard widthsC.to match width of bottom track or rim track members.

FABRICATION2.9Fabricate cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connectionsA.securely fastened, according to referenced AISI's specifications and standards, manufacturer's writteninstructions, and requirements in this Section.

Fabricate framing assemblies using jigs or templates.1.Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.2.Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening,3.pneumatic pin fastening, or riveting as standard with fabricator. Wire tying of framing members isnot permitted.




Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance anda.quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, with screw penetratingb.joined members by no fewer than three exposed screw threads.

Fasten other materials to cold-formed steel framing by welding, bolting, pneumatic pin fastening, or4.screw fastening, according to Shop Drawings.

Reinforce, stiffen, and brace framing assemblies to withstand handling, delivery, and erection stresses.B.Lift fabricated assemblies to prevent damage or permanent distortion.Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate assemblies level, plumb, and true to line to a maximum allowableC.tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:

Spacing: Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inch from plan1.location. Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or otherfinishing materials.Squareness: Fabricate each cold-formed steel framing assembly to a maximum out-of-square2.tolerance of 1/8 inch.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine supporting substrates and abutting structural framing for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Install load bearing shims or grout between the underside of load-bearing wall bottom track and the top ofA.foundation wall or slab at locations with a gap larger than 1/4 inch to ensure a uniform bearing surface onsupporting concrete or masonry construction.Install sealer gaskets at the underside of wall bottom track or rim track and at the top of foundation wall orB.slab at stud or joist locations.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.3Cold-formed steel framing may be shop or field fabricated for installation, or it may be field assembled.A.Install cold-formed steel framing according to AISI S200 and to manufacturer's written instructions unlessB.more stringent requirements are indicated.Install shop- or field-fabricated, cold-formed framing and securely anchor to supporting structure.C.

Screw, bolt, or weld wall panels at horizontal and vertical junctures to produce flush, even,1.true-to-line joints with maximum variation in plane and true position between fabricated panels notexceeding 1/16 inch.

Install cold-formed steel framing and accessories plumb, square, and true to line, and with connectionsD.securely fastened.

Cut framing members by sawing or shearing; do not torch cut.1.Fasten cold-formed steel framing members by welding, screw fastening, clinch fastening, or2.riveting. Wire tying of framing members is not permitted.

Comply with AWS D1.3/D1.3M requirements and procedures for welding, appearance anda.quality of welds, and methods used in correcting welding work.Locate mechanical fasteners and install according to Shop Drawings, and complying withb.requirements for spacing, edge distances, and screw penetration.

Install framing members in one-piece lengths unless splice connections are indicated for track or tensionE.members.Install temporary bracing and supports to secure framing and support loads comparable in intensity toF.those for which structure was designed. Maintain braces and supports in place, undisturbed, until entireintegrated supporting structure has been completed and permanent connections to framing are secured.Do not bridge building expansion joints with cold-formed steel framing. Independently frame both sides ofG.joints.Install insulation, specified in Section 072100 "Thermal Insulation," in built-up exterior framing members,H.such as headers, sills, boxed joists, and multiple studs at openings, that are inaccessible on completion offraming work.Fasten hole reinforcing plate over web penetrations that exceed size of manufacturer's approved orI.standard punched openings.Erection Tolerances: Install cold-formed steel framing level, plumb, and true to line to a maximumJ.allowable tolerance variation of 1/8 inch in 10 feet and as follows:




Space individual framing members no more than plus or minus 1/8 inchfrom plan location.1.Cumulative error shall not exceed minimum fastening requirements of sheathing or other finishingmaterials.

EXTERIOR NON-LOAD-BEARING WALL INSTALLATION3.4Install continuous tracks sized to match studs. Align tracks accurately and securely anchor to supportingA.structure as indicated.Fasten both flanges of studs to bottom track unless otherwise indicated. Space studs as follows:B.

Stud Spacing: As required by design, but not less than 18 inches.1.Stud Spacing: As indicated.2.

Set studs plumb, except as needed for diagonal bracing or required for nonplumb walls or warped surfacesC.and similar requirements.Isolate non-load-bearing steel framing from building structure to prevent transfer of vertical loads whileD.providing lateral support.

Install single deep-leg deflection tracks and anchor to building structure.1.Connect vertical deflection clips to bypassing studs and anchor to building structure.2.

Install horizontal bridging in wall studs, spaced vertically in rows indicated on Shop Drawings but not moreE.than 48 inches apart. Fasten at each stud intersection.

Top Bridging for Single Deflection Track: Install row of horizontal bridging within 18 inches of single1.deflection track. Install a combination of bridging and stud or stud-track solid blocking of width andthickness matching studs, secured to stud webs or flanges.

Install solid blocking at centers indicated.a.Bridging: Cold-rolled steel channel, welded or mechanically fastened to webs of punched studs.2.Bridging: Combination of flat, taut, steel sheet straps of width and thickness indicated and3.stud-track solid blocking of width and thickness to match studs. Fasten flat straps to stud flangesand secure solid blocking to stud webs or flanges.

Install miscellaneous framing and connections, including stud kickers, web stiffeners, clip angles,F.continuous angles, anchors, and fasteners, to provide a complete and stable wall-framing system.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.5Testing: Owner will engage a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency to perform field testsA.and inspections and prepare test reports.Field and shop welds will be subject to testing and inspecting.B.Testing agency will report test results promptly and in writing to Contractor and Architect.C.Remove and replace work where test results indicate that it does not comply with specified requirements.D.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine compliance ofE.replaced or additional work with specified requirements.

REPAIRS AND PROTECTION3.6Galvanizing Repairs: Prepare and repair damaged galvanized coatings on fabricated and installedA.cold-formed steel framing with galvanized repair paint according to ASTM A 780 and manufacturer'swritten instructions.Provide final protection and maintain conditions, in a manner acceptable to manufacturer and Installer, thatB.ensure that cold-formed steel framing is without damage or deterioration at time of Substantial Completion.





SECTION 055000 - METAL FABRICATIONS

GENERALPART 1 -



Steel framing and supports for countertops.1.Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.2.Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other3.Sections.Shelf angles.4.Metal ladders.5.Loose bearing and leveling plates for applications where they are not specified in other Sections.6.

Products furnished, but not installed, under this Section include the following:B.Loose steel lintels.1.Anchor bolts, steel pipe sleeves, slotted-channel inserts, and wedge-type inserts indicated to be2.cast into concrete or built into unit masonry.

COORDINATION1.3Coordinate selection of shop primers with topcoats to be applied over them. Comply with paint andA.coating manufacturers' written recommendations to ensure that shop primers and topcoats are compatiblewith one another.Coordinate installation of metal fabrications that are anchored to or that receive other work. FurnishB.setting drawings, templates, and directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts,anchor bolts, and items with integral anchors, that are to be embedded in concrete or masonry. Deliversuch items to Project site in time for installation.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For the following:A.

Nonslip aggregates and nonslip-aggregate surface finishes.1.Paint products.2.Grout.3.

Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation details. Include plans, elevations, sections, and detailsB.of metal fabrications and their connections. Show anchorage and accessory items.

Steel framing and supports for countertops.1.Steel framing and supports for mechanical and electrical equipment.2.Steel framing and supports for applications where framing and supports are not specified in other3.Sections.Metal ladders.4.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.5Field Measurements: Verify actual locations of walls and other construction contiguous with metalA.fabrications by field measurements before fabrication.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "QualityA.Requirements," to design ladders alternating tread devices.

METALS2.2Metal Surfaces, General: Provide materials with smooth, flat surfaces unless otherwise indicated. ForA.metal fabrications exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials without seam marks, rollermarks, rolled trade names, or blemishes.Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.B.Steel Pipe: ASTM A 53/A 53M, Standard Weight (Schedule 40) unless otherwise indicated.C.


METAL FABRICATIONS 055000 - 1


Cast Iron: Either gray iron, ASTM A 48/A 48M, or malleable iron, ASTM A 47/A 47M, unless otherwiseD.indicated.

FASTENERS2.3General: Unless otherwise indicated, provide stainless-steel fasteners for exterior use and zinc-platedA.fasteners with coating complying with ASTM B 633 or ASTM F 1941, Class Fe/Zn 5, at exterior walls.Select fasteners for type, grade, and class required.Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 307, Grade A; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563;B.and, where indicated, flat washers.Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head bolts, ASTM A 325, Type 3; with hex nuts, ASTM A 563,C.Grade C3; and, where indicated, flat washers.Stainless-Steel Bolts and Nuts: Regular hexagon-head annealed stainless-steel bolts, ASTM F 593; withD.hex nuts, ASTM F 594; and, where indicated, flat washers; Alloy Group 1.Anchor Bolts: ASTM F 1554, Grade 36, of dimensions indicated; with nuts, ASTM A 563; and, whereE.indicated, flat washers.

Hot-dip galvanize or provide mechanically deposited, zinc coating where item being fastened is1.indicated to be galvanized.

Anchors, General: Anchors capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to six times the loadF.imposed when installed in unit masonry and four times the load imposed when installed in concrete, asdetermined by testing according to ASTM E 488/E 488M, conducted by a qualified independent testingagency.Post-Installed Anchors: Torque-controlled expansion anchors or chemical anchors.G.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.4Shop Primers: Provide primers that comply withA.Universal Shop Primer: Fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal modified-alkyd primer complyingB.with MPI#79 and compatible with topcoat specified in Section 099100 "Painting."Galvanizing Repair Paint: High-zinc-dust-content paint complying with SSPC-Paint 20 and compatibleC.with paints specified to be used over it.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187/D 1187M.D.Nonshrink, Nonmetallic Grout: Factory-packaged, nonstaining, noncorrosive, nongaseous grout complyingE.with ASTM C 1107/C 1107M. Provide grout specifically recommended by manufacturer for interior andexterior applications.

FABRICATION, GENERAL2.5Shop Assembly: Preassemble items in the shop to greatest extent possible. Disassemble units only asA.necessary for shipping and handling limitations. Use connections that maintain structural value of joinedpieces. Clearly mark units for reassembly and coordinated installation.Cut, drill, and punch metals cleanly and accurately. Remove burrs and ease edges to a radius ofB.approximately 1/32 inch unless otherwise indicated. Remove sharp or rough areas on exposed surfaces.Form bent-metal corners to smallest radius possible without causing grain separation or otherwiseC.impairing work.Form exposed work with accurate angles and surfaces and straight edges.D.Weld corners and seams continuously to comply with the following:E.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance1.of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness4.shows after finishing.

Form exposed connections with hairline joints, flush and smooth, using concealed fasteners or weldsF.where possible. Where exposed fasteners are required, use Phillips flat-head (countersunk) fastenersunless otherwise indicated. Locate joints where least conspicuous.Fabricate seams and other connections that are exposed to weather in a manner to exclude water.G.Provide weep holes where water may accumulate.Cut, reinforce, drill, and tap metal fabrications as indicated to receive finish hardware, screws, and similarH.items.Provide for anchorage of type indicated; coordinate with supporting structure. Space anchoring devices toI.secure metal fabrications rigidly in place and to support indicated loads.Where units are indicated to be cast into concrete or built into masonry, equip with integrally welded steelJ.strap anchors, 1/8 by 1-1/2 inches, with a minimum 6-inch embedment and 2-inch hook, not less than 8inches from ends and corners of units and 24 inches o.c., unless otherwise indicated.




MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS2.6General: Provide steel framing and supports not specified in other Sections as needed to complete theA.Work.Fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of welded construction unless otherwise indicated.B.Fabricate to sizes, shapes, and profiles indicated and as necessary to receive adjacent construction.Fabricate supports for operable partitions from continuous steel beams of sizes recommended by partitionC.manufacturer with attached bearing plates, anchors, and braces as recommended by partitionmanufacturer. Drill or punch bottom flanges of beams to receive partition track hanger rods; locate holeswhere indicated on operable partition Shop Drawings.Galvanize miscellaneous framing and supports where indicated.D.Prime miscellaneous framing and supports with zinc-rich primer where indicated.E.

METAL LADDERS2.7General:A.

Comply with ANSI A14.3.1.Steel Ladders:B.

Space siderails 18 inches apart unless otherwise indicated.1.Siderails: Continuous, 3/8-by-2-1/2-inch steel flat bars, with eased edges.2.Rungs: 3/4-inch- diameter steel bars.3.Fit rungs in centerline of siderails; plug-weld and grind smooth on outer rail faces.4.Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung, either by coating rung with aluminum-oxide granules5.set in epoxy-resin adhesive or by using a type of manufactured rung filled with aluminum-oxidegrout.Provide nonslip surfaces on top of each rung by coating with abrasive material metallically bonded6.to rung.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a.Harsco Industrial IKG, a division of Harsco Corporation; Mebac.1)SlipNOT Metal Safety Flooring, a division of W. S. Molnar Company; SlipNOT.2)

Provide platforms as indicated fabricated from welded or pressure-locked steel bar grating,7.supported by steel angles. Limit openings in gratings to no more than [1/2 inch] [3/4 inch] in leastdimension.Support each ladder at top and bottom and not more than 60 inches o.c. with welded or bolted steel8.brackets.Prime ladders, including brackets and fasteners, with zinc-rich primer and the requirements of9.Section 099100 "Painting."

MISCELLANEOUS STEEL TRIM2.8Unless otherwise indicated, fabricate units from steel shapes, plates, and bars of profiles shown withA.continuously welded joints and smooth exposed edges. Miter corners and use concealed field spliceswhere possible.Provide cutouts, fittings, and anchorages as needed to coordinate assembly and installation with otherB.work.

Provide with integrally welded steel strap anchors for embedding in concrete or masonry1.construction.

Galvanizeexterior miscellaneous steel trim.C.Prime exterior miscellaneous steel trim with primer specified in Section 099100 "Painting."D.

E.

LOOSE BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES2.9Provide loose bearing and leveling plates for steel items bearing on masonry or concrete construction.A.Drill plates to receive anchor bolts and for grouting.Galvanize plates.B.Prime plates with zinc-rich primer. primer specified in Section 099100 "Painting."C.

LOOSE STEEL LINTELS2.10Fabricate loose steel lintels from steel angles and shapes of size indicated for openings and recesses inA.masonry walls and partitions at locations indicated. Fabricate in single lengths for each opening unlessotherwise indicated. Weld adjoining members together to form a single unit where indicated.



http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=8919&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456895203&mf=&src=wd



FINISHES, GENERAL2.11Finish metal fabrications after assembly.A.Finish exposed surfaces to remove tool and die marks and stretch lines, and to blend into surroundingB.surface.

STEEL AND IRON FINISHES2.12Galvanizing: Hot-dip galvanize items as indicated to comply with ASTM A 153/A 153M for steel and ironA.hardware and with ASTM A 123/A 123M for other steel and iron products.

Do not quench or apply post galvanizing treatments that might interfere with paint adhesion.1.Shop prime iron and steel items[ not indicated to be galvanized] unless they are to be embedded inB.concrete, sprayed-on fireproofing, or masonry, or unless otherwise indicated.

Shop prime with universal shop primer unless zinc-rich primer is indicated.1.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.1Cutting, Fitting, and Placement: Perform cutting, drilling, and fitting required for installing metalA.fabrications. Set metal fabrications accurately in location, alignment, and elevation; with edges andsurfaces level, plumb, true, and free of rack; and measured from established lines and levels.Fit exposed connections accurately together to form hairline joints. Weld connections that are not to beB.left as exposed joints but cannot be shop welded because of shipping size limitations. Do not weld, cut, orabrade surfaces of exterior units that have been hot-dip galvanized after fabrication and are for bolted orscrewed field connections.Field Welding: Comply with the following requirements:C.

Use materials and methods that minimize distortion and develop strength and corrosion resistance1.of base metals.Obtain fusion without undercut or overlap.2.Remove welding flux immediately.3.At exposed connections, finish exposed welds and surfaces smooth and blended so no roughness4.shows after finishing and contour of welded surface matches that of adjacent surface.

Fastening to In-Place Construction: Provide anchorage devices and fasteners where metal fabricationsD.are required to be fastened to in-place construction. Provide threaded fasteners for use with concrete andmasonry inserts, toggle bolts, through bolts, lag screws, wood screws, and other connectors.Provide temporary bracing or anchors in formwork for items that are to be built into concrete, masonry, orE.similar construction.

INSTALLING MISCELLANEOUS FRAMING AND SUPPORTS3.2General: Install framing and supports to comply with requirements of items being supported, includingA.manufacturers' written instructions and requirements indicated on Shop Drawings.Anchor supports for ceiling hung toilet partitions overhead doors and overhead grilles securely to, andB.rigidly brace from, building structure.

INSTALLING BEARING AND LEVELING PLATES3.3Clean concrete and masonry bearing surfaces of bond-reducing materials, and roughen to improve bondA.to surfaces. Clean bottom surface of plates.Set bearing and leveling plates on wedges, shims, or leveling nuts. After bearing members have beenB.positioned and plumbed, tighten anchor bolts. Do not remove wedges or shims but, if protruding, cut offflush with edge of bearing plate before packing with nonshrink grout. Pack grout solidly between bearingsurfaces and plates to ensure that no voids remain.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.4Touchup Painting: Immediately after erection, clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas.A.Paint uncoated and abraded areas with the same material as used for shop painting to comply withSSPC-PA 1 for touching up shop-painted surfaces.

Apply by brush or spray to provide a minimum 2.0-mil dry film thickness.1.Touchup Painting: Cleaning and touchup painting of field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas ofB.shop paint are specified in Section 099100 "Painting."

END OF SECTION 055000Delivery Pavilion, El Monte, Ca.Ware Malcomb PN IRV15-0103-00



SECTION 061053 - MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY

GENERALPART 1 -



Wood blocking, cants, and nailers.1.Wood furring and grounds.2.Plywood backing panels.3.

DEFINITIONS1.3Dimension Lumber: Lumber of 2 inches nominal or greater but less than 5 inches nominal in leastA.dimension.Lumber grading agencies, and the abbreviations used to reference them, include the following:B.

NeLMA: Northeastern Lumber Manufacturers' Association.1.NHLA: National Hardwood Lumber Association.2.NLGA: National Lumber Grades Authority.3.SPIB: The Southern Pine Inspection Bureau.4.WCLIB: West Coast Lumber Inspection Bureau.5.WWPA: Western Wood Products Association.6.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials andA.dimensions and include construction and application details.

Include data for wood-preservative treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and1.certification by treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Indicate type ofpreservative used and net amount of preservative retained.Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical treatment manufacturer and certification by2.treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements. Include physical properties oftreated materials based on testing by a qualified independent testing agency.For fire-retardant treatments, include physical properties of treated lumber both before and after3.exposure to elevated temperatures, based on testing by a qualified independent testing agencyaccording to ASTM D 5664.For products receiving a waterborne treatment, include statement that moisture content of treated4.materials was reduced to levels specified before shipment to Project site.Include copies of warranties from chemical treatment manufacturers for each type of treatment.5.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Evaluation Reports: For the following, from ICC-ES:A.

Preservative-treated wood.1.Fire-retardant-treated wood.2.Power-driven fasteners.3.Powder-actuated fasteners.4.Expansion anchors.5.Metal framing anchors.6.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.6Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant treatedA.material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performsinspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the materialtested.


MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY 061053 - 1


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.7Stack lumber flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. Protect lumberA.from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for air circulation aroundstacks and under coverings.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

WOOD PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1Required Certification: A minimum of 50 percent of permanently installed wood, calculated by cost, shallA.be obtained from forests certified by an FSC accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001,"FSC Principles and Criteria for Forest Stewardship."VOC Limits: Any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings used inside the weatherproofing system andB.applied on site shall meet the VOC limits indicated in Section 018113 “Sustainable Design Requirements.”Required Certification: Composite wood products shall contain No Added Urea-Formaldehyde (NAUF) inC.the product or laminating adhesives used to fabricate the product.Certified Wood: Lumber and plywood shall be produced from wood obtained from forests certified by anD.FSC-accredited certification body to comply with FSC STD-01-001, "FSC Principles and Criteria for ForestStewardship."Lumber: DOC PS 20 and applicable rules of grading agencies indicated. If no grading agency isE.indicated, provide lumber that complies with the applicable rules of any rules-writing agency certified bythe ALSC Board of Review. Provide lumber graded by an agency certified by the ALSC Board of Reviewto inspect and grade lumber under the rules indicated.

Factory mark each piece of lumber with grade stamp of grading agency.1.For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark grade stamp on end or2.back of each piece.Where nominal sizes are indicated, provide actual sizes required by DOC PS 20 for moisture3.content specified. Where actual sizes are indicated, they are minimum dressed sizes for drylumber.Provide dressed lumber, S4S, unless otherwise indicated.4.

Maximum Moisture Content of Lumber: 15 percent unless otherwise indicated.F.WOOD-PRESERVATIVE-TREATED MATERIALSG.Preservative Treatment by Pressure Process: AWPA U1; Use Category UC2 for interior construction notH.in contact with the ground, Use Category UC3b for exterior construction not in contact with the ground, andUse Category UC4a for items in contact with the ground.

Preservative Chemicals: Acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and containing no arsenic or1.chromium. Do not use inorganic boron (SBX) for sill plates.For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do2.not require incising, contain colorants, bleed through, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Do not use material that isI.warped or does not comply with requirements for untreated material.Mark lumber with treatment quality mark of an inspection agency approved by the ALSC Board of Review.J.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, mark end or back of each piece.1.Application: Treat items indicated on Drawings, and the following:K.

Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, stripping, and similar members in1.connection with roofing, flashing, vapor barriers, and waterproofing.Wood sills, sleepers, blocking, furring, and similar concealed members in contact with masonry or2.concrete.Wood framing and furring attached directly to the interior of below-grade exterior masonry or3.concrete walls.Wood framing members that are less than 18 inches above the ground in crawl spaces or4.unexcavated areas.Wood floor plates that are installed over concrete slabs-on-grade.5.




FIRE-RETARDANT-TREATED MATERIALS2.2General: Where fire-retardant-treated materials are indicated, use materials complying with requirementsA.in this article, that are acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, and with fire-test-responsecharacteristics specified as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated by aqualified testing agency.Fire-Retardant-Treated Lumber and Plywood by Pressure Process: Products with a flame spread index ofB.25 or less when tested according to ASTM E 84, and with no evidence of significant progressivecombustion when the test is extended an additional 20 minutes, and with the flame front not extendingmore than 10.5 feet beyond the centerline of the burners at any time during the test.

Use treatment that does not promote corrosion of metal fasteners.1.Exterior Type: Treated materials shall comply with requirements specified above for2.fire-retardant-treated lumber and plywood by pressure process after being subjected to acceleratedweathering according to ASTM D 2898. Use for exterior locations and where indicated.Interior Type A: Treated materials shall have a moisture content of 28 percent or less when tested3.according to ASTM D 3201 at 92 percent relative humidity. Use where exterior type is notindicated.Design Value Adjustment Factors: Treated lumber shall be tested according ASTM D 5664, and4.design value adjustment factors shall be calculated according to ASTM D 6841.

Kiln-dry lumber after treatment to a maximum moisture content of 19 percent. Kiln-dry plywood afterC.treatment to a maximum moisture content of 15 percent.Identify fire-retardant-treated wood with appropriate classification marking of testing and inspecting agencyD.acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

For exposed lumber indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, omit marking and provide1.certificates of treatment compliance issued by inspection agency.

For exposed items indicated to receive a stained or natural finish, use chemical formulations that do notE.bleed through, contain colorants, or otherwise adversely affect finishes.Application: Treat all miscellaneous carpentry unless otherwise indicated.F.

Concealed blocking.1.Roof framing and blocking.2.Wood cants, nailers, curbs, equipment support bases, blocking, and similar members in connection3.with roofing.Plywood backing panels.4.

MISCELLANEOUS LUMBER2.3General: Provide miscellaneous lumber indicated and lumber for support or attachment of otherA.construction, including the following:

Blocking.1.Nailers.2.Rooftop equipment bases and support curbs.3.Cants.4.Furring.5.Grounds.6.Utility shelving.7.

For items of dimension lumber size, provide Construction or No. 2 grade lumber and any of the followingB.species:

Mixed southern pine; SPIB.1.Hem-fir; WCLIB or WWPA.2.Spruce-pine-fir (south); NeLMA, WCLIB, or WWPA.3.Western woods; WCLIB or WWPA.4.Eastern softwoods; NeLMA.5.

For concealed boards, provide lumber with 15 percent maximum moisture content and any of the followingC.species and grades:

Mixed southern pine, No. 2 grade; SPIB.1.Spruce-pine-fir (south) or spruce-pine-fir, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; NeLMA, NLGA,2.WCLIB, or WWPA.Eastern softwoods, No. 2 Common grade; NELMA.3.




Western woods, Construction or No. 2 Common grade; WCLIB or WWPA.4.For blocking not used for attachment of other construction, Utility, Stud, or No. 3 grade lumber of anyD.species may be used provided that it is cut and selected to eliminate defects that will interfere with itsattachment and purpose.For blocking and nailers used for attachment of other construction, select and cut lumber to eliminate knotsE.and other defects that will interfere with attachment of other work.For furring strips for installing plywood or hardboard paneling, select boards with no knots capable ofF.producing bent-over nails and damage to paneling.

PLYWOOD BACKING PANELS2.4Equipment Backing Panels: DOC PS 1, , fire-retardant treated, in thickness indicated or, if not indicated,A.not less than 3/4-inch nominal thickness.

FASTENERS2.5General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in thisA.article for material and manufacture.

Where carpentry is exposed to weather, in ground contact, pressure-preservative treated, or in area1.of high relative humidity, provide fastenersof Type 304 stainless steel.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.B.Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.C.Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.D.Screws for Fastening to Metal Framing: ASTM C 1002, length as recommended by screw manufacturerE.for material being fastened.Lag Bolts: ASME B18.2.1.F.Bolts: Steel bolts complying with ASTM A 307, Grade A; with ASTM A 563 hex nuts and, where indicated,G.flat washers.Expansion Anchors: Anchor bolt and sleeve assembly of material indicated below with capability toH.sustain, without failure, a load equal to 6 times the load imposed when installed in unit masonryassemblies and equal to 4 times the load imposed when installed in concrete as determined by testing perASTM E 488 conducted by a qualified independent testing and inspecting agency.

Material: Carbon-steel components, zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633, Class Fe/Zn 5.1.Material: Stainless steel with bolts and nuts complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM F 594, Alloy2.Group 1 or 2.

METAL FRAMING ANCHORS2.6Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

Cleveland Steel Specialty Co.1.KC Metals Products, Inc.2.Phoenix Metal Products, Inc.3.Simpson Strong-Tie Co., Inc.4.USP Structural Connectors.5.

Galvanized-Steel Sheet: Hot-dip, zinc-coated steel sheet complying with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60B.coating designation.

Use for interior locations unless otherwise indicated.1.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.7Adhesives for Gluing Furring to Concrete or Masonry: Formulation complying with ASTM D 3498 that isA.approved for use indicated by adhesive manufacturer.

VOC Limits: Any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings used inside the weatherproofing system1.and applied on site shall meet the VOC limits indicated in Section 018113 ““Sustainable DesignRequirements.”

Flexible Flashing: Composite, self-adhesive, flashing product consisting of a pliable, butyl rubberB.compound, bonded to a high-density polyethylene film, aluminum foil, or spunbonded polyolefin to producean overall thickness of not less than 0.025 inch.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.1Set carpentry to required levels and lines, with members plumb, true to line, cut, and fitted. Fit carpentry toA.other construction; scribe and cope as needed for accurate fit. Locate furring, nailers, blocking, grounds,and similar supports to comply with requirements for attaching other construction.Where wood-preservative-treated lumber is installed adjacent to metal decking, install continuous flexibleB.flashing separator between wood and metal decking.Framing Standard: Comply with AF&PA's WCD 1, "Details for Conventional Wood Frame Construction,"C.unless otherwise indicated.Install plywood backing panels by fastening to studs; coordinate locations with utilities requiring backingD.panels. Install fire-retardant treated plywood backing panels with classification marking of testing agencyexposed to view.Metal Framing Anchors: Install metal framing anchors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions.E.Install fasteners through each fastener hole.Do not splice structural members between supports unless otherwise indicated.F.Provide blocking and framing as indicated and as required to support facing materials, fixtures, specialtyG.items, and trim.

Provide metal clips for fastening gypsum board or lath at corners and intersections where framing1.or blocking does not provide a surface for fastening edges of panels. Space clips not more than 16inches o.c.

Provide fire blocking in furred spaces, stud spaces, and other concealed cavities as indicated and asH.follows:

Fire block furred spaces of walls, at each floor level, at ceiling, and at not more than 96 inches o.c.1.with solid wood blocking or noncombustible materials accurately fitted to close furred spaces.Fire block concealed spaces of wood-framed walls and partitions at each floor level, at ceiling line2.of top story, and at not more than 96 inches o.c. Where fire blocking is not inherent in framingsystem used, provide closely fitted solid wood blocks of same width as framing members and2-inch nominal thickness.Fire block concealed spaces between floor sleepers with same material as sleepers to limit3.concealed spaces to not more than 100 sq. ft. and to solidly fill space below partitions.Fire block concealed spaces behind combustible cornices and exterior trim at not more than 20 feet4.o.c.

Sort and select lumber so that natural characteristics will not interfere with installation or with fasteningI.other materials to lumber. Do not use materials with defects that interfere with function of member orpieces that are too small to use with minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement.Comply with AWPA M4 for applying field treatment to cut surfaces of preservative-treated lumber.J.

Use inorganic boron for items that are continuously protected from liquid water.1.Use copper naphthenate for items not continuously protected from liquid water.2.

Securely attach carpentry work to substrate by anchoring and fastening as indicated, complying with theK.following:

NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.1.Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's International Building Code.2.Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate3.Attachments," in ICC's International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings.

Use steel common nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrateL.members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tightconnections between members. Install fasteners without splitting wood. Drive nails snug but do notcountersink nail heads unless otherwise indicated.

WOOD GROUND, BLOCKING, AND NAILER INSTALLATION3.2Install where indicated and where required for[ screeding or] attaching other work. Form to shapesA.indicated and cut as required for true line and level of attached work. Coordinate locations with other workinvolved.Attach items to substrates to support applied loading. Recess bolts and nuts flush with surfaces unlessB.otherwise indicated.




Provide permanent grounds of dressed, pressure-preservative-treated, key-beveled lumber not less thanC.1-1/2 inches wide and of thickness required to bring face of ground to exact thickness of finish material.Remove temporary grounds when no longer required.

WOOD FURRING INSTALLATION3.3Install level and plumb with closure strips at edges and openings. Shim with wood as required forA.tolerance of finish work.Furring to Receive Plywood or Hardboard Paneling: Install 1-by-3-inch nominal-size furring vertically atB.24 inches o.c.Furring to Receive Gypsum Board: Install 1-by-2-inch nominal-size furring vertically at 16 inches o.c.C.

PROTECTION3.4Protect wood that has been treated with inorganic boron (SBX) from weather. If, despite protection,A.inorganic boron-treated wood becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solutionby spraying to comply with EPA-registered label.Protect miscellaneous rough carpentry from weather. If, despite protection, miscellaneous rough carpentryB.becomes wet, apply EPA-registered borate treatment. Apply borate solution by spraying to comply withEPA-registered label.





SECTION 061600 - SHEATHING

GENERALPART 1 -



Non-structural wall sheathing.1.Sheathing joint and penetration treatment.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of process and factory-fabricated product. Indicate component materials andA.dimensions and include construction and application details.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Testing Agency Qualifications: For testing agency providing classification marking for fire-retardant-treatedA.material, an inspection agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction that periodically performsinspections to verify that the material bearing the classification marking is representative of the materialtested.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5Stack panels flat with spacers beneath and between each bundle to provide air circulation. ProtectA.sheathing from weather by covering with waterproof sheeting, securely anchored. Provide for aircirculation around stacks and under coverings.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113, "Sustainable Design Requirements."

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.2Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For assemblies with fire-resistance ratings, provide materials andA.construction identical to those of assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a testing andinspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Indicated by design designations from UL's "Fire Resistance Directory.".1.

WALL SHEATHING2.3Glass-Mat Gypsum Wall Sheathing: ASTM C 1177/1177M.A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc.a.G-P Gypsum Corporation; Dens-Glass Gold.b.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond e(2)XP.c.Temple-Inland Inc.; GreenGlassd.United States Gypsum Co.; Securock.e.

Type and Thickness: Regular, 1/2 inch thick.2.Size: 48 by 120 inches for vertical installation.3.

FASTENERS2.4General: Provide fasteners of size and type indicated that comply with requirements specified in this articleA.for material and manufacture.

For roof and wall sheathing, provide fasteners with hot-dip zinc coating complying with ASTM A1.153/A 153M.

Nails, Brads, and Staples: ASTM F 1667.B.Power-Driven Fasteners: NES NER-272.C.Wood Screws: ASME B18.6.1.D.


SHEATHING 061600 - 1








Screws for Fastening Wood Structural Panels to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: ASTM C 954, except withE.wafer heads and reamer wings, length as recommended by screw manufacturer for material beingfastened.

For wall and roof sheathing panels, provide screws with organic-polymer or other1.corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according toASTM B 117.

Screws for Fastening Gypsum Sheathing to Cold-Formed Metal Framing: Steel drill screws, in lengthF.recommended by sheathing manufacturer for thickness of sheathing to be attached, with organic-polymeror other corrosion-protective coating having a salt-spray resistance of more than 800 hours according toASTM B 117.

For steel framing less than 0.0329 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 1002.1.For steel framing from 0.033 to 0.112 inch thick, use screws that comply with ASTM C 954.2.

SHEATHING JOINT-AND-PENETRATION TREATMENT MATERIALS2.5Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Elastomeric, medium-modulus, neutral-curing silicone jointA.sealant compatible with joint substrates formed by gypsum sheathing and other materials, recommendedby sheathing manufacturer for application indicated and complying with requirements for elastomericsealants specified in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."Sealant for Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing: Silicone emulsion sealant complying with ASTM C 834,B.compatible with sheathing tape and sheathing and recommended by tape and sheathing manufacturers foruse with glass-fiber sheathing tape and for covering exposed fasteners.

Sheathing Tape: Self-adhering glass-fiber tape, minimum 2 inches wide, 10 by 10 or 10 by 201.threads/inch, of type recommended by sheathing and tape manufacturers for use with siliconeemulsion sealant in sealing joints in glass-mat gypsum sheathing and with a history of successfulin-service use.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.1Do not use materials with defects that impair quality of sheathing or pieces that are too small to use withA.minimum number of joints or optimum joint arrangement. Arrange joints so that pieces do not spanbetween fewer than three support members.Cut panels at penetrations, edges, and other obstructions of work; fit tightly against abutting constructionB.unless otherwise indicated.Securely attach to substrate by fastening as indicated, complying with the following:C.

NES NER-272 for power-driven fasteners.1.Table 2304.9.1, "Fastening Schedule," in ICC's "International Building Code."2.Table R602.3(1), "Fastener Schedule for Structural Members," and Table R602.3(2), "Alternate3.Attachments," in ICC's "International Residential Code for One- and Two-Family Dwellings."

Use common wire nails unless otherwise indicated. Select fasteners of size that will not fully penetrateD.members where opposite side will be exposed to view or will receive finish materials. Make tightconnections. Install fasteners without splitting wood.Coordinate wall sheathing installation with flashing and joint-sealant installation so these materials areE.installed in sequence and manner that prevent exterior moisture from passing through completedassembly.Do not bridge building expansion joints; cut and space edges of panels to match spacing of structuralF.support elements.Coordinate sheathing installation with installation of materials installed over sheathing so sheathing is notG.exposed to precipitation or left exposed at end of the workday when rain is forecast.

GYPSUM SHEATHING INSTALLATION3.2Comply with GA-253 and with manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Fasten gypsum sheathing to wood framing with [nails] [or] [screws].1.Fasten gypsum sheathing to cold-formed metal framing with screws.2.Install boards with a 3/8-inch gap where non-load-bearing construction abuts structural elements.3.Install boards with a 1/4-inch gap where they abut masonry or similar materials that might retain4.moisture, to prevent wicking.

Apply fasteners so heads bear tightly against face of sheathing, but do not cut into facing.B.Horizontal Installation: Install sheathing with V-grooved edge down and tongue edge up. Interlock tongueC.with groove to bring long edges in contact with edges of adjacent boards without forcing. Abut ends ofboards over centers of studs, and stagger end joints of adjacent boards not less than one stud spacing.Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each steel stud.




Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and1.ends of boards.For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying2.self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing isinstalled.

Vertical Installation: Install board vertical edges centered over studs. Abut ends and edges of each boardD.with those of adjacent boards. Attach boards at perimeter and within field of board to each stud.

Space fasteners approximately 8 inches o.c. and set back a minimum of 3/8 inch from edges and1.ends of boards.For sheathing under stucco cladding, boards may be initially tacked in place with screws if overlying2.self-furring metal lath is screw-attached through sheathing to studs immediately after sheathing isinstalled.

Seal sheathing joints according to sheathing manufacturer's written instructions.E.Apply elastomeric sealant to joints and fasteners and trowel flat. Apply sufficient amount of sealant1.to completely cover joints and fasteners after troweling. Seal other penetrations and openings.Apply glass-fiber sheathing tape to glass-mat gypsum sheathing joints and apply and trowel2.silicone emulsion sealant to embed entire face of tape in sealant. Apply sealant to exposedfasteners with a trowel so fasteners are completely covered. Seal other penetrations and openings.





SECTION 064116 - PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS

GENERALPART 1 -



Plastic-laminate-faced architectural cabinets.1.Wood furring, blocking, shims, and hanging strips for installing plastic-laminate-faced architectural2.cabinets unless concealed within other construction before cabinet installation.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product.A.

Include data for fire-retardant treatment from chemical-treatment manufacturer and certification by1.treating plant that treated materials comply with requirements.

Product information or statement from manufacturer indicating that composite wood or agrifiber productsB.or adhesives used to fabricate the product have No Added Urea-Formaldehyde (NAUF).Shop Drawings: Show location of each item, dimensioned plans and elevations, large-scale details,C.attachment devices, and other components.

Show details full size.1.Show locations and sizes of furring, blocking, and hanging strips, including concealed blocking and2.reinforcement specified in other Sections.Show locations and sizes of cutouts and holes for electrical switches and outlets and other items3.installed in architectural plastic-laminate cabinets.Apply AWI Quality Certification Program label to Shop Drawings.4.

Samples for Initial Selection:D.Plastic laminates.1.PVC edge material.2.Thermoset decorative panels.3.

Samples for Verification:E.Plastic laminates, 8 by 10 inches, for each type, color, pattern, and surface finishand specified edge1.material applied to one edge.Corner pieces as follows:2.

Cabinet-front frame joints between stiles and rails, as well as exposed end pieces, 18a.inches high by 18 inches wide by 6 inches deep.Miter joints for standing trim.b.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Product Certificates: For each type of product.A.

Composite wood and agrifiber products.1.Thermoset decorative panels.2.High-pressure decorative laminate.3.Glass.4.Adhesives.5.

Woodwork Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.B.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Fabricator Qualifications: Shop that employs skilled workers who custom fabricate products similar toA.those required for this Project and whose products have a record of successful in-service performance.Shop is a certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.Installer Qualifications: Certified participant in AWI's Quality Certification Program.B.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticC.effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Build mockups of typical plastic-laminate cabinets as shown on Drawings.1.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed2.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS 064116 - 1


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Do not deliver cabinets until painting and similar operations that could damage woodwork have beenA.completed in installation areas. If cabinets must be stored in other than installation areas, store only inareas where environmental conditions comply with requirements specified in "Field Conditions" Article.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work isA.complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature and relative humidity at occupancylevels during the remainder of the construction period.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install cabinets until building is enclosed, wet work isB.complete, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining temperature between 60 and 90 deg F andrelative humidity between 25 and 55 percent during the remainder of the construction period.Field Measurements: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, verify dimensions of otherC.construction by field measurements before fabrication, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.Coordinate fabrication schedule with construction progress to avoid delaying the Work.

Locate concealed framing, blocking, and reinforcements that support cabinets by field1.measurements before being enclosed, and indicate measurements on Shop Drawings.

Established Dimensions: Where cabinets are indicated to fit to other construction, establish dimensionsD.for areas where cabinets are to fit. Provide allowance for trimming at site, and coordinate construction toensure that actual dimensions correspond to established dimensions.

COORDINATION1.8Coordinate sizes and locations of framing, blocking, furring, reinforcements, and other related units ofA.Work specified in other Sections to ensure that cabinets can be supported and installed as indicated.Hardware Coordination: Distribute copies of approved hardware schedule specified in Section 087100B."Door Hardware" to fabricator of architectural woodwork; coordinate Shop Drawings and fabrication withhardware requirements.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113, "Sustainable Design Requirements."

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED ARCHITECTURAL CABINETS2.2Quality Standard: Unless otherwise indicated, comply with the "Architectural Woodwork Standards" forA.grades of architectural plastic-laminate cabinets indicated for construction, finishes, installation, and otherrequirements.

Provide labels and certificates from AWI certification program indicating that woodwork, including1.installation, complies with requirements of grades specified.Retain subparagraph below only if Drawings and Specifications are more restrictive than quality2.standard.The Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in the quality standard and3.additional requirements beyond those of the quality standard. Comply with those selections andrequirements in addition to the quality standard.

Grade: Custom.B.Type of Construction: Frameless.C.Cabinet, Door, and Drawer Front Interface Style: Flush overlay.D.High-Pressure Decorative Laminate: NEMA LD 3, grades as indicated or if not indicated, as required byE.woodwork quality standard.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Abet Laminati, Inc.a.Formica Corporation.b.Lamin-Art, Inc.c.Panolam Industries International, Inc.d.Wilsonart International; Div. of Premark International, Inc.e.

Laminate Cladding for Exposed Surfaces:F.Horizontal Surfaces: Grade HGS.1.Vertical Surfaces: Grade VGS.2.










Edges: Grade HGS.3.Pattern Direction: Vertically for drawer fronts, doors, and fixed panels.4.

Edgebanding for Plastic Laminate Clad Cabinets: Rigid PVC extrusions, through color with satin finish, 3G.mm thick at counter tops, doors, drawer fronts, and exposed shelving on front and back edges (front edgeonly for fixed shelving); and 1 mm thick elsewhere, including edges of shelving within cabinets.Materials for Semiexposed Surfaces:H.

Surfaces Other Than Drawer Bodies: High-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade CLS.1.Edges of Plastic-Laminate Shelves: PVC tape, 0.018-inchminimum thickness, matchinga.laminate in color, pattern, and finish.Edges of Thermoset Decorative Panel Shelves: PVC or polyester edge banding.b.For semiexposed backs of panels with exposed plastic-laminate surfaces, provide surface ofc.high-pressure decorative laminate, NEMA LD 3, Grade VGS.

Drawer Sides and Backs: Thermoset decorative panels with PVC or polyester edge banding.2.Drawer Bottoms: Hardwood plywood.3.

Dust Panels: 1/4-inch plywood or tempered hardboard above compartments and drawers unless locatedI.directly under tops.Concealed Backs of Panels with Exposed Plastic-Laminate Surfaces: High-pressure decorative laminate,J.NEMA LD 3, Grade BKL.Drawer Construction: Fabricate with exposed fronts fastened to subfront with mounting screws fromK.interior of body.

Join subfronts, backs, and sides with glued dovetail joints.1.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: Provide materials and products that result in colors and textures ofL.exposed laminate surfaces complying with the following requirements:

As scheduled.1.

WOOD MATERIALS2.3Wood Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referenced quality standard for eachA.type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

Wood Moisture Content: 5 to 10 percent.1.Composite Wood and Agrifiber Products: Provide materials that comply with requirements of referencedB.quality standard for each type of woodwork and quality grade specified unless otherwise indicated.

Medium-Density Fiberboard: ANSI A208.2, Grade 130.1.Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade M-2, made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.2.Softwood Plywood: DOC PS 1, medium-density overlay.3.

CABINET HARDWARE AND ACCESSORIES2.4General: Provide cabinet hardware and accessory materials associated with architectural cabinets exceptA.for items specified in Section 087111 "Door Hardware (Descriptive Specification)."Frameless Concealed Hinges (European Type): BHMA A156.9, B01602, 135 degrees of opening,B.self-closing.Wire Pulls: Back mounted, solid metal, 4 inches long, 5/16 inch in diameter.C.Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: BHMA A156.9, B04071; with shelf rests, B04081.D.Shelf Rests: BHMA A156.9, B04013; metal.E.Drawer Slides: BHMA A156.9.F.

Grade 1 and Grade 2: Side mounted and extending under bottom edge of drawer; full-extension1.type; zinc-plated steel with polymer rollers.Grade 1HD-100 and Grade 1HD-200: Side mounted; full-extension type; zinc-plated-steel2.ball-bearing slides.For drawers not more than 3 inches high and not more than 24 inches wide, provide Grade 2.3.For drawers more than 3 inches high but not more than 6 inches high and not more than 24 inches4.wide, provide Grade 1.For drawers more than 6 inches high or more than 24 incheswide, provide Grade 1HD-100.5.For computer keyboard shelves, provide Grade 1.6.For trash bins not more than 20 inches high and 16 incheswide, provide Grade 1HD-100.7.

Door Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07121.G.Drawer Locks: BHMA A156.11, E07041.H.Door and Drawer Silencers: BHMA A156.16, L03011.I.Hanging Rail System for Wall Cabinets:J.

Hafele; Item No. 290.11.901 Wall and Rail and Suspension Fitting, Item No. 290.00.700 and 701.1.Exposed Hardware Finishes: For exposed hardware, provide finish that complies with BHMA A156.18 forK.BHMA finish number indicated.




Satin Chromium Plated: BHMA 626 for brass or bronze base; BHMA 652 for steel base.1.Satin Stainless Steel: BHMA 630.2.

For concealed hardware, provide manufacturer's standard finish that complies with product classL.requirements in BHMA A156.9.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.5Furring, Blocking, Shims, and Hanging Strips: Fire-retardant-treated softwood lumber, kiln dried to lessA.than 15 percent moisture content.Anchors: Select material, type, size, and finish required for each substrate for secure anchorage. ProvideB.metal expansion sleeves or expansion bolts for post-installed anchors. Use nonferrous-metal or hot-dipgalvanized anchors and inserts at inside face of exterior walls and at floors.Adhesives: Do not use adhesives that contain urea formaldehyde.C.Adhesive for Bonding Plastic Laminate: Unpigmented contact cement.D.

Adhesive for Bonding Edges: Hot-melt adhesive or adhesive specified above for faces.1.

FABRICATION2.6Fabricate cabinets to dimensions, profiles, and details indicated.A.Complete fabrication, including assembly and hardware application, to maximum extent possible beforeB.shipment to Project site. Disassemble components only as necessary for shipment and installation.Where necessary for fitting at site, provide ample allowance for scribing, trimming, and fitting.

Notify Architect seven days in advance of the dates and times woodwork fabrication will be1.complete.Trial fit assemblies at fabrication shop that cannot be shipped completely assembled. Install2.dowels, screws, bolted connectors, and other fastening devices that can be removed after trialfitting. Verify that various parts fit as intended and check measurements of assemblies against fieldmeasurements before disassembling for shipment.

Shop-cut openings to maximum extent possible to receive hardware, appliances, electrical work, andC.similar items. Locate openings accurately and use templates or roughing-in diagrams to produceaccurately sized and shaped openings. Sand edges of cutouts to remove splinters and burrs.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1Before installation, condition cabinets to average prevailing humidity conditions in installation areas.A.Before installing cabinets, examine shop-fabricated work for completion and complete work as required.B.

INSTALLATION3.2Grade: Install cabinets to comply with same grade as item to be installed.A.Assemble cabinets and complete fabrication at Project site to the extent that it was not completed in theB.shop.Install cabinets level, plumb, true, and straight. Shim as required with concealed shims. Install level andC.plumb to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 96 inches.Scribe and cut cabinets to fit adjoining work, refinish cut surfaces, and repair damaged finish at cuts.D.Anchor cabinets to anchors or blocking built in or directly attached to substrates. Secure with countersunk,E.concealed fasteners and blind nailing. Use fine finishing nails[ or finishing screws] for exposedfastening, countersunk and filled flush with woodwork.

Use filler matching finish of items being installed.1.Cabinets: Install without distortion so doors and drawers fit openings properly and are accurately aligned.F.Adjust hardware to center doors and drawers in openings and to provide unencumbered operation.Complete installation of hardware and accessory items as indicated.

Install cabinets with no more than 1/8 inch in 96-inch sag, bow, or other variation from a straight1.line.Fasten wall cabinets through back, near top and bottom, and at ends not more than 16 inches o.c.2.with No. 10 wafer-head sheet metal screws through metal backing or metal framing behind wallfinish.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.3Repair damaged and defective cabinets, where possible, to eliminate functional and visual defects; whereA.not possible to repair, replace woodwork. Adjust joinery for uniform appearance.Clean, lubricate, and adjust hardware.B.




Clean cabinets on exposed and semiexposed surfaces.C.





SECTION 072100 - THERMAL INSULATION

GENERALPART 1 -



Glass-fiber blanket insulation.1.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product indicated.A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Surface-Burning Characteristics: As determined by testing identical products according to ASTM E 84 byA.a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration due to moisture, soiling, andA.other sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions forhandling, storing, and protecting during installation.Protect foam-plastic board insulation as follows:B.

Do not expose to sunlight except to necessary extent for period of installation and concealment.1.Protect against ignition at all times. Do not deliver foam-plastic board materials to Project site2.before installation time.Quickly complete installation and concealment of foam-plastic board insulation in each area of3.construction.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

GENERAL REQUIREMENTS2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."

GLASS-FIBER BLANKET INSULATION2.2Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

CertainTeed Corporation.1.Guardian Building Products, Inc.2.Johns Manville.3.Knauf Insulation.4.Owens Corning.5.

Unfaced, Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread andB.smoke-developed indexes of 25 and 50, respectively, per ASTM E 84; passing ASTM E 136 forcombustion characteristics.Sustainability Requirements: Provide glass-fiber blanket insulation as follows:C.

Free of Formaldehyde: Insulation manufactured with 100 percent acrylic binders and no1.formaldehyde.Low Emitting: Insulation tested according to ASTM D 5116 and shown to emit less than 0.05-ppm2.formaldehyde.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

PREPARATION3.1Clean substrates of substances that are harmful to insulation or that interfere with insulation attachment.A.


THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 1

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?ulid=4664&mf=04&mf=95&src=wd&mf=04&src=wd

http://www.specagent.com/LookUp/?uid=123456799715&mf=04&&mf=04&src=wd






INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.2Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and applicationsA.indicated.Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed to ice, rain, orB.snow at any time.Extend insulation to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly around obstructions and fillC.voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.Provide sizes to fit applications indicated and selected from manufacturer's standard thicknesses, widths,D.and lengths. Apply single layer of insulation units to produce thickness indicated unless multiple layers areotherwise shown or required to make up total thickness.

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION FOR FRAMED CONSTRUCTION3.3Apply insulation units to substrates by method indicated, complying with manufacturer's writtenA.instructions. If no specific method is indicated, bond units to substrate with adhesive or use mechanicalanchorage to provide permanent placement and support of units.Glass-Fiber Blanket Insulation: Install in cavities formed by framing members according to the followingB.requirements:

Use insulation widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than1.one length is required to fill the cavities, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.Place insulation in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of2.insulation and adjoining framing members.Maintain 3-inch clearance of insulation around recessed lighting fixtures not rated for or protected3.from contact with insulation.For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets4.mechanically and support faced blankets by taping flanges of insulation to flanges of metal studs.Vapor-Retarder-Faced Blankets: Tape joints and ruptures in vapor-retarder facings, and seal each5.continuous area of insulation to ensure airtight installation.

INSTALLATION OF INSULATION IN CEILINGS FOR SOUND ATTENUATION3.4Where glass-fiber blankets are indicated for sound attenuation above ceilings, install blanket insulationA.over entire ceiling area in thicknesses indicated. Extend insulation 48 inches up either side of partitions.

PROTECTION3.5Protect installed insulation from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physical abuse, and otherA.causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuse and cannot beconcealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.

INSULATION SCHEDULE3.6Insulation Type: Unfaced, glass-fiber blanket insulation R-19 value, for use at exterior walls and otherA.locations where integral vapor barrier is not required.



THERMAL INSULATION 072100 - 2


SECTION 072600 - UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes:A.

Sheet materials for controlling vapor diffusion through concrete slabs-on-grade.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3Written certification from the manufacturer that the materials and their application as noted in thisA.Specification and on the Drawings is appropriate and approved for this project.Product Data: Manufacturer's product data, specifications, and installation instructions. Include vaporB.barrier manufacturer's requirements for placement, seaming and pipe book installation.Installer Certificates: Signed by manufacturers certifying that installers comply with requirements.C.Submit evidence that Installer's existing company has minimum of 5-years continuous experience inD.application of specified materials.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Installer Qualifications: An experienced installer (applicator) who is acceptable to manufacturer, who hasA.completed applications similar in material and extent to that required for this Project, and whose work hasresulted in construction with a record of successful in-service performance.Source Limitations: Vapor Barrier and components to be from one source from a single manufacturer.B.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5Deliver materials in original packages and containers, with seals unbroken, bearing manufacturer's labelsA.indicating brand name and directions for storage and application.Store materials in a clean dry location in accordance with manufacturer's written instructions to preventB.deterioration from moisture or other detrimental effects.Stack membrane on elevated wood platform to eliminate warping.C.Protect materials during handling and application to prevent damage or contamination.D.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.6Environmental Limitations: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for substrateA.temperature and moisture content, ambient temperature and humidity, ventilation, and other conditionsaffecting materials performance. Do not apply on frozen ground.Close areas to traffic during application and for time period after application recommended in writing byB.manufacturer.

COORDINATION1.7Coordinate placement of sheet vapor barrier with Division 03 sections.A.Coordinate placement of sealer and hardener with Division 03 sections and with requirements of finishB.flooring products, including adhesives, specified in Division 09 Sections.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1Sheet Vapor Barrier:A.

Type: 15 mil polyolefin film meeting requirements of ASTM E 1745, Class A.1.Water Vapor Transmittance (After mandatory condition per ASTM E154 sections 8,11,12,13):2.Maximum perm rating of 0.01 as tested in accordance with ASTM E 1745 Section 7.Strength: ASTM E 1745: Class A.3.

Acceptable Products:B.Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.

Stego Wrap Vapor Barrier by Stego Industries, LLC, 15 mils.a.Zero-Perm Vapor Barrier by Alumiseal.b.


UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER 072600 - 1


Perminator by W.R. Meadows.c.Xtreme by Tex-Trude.d.Husky Yellow Guard.e.

Accessories:C.Bonding Agent: Manufacturer's approved or recommended vapor barrier bonding agent.1.Sealing and Seaming Tape: High density polyethylene tape a minimum of 4 inches in width,2.compatible with vapor barrier membrane, and manufactured by or recommended by vapor barriermembrane manufacturer. Tape for joints shall have at least the same permeability rating as thevapor barrier specified.Vapor Proofing Mastic: Manufacturer's approved or recommended vapor proofing mastic with the3.same permeability rating as the vapor barrier specified.Pipe Boot: Construct pipe boots from vapor barrier material and pressure sensitive tape in4.accordance with manufacturer's instructions.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine surfaces to receive membrane. Notify Architect if surfaces are not acceptable. Do not beginA.surface preparation or application until unacceptable conditions have been corrected.

PREPARATION3.2Level or tamp or roll aggregate, sand or granular base.A.

INSTALLATION3.3Vapor Barrier:A.

Place, protect, and repair vapor barrier sheets according to ASTM E 1643 and manufacturer's1.written instructions.Unroll vapor barrier with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the concrete pour.2.Install vapor barrier without tears, voids, and holes. Lap ends and edges as recommended by3.manufacturer, but not less than 6 inches over adjacent sheets. Seal laps with tape.Turn up sheets at perimeter, at footings and vertical walls, and against penetrations, and seal joints4.with tape.Seal joints, tears, holes, perimeter, and penetrations through vapor with tape in accordance with5.manufacturer's recommendations.Point exposed edges with pointing mastic to prevent water from traveling under membrane.6.Adhere membrane to vertical surfaces with adhesive.7.

PROTECTION3.4Protect complete membrane from damage. Prior to pouring concrete, inspect membrane for punctures orA.damage and repair as required to maintain vapor barrier integrity.



UNDER SLAB VAPOR BARRIER 072600 - 2


SECTION 072726 - FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes fluid-applied, vapor-permeable membrane air barriers.A.

DEFINITIONS1.3Air-Barrier Material: A primary element that provides a continuous barrier to the movement of air.A.Air-Barrier Accessory: A transitional component of the air barrier that provides continuity.B.Air-Barrier Assembly: The collection of air-barrier materials and accessory materials applied to an opaqueC.wall, including joints and junctions to abutting construction, to control air movement through the wall.


Review air-barrier requirements and installation, special details, mockups, air-leakage and bond1.testing, air-barrier protection, and work scheduling that covers air barriers.


Include manufacturer's written instructions for evaluating, preparing, and treating substrate;1.technical data; and tested physical and performance properties of products.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.6Qualification Data: For Installer. Include list of ABAA-certified installers and supervisors employed by theA.Installer, who work on Project.Product Certificates: From air-barrier manufacturer, certifying compatibility of air barriers and accessoryB.materials with Project materials that connect to or that come in contact with the barrier.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.7Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved byA.manufacturer.

Installer shall be licensed by ABAA according to ABAA's Quality Assurance Program and shall1.employ ABAA-certified installers and supervisors on Project.

Mockups: Build mockups to set quality standards for materials and execution.B.

Build integrated mockups of exterior wall assembly , 150 sq. ft., incorporating backup wall1.construction, external cladding, window, storefront, door frame and sill, insulation, ties and otherpenetrations, and flashing to demonstrate surface preparation, crack and joint treatment,application of air barriers, and sealing of gaps, terminations, and penetrations of air-barrierassembly.

Coordinate construction of mockups to permit inspection by Owner's testing agency of aira.barrier before external insulation and cladding are installed.Include junction with roofing membrane, building corner condition, and foundation wallb.intersection.If Architect determines mockups do not comply with requirements, reconstruct mockups andc.apply air barrier until mockups are approved.

Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents2.contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.


FLUID-APPLIED MEMBRANE AIR BARRIERS 072726 - 1


Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed3.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.8Remove and replace liquid materials that cannot be applied within their stated shelf life.A.Protect stored materials from direct sunlight.B.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.9Environmental Limitations: Apply air barrier within the range of ambient and substrate temperaturesA.recommended by air-barrier manufacturer.

Protect substrates from environmental conditions that affect air-barrier performance.1.Do not apply air barrier to a damp or wet substrate or during snow, rain, fog, or mist.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS, GENERAL2.1Source Limitations: Obtain primary air-barrier materials and air-barrier accessories from single sourceA.from single manufacturer.VOC Limits: Any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings used inside the weatherproofing system andB.applied on site shall meet the VOC limits indicated in Section 018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.2General: Air barrier shall be capable of performing as a continuous vapor-permeable air barrier and as aA.liquid-water drainage plane flashed to discharge to the exterior incidental condensation or waterpenetration. Air-barrier assemblies shall be capable of accommodating substrate movement and ofsealing substrate expansion and control joints, construction material changes, penetrations, tie-ins toinstalled waterproofing, and transitions at perimeter conditions without deterioration and air leakageexceeding specified limits.

VAPOR-PERMEABLE MEMBRANE AIR-BARRIER2.3Fluid-Applied, Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Elastomeric, modified bituminous or syntheticA.polymer membrane.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.

Elastomeric, Modified Bituminous Membrane:a.Meadows, W. R., Inc.; Air-Shield LMP.1)Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 220R.2)

Synthetic Polymer Membrane:b.Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; Barritech VP.1)Grace, W. R., & Co. - Conn.; Perm-A-Barrier VP.2)Henry Company; Air-Bloc 31 typical and Air-Bloc 33 at rainscreen applications.3)Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; ExoAir 230.4)

Physical and Performance Properties:2.

Air Permeance: Maximum 0.004 cfm/sq. ft. of surface area at 1.57-lbf/sq. ft. pressurea.difference; ASTM E 2178.Vapor Permeance: Minimum 10 perms; ASTM E 96/E 96M.b.Ultimate Elongation: Minimum 200 percent; ASTM D 412, Die C.c.

ACCESSORY MATERIALS2.4General: Accessory materials recommended by air-barrier manufacturer to produce a complete air-barrierA.assembly and compatible with primary air-barrier material.Primer: Liquid primer recommended for substrate by air-barrier material manufacturer.B.Butyl Strip: Vapor retarding, 30 to 40 mils thick, self-adhering; polyethylene-film-reinforced top surfaceC.laminated to layer of butyl adhesive with release liner backing.Adhesive and Tape: Air-barrier manufacturer's standard adhesive and pressure-sensitive adhesive tape.D.




Stainless-Steel Sheet: ASTM A 240/A 240M, Type 304, 0.0187 inch thick, and Series 300 stainless-steelE.fasteners.Sprayed Polyurethane Foam Sealant: One- or two-component, foamed-in-place, polyurethane foamF.sealant, 1.5- to 2.0-lb/cu. ft density; flame-spread index of 25 or less according to ASTM E 162; with primerand noncorrosive substrate cleaner recommended by foam sealant manufacturer.Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Vapor retarding, 40 mils thick, smooth surfaced, self-adhering;G.consisting of 36 mils of rubberized asphalt laminated to a 4-mil- thick polyethylene film with release linerbacking.Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Manufacturer's standard system consisting of cured low-modulusH.silicone extrusion, sized to fit opening widths, with a single-component, neutral-curing, Class 100/50(low-modulus) silicone sealant for bonding extrusions to substrates.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Dow Corning Corporation; 123 Silicone Seal.a.Pecora Corporation; Sil-Span.b.Tremco Incorporated, an RPM company; Spectrem Simple Seal.c.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements andA.other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify that substrates are sound and free of oil, grease, dirt, excess mortar, or other contaminants.1.Verify that concrete has cured and aged for minimum time period recommended by air-barrier2.manufacturer.Verify that concrete is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by plastic sheet3.method according to ASTM D 4263.Verify that masonry joints are flush and completely filled with mortar.4.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

SURFACE PREPARATION3.2Clean, prepare, treat, and seal substrate according to manufacturer's written instructions. Provide clean,A.dust-free, and dry substrate for air-barrier application.Mask off adjoining surfaces not covered by air barrier to prevent spillage and overspray affecting otherB.construction.Remove grease, oil, bitumen, form-release agents, paints, curing compounds, and other penetratingC.contaminants or film-forming coatings from concrete.Remove excess mortar from masonry ties, shelf angles, and other obstructions.D.At changes in substrate plane, apply sealant or termination mastic beads at sharp corners and edges toE.form a smooth transition from one plane to another.Cover gaps in substrate plane and form a smooth transition from one substrate plane to another withF.stainless-steel sheet mechanically fastened to structural framing to provide continuous support for airbarrier.

JOINT TREATMENT3.3Concrete and Masonry: Prepare, treat, rout, and fill joints and cracks in substrate according to ASTM CA.1193 and air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Remove dust and dirt from joints and crackscomplying with ASTM D 4258 before coating surfaces.

Prime substrate and apply a single thickness of air-barrier manufacturer's recommended1.preparation coat extending a minimum of 3 inches along each side of joints and cracks. Apply adouble thickness of fluid air-barrier material and embed a joint reinforcing strip in preparation coat.

Gypsum Sheathing: Fill joints greater than 1/4 inch with sealant according to ASTM C 1193 and air-barrierB.manufacturer's written instructions. Apply first layer of fluid air-barrier material at joints. Tape joints withjoint reinforcing strip after first layer is dry. Apply a second layer of fluid air-barrier material over jointreinforcing strip.

TRANSITION STRIP INSTALLATION3.4General: Install strips, transition strips, and accessory materials according to air-barrier manufacturer'sA.written instructions to form a seal with adjacent construction and maintain a continuous air barrier.




Coordinate the installation of air barrier with installation of roofing membrane and base flashing to1.ensure continuity of air barrier with roofing membrane.Install butyl strip on roofing membrane or base flashing so that a minimum of 3 inches of coverage2.is achieved over each substrate.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry. Limit priming to areas that will be coveredB.by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas exposed for more than 24 hours.

Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve1.required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

Connect and seal exterior wall air-barrier material continuously to roofing-membrane air barrier, concreteC.below-grade structures, floor-to-floor construction, exterior glazing and window systems, glazedcurtain-wall systems, storefront systems, exterior louvers, exterior door framing, and other constructionused in exterior wall openings, using accessory materials.Wall Openings: Prime concealed, perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, andD.doors. Apply modified bituminous transition strip preformed silicone-sealant extrusion so that a minimumof 3 inches of coverage is achieved over each substrate. Maintain 3 inches of full contact over firm bearingto perimeter frames with not less than 1 inch of full contact.

Modified Bituminous Transition Strip: Roll firmly to enhance adhesion.1.Preformed Silicone-Sealant Extrusion: Set in full bed of silicone sealant applied to walls, frame,2.and air-barrier material.

Fill gaps in perimeter frame surfaces of windows, curtain walls, storefronts, and doors, and miscellaneousE.penetrations of air-barrier material with foam sealant.Seal strips and transition strips around masonry reinforcing or ties and penetrations with terminationF.mastic.Seal exposed edges of strips at seams, cuts, penetrations, and terminations not concealed by metalG.counterflashings or ending in reglets with termination mastic.Repair punctures, voids, and deficient lapped seams in strips and transition strips. Slit and flattenH.fishmouths and blisters. Patch with transition strips extending 6 inches beyond repaired areas in stripdirection.

FLUID AIR-BARRIER MEMBRANE INSTALLATION3.5General: Apply fluid air-barrier material to form a seal with strips and transition strips and to achieve aA.continuous air barrier according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions. Apply fluid air-barriermaterial within manufacturer's recommended application temperature ranges.

Apply primer to substrates at required rate and allow it to dry.1.Limit priming to areas that will be covered by fluid air-barrier material on same day. Reprime areas2.exposed for more than 24 hours.Prime glass-fiber-surfaced gypsum sheathing with number of prime coats needed to achieve3.required bond, with adequate drying time between coats.

Membrane Air Barriers: Apply a continuous unbroken air-barrier membrane to substrates according to theB.following thickness. Apply air-barrier membrane in full contact around protrusions such as masonry ties.

Vapor-Permeable Membrane Air Barrier: Total dry film thickness as recommended in writing by1.manufacturer to meet performance requirements, but not less than 40-mil dry film thickness.

Apply strip and transition strip a minimum of 1 inch onto cured air-barrier material or strip and transitionC.strip over cured air-barrier material overlapping 3 inches onto each surface according to air-barriermanufacturer's written instructions.Do not cover air barrier until it has been tested and inspected by Owner's testing agency.D.Correct deficiencies in or remove air barrier that does not comply with requirements; repair substrates andE.reapply air-barrier components.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.6Testing Agency: Owner will engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.A.Inspections: Air-barrier materials, accessories, and installation are subject to inspection for complianceB.with requirements. Inspections may include the following:

Continuity of air-barrier system has been achieved throughout the building envelope with no gaps1.or holes.Continuous structural support of air-barrier system has been provided.2.Masonry and concrete surfaces are smooth, clean, and free of cavities, protrusions, and mortar3.droppings.




Site conditions for application temperature and dryness of substrates have been maintained.4.Maximum exposure time of materials to UV deterioration has not been exceeded.5.Surfaces have been primed, if applicable.6.Laps in strips and transition strips have complied with minimum requirements and have been7.shingled in the correct direction (or mastic has been applied on exposed edges), with nofishmouths.Strips and transition strips have been firmly adhered to substrate.8.Compatible materials have been used.9.Transitions at changes in direction and structural support at gaps have been provided.10.Connections between assemblies (air-barrier and sealants) have complied with requirements for11.cleanliness, surface preparation and priming, structural support, integrity, and continuity of seal.All penetrations have been sealed.12.

Tests: As determined by Owner's testing agency from among the following tests:C.Adhesion Testing: Air-barrier assemblies will be tested for minimum air-barrier adhesion of 301.lbf/sq. in. according to ASTM D 4541 for each 600 sq. ft. of installed air barrier or part thereof.

Air barriers will be considered defective if they do not pass tests and inspections.D.

Apply additional air-barrier material, according to manufacturer's written instructions, where1.inspection results indicate insufficient thickness.Remove and replace deficient air-barrier components for retesting as specified above.2.

Repair damage to air barriers caused by testing; follow manufacturer's written instructions.E.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.7Protect air-barrier system from damage during application and remainder of construction period, accordingA.to manufacturer's written instructions.

Protect air barrier from exposure to UV light and harmful weather exposure as required by1.manufacturer. If exposed to these conditions for more than 30 days, remove and replace air barrieror install additional, full-thickness, air-barrier application after repairing and preparing theoverexposed membrane according to air-barrier manufacturer's written instructions.Protect air barrier from contact with incompatible materials and sealants not approved by air-barrier2.manufacturer.

Clean spills, stains, and soiling from construction that would be exposed in the completed work usingB.cleaning agents and procedures recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.Remove masking materials after installation.C.





SECTION 074213.23 - METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes metal composite material wall panels, installed using dry seal method of installation.A.


Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, metal composite material panel Installer,1.metal composite material panel manufacturer's representative, structural-support Installer, andinstallers whose work interfaces with or affects metal composite material panels, including installersof doors, windows, and louvers.Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,2.equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.Review methods and procedures related to metal composite material panel installation, including3.manufacturer's written instructions.Examine support conditions for compliance with requirements, including alignment between and4.attachment to structural members.Review flashings, special siding details, wall penetrations, openings, and condition of other5.construction that affect metal composite material panels.Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance, certificates, and tests and6.inspections if applicable.Review temporary protection requirements for metal composite material panel assembly during and7.after installation.Review procedures for repair of panels damaged after installation.8.Document proceedings, including corrective measures and actions required, and furnish copy of9.record to each participant.


Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and1.profiles, and finishes for each type of panel and accessory.

Shop Drawings:B.Include fabrication and installation layouts of metal composite material panels; details of edge1.conditions, joints, panel profiles, corners, anchorages, attachment assembly, trim, flashings,closures, and accessories; and special details.Accessories: Include details of the flashing, trim and anchorage, at a scale of not less than 1-1/22.inches per 12 inches.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of metal composite material panel indicated withC.factory-applied color finishes.

Include similar Samples of trim and accessories involving color selection.1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved byA.manufacturer.Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticB.effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

Build mockup of typical metal composite material panel assembly as shown on Drawings, including1.corner, supports, attachments, and accessories.Water-Spray Test: Conduct water-spray test of mockup of metal composite material panel2.assembly, testing for water penetration according to AAMA 501.2.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents3.contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed4.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.


METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS 074213.23 - 1


DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Deliver components, metal composite material panels, and other manufactured items so as not to beA.damaged or deformed. Package metal composite material panels for protection during transportation andhandling.Unload, store, and erect metal composite material panels in a manner to prevent bending, warping,B.twisting, and surface damage.Stack metal composite material panels horizontally on platforms or pallets, covered with suitableC.weathertight and ventilated covering. Store metal composite material panels to ensure dryness, withpositive slope for drainage of water. Do not store metal composite material panels in contact with othermaterials that might cause staining, denting, or other surface damage.Retain strippable protective covering on metal composite material panels during installation.D.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permitA.assembly of metal composite material panels to be performed according to manufacturers' writteninstructions and warranty requirements.

COORDINATION1.8Coordinate metal composite material panel installation with rain drainage work, flashing, trim, constructionA.of soffits, and other adjoining work to provide a leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.

WARRANTY1.9Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replaceA.components of metal composite material panel systems that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.Structural failures including rupturing, cracking, or puncturing.a.Deterioration of metals and other materials beyond normal weathering.b.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.2.Special Warranty on Panel Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repairB.finish or replace metal composite material panels that show evidence of deterioration of factory-appliedfinishes within specified warranty period.

Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:1.Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.a.Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.b.Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.c.

Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1Structural Performance: Provide metal composite material panel systems capable of withstanding theA.effects of the following loads, based on testing according to ASTM E 330:

Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.1.Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.2.Deflection Limits: For wind loads, no greater than 1/240 of the span.3.

Air Infiltration: Air leakage of not more than 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. when tested according to ASTM E 283 at theB.following test-pressure difference:

Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..1.Water Penetration under Static Pressure: No water penetration when tested according to ASTM E 331 atC.the following test-pressure difference:

Test-Pressure Difference: 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..1.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes byD.preventing buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure ofconnections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due toboth solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.1.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify productsE.with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.





Combustibility: Metal composite material wall panels shall meet the requirements for NFPA 285, StandardF.Method of Test for the Evaluation of Fire Propagation Characteristics of Exterior Non-Load Bearing WallAssemblies Containing Combustible Components, in exterior walls in Type I, II, III, or IV construction thatare greater than 40 feet in height.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL WALL PANELS2.2Metal Composite Material Wall Panel Systems: Provide factory-formed and -assembled, metal compositeA.material wall panels fabricated from two metal facings that are bonded to a solid, extruded thermoplasticcore; formed into profile for installation method indicated. Include attachment assembly components, panelstiffeners, and accessories required for weathertight system.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.3A Composites USA, Inc.; Alucobond Plus.a.Alcoa Inc.; Reynobond FR.b.CENTRIA Architectural Systems; Formabond Wall System.c.

Aluminum-Faced Composite Wall Panels: Formed with 0.020-inch- thick, coil-coated aluminum sheetB.facings.

Panel Thickness: 0.157 inch.1.Core: Standard.2.Exterior Finish: Two-coat fluoropolymer.3.

Color: Match Architect's samples.a.Attachment Assembly Components: Formed from extruded aluminum.C.Attachment Assembly: Manufacturer's standard Clip.D.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.3Miscellaneous Metal Subframing and Furring: ASTM C 645, cold-formed, metallic-coated steel sheetA.ASTM A 653/A 653M, G90 coating designation or ASTM A 792/A 792M, Class AZ50 aluminum-zinc-alloycoating designation unless otherwise indicated. Provide manufacturer's standard sections as required forsupport and alignment of metal composite material panel system.Panel Accessories: Provide components required for a complete, weathertight panel system including trim,B.copings, fasciae, mullions, sills, corner units, clips, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, andsimilar items. Match material and finish of metal composite material panels unless otherwise indicated.Flashing and Trim: Provide flashing and trim formed from same material as metal composite materialC.panels as required to seal against weather and to provide finished appearance. Locations include, but arenot limited to, bases, drips, sills, jambs, corners, endwalls, framed openings, rakes, fasciae, parapet caps,soffits, reveals, and fillers. Finish flashing and trim with same finish system as adjacent metal compositematerial panels.Panel Fasteners: Self-tapping screws designed to withstand design loads. Provide exposed fasteners withD.heads matching color of metal composite material panels by means of plastic caps or factory-appliedcoating. Provide EPDM or PVC sealing washers for exposed fasteners.Panel Sealants: ASTM C 920; elastomeric polyurethane or silicone sealant; of type, grade, class, and useE.classifications required to seal joints in metal composite material panels and remain weathertight; and asrecommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

FABRICATION2.4General: Fabricate and finish metal composite material panels and accessories at the factory, byA.manufacturer's standard procedures and processes, as necessary to fulfill indicated performancerequirements demonstrated by laboratory testing. Comply with indicated profiles and with dimensional andstructural requirements.Fabricate metal composite material panel joints with factory-installed captive gaskets or separator stripsB.that provide a weathertight seal and prevent metal-to-metal contact, and that minimize noise frommovements.Sheet Metal Flashing and Trim: Fabricate flashing and trim to comply with manufacturer'sC.recommendations and recommendations in SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" that apply todesign, dimensions, metal, and other characteristics of item indicated.

Form exposed sheet metal accessories that are without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool1.marks and that are true to line and levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems.Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with2.epoxy seam sealer. Rivet joints for additional strength.Seams for Other Than Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams in accessories with flat-lock seams.3.Tin edges to be seamed, form seams, and solder.







Sealed Joints: Form non-expansion, but movable, joints in metal to accommodate sealant and to4.comply with SMACNA standards.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Exposed fasteners are not allowed on5.faces of accessories exposed to view.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or from6.compatible, noncorrosive metal recommended in writing by metal panel manufacturer.

Size: As recommended by SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" or metal walla.panel manufacturer for application but not less than thickness of metal being secured.

FINISHES2.5Protect mechanical and painted finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable,A.temporary protective covering before shipping.Appearance of Finished Work: Variations in appearance of abutting or adjacent pieces are acceptable ifB.they are within one-half of the range of approved Samples. Noticeable variations in same piece are notacceptable. Variations in appearance of other components are acceptable if they are within the range ofapproved Samples and are assembled or installed to minimize contrast.Aluminum Panels and Accessories:C.

Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 620. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70 percent1.PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating to exposed metal surfacesto comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances, metal composite material panel supports, and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.

Examine wall framing to verify that girts, angles, channels, studs, and other structural panel support1.members and anchorage have been installed within alignment tolerances required by metalcomposite material wall panel manufacturer.Examine wall sheathing to verify that sheathing joints are supported by framing or blocking and that2.installation is within flatness tolerances required by metal composite material wall panelmanufacturer.

Verify that air- or water-resistive barriers have been installed over sheathing or backinga.substrate to prevent air infiltration or water penetration.

Examine roughing-in for components and assemblies penetrating metal composite material panels toB.verify actual locations of penetrations relative to seam locations of metal composite material panels beforeinstallation.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

PREPARATION3.2Miscellaneous Supports: Install subframing, furring, and other miscellaneous panel support members andA.anchorages according to ASTM C 754 and metal composite material panel manufacturer's writtenrecommendations.

METAL COMPOSITE MATERIAL PANEL INSTALLATION3.3General: Install metal composite material panels according to manufacturer's written instructions inA.orientation, sizes, and locations indicated on Drawings. Install panels perpendicular to supports unlessotherwise indicated. Anchor metal composite material panels and other components of the Work securelyin place, with provisions for thermal and structural movement.

Shim or otherwise plumb substrates receiving metal composite material panels.1.Flash and seal metal composite material panels at perimeter of all openings. Fasten with2.self-tapping screws. Do not begin installation until air- or water-resistive barriers and flashings thatwill be concealed by metal composite material panels are installed.Install screw fasteners in predrilled holes.3.Locate and space fastenings in uniform vertical and horizontal alignment.4.Install flashing and trim as metal composite material panel work proceeds.5.Locate panel splices over, but not attached to, structural supports. Stagger panel splices and end6.laps to avoid a four-panel lap splice condition.Align bottoms of metal composite material panels and fasten with blind rivets, bolts, or self-tapping7.screws. Fasten flashings and trim around openings and similar elements with self-tapping screws.




Provide weathertight escutcheons for pipe- and conduit-penetrating panels.8.Fasteners:B.

Aluminum Panels: Use aluminum or stainless-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the exterior;1.use aluminum or galvanized-steel fasteners for surfaces exposed to the interior.

Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other or corrosive substrates, protect againstC.galvanic action as recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.Attachment Assembly, General: Install attachment assembly required to support metal composite materialD.wall panels and to provide a complete weathertight wall system, including subgirts, perimeter extrusions,tracks, drainage channels, panel clips, and anchor channels.

Include attachment to supports, panel-to-panel joinery, panel-to-dissimilar-material joinery, and1.panel-system joint seals.

Installation: Attach metal composite material wall panels to supports at locations, spacings, and withE.fasteners recommended by manufacturer to achieve performance requirements specified.

Dry Seal Systems: Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material1.wall panels with manufacturer's standard gasket system.

Clip Installation: Attach panel clips to supports at locations, spacings, and with fasteners recommended byF.manufacturer. Attach routed-and-returned flanges of wall panels to panel clips with manufacturer'sstandard fasteners.

Seal horizontal and vertical joints between adjacent metal composite material wall panels with1.manufacturer's standard gaskets.

Accessory Installation: Install accessories with positive anchorage to building and weathertight mounting,G.and provide for thermal expansion. Coordinate installation with flashings and other components.

Install components required for a complete metal composite material panel assembly including trim,1.copings, corners, seam covers, flashings, sealants, gaskets, fillers, closure strips, and similar items.Provide types indicated by metal composite material panel manufacturer; or, if not indicated,provide types recommended in writing by metal composite material panel manufacturer.

Flashing and Trim: Comply with performance requirements, manufacturer's written installation instructions,H.and SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual." Provide concealed fasteners where possible, and setunits true to line and level as indicated. Install work with laps, joints, and seams that are permanentlywatertight.

Install exposed flashing and trim that is without buckling and tool marks and that is true to line and1.levels indicated, with exposed edges folded back to form hems. Install sheet metal flashing and trimto fit substrates and to result in waterproof performance.Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space2.movement joints at a maximum of 10 feet with no joints allowed within 24 inches of corner orintersection. Where lapped expansion provisions cannot be used or would not be sufficientlywaterproof, form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inch deep, filledwith mastic sealant (concealed within joints).

ERECTION TOLERANCES3.4Installation Tolerances: Shim and align metal composite material wall panel units within installed toleranceA.of 1/4 inch in 20 feet, non-accumulative, on level, plumb, and location lines as indicated, and within1/8-inch offset of adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.5Testing Agency: Engage a qualified independent testing agency to perform field tests and inspections.A.Water-Spray Test: After installation, test area of assembly as directed by Architect for water penetrationB.according to AAMA 501.2.Manufacturer's Field Service: Engage a factory-authorized service representative to test and inspectC.completed metal composite material wall panel installation, including accessories.Metal composite material wall panels will be considered defective if they do not pass test and inspections.D.Additional tests and inspections, at Contractor's expense, are performed to determine compliance ofE.replaced or additional work with specified requirements.Prepare test and inspection reports.F.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.6Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as metal composite material panelsA.are installed, unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completionof metal composite material panel installation, clean finished surfaces as recommended by metalcomposite material panel manufacturer. Maintain in a clean condition during construction.After metal composite material panel installation, clear weep holes and drainage channels of obstructions,B.dirt, and sealant.




Replace metal composite material panels that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyondC.successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.

END OF SECTION 074213.23




SECTION 075423 - THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING

GENERALPART 1 -



Adhered thermoplastic polyolefin (TPO) roofing system.1.Roof insulation.2.

Section includes the installation of insulation strips in ribs of roof deck. Insulation strips are furnished underB.Section 053100 "Steel Decking."

DEFINITIONS1.3Roofing Terminology: Definitions in ASTM D 1079 and glossary in NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing andA.Waterproofing Manual" apply to work of this Section.

PREINSTALLATION MEETINGS1.4Preinstallation Roofing Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.A.

Meet with Owner, Architect, Owner's insurer if applicable, testing and inspecting agency1.representative, roofing Installer, roofing system manufacturer's representative, deck Installer, andinstallers whose work interfaces with or affects roofing, including installers of roof accessories androof-mounted equipment.Review methods and procedures related to roofing installation, including manufacturer's written2.instructions.Review and finalize construction schedule, and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,3.equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.Examine deck substrate conditions and finishes for compliance with requirements, including4.flatness and fastening.Review structural loading limitations of roof deck during and after roofing.5.Review base flashings, special roofing details, roof drainage, roof penetrations, equipment curbs,6.and condition of other construction that affects roofing system.Review governing regulations and requirements for insurance and certificates if applicable.7.Review temporary protection requirements for roofing system during and after installation.8.Review roof observation and repair procedures after roofing installation.9.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.5Product Data: For each type of product.A.Shop Drawings: For roofing system. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to otherB.work, including:

Base flashings and membrane terminations.1.Tapered insulation, including slopes.2.Insulation fastening patterns for corner, perimeter, and field-of-roof locations.3.

Samples for Verification: For the following products:C.Sheet roofing, of color required.1.Walkway pads or rolls, of color required.2.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.6Qualification Data: For Installer and manufacturer.A.Manufacturer Certificates: Signed by roofing manufacturer certifying that roofing system complies withB.requirements specified in "Performance Requirements" Article.

Submit evidence of compliance with performance requirements.1.Product Test Reports: For components of roofing system, tests performed by manufacturer and witnessedC.by a qualified testing agency.Research/Evaluation Reports: For components of roofing system, from ICC-ES.D.Field quality-control reports.E.Sample Warranties: For manufacturer's special warranties.F.


THERMOPLASTIC POLYOLEFIN (TPO) ROOFING 075423 - 1


CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.7Maintenance Data: For roofing system to include in maintenance manuals.A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.8Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is UL listed for roofing system identical to thatA.used for this Project.Installer Qualifications: A qualified firm that is approved, authorized, or licensed by roofing systemB.manufacturer to install manufacturer's product and that is eligible to receive manufacturer's specialwarranty.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.9Deliver roofing materials to Project site in original containers with seals unbroken and labeled withA.manufacturer's name, product brand name and type, date of manufacture, approval or listing agencymarkings, and directions for storing and mixing with other components.Store liquid materials in their original undamaged containers in a clean, dry, protected location and withinB.the temperature range required by roofing system manufacturer. Protect stored liquid material from directsunlight.

Discard and legally dispose of liquid material that cannot be applied within its stated shelf life.1.Protect roof insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by sunlight, moisture,C.soiling, and other sources. Store in a dry location. Comply with insulation manufacturer's writteninstructions for handling, storing, and protecting during installation.Handle and store roofing materials, and place equipment in a manner to avoid permanent deflection ofD.deck.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.10Weather Limitations: Proceed with installation only when existing and forecasted weather conditions permitA.roofing system to be installed according to manufacturer's written instructions and warranty requirements.

WARRANTY1.11Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of roofing system that fail inA.materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Special warranty includes roofing, base flashings, roof insulation, and other components of roofing1.system.Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

Special Project Warranty: Submit roofing Installer's warranty, on warranty form at end of this Section,B.signed by Installer, covering the Work of this Section, including all components of roofing system such asroofing, base flashing, roof insulation, fasteners, cover boards, substrate boards, vapor retarders, roofpavers, and walkway products, for the following warranty period:

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.1.Firestone Building Products.2.GAF Materials Corporation.3.Johns Manville.4.

Source Limitations: Obtain components including roof insulation and fasteners for roofing system fromB.manufacturer approved by membrane roofing manufacturer.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.2General Performance: Installed roofing and base flashings shall withstand specified uplift pressures,A.thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Roofing and base flashings shall remainwatertight.

Accelerated Weathering: Roofing system shall withstand 2000 hours of exposure when tested1.according to ASTM G 152, ASTM G 154, or ASTM G 155.Impact Resistance: Roofing system shall resist impact damage when tested according to ASTM D2.3746 or ASTM D 4272.








Material Compatibility: Roofing materials shall be compatible with one another and adjacent materialsB.under conditions of service and application required, as demonstrated by roofing manufacturer based ontesting and field experience.Roofing System Design: Tested by a qualified testing agency to resist the uplift pressures as indicated onC.Structural Drawings.Solar Reflectance Index: Not less than 78 when calculated according to ASTM E 1980, based on testingD.identical products by a qualified testing agency.Energy Performance: Roofing system shall have an initial solar reflectance of not less than 0.70 and anE.emissivity of not less than 0.75 when tested according to CRRC-1.Exterior Fire-Test Exposure: ASTM E 108 or UL 790, Class A; for application and roof slopes indicated;F.testing by a qualified testing agency. Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testingagency.Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly designs indicated. Identify productsG.with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

TPO ROOFING2.3Fabric-Reinforced TPO Sheet: ASTM D 6878, internally fabric- or scrim-reinforced, uniform, flexible TPOA.sheet.

Thickness: 60 mils, nominal.1.Exposed Face Color: White.2.

AUXILIARY ROOFING MATERIALS2.4General: Auxiliary materials recommended by roofing system manufacturer for intended use andA.compatible with roofing.

Liquid-type auxiliary materials shall comply with VOC limits of authorities having jurisdiction and in1.accordance with Section 018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."

Sheet Flashing: Manufacturer's standard unreinforced TPO sheet flashing, 60 mils thick, minimum, ofB.same color as TPO sheet.Bonding Adhesive: Manufacturer's standard, water based.C.Slip Sheet: Manufacturer's standard, of thickness required for application.D.Metal Termination Bars: Manufacturer's standard, predrilled stainless-steel or aluminum bars,E.approximately 1 by 1/8 inch thick; with anchors.Metal Battens: Manufacturer's standard, aluminum-zinc-alloy-coated or zinc-coated steel sheet,F.approximately 1 inch wide by 0.05 inch thick, prepunched.Fasteners: Factory-coated steel fasteners and metal or plastic plates complying with corrosion-resistanceG.provisions in FM Global 4470, designed for fastening roofing to substrate, and acceptable to roofingsystem manufacturer.Miscellaneous Accessories: Provide pourable sealers, preformed cone and vent sheet flashings,H.preformed inside and outside corner sheet flashings, T-joint covers, lap sealants, termination reglets, andother accessories.

ROOF INSULATION2.5General: Preformed roof insulation boards manufactured or approved by TPO roofing manufacturer,A.selected from manufacturer's standard sizes suitable for application, of thicknesses indicated.Polyisocyanurate Board Insulation: ASTM C 1289, Type II, Class 1, Grade 2, felt or glass-fiber mat facerB.on both major surfaces.

Thickness or R Value: Insulation system shall have a minimum R-30 (continuous insulation) Long1.Term Thermal Resistance (LTTR) value as determined in accordance with CAN/ULC-S770 and thecorresponding thickness required to meet this minimum requirement.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:2.

Carlisle SynTec Incorporated.a.Firestone Building Products.b.GAF Materials Corporation.c.Insulfoam LLC; a Carlisle company.d.Johns Manville.e.Rmax, Inc.f.

Tapered Insulation: Provide factory-tapered insulation boards fabricated to slope of 1/4 inch per 12 inchesC.unless otherwise indicated.Provide preformed saddles, crickets, tapered edge strips, and other insulation shapes where indicated forD.sloping to drain. Fabricate to slopes indicated.










INSULATION ACCESSORIES2.6General: Roof insulation accessories recommended by insulation manufacturer for intended use andA.compatibility with roofing.Insulation Adhesive: Insulation manufacturer's recommended adhesive formulated to attach roof insulationB.to substrate or to another insulation layer as follows:

Modified asphaltic, asbestos-free, cold-applied adhesive.1.Bead-applied, low-rise, one-component or multicomponent urethane adhesive.2.Full-spread spray-applied, low-rise, two-component urethane adhesive.3.

Cover Board: ASTM C 1177/C 1177M, glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum substrate, 1/2 inch thick, factoryC.primed.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.CertainTeed Corporation; GlasRoc Sheathing Type X.a.Georgia-Pacific Corporation; Dens Deck Prime.b.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.c.Temple-Inland, Inc; GreenGlass Exterior Sheathing.d.USG Corporation; Securock Glass Mat Roof Board.e.

WALKWAYS2.7Flexible Walkways: Factory-formed, nonporous, heavy-duty, slip-resisting, surface-textured walkway pads,A.approximately 3/16 inch thick and acceptable to roofing system manufacturer.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements andA.other conditions affecting performance of the Work:

Verify that roof openings and penetrations are in place, curbs are set and braced, and roof-drain1.bodies are securely clamped in place.Verify that wood blocking, curbs, and nailers are securely anchored to roof deck at penetrations2.and terminations and that nailers match thicknesses of insulation.Verify that surface plane flatness and fastening of steel roof deck complies with requirements in3.Section 053100 "Steel Decking."Verify that minimum concrete drying period recommended by roofing system manufacturer has4.passed.Verify that concrete substrate is visibly dry and free of moisture. Test for capillary moisture by5.plastic sheet method according to ASTM D 4263.Verify that concrete-curing compounds that will impair adhesion of roofing components to roof deck6.have been removed.


PREPARATION3.2Clean substrate of dust, debris, moisture, and other substances detrimental to roofing installationA.according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions. Remove sharp projections.Prevent materials from entering and clogging roof drains and conductors and from spilling or migratingB.onto surfaces of other construction. Remove roof-drain plugs when no work is taking place or when rain isforecast.Install insulation strips according to acoustical roof deck manufacturer's written instructions.C.

ROOFING INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.3Install roofing system according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.A.Complete terminations and base flashings and provide temporary seals to prevent water from enteringB.completed sections of roofing system at the end of the workday or when rain is forecast. Remove anddiscard temporary seals before beginning work on adjoining roofing.Install roofing and auxiliary materials to tie in to existing roofing to maintain weathertightness of transition.C.

INSULATION INSTALLATION3.4Coordinate installing roofing system components so insulation is not exposed to precipitation or leftA.exposed at the end of the workday.Comply with roofing system and insulation manufacturer's written instructions for installing roof insulation.B.Install tapered insulation under area of roofing to conform to slopes indicated.C.










Install insulation under area of roofing to achieve required thickness. Where overall insulation thickness isD.2.7 inches or greater, install two or more layers with joints of each succeeding layer staggered from jointsof previous layer a minimum of 6 inches in each direction.

Where installing composite and noncomposite insulation in two or more layers, install1.noncomposite board insulation for bottom layer and intermediate layers, if applicable, and installcomposite board insulation for top layer.

Trim surface of insulation where necessary at roof drains so completed surface is flush and does notE.restrict flow of water.Install insulation with long joints of insulation in a continuous straight line with end joints staggeredF.between rows, abutting edges and ends between boards. Fill gaps exceeding 1/4 inch with insulation.

Cut and fit insulation within 1/4 inch of nailers, projections, and penetrations.1.Adhered Insulation: Install each layer of insulation and adhere to substrate as follows:G.

Prime surface of concrete deck with asphalt primer at rate of 3/4 gal./100 sq. ft., and allow primer to1.dry.Set each layer of insulation in a solid mopping of hot roofing asphalt, applied within plus or minus2.25 deg F of equiviscous temperature.Set each layer of insulation in ribbons of bead-applied insulation adhesive, firmly pressing and3.maintaining insulation in place.Set each layer of insulation in a uniform coverage of full-spread insulation adhesive, firmly pressing4.and maintaining insulation in place.

Install cover boards over insulation with long joints in continuous straight lines with end joints staggeredH.between rows. Offset joints of insulation below a minimum of 6 inches in each direction. Loosely butt coverboards together.

Fasten cover boards to resist uplift pressure at corners, perimeter, and field of roof.1.

ADHERED ROOFING INSTALLATION3.5Adhere roofing over area to receive roofing according to roofing system manufacturer's written instructions.A.Unroll roofing and allow to relax before retaining.Start installation of roofing in presence of roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel.B.Accurately align roofing, and maintain uniform side and end laps of minimum dimensions required byC.manufacturer. Stagger end laps.Bonding Adhesive: Apply to substrate and underside of roofing at rate required by manufacturer, and allowD.to partially dry before installing roofing. Do not apply to splice area of roofing.In addition to adhering, mechanically fasten roofing securely at terminations, penetrations, and perimeterE.of roofing.Apply roofing with side laps shingled with slope of roof deck where possible.F.Seams: Clean seam areas, overlap roofing, and hot-air weld side and end laps of roofing and sheetG.flashings according to manufacturer's written instructions, to ensure a watertight seam installation.

Test lap edges with probe to verify seam weld continuity. Apply lap sealant to seal cut edges of1.sheet.Verify field strength of seams a minimum of twice daily, and repair seam sample areas.2.Repair tears, voids, and lapped seams in roofing that do not comply with requirements.3.

Spread sealant bed over deck-drain flange at roof drains, and securely seal roofing in place with clampingH.ring.

BASE FLASHING INSTALLATION3.6Install sheet flashings and preformed flashing accessories, and adhere to substrates according to roofingA.system manufacturer's written instructions.Apply bonding adhesive to substrate and underside of sheet flashing at required rate, and allow to partiallyB.dry. Do not apply to seam area of flashing.Flash penetrations and field-formed inside and outside corners with cured or uncured sheet flashing.C.Clean seam areas, overlap, and firmly roll sheet flashings into the adhesive. Hot-air weld side and endD.laps to ensure a watertight seam installation.Terminate and seal top of sheet flashings.E.

WALKWAY INSTALLATION3.7Flexible Walkways: Install walkway products in locations indicated. Heat weld to substrate or adhereA.walkway products to substrate with compatible adhesive according to roofing system manufacturer'swritten instructions.




FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.8Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to inspect substrate conditions, surface preparation,A.membrane application, flashings, protection, and drainage components, and to furnish reports to Architect.

Electric Field Vector Mapping (EFVM): Testing agency shall survey entire roof area for potential1.leaks using electric field vector mapping (EFVM).

Final Roof Inspection: Arrange for roofing system manufacturer's technical personnel to inspect roofingB.installation on completion.Repair or remove and replace components of roofing system where inspections indicate that they do notC.comply with specified requirements.Additional testing and inspecting, at Contractor's expense, will be performed to determine if replaced orD.additional work complies with specified requirements.

PROTECTING AND CLEANING3.9Protect roofing system from damage and wear during remainder of construction period. When remainingA.construction does not affect or endanger roofing, inspect roofing for deterioration and damage, describingits nature and extent in a written report, with copies to Architect and Owner.Correct deficiencies in or remove roofing system that does not comply with requirements, repairB.substrates, and repair or reinstall roofing system to a condition free of damage and deterioration at time ofSubstantial Completion and according to warranty requirements.Clean overspray and spillage from adjacent construction using cleaning agents and proceduresC.recommended by manufacturer of affected construction.





SECTION 076200 - SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM

GENERALPART 1 -



Formed low-slope roof sheet metal fabrications.1.Formed equipment support flashing.2.

COORDINATION1.3Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim layout and seams with sizes and locations of penetrations to beA.flashed, and joints and seams in adjacent materials.Coordinate sheet metal flashing and trim installation with adjoining roofing and wall materials, joints, andB.seams to provide leakproof, secure, and noncorrosive installation.


Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and1.profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product and accessory.Certification Letter: ANSI SPRI ES1 for all roof termination metal.1.

Shop Drawings: For sheet metal flashing and trim.B.Include plans, elevations, sections, and attachment details.1.Detail fabrication and installation layouts, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish2.between shop- and field-assembled work.Include identification of material, thickness, weight, and finish for each item and location in Project.3.Include details for forming, including profiles, shapes, seams, and dimensions.4.Include details for joining, supporting, and securing, including layout and spacing of fasteners,5.cleats, clips, and other attachments. Include pattern of seams.Include details of termination points and assemblies.6.Include details of expansion joints and expansion-joint covers, including showing direction of7.expansion and contraction from fixed points.Include details of roof-penetration flashing.8.Include details of edge conditions, including eaves, ridges, valleys, rakes, crickets, and9.counterflashings as applicable.Include details of special conditions.10.Include details of connections to adjoining work.11.Detail formed flashing and trim at scale of not less than 1-1/2 inches per 12 inches.12.

Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of sheet metal and accessory indicated with factory-appliedC.finishes.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Product Certificates: For each type of coping and roof edge flashing that is SPRI ES-1 tested.A.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Do not store sheet metal flashing and trim materials in contact with other materials that might causeA.staining, denting, or other surface damage. Store sheet metal flashing and trim materials away fromuncured concrete and masonry.Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and highB.humidity, except to extent necessary for period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

WARRANTY1.7Special Warranty on Finishes: Manufacturer agrees to repair finish or replace sheet metal flashing andA.trim that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

Exposed Panel Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:1.Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.a.Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.b.


SHEET METAL FLASHING AND TRIM 076200 - 1


Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.c.Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1General: Sheet metal flashing and trim assemblies shall withstand wind loads, structural movement,A.thermally induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture,fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall notrattle, leak, or loosen, and shall remain watertight.Sheet Metal Standard for Flashing and Trim: Comply with NRCA's "The NRCA Roofing Manual" andB.SMACNA's "Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" requirements for dimensions and profiles shown unlessmore stringent requirements are indicated.SPRI Wind Design Standard: Manufacture and install roof edge flashings tested according to SPRI ES-1C.and capable of resisting the following design pressure:

Design Pressure: As indicated on Structural Drawings.1.Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes toD.prevent buckling, opening of joints, overstressing of components, failure of joint sealants, failure ofconnections, and other detrimental effects. Base calculations on surface temperatures of materials due toboth solar heat gain and nighttime-sky heat loss.

Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.1.

SHEET METALS2.2General: Protect mechanical and other finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying strippable,A.temporary protective film before shipping.Metallic-Coated Steel Sheet: Provide zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet according to ASTM A 653/AB.653M, G90 coating designation; prepainted by coil-coating process to comply with ASTM A 755/A 755M.

Surface: Smooth, flat.1.Exposed Coil-Coated Finish:2.

Two-Coat Fluoropolymer: AAMA 621. Fluoropolymer finish containing not less than 70a.percent PVDF resin by weight in color coat. Prepare, pretreat, and apply coating toexposed metal surfaces to comply with coating and resin manufacturers' written instructions.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.3.Concealed Finish: Pretreat with manufacturer's standard white or light-colored acrylic or polyester4.backer finish, consisting of prime coat and wash coat with minimum total dry film thickness of 0.5mil.

UNDERLAYMENT MATERIALS2.3Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 mils thick, consisting of a slip-resistantA.polyethylene- or polypropylene-film top surface laminated to a layer of butyl- or SBS-modified asphaltadhesive, with release-paper backing; specifically designed to withstand high metal temperatures beneathmetal roofing. Provide primer according to written recommendations of underlayment manufacturer.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.a.Polyguard Products, Inc.; Deck Guard HT.b.Protecto Wrap Company; Protecto Jiffy Seal Ice & Water Guard HT.c.

Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F or higher.2.Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F or lower.3.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.4General: Provide materials and types of fasteners[, solder], protective coatings, sealants, and otherA.miscellaneous items as required for complete sheet metal flashing and trim installation and asrecommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metal or manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.Fasteners: Wood screws, annular threaded nails, self-tapping screws, self-locking rivets and bolts, andB.other suitable fasteners designed to withstand design loads and recommended by manufacturer of primarysheet metal or manufactured item.

General: Blind fasteners or self-drilling screws, gasketed, with hex-washer head.1.Exposed Fasteners: Heads matching color of sheet metal using plastic caps ora.factory-applied coating. Provide metal-backed EPDM or PVC sealing washers under headsof exposed fasteners bearing on weather side of metal.








Blind Fasteners: High-strength aluminum or stainless-steel rivets suitable for metal beingb.fastened.Spikes and Ferrules: Same material as gutter; with spike with ferrule matching internalc.gutter width.

Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric polymer sealant; of type, grade, class, and useC.classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

FABRICATION, GENERAL2.5General: Custom fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with details shown andA.recommendations in cited sheet metal standard that apply to design, dimensions, geometry, metalthickness, and other characteristics of item required. Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in shop togreatest extent possible.

Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim in thickness or weight needed to comply with performance1.requirements, but not less than that specified for each application and metal.Obtain field measurements for accurate fit before shop fabrication.2.Form sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates without excessive oil canning, buckling, and tool3.marks; true to line, levels, and slopes; and with exposed edges folded back to form hems.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible. Do not use exposed fasteners on4.faces exposed to view.

Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to aB.tolerance of 1/4 inch in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offsetof adjoining faces and of alignment of matching profiles.Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate sheet metal flashing and trim that is capable of installation to tolerancesC.specified in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."Expansion Provisions: Form metal for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim.D.

Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inchdeep, filled with butyl1.sealant concealed within joints.Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.2.

Sealant Joints: Where movable, nonexpansion-type joints are required, form metal to provide for properE.installation of elastomeric sealant according to cited sheet metal standard.Fabricate cleats and attachment devices from same material as accessory being anchored or fromF.compatible, noncorrosive metal.Seams: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with elastomeric sealantG.unless otherwise recommended by sealant manufacturer for intended use.Rivet joints where necessary forstrength.Seams for Aluminum: Fabricate nonmoving seams with flat-lock seams. Form seams and seal with epoxyH.seam sealer.Rivet joints where necessary for strength.Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.I.

LOW-SLOPE ROOF SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS2.6Roof Edge Flashing: Fabricate in minimum 96-inch- long, but not exceeding 12-foot- long sections.A.Furnish with 6-inch-wide, joint cover plates.Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.

Joint Style: Butted with expansion space and 6-inch- wide, concealed backup plate.1.Fabricate with scuppers spaced 10 feet apart, to dimensions required with 4-inch- wide flanges and2.base extending 4 inchesbeyond cant or tapered strip into field of roof. Fasten gravel guard anglesto base of scupper.Fabricate from the Following Materials:3.

Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.a.Base Flashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.Fabricate from the following materials:B.

Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.1.Counterflashing: Shop fabricate interior and exterior corners.Fabricate from the following materials:C.

Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.1.Flashing Receivers: Fabricate from the following materials:D.

Galvanized Steel: 0.022 inch thick.1.Roof-Penetration Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:E.

Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.1.

MISCELLANEOUS SHEET METAL FABRICATIONS2.7Equipment Support Flashing: Fabricate from the following materials:A.

Galvanized Steel: 0.028 inch thick.1.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances, substrate, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.1.Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.2.Verify that air- or water-resistant barriers have been installed over sheathing or backing substrate to3.prevent air infiltration or water penetration.


UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION3.2Self-Adhering Sheet Underlayment: Install self-adhering sheet underlayment, wrinkle free. PrimeA.substrate if recommended by underlayment manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions ofunderlayment manufacturer for installation; use primer for installing underlayment at low temperatures.Apply in shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inchesbetween courses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps and edges with roller. Coverunderlayment within 14 days.Apply slip sheet, wrinkle free, directly on substrate before installing sheet metal flashing and trim.B.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.3General: Anchor sheet metal flashing and trim and other components of the Work securely in place, withA.provisions for thermal and structural movement. Use fasteners, protective coatings, separators, sealants,and other miscellaneous items as required to complete sheet metal flashing and trim system.

Install sheet metal flashing and trim true to line, levels, and slopes. Provide uniform, neat seams1.with minimum exposure of solder, welds, and sealant.Install sheet metal flashing and trim to fit substrates and to result in watertight performance. Verify2.shapes and dimensions of surfaces to be covered before fabricating sheet metal.Space cleats not more than 12 inches apart. Attach each cleat with at least two fasteners. Bend3.tabs over fasteners.Install exposed sheet metal flashing and trim with limited oil canning, and free of buckling and tool4.marks.Torch cutting of sheet metal flashing and trim is not permitted.5.Do not use graphite pencils to mark metal surfaces.6.

Metal Protection: Where dissimilar metals contact each other, or where metal contacts pressure-treatedB.wood or other corrosive substrates, protect against galvanic action or corrosion by painting contactsurfaces with bituminous coating or by other permanent separation as recommended by sheet metalmanufacturer or cited sheet metal standard.

Coat concealed side of sheet metal flashing and trim with bituminous coating where flashing and1.trim contact wood, ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.Underlayment: Where installing sheet metal flashing and trim directly on cementitious or wood2.substrates, install underlayment and cover with slip sheet.

Expansion Provisions: Provide for thermal expansion of exposed flashing and trim. Space movementC.joints at maximum of 10 feet with no joints within 24 inches of corner or intersection.

Form expansion joints of intermeshing hooked flanges, not less than 1 inchdeep, filled with sealant1.concealed within joints.Use lapped expansion joints only where indicated on Drawings.2.

Fasteners: Use fastener sizes that penetrate wood blocking or sheathing not less than 1-1/4 inches forD.nails and not less than 3/4 inch for wood screws.Conceal fasteners and expansion provisions where possible in exposed work and locate to minimizeE.possibility of leakage. Cover and seal fasteners and anchors as required for a tight installation.Seal joints as required for watertight construction.F.

Use sealant-filled joints unless otherwise indicated. Embed hooked flanges of joint members not1.less than 1 inch into sealant. Form joints to completely conceal sealant. When ambienttemperature at time of installation is between 40 and 70 deg F, set joint members for 50 percentmovement each way. Adjust setting proportionately for installation at higher ambient temperatures.Do not install sealant-type joints at temperatures below 40 deg F.Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Section 079200 "Joint Sealants."2.




ROOF FLASHING INSTALLATION3.4General: Install sheet metal flashing and trim to comply with performance requirements, sheet metalA.manufacturer's written installation instructions, and cited sheet metal standard. Provide concealedfasteners where possible, and set units true to line, levels, and slopes. Install work with laps, joints, andseams that are permanently watertight and weather resistant.Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in citedB.sheet metal standard unless otherwise indicated. Interlock bottom edge of roof edge flashing withcontinuous cleat anchored to substrate at staggered 3-inch centers.Roof Edge Flashing: Anchor to resist uplift and outward forces according to recommendations in FMC.Global Property Loss Prevention Data Sheet 1-49 for FM Approvals' listing for required windstormclassification.Pipe or Post Counterflashing: Install counterflashing umbrella with close-fitting collar with top edge flaredD.for elastomeric sealant, extending minimum of 4 inches over base flashing. Install stainless-steel drawband and tighten.Counterflashing: Coordinate installation of counterflashing with installation of base flashing. InsertE.counterflashing in reglets or receivers and fit tightly to base flashing. Extend counterflashing 4 inches overbase flashing. Lap counterflashing joints minimum of 4 inches. Secure in waterproof manner by means ofsnap-in installation and sealant or lead wedges and sealant unless otherwise indicated.Roof-Penetration Flashing: Coordinate installation of roof-penetration flashing with installation of roofingF.and other items penetrating roof. Seal with elastomeric sealant and clamp flashing to pipes that penetrateroof.

MISCELLANEOUS FLASHING INSTALLATION3.5Equipment Support Flashing: Coordinate installation of equipment support flashing with installation ofA.roofing and equipment. Weld or seal flashing with elastomeric sealant to equipment support member.

ERECTION TOLERANCES3.6Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerance of 1/4 inchA.in 20 feet on slope and location lines indicated on Drawings and within 1/8-inch offset of adjoining facesand of alignment of matching profiles.Installation Tolerances: Shim and align sheet metal flashing and trim within installed tolerances specifiedB.in MCA's "Guide Specification for Residential Metal Roofing."

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.7Clean exposed metal surfaces of substances that interfere with uniform oxidation and weathering.A.Clean and neutralize flux materials. Clean off excess solder.B.Clean off excess sealants.C.Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films as sheet metal flashing and trim are installedD.unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions. On completion of sheet metalflashing and trim installation, remove unused materials and clean finished surfaces as recommended bysheet metal flashing and trim manufacturer. Maintain sheet metal flashing and trim in clean conditionduring construction.Replace sheet metal flashing and trim that have been damaged or that have deteriorated beyondE.successful repair by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





SECTION 076210 - FLEXIBLE FLASHING

GENERALPART 1 -



Formed Products: Concealed flashing within wall assemblies to protect and shed incidental water to1.the exterior.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS1.3General: Flashing and trim assemblies as indicated shall withstand structural movement, thermallyA.induced movement, and exposure to weather without failure due to defective manufacture, fabrication,installation, or other defects in construction. Completed sheet metal flashing and trim shall not rattle, leak,or loosen, and shall remain watertight.Thermal Movements: Provide sheet metal flashing and trim that allows for thermal movements fromB.ambient and surface temperature changes.

Temperature Change (Range): 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.1.

SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,A.dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes for each manufactured product andaccessory.Shop Drawings: Show fabrication and installation layouts of sheet metal flashing and trim, including plans,B.elevations, expansion-joint locations, and keyed details. Distinguish between shop- and field-assembledwork.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5Do not store flashing materials in contact with other materials that might cause staining, denting, or otherA.surface damage. Store flashing materials away from uncured concrete and masonry.Protect strippable protective covering on sheet metal flashing and trim from exposure to sunlight and highB.humidity, except to the extent necessary for the period of sheet metal flashing and trim installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

FLEXIBLE FLASHING2.1Self-Adhesive flexible flashing product consisting of a pliable, adhesive rubberized-asphalt compound,A.bonded to a high-density, cross-laminated polyethylene film to produce an overall thickness of not lessthan 40 mils.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Advanced Building Products Inc.; Strip-N-Flash.a.Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing; CCW-705 Air & Vapor Barrier Strips.b.Grace Construction Products; Perm-A-Barrier Detail Membrane.c.Henry; Blueskin SA.d.

HIGH TEMPERATURE FLASHING2.2Self-Adhering, High-Temperature Sheet: Minimum 30 to 40 mils thick, consisting of slip-resistingA.polyethylene-film top surface laminated to layer of butyl or SBS-modified asphalt adhesive, withrelease-paper backing; cold applied. Provide primer when recommended by manufacturer.

Thermal Stability: ASTM D 1970; stable after testing at 240 deg F.1.Low-Temperature Flexibility: ASTM D 1970; passes after testing at minus 20 deg F.2.Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:3.

Carlisle Coatings & Waterproofing Inc.; CCW WIP 300HT.a.Grace Construction Products, a unit of W. R. Grace & Co.; Ultra.b.Henry Company; Blueskin PE200 HT.c.Owens Corning; WeatherLock Metal High Temperature Underlayment.d.


FLEXIBLE FLASHING 076210 - 1


MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.3General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items asA.required for complete metal flashing installation and recommended by manufacturer of primary sheet metalor manufactured item unless otherwise indicated.Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant; low modulus; of type, grade,B.class, and use classifications required to seal joints in sheet metal flashing and trim and remain watertight.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensionsA.and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify compliance with requirements for installation tolerances of substrates.1.Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.2.

For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performanceB.of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

FLASHING INSTALLATION3.2General: Install as indicated on Drawings and per Manufacturer's recommendations.A.Self-Adhering Sheet Flashing: Install self-adhering sheet flashing, wrinkle free. Apply primer if required byB.flashing manufacturer. Comply with temperature restrictions of flashing manufacturer for installation. Applyin shingle fashion to shed water, with end laps of not less than 6 inches staggered 24 inches betweencourses. Overlap side edges not less than 3-1/2 inches. Roll laps with roller. Cover flashing withsubsequent construction within 14 days.Location:C.

Flexible Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all exterior windows, doors or other penetrations1.where high temperature flashing is not required.High Temperature Flashing: As indicated on drawings, or at all locations where flashing will be in2.contact with metal coping or metal panels where high temperatures exist.



FLEXIBLE FLASHING 076210 - 2


SECTION 077200 - ROOF ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -



Roof curbs.1.Equipment supports.2.Roof hatches.3.Pipe supports.4.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS1.3General Performance: Roof accessories shall withstand exposure to weather and resist thermally inducedA.movement without failure, rattling, leaking, or fastener disengagement due to defective manufacture,fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each type of roof accessory indicated. Include construction details, materialA.descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, and finishes.Shop Drawings: For roof accessories. Include plans, elevations, keyed details, and attachments to otherB.work. Indicate dimensions, loadings, and special conditions. Distinguish between plant- andfield-assembled work.

COORDINATION1.5Coordinate layout and installation of roof accessories with roofing membrane and base flashing andA.interfacing and adjoining construction to provide a leakproof, weathertight, secure, and noncorrosiveinstallation.Coordinate dimensions with rough-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to be supported.B.

WARRANTY1.6Special Warranty on Painted Finishes: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees toA.repair finishes or replace roof accessories that show evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finisheswithin specified warranty period.

Fluoropolymer Finish: Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:1.Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.a.Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.b.Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.c.

Finish Warranty Period: 20 years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METAL MATERIALS2.1Steel Tube: ASTM A 500, round tube.A.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.2General: Provide materials and types of fasteners, protective coatings, sealants, and other miscellaneousA.items required by manufacturer for a complete installation.Glass-Fiber Board Insulation: ASTM C 726, thickness as indicated.B.Wood Nailers: Softwood lumber, pressure treated with waterborne preservatives for aboveground use,C.acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction, containing no arsenic or chromium, and complying with AWPAC2; not less than 1-1/2 inches thick.Bituminous Coating: Cold-applied asphalt emulsion complying with ASTM D 1187.D.Underlayment:E.

Felt: ASTM D 226, Type II (No. 30), asphalt-saturated organic felt, nonperforated.1.Polyethylene Sheet: 6-mil- thick polyethylene sheet complying with ASTM D 4397.2.


ROOF ACCESSORIES 077200 - 1


Slip Sheet: Building paper, 3-lb/100 sq. ft. minimum, rosin sized.3.Fasteners: Roof accessory manufacturer's recommended fasteners suitable for application and metalsF.being fastened. Match finish of exposed fasteners with finish of material being fastened. Providenonremovable fastener heads to exterior exposed fasteners. Furnish the following unless otherwiseindicated:

Fasteners for Zinc-Coated or Aluminum-Zinc Alloy-Coated Steel: Series 300 stainless steel or1.hot-dip zinc-coated steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTM F 2329.Fasteners for Aluminum Sheet: Aluminum or Series 300 stainless steel.2.Fasteners for Copper Sheet: Copper, hardware bronze, or passivated Series 300 stainless steel.3.Fasteners for Stainless-Steel Sheet: Series 300 stainless steel.4.

Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard tubular or fingered design of neoprene, EPDM, PVC, or silicone or a flatG.design of foam rubber, sponge neoprene, or cork.Elastomeric Sealant: ASTM C 920, elastomeric silicone polymer sealant as recommended by roofH.accessory manufacturer for installation indicated; low modulus; of type, grade, class, and useclassifications required to seal joints and remain watertight.Butyl Sealant: ASTM C 1311, single-component, solvent-release butyl rubber sealant; polyisobutyleneI.plasticized; heavy bodied for expansion joints with limited movement.Asphalt Roofing Cement: ASTM D 4586, asbestos free, of consistency required for application.J.

ROOF CURBS2.3Roof Curbs: Internally reinforced roof-curb units with integral spring-type vibration isolators and capable ofA.supporting superimposed live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicatedon Drawings; with welded or mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, andintegrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Curbs Plus, Inc.a.LM Curbs.b.Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.c.Pate Company (The).d.Thybar Corporation.e.

Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to beB.supported.Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.C.

Finish: Mill phosphatized.1.Construction:D.

Liner: Same material as curb, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.1.Factory-installed wood nailer at top of curb, continuous around curb perimeter.2.Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.3.Top Surface: Level around perimeter with roof slope accommodated by sloping the deck-mounting4.flange.

EQUIPMENT SUPPORTS2.4Equipment Supports: Internally reinforced metal equipment supports capable of supporting superimposedA.live and dead loads, including equipment loads and other construction indicated on Drawings; with weldedor mechanically fastened and sealed corner joints, integral metal cant, and integrally formeddeck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Curbs Plus, Inc.a.LM Curbs.b.Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.c.Pate Company (The).d.Thybar Corporation.e.

Size: Coordinate dimensions with roughing-in information or Shop Drawings of equipment to beB.supported.Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.052 inch thick.C.

Finish: Mill phosphatized.1.Construction:D.

Insulation: Factory insulated with 1-1/2-inch- thick glass-fiber board insulation.1.Liner: Same material as equipment support, of manufacturer's standard thickness and finish.2.Factory-installed continuous wood nailers 3-1/2 inches wide at tops of equipment supports.3.Metal Counterflashing: Manufacturer's standard, removable, fabricated of same metal and finish as4.equipment support.














Fabricate equipment supports to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.5.Security Grille: Provide where indicated.6.

ROOF HATCH2.5Roof Hatches: Metal roof-hatch units with lids and insulated single-walled curbs, welded or mechanicallyA.fastened and sealed corner joints, continuous lid-to-curb counterflashing and weathertight perimetergasketing, integral metal cant, and integrally formed deck-mounting flange at perimeter bottom.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Babcock-Davis.a.Bilco Company (The).b.Milcor Inc.; Commercial Products Group of Hart & Cooley, Inc.c.Nystrom.d.O'Keeffe's Inc.e.

Type and Size: Single-leaf lid, refer to Drawings for size.B.Loads: Minimum 40-lbf/sq. ft. external live load and 20-lbf/sq. ft. internal uplift load.C.Hatch Material: Zinc-coated (galvanized) steel sheet, 0.079 inch thick.D.

Finish: Mill phosphatized.1.Construction:E.

Insulation: Glass-fiber board.1.Hatch Lid: Opaque, insulated, and double walled, with manufacturer's standard metal liner of same2.material and finish as outer metal lid.On ribbed or fluted metal roofs, form flange at perimeter bottom to conform to roof profile.3.Fabricate curbs to minimum height of 12 inches unless otherwise indicated.4.

Hardware: Stainless-steel spring latch with turn handles, butt- or pintle-type hinge system, and padlockF.hasps inside and outside.Safety Railing System: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard system including rails, clamps, fasteners,G.safety barrier at railing opening, and accessories required for a complete installation; attached to roofhatch and complying with 29 CFR 1910.23 requirements and authorities having jurisdiction.

Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.1.Posts and Rails: Galvanized-steel pipe, 1-1/4 inches in diameter or galvanized-steel tube, 1-5/82.inches in diameter.Flat Bar: Galvanized steel, 2 inches high by 3/8 inch thick.3.Maximum Opening Size: System constructed to prevent passage of a sphere 21 inchesin4.diameter.Self-Latching Gate: Fabricated of same materials and rail spacing as safety railing system.5.Provide manufacturer's standard hinges and self-latching mechanism.Post and Rail Tops and Ends: Weather resistant, closed or plugged with prefabricated end fittings.6.Provide weep holes or another means to drain entrapped water in hollow sections of handrail and7.railing members.Fabricate joints exposed to weather to be watertight.8.Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard, finished to match railing system.9.Finish: Manufacturer's standard.10.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.a.Ladder-Assist Post: Roof-hatch manufacturer's standard device for attachment to roof-access ladder.H.

Operation: Post locks in place on full extension; release mechanism returns post to closed1.position.Height: 42 inches above finished roof deck.2.Material: Steel tube.3.Post: 1-5/8-inch- diameter pipe.4.Finish: Manufacturer's standard baked enamel or powder coat.5.

Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.a.

PIPE SUPPORTS2.6Pipe Supports: Adjustable-height, extruded-aluminum tube, filled with urethane insulation; 2 inches inA.diameter; with aluminum baseplate, EPDM base seal, manufacturer's recommended hardware formounting to structure or structural roof deck as indicated, and extruded-aluminum carrier assemblies;suitable for quantity of pipe runs and sizes.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Thaler Metal USA Inc.a.

Pipe Support Height: As indicated on Drawings.2.Roller Assembly: With stainless-steel roller, sized for supported pipes.3.










Pipe Support Flashing: Manufacturer's standard insulated sleeve flashing with integral base flange;4.aluminum sheet, 0.063 inch thick.Finish: Manufacturer's standard.5.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS2.7Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendationsA.for applying and designating finishes.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations inB.appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples andare assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, to verify actual locations, dimensions,A.and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.Verify that substrate is sound, dry, smooth, clean, sloped for drainage, and securely anchored.B.Verify dimensions of roof openings for roof accessories.C.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.D.

INSTALLATION3.2General: Install roof accessories according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.

Install roof accessories level, plumb, true to line and elevation, and without warping, jogs in1.alignment, excessive oil canning, buckling, or tool marks.Anchor roof accessories securely in place so they are capable of resisting indicated loads.2.Use fasteners, separators, sealants, and other miscellaneous items as required to complete3.installation of roof accessories and fit them to substrates.Install roof accessories to resist exposure to weather without failing, rattling, leaking, or loosening of4.fasteners and seals.

Metal Protection: Protect metals against galvanic action by separating dissimilar metals from contact withB.each other or with corrosive substrates by painting contact surfaces with bituminous coating or by otherpermanent separation as recommended by manufacturer.

Coat concealed side of roof accessories with bituminous coating where in contact with wood,1.ferrous metal, or cementitious construction.Underlayment: Where installing roof accessories directly on cementitious or wood substrates,2.install a course of felt underlayment and cover with a slip sheet, or install a course of polyethylenesheet.Bed flanges in thick coat of asphalt roofing cement where required by manufacturers of roof3.accessories for waterproof performance.

Roof Curb Installation: Install each roof curb so top surface is level.C.Equipment Support Installation: Install equipment supports so top surfaces are level with each other.D.Roof-Hatch Installation:E.

Install roof hatch so top surface of hatch curb is level.1.Verify that roof hatch operates properly. Clean, lubricate, and adjust operating mechanism and2.hardware.Attach safety railing system to roof-hatch curb.3.Attach ladder-assist post according to manufacturer's written instructions.4.

Pipe Support Installation: Install pipe supports so top surfaces are in contact with and provide equallyF.distributed support along length of supported item.Seal joints with elastomeric sealant as required by roof accessory manufacturer.G.

REPAIR AND CLEANING3.3Galvanized Surfaces: Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas and repair galvanizingA.according to ASTM A 780.Touch up factory-primed surfaces with compatible primer ready for field painting according to SectionB.099113 "Exterior Painting" and Section 099123 "Interior Painting."Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions.C.Clean off excess sealants.D.Replace roof accessories that have been damaged or that cannot be successfully repaired by finishE.touchup or similar minor repair procedures.








SECTION 079200 - JOINT SEALANTS

GENERALPART 1 -



Silicone joint sealants.1.Nonstaining silicone joint sealants.2.Urethane joint sealants.3.Mildew-resistant joint sealants.4.Butyl joint sealants.5.Latex joint sealants.6.


ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each joint-sealant product.A.Samples for Initial Selection: Manufacturer's color charts consisting of strips of cured sealants showing theB.full range of colors available for each product exposed to view.Joint-Sealant Schedule: Include the following information:C.

Joint-sealant application, joint location, and designation.1.Joint-sealant manufacturer and product name.2.Joint-sealant formulation.3.Joint-sealant color.4.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Product Test Reports: For each kind of joint sealant, for tests performed by manufacturer.A.Preconstruction Laboratory Test Reports: From sealant manufacturer, indicating the following:B.

Materials forming joint substrates and joint-sealant backings have been tested for compatibility and1.adhesion with joint sealants.Interpretation of test results and written recommendations for primers and substrate preparation are2.needed for adhesion.

Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: Indicate which sealants and joint preparation methodsC.resulted in optimum adhesion to joint substrates based on testing specified in "Preconstruction Testing"Article.Field-Adhesion-Test Reports: For each sealant application tested.D.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.6Installer Qualifications: An authorized representative who is trained and approved by manufacturer.A.Product Testing: Test joint sealants using a qualified testing agency.B.

Testing Agency Qualifications: Qualified according to ASTM C 1021 to conduct the testing1.indicated.

Mockups: Install sealant in mockups of assemblies specified in other Sections that are indicated to receiveC.joint sealants specified in this Section. Use materials and installation methods specified in this Section.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING1.7Preconstruction Laboratory Testing: Submit to joint-sealant manufacturers, for testing indicated below,A.samples of materials that will contact or affect joint sealants.

Adhesion Testing: Use ASTM C 794 to determine whether priming and other specific joint1.preparation techniques are required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of joint sealants to jointsubstrates.Compatibility Testing: Use ASTM C 1087 to determine sealant compatibility when in contact with2.glazing and gasket materials.Stain Testing: Use ASTM C 1248 to determine stain potential of sealant when in contact with3.[stone] [masonry] <Insert substrate> substrates.


JOINT SEALANTS 079200 - 1


Submit manufacturer's recommended number of pieces of each type of material, including joint4.substrates, joint-sealant backings, and miscellaneous materials.Schedule sufficient time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.5.For materials failing tests, obtain joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective6.measures, including use of specially formulated primers.Testing will not be required if joint-sealant manufacturers submit data that are based on previous7.testing, not older than 24 months, of sealant products for adhesion to, staining of, and compatibilitywith joint substrates and other materials matching those submitted.

Preconstruction Field-Adhesion Testing: Before installing sealants, field test their adhesion to Project jointB.substrates as follows:

Locate test joints where indicated on Project or, if not indicated, as directed by Architect.1.Conduct field tests for each kind of sealant and joint substrate.2.Notify Architect seven days in advance of dates and times when test joints will be erected.3.Arrange for tests to take place with joint-sealant manufacturer's technical representative present.4.

Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Handa.Pull Tab, in Appendix X1.1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately;1)extend cut along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure foropposite side.

Report whether sealant failed to adhere to joint substrates or tore cohesively. Include data on pull5.distance used to test each kind of product and joint substrate. For sealants that fail adhesively,retest until satisfactory adhesion is obtained.Evaluation of Preconstruction Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive6.failure from testing, in absence of other indications of noncompliance with requirements, will beconsidered satisfactory. Do not use sealants that fail to adhere to joint substrates during testing.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.8Do not proceed with installation of joint sealants under the following conditions:A.

When ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside limits permitted by joint-sealant1.manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.When joint substrates are wet.2.Where joint widths are less than those allowed by joint-sealant manufacturer for applications3.indicated.Where contaminants capable of interfering with adhesion have not yet been removed from joint4.substrates.

WARRANTY1.9Special Installer's Warranty: Installer agrees to repair or replace joint sealants that do not comply withA.performance and other requirements specified in this Section within specified warranty period.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.1.Special Manufacturer's Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to furnish joint sealants to repair or replace thoseB.joint sealants that do not comply with performance and other requirements specified in this Section withinspecified warranty period.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.1.Special warranties specified in this article exclude deterioration or failure of joint sealants from theC.following:

Movement of the structure caused by stresses on the sealant exceeding sealant manufacturer's1.written specifications for sealant elongation and compression.Disintegration of joint substrates from causes exceeding design specifications.2.Mechanical damage caused by individuals, tools, or other outside agents.3.Changes in sealant appearance caused by accumulation of dirt or other atmospheric contaminants.4.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

JOINT SEALANTS, GENERAL2.1Compatibility: Provide joint sealants, backings, and other related materials that are compatible with oneA.another and with joint substrates under conditions of service and application, as demonstrated byjoint-sealant manufacturer, based on testing and field experience.VOC Limits of Interior Sealants: Any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings used inside theB.weatherproofing system and applied on site shall meet the VOC limits indicated in Section 018113“Sustainable Design Requirements.”Colors of Exposed Joint Sealants: Match adjacent substrates unless indicated otherwise.C.




NONSTAINING SILICONE JOINT SEALANTS2.2Nonstaining Joint Sealants: No staining of substrates when tested according to ASTM C 1248.A.Silicone, Nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT: Nonstaining, single-component, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minusB.50 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, neutral-curing silicone joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S,Grade NS, Class 50, Use NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Dow Corning Corporation; 795.a.GE Construction Sealants; SilPruf NB.b.Pecora Corporation; 864NST.c.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.d.Sika Corporation; Silasil WS295.e.

URETHANE JOINT SEALANTS2.3Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT: Single-component, nonsag, nontraffic-use, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percentA.movement capability, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonalastic TX1.a.Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol I-XL.b.Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-1.c.Sika Corporation U.S.; Sikaflex Textured Sealant.d.Sika Corporation; Sikaflex 2c NS.e.Tremco Incorporated; Dymonic.f.

Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT: Single-component, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movementB.capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade P, Class 25,Uses T and NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolastic SL 1.a.Pecora Corporation; NR-201.b.Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede 1SL.c.Sika Corporation; Sikaflex 2c SL.d.

Urethane, M, NS, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, nonsag, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movementC.capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade NS, Class 50,Uses T and NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Tremco Incorporated; Dymeric 240.a.

Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 50 percent and minus 50 percent movementD.capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 50,Uses T and NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, :1.LymTal International, Inc.; Iso-Flex 888QC.a.

Urethane, M, P, 25, T, NT: Multicomponent, pourable, plus 25 percent and minus 25 percent movementE.capability, traffic- and nontraffic-use, urethane joint sealant; ASTM C 920, Type M, Grade P, Class 25,Uses T and NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 555-SL.a.Pecora Corporation; Dynatrol II SGb.Sherwin-Williams Company (The); Stampede-2SL.c.Tremco Incorporated; THC 900/901.d.Sika Corporation; Sika Sikaflex 2C SL.e.

MILDEW-RESISTANT JOINT SEALANTS2.4Mildew-Resistant Joint Sealants: Formulated for prolonged exposure to humidity with fungicide to preventA.mold and mildew growth.Silicone, Mildew Resistant, Acid Curing, S, NS, 25, NT: Mildew-resistant, single-component, nonsag, plusB.25 percent and minus 25 percent movement capability, nontraffic-use, acid-curing silicone joint sealant;ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25, Use NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Dow Corning Corporation; 786-M White.a.GE Construction Sealants; SCS1700 Sanitary.b.Tremco Incorporated; Tremsil 200.c.Sika Corporation; Sikasil GP.d.
































BUTYL JOINT SEALANTS2.5Butyl-Rubber-Based Joint Sealants: ASTM C 1311.A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Bostik, Inc.; Chem-Calk 300.a.Pecora Corporation; BC-158.b.

LATEX JOINT SEALANTS2.6Acrylic Latex: Acrylic latex or siliconized acrylic latex, ASTM C 834, Type OP, Grade NF.A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems; Sonolac.a.Pecora Corporation; AC-20.b.Sherwin-Williams Company (The); 850A.c.Tremco Incorporated; Tremflex 834.d.

JOINT-SEALANT BACKING2.7Sealant Backing Material, General: Nonstaining; compatible with joint substrates, sealants, primers, andA.other joint fillers; and approved for applications indicated by sealant manufacturer based on fieldexperience and laboratory testing.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.BASF Construction Chemicals, LLC, Building Systems.a.Construction Foam Products, a division of Nomaco, Inc.b.

Cylindrical Sealant Backings: ASTM C 1330, Type C (closed-cell material with a surface skin), and of sizeB.and density to control sealant depth and otherwise contribute to producing optimum sealant performance.Bond-Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape or other plastic tape recommended by sealant manufacturer forC.preventing sealant from adhering to rigid, inflexible joint-filler materials or joint surfaces at back of joint.Provide self-adhesive tape where applicable.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.8Primer: Material recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer where required for adhesion of sealant toA.joint substrates indicated, as determined from preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests and field tests.Cleaners for Nonporous Surfaces: Chemical cleaners acceptable to manufacturers of sealants and sealantB.backing materials, free of oily residues or other substances capable of staining or harming joint substratesand adjacent nonporous surfaces in any way, and formulated to promote optimum adhesion of sealants tojoint substrates.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine joints indicated to receive joint sealants, with Installer present, for compliance with requirementsA.for joint configuration, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Surface Cleaning of Joints: Clean out joints immediately before installing joint sealants to comply withA.joint-sealant manufacturer's written instructions and the following requirements:

Remove all foreign material from joint substrates that could interfere with adhesion of joint sealant,1.including dust, paints (except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealantadhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer), old joint sealants, oil, grease, waterproofing,water repellents, water, surface dirt, and frost.Clean porous joint substrate surfaces by brushing, grinding, mechanical abrading, or a combination2.of these methods to produce a clean, sound substrate capable of developing optimum bond withjoint sealants. Remove loose particles remaining after cleaning operations above by vacuuming orblowing out joints with oil-free compressed air. Porous joint substrates include the following:

Concrete.a.Masonry.b.Unglazed surfaces of ceramic tile.c.Exterior insulation and finish systems.d.

Remove laitance and form-release agents from concrete.3.














Clean nonporous joint substrate surfaces with chemical cleaners or other means that do not stain,4.harm substrates, or leave residues capable of interfering with adhesion of joint sealants. Nonporousjoint substrates include the following:

Metal.a.Glass.b.Porcelain enamel.c.Glazed surfaces of ceramic tile.d.

Joint Priming: Prime joint substrates where recommended by joint-sealant manufacturer or as indicated byB.preconstruction joint-sealant-substrate tests or prior experience. Apply primer to comply with joint-sealantmanufacturer's written instructions. Confine primers to areas of joint-sealant bond; do not allow spillage ormigration onto adjoining surfaces.

INSTALLATION OF JOINT SEALANTS3.3General: Comply with joint-sealant manufacturer's written installation instructions for products andA.applications indicated, unless more stringent requirements apply.Sealant Installation Standard: Comply with recommendations in ASTM C 1193 for use of joint sealants asB.applicable to materials, applications, and conditions indicated.Install sealant backings of kind indicated to support sealants during application and at position required toC.produce cross-sectional shapes and depths of installed sealants relative to joint widths that allow optimumsealant movement capability.

Do not leave gaps between ends of sealant backings.1.Do not stretch, twist, puncture, or tear sealant backings.2.Remove absorbent sealant backings that have become wet before sealant application, and replace3.them with dry materials.

Install bond-breaker tape behind sealants where sealant backings are not used between sealants andD.backs of joints.Install sealants using proven techniques that comply with the following and at the same time backings areE.installed:

Place sealants so they directly contact and fully wet joint substrates.1.Completely fill recesses in each joint configuration.2.Produce uniform, cross-sectional shapes and depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum3.sealant movement capability.

Tooling of Nonsag Sealants: Immediately after sealant application and before skinning or curing begins,F.tool sealants according to requirements specified in subparagraphs below to form smooth, uniform beadsof configuration indicated; to eliminate air pockets; and to ensure contact and adhesion of sealant withsides of joint.

Remove excess sealant from surfaces adjacent to joints.1.Use tooling agents that are approved in writing by sealant manufacturer and that do not discolor2.sealants or adjacent surfaces.Provide concave joint profile per Figure 8A in ASTM C 1193 unless otherwise indicated.3.Provide flush joint profile at locations indicated on Drawings according to Figure 8B in ASTM C4.1193.Provide recessed joint configuration of recess depth and at locations indicated on Drawings5.according to Figure 8C in ASTM C 1193.

Use masking tape to protect surfaces adjacent to recessed tooled joints.a.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.4Field-Adhesion Testing: Field test joint-sealant adhesion to joint substrates as follows:A.

Extent of Testing: Test completed and cured sealant joints as follows:1.Perform 10 tests for the first 1000 feet of joint length for each kind of sealant and jointa.substrate.Perform one test for each 1000 feet of joint length thereafter or one test per each floor perb.elevation.

Test Method: Test joint sealants according to Method A, Field-Applied Sealant Joint Hand Pull Tab,2.in Appendix X1 in ASTM C 1193 or Method A, Tail Procedure, in ASTM C 1521.

For joints with dissimilar substrates, verify adhesion to each substrate separately; extend cuta.along one side, verifying adhesion to opposite side. Repeat procedure for opposite side.

Inspect tested joints and report on the following:3.Whether sealants filled joint cavities and are free of voids.a.Whether sealant dimensions and configurations comply with specified requirements.b.




Whether sealants in joints connected to pulled-out portion failed to adhere to joint substratesc.or tore cohesively. Include data on pull distance used to test each kind of product and jointsubstrate. Compare these results to determine if adhesion complies with sealantmanufacturer's field-adhesion hand-pull test criteria.

Record test results in a field-adhesion-test log. Include dates when sealants were installed, names4.of persons who installed sealants, test dates, test locations, whether joints were primed, adhesionresults and percent elongations, sealant material, sealant configuration, and sealant dimensions.Repair sealants pulled from test area by applying new sealants following same procedures used5.originally to seal joints. Ensure that original sealant surfaces are clean and that new sealantcontacts original sealant.

Evaluation of Field-Adhesion-Test Results: Sealants not evidencing adhesive failure from testing orB.noncompliance with other indicated requirements will be considered satisfactory. Remove sealants that failto adhere to joint substrates during testing or to comply with other requirements. Retest failed applicationsuntil test results prove sealants comply with indicated requirements.

CLEANING3.5Clean off excess sealant or sealant smears adjacent to joints as the Work progresses by methods and withA.cleaning materials approved in writing by manufacturers of joint sealants and of products in which jointsoccur.

PROTECTION3.6Protect joint sealants during and after curing period from contact with contaminating substances and fromA.damage resulting from construction operations or other causes so sealants are without deterioration ordamage at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, cutout, remove, and repair damaged or deteriorated joint sealants immediately so installations with repairedareas are indistinguishable from original work.

JOINT-SEALANT SCHEDULE3.7Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.A.

Joint Locations:1.Isolation and contraction joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.a.Joints between different materials listed above.b.Other joints as indicated on Drawings.c.

Joint Sealant: Urethane, M, P, 50, T, NT.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.

Joint-Sealant Application: Exterior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.B.Joint Locations:1.

Construction joints in cast-in-place concrete.a.Joints between plant-precast architectural concrete units.b.Control and expansion joints in unit masonry.c.Joints in dimension stone cladding.d.Joints in exterior insulation and finish systems.e.Joints between different materials listed above.f.Perimeter joints between materials listed above and frames of doors windows .g.Precast Concrete to Precast Concrete Joints: Provide dual joint line with weep capabilitiesh.as indicated and as specified herein.Other joints as indicated on Drawings.i.

Joint Sealant: Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 50, NT Silicone, nonstaining, S, NS, 25, NT.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in horizontal traffic surfaces.C.Joint Locations:1.

Isolation joints in cast-in-place concrete slabs.a.Control and expansion joints in stone flooring.b.Control and expansion joints in tile flooring.c.Other joints as indicated on Drawings.d.

Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, P, 25, T, NT.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces.D.Joint Locations:1.

Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.a.Tile control and expansion joints.b.Vertical joints on exposed surfaces of partitions.c.




Other joints as indicated on Drawings.d.Joint Sealant: Urethane, S, NS, 25, NT.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.

Joint-Sealant Application: Interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontraffic surfaces not subject toE.significant movement.

Joint Locations:1.Control joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls.a.Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors and windows.b.Other joints as indicated on Drawings.c.

Joint Sealant: Acrylic latex.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.

Joint-Sealant Application: Mildew-resistant interior joints in vertical surfaces and horizontal nontrafficF.surfaces.

Joint Locations:1.Joints between plumbing fixtures and adjoining walls, floors, and counters.a.Tile control and expansion joints where indicated.b.Other joints as indicated on Drawings.c.

Joint Sealant: Silicone, mildew resistant, acid curing, S, NS, 25, NT.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.

Joint-Sealant Application: Concealed mastics.G.Joint Locations:1.

Aluminum thresholds.a.Sill plates.b.Other joints as indicated on Drawings.c.

Joint Sealant: Butyl-rubber based.2.Joint-Sealant Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors.3.





SECTION 081113 - HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -

RELATED DOCUMENTS1.1Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions andA.Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.Building Envelope RequirementsB.


Standard hollow metal door frames.1.

DEFINITIONS1.3Minimum Thickness: Minimum thickness of base metal without coatings.A.Standard Hollow Metal Work to comply with the following Steel Door Institute Performance Standards:B.

Hollow metal work fabricated according to ANSI/SDI A250.8 (R2008).1.ANSI/SDI A250.4 (2001) - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Physical Endurance for2.Steel Doors, Frames, Frames Anchors and Hardware Reinforcing.ANSI/SDI A250.6 (R2009) - Recommended Practice for Hardware Reinforcing on Standard Steel3.Doors and Frames.ANSI/SDI A250.10 (R2004) - Test Procedure and Acceptance Criteria for Prime Painted Steel4.Surfaces for Steel Doors and Frames.ANSI/SDI A250.11 (2001) - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames.5.ANSI/SDI A250.13 (2008) – Testing and Rating of Severe windstorm Resistant Components for6.Swinging Door Assemblies.SDI 111 (2008 – Recommendations for Selection and Usage Guide for Standard Steel Doors and7.Frames.SDI 117 (2009) – Manufacturing Tolerances Standard Steel Doors and Frames.8.SDI 122 (2007) - Installation and Troubleshooting Guide for Standard Steel Doors and Frames.9.SDI 124 (1998) - Maintenance of Standard Steel Doors and Frames.10.

SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions, coreA.descriptions, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.Shop Drawings: Include the following:B.

Elevations of each door design.1.Details of doors, including vertical and horizontal edge details and metal thicknesses.2.Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.3.Locations of reinforcement and preparations for hardware.4.Details of each different wall opening condition.5.Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.6.Details of accessories.7.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5Deliver hollow metal work palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit andA.Project-site storage. Do not use non-vented plastic.

Provide additional protection to prevent damage to finish of factory-finished units.1.Deliver welded frames with two removable spreader bars across bottom of frames, tack welded to jambsB.and mullions.Store hollow metal work under cover at Project site. Place in stacks of five units maximum in a verticalC.position with heads up, spaced by blocking, on minimum 4-inch-high wood blocking. Do not store in amanner that traps excess humidity.

Provide minimum 1/4-inch space between each stacked door to permit air circulation.1.Any scratches or disfigurements caused in shipping or handling are promptly cleaned and touched2.up with a rust-inhibitive primer to new conditions

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.6Field Measurements: Verify actual dimensions of openings by field measurements before fabrication.A.


HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES 081113 - 1


COORDINATION1.7Coordinate installation of anchorages for hollow metal frames. Furnish setting drawings, templates, andA.directions for installing anchorages, including sleeves, concrete inserts, anchor bolts, and items withintegral anchors. Deliver such items to Project site in time for installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MATERIALS2.1Cold-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1008, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; suitable for exposedA.applications.Hot-Rolled Steel Sheet: ASTM A 1011, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B; free of scale, pitting, or surfaceB.defects; pickled and oiled.Frame Anchors: ASTM A 591, Commercial Steel (CS), 40Z (12G) coating designation; mill phosphatized.C.Inserts, Bolts, and Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A 153.D.Powder-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,E.fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attaching hollowmetal frames of type indicated.

STANDARD HOLLOW METAL FRAMES2.2General: Comply with ANSI/SDI A250.8 and with details indicated for type and profile.A.Interior Frames: Fabricated from cold-rolled steel sheet unless metallic-coated sheet is indicated.B.

Fabricate frames with mitered or coped corners.1.Fabricate frames as full profile and face welded unless otherwise indicated.2.Frames for Level 3 Steel Doors: (16 gage) - thick steel sheet.3.Frames 48-inches and wider in opening width are required to me min. 14 gage thick steel sheet.4.Frames for Wood Doors: (16 gage) thick steel sheet.5.Frames for Borrowed Lights: (16 gage) thick steel sheet.6.

Hardware Reinforcement: Fabricate according to ANSI/SDI A250.6 with reinforcement plates from sameC.material as frames.Knock down frames are not acceptable.D.

FRAME ANCHORS2.3Jamb Anchors:A.

Stud Anchors: Welded frames for installation in stud partitions shall be provided with welded in1.steel anchors of suitable design, not less than 18 gage thickness, secured inside each jamb asfollows:

Frames up to 60•• height: 2 anchors.a.Frames greater than 60•• up to 90•• 4 anchors.b.Frames greater than 90•• up to 96•• 5 anchors.c.Frames greater than 96••: 5 anchors plus one for each 24•• or fraction thereof overd.96•• spaced at 24•• maximum between anchors.

Post-installed Expansion Type for In-Place Concrete or Masonry: Minimum 3/8-inch- diameter bolts2.with expansion shields or inserts. Provide pipe spacer from frame to wall, with throat reinforcementplate, welded to frame at each anchor location. 3•• minimum, embedment.Hot-dip galvanize all anchors in exterior walls.3.

Floor Anchors: Formed from same material as frames, not less than 0.067 inch thick, and as follows:B.Monolithic Concrete Slabs: Floor anchors shall be provided with two holes for fasteners and shall1.be fastened inside jambs with at least four (4) spot welds per anchor

FABRICATION2.4Fabricate hollow metal work to be rigid and free of defects, warp, or buckle. Accurately form metal toA.required sizes and profiles, with minimum radius for thickness of metal. Where practical, fit and assembleunits in manufacturer's plant. To ensure proper assembly at Project site, clearly identify work that cannotbe permanently factory assembled before shipment.Tolerances: Fabricate hollow metal work to tolerances indicated in SDI 117.B.Hollow Metal Frames: Where frames are fabricated in sections due to shipping or handling limitations,C.provide alignment plates or angles at each joint, fabricated of same thickness metal as frames.

Welded Frames: Weld flush face joints continuously; grind, fill, dress, and make smooth, flush, and1.invisible.




Hinge Reinforcement: Provide high frequency hinge reinforcements at door openings 42-inch and2.wider with mortise/butt type hinges at top hinge location to deter against hinge reinforcement sag;required at all openings with automatic openers.Provide countersunk, flat- or oval-head exposed screws and bolts for exposed fasteners unless3.otherwise indicated.Door Silencers: Except on weather-stripped or gasketed doors, drill stops to receive door silencers4.as follows. Keep holes clear during construction. Silencers to be supplied by frame manufacturerregardless if specified in Div. 8 Door Hardware.

Single-Door Frames: Drill stop in strike jamb to receive three door silencers.a.Double-Door Frames: Drill stop in head jamb to receive two door silencers.b.

Hardware Preparation: Factory prepare hollow metal work to receive templated mortised hardware; includeD.cutouts, reinforcement, mortising, drilling, and tapping according to the Door Hardware Schedule andtemplates furnished as specified in Division 08 Section "Door Hardware."

Locate hardware as indicated, or if not indicated, according to ANSI/SDI A250.8.1.Reinforce doors and frames to receive non-templated, mortised and surface-mounted door2.hardware.Comply with applicable requirements in ANSI/SDI A250.6 and ANSI/DHI A115 Series specifications3.for preparation of hollow metal work for hardware.Coordinate locations of conduit and wiring boxes for electrical connections with Division 264.Sections.

STEEL FINISHES2.5Prime Finish: Apply manufacturer's standard primer immediately after cleaning and pretreating.A.

Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free primer complying with1.ANSI/SDI A250.10 acceptance criteria; recommended by primer manufacturer for substrate;compatible with substrate and field-applied coatings despite prolonged exposure.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.Examine roughing-in for embedded and built-in anchors to verify actual locations before frame installation.B.For the record, prepare written report, endorsed by Installer, listing conditions detrimental to performanceC.of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.D.

PREPARATION3.2Remove welded-in shipping spreaders installed at factory after installation of frame in wall. RestoreA.exposed finish by grinding, filling, and dressing, as required to make repaired area smooth, flush, andinvisible on exposed faces.Prior to installation, adjust and securely brace welded hollow metal frames for squareness, alignment,B.twist, and plumbness to the following tolerances:

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees from jamb1.perpendicular to frame head.Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to plane of wall.2.Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines, and3.perpendicular to plane of wall.Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a perpendicular line from head to floor.4.

Drill and tap doors and frames to receive nontemplated, mortised, and surface-mounted door hardware.C.

INSTALLATION3.3General: Install hollow metal work plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place; complyA.with manufacturer's written instructions.Hollow Metal Frames: Install hollow metal frames of size and profile indicated. Comply with ANSI/SDIB.A250.11.

Set frames accurately in position, plumbed, aligned, and braced securely until permanent anchors1.are set. After wall construction is complete, remove temporary braces, leaving surfaces smooth andundamaged.

At fire-protection-rated openings, install frames according to NFPA 80.a.




Where frames are fabricated in sections because of shipping or handling limitations, fieldb.splice at approved locations by welding face joint continuously; grind, fill, dress, and makesplice smooth, flush, and invisible on exposed faces.Install frames with removable glazing stops located on secure side of opening.c.Remove temporary braces necessary for installation only after frames have been properlyd.set and secured.Check plumbness, squareness, and twist of frames as walls are constructed. Shim ase.necessary to comply with installation tolerances.

Floor Anchors: Provide floor anchors for each jamb and mullion that extends to floor, and secure2.with post-installed expansion anchors.

Floor anchors may be set with powder-actuated fasteners instead of post-installeda.expansion anchors if so indicated and approved on Shop Drawings.

Metal-Stud Partitions: Solidly pack mineral-fiber insulation behind frames.3.In-Place Gypsum Board Partitions: Secure frames in place with post-installed expansion anchors4.through floor anchors at each jamb. Countersink anchors, and fill and make smooth, flush, andinvisible on exposed faces.Installation Tolerances: Adjust hollow metal door frames for squareness, alignment, twist, and5.plumb to the following tolerances:

Squareness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at door rabbet on a line 90 degrees froma.jamb perpendicular to frame head.Alignment: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at jambs on a horizontal line parallel to planeb.of wall.Twist: Plus or minus 1/16 inch, measured at opposite face corners of jambs on parallel lines,c.and perpendicular to plane of wall.Plumbness: Plus or minus 1/16 inch (), measured at jambs at floor.d.

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.4Final Adjustments: Check and readjust operating hardware items immediately before final inspection.A.Leave work in complete and proper operating condition. Remove and replace defective work, includinghollow metal work that is warped, bowed, or otherwise unacceptable.Adjust frames and doors per SDI 122 Installation for trouble shooting openings.B.Remove grout and other bonding material from hollow metal work immediately after installation.C.Prime-Coat Touchup: Immediately after erection, sand smooth rusted or damaged areas of prime coat andD.apply touchup of compatible air-drying, rust-inhibitive primer.





SECTION 081216 - ALUMINUM FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes interior aluminum frames for doors and glazing installed in gypsum board partitions.A.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product indicated. Include construction details, material descriptions,A.dimensions of individual components and profiles, fire-resistance rating, and finishes.Shop Drawings: Include the following:B.

Frame details for each frame type, including dimensioned profiles and metal thicknesses.1.Locations of reinforcements and preparations for hardware.2.Details of each different wall-opening condition.3.Details of anchorages, joints, field splices, and connections.4.Details of accessories.5.Details of moldings, removable stops, and glazing.6.Details of conduits and preparations for power, signal, and control systems.7.

Schedule: For interior aluminum frames. Use same designations indicated on Drawings. Coordinate withC.door hardware schedule and glazing.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Product Test Reports: Based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by a qualified testingA.agency, for each type of interior aluminum frame.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Source Limitations: Obtain interior aluminum frames from single source from single manufacturer.A.Fire-Rated Assemblies: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualifiedB.testing agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according toNFPA 252 or UL 10C.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Deliver interior aluminum frames palletized, wrapped, or crated to provide protection during transit andA.Project-site storage. Do not use nonvented plastic. Store interior aluminum frames under cover at Projectsite.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


Frameworks Manufacturing.1.Interior Components Inc.2.RACO Interior Products, Inc.3.Versatrac.4.Wilson Partitions.5.

COMPONENTS2.2Aluminum Framing: ASTM B 221, Alloy 6063-T5 or alloy and temper required to suit structural and finishA.requirements, not less than 0.062 inch thick.Door Frames: Extruded aluminum, reinforced for hinges, strikes, and closers. Refer to drawings for frameB.type.

90-Minute Fire-Protection Rating: Fabricate aluminum frame assemblies with a cold-formed,1.primed, interior steel liner, where indicated.


ALUMINUM FRAMES 081216 - 1


Glazing Frames: Extruded aluminum, for glazing thickness indicated.C.Ceiling Tracks: Extruded aluminum.D.Trim: Extruded aluminum, not less than 0.062 inch thick, with removable snap-in glazing stops and doorE.stops without exposed fasteners.

Trim Style: As selected by Architect.1.

ACCESSORIES2.3Fasteners: Aluminum, nonmagnetic, stainless-steel or other noncorrosive metal fasteners compatible withA.frames, stops, panels, reinforcement plates, hardware, anchors, and other items being fastened.Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard continuous mohair, wool pile, or vinyl seals.B.Smoke Seals: Intumescent strip or fire-rated gaskets.C.Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard extruded or molded plastic, to accommodate glazing thicknessD.indicated.Glazing: Comply with requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."E.Hardware: Comply with requirements in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."F.

FABRICATION2.4Provide concealed corner reinforcements and alignment clips for accurately fitted hairline joints at buttedA.or mitered connections.Factory prepare interior aluminum frames to receive templated mortised hardware; include cutouts,B.reinforcements, mortising, drilling, and tapping, according to the Door Hardware Schedule and templatesfurnished as specified in Section 087100 "Door Hardware."

Locate hardware as required by fire-rated label for assembly.1.Fabricate frames for glazing with removable stops to allow glazing replacement without dismantling frame.C.

Locate removable stops on the inside of spaces accessed by keyed doors.1.Fabricate components to allow secure installation without exposed fasteners.D.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS2.5Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendationsA.for applying and designating finishes.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations inB.appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples andare assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

ALUMINUM FINISHES2.6Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.A.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine walls, floors, and ceilings, with Installer present, for conditions affecting performance of the Work.A.Verify that wall thickness does not exceed standard tolerances allowed by throat size indicated.B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

INSTALLATION3.2General: Install interior aluminum frames plumb, rigid, properly aligned, and securely fastened in place;A.comply with manufacturer's written instructions.Set frames accurately in position and plumbed, aligned, and securely anchored to substrates.B.

At fire-protection-rated openings, install interior aluminum frames according to NFPA 80 and NFPA1.105.

Install frame components in the longest possible lengths; components up to 96 inches long must be oneC.piece.

Fasten to suspended ceiling grid on maximum 48-inch centers, using sheet metal screws or other1.fasteners approved by frame manufacturer.Use concealed installation clips to produce tightly fitted and aligned splices and connections.2.




Secure clips to extruded main-frame components and not to snap-in or trim members.3.Do not leave screws or other fasteners exposed to view when installation is complete.4.

CLEANING3.3Clean exposed frame surfaces promptly after installation, using cleaning methods recommended by frameA.manufacturer and according to AAMA 609 & 610.Touch up marred frame surfaces so touchup is not visible from a distance of 48 inches. Remove andB.replace frames with damaged finish that cannot be satisfactorily repaired.





SECTION 081416 - FLUSH WOOD DOORS

GENERALPART 1 -



Solid-core doors with plastic-laminate faces.1.Factory fitting flush wood doors to frames and factory machining for hardware.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of door. Include details of core and edge construction and trim for openings.A.Shop Drawings: Indicate location, size, and hand of each door; elevation of each kind of door;B.construction details not covered in Product Data; and the following:

Dimensions and locations of blocking.1.Dimensions and locations of mortises and holes for hardware.2.Dimensions and locations of cutouts.3.Undercuts.4.Requirements for veneer matching.5.Doors to be factory finished and finish requirements.6.Fire-protection ratings for fire-rated doors.7.

Samples for Verification:C.Factory finishes applied to actual door face materials, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 2501.mm), for each material and finish. For each wood species and transparent finish, provide set ofthree Samples showing typical range of color and grain to be expected in finished Work.Plastic laminate, 6 inches (150 mm) square, for each color, texture, and pattern selected.2.Corner sections of doors, approximately 8 by 10 inches (200 by 250 mm), with door faces and3.edges representing actual materials to be used.

Provide Samples for each species of veneer and solid lumber required.a.Provide Samples for each color, texture, and pattern of plastic laminate required.b.Finish veneer-faced door Samples with same materials proposed for factory-finished doors.c.

Louver blade and frame sections, 6 inches (150 mm) long, for each material and finish specified.4.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Sample Warranty: For special warranty.A.Quality Standard Compliance Certificates: AWI Quality Certification Program certificates.B.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Manufacturer Qualifications: A qualified manufacturer that is a certified participant in AWI's QualityA.Certification Program.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Comply with requirements of referenced standard and manufacturer's written instructions.A.Package doors individually in plastic bags or cardboard cartons.B.Mark each door on top and bottom rail with opening number used on Shop Drawings.C.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install doors until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wetA.work in spaces is complete and dry, and HVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperatureand humidity conditions at occupancy levels during remainder of construction period.

WARRANTY1.8Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace doors that fail in materials or workmanshipA.within specified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.Warping (bow, cup, or twist) more than 1/4 inch in a 42-by-84-inch section.a.Telegraphing of core construction in face veneers exceeding 0.01 inch in a 3-inch span.b.


FLUSH WOOD DOORS 081416 - 1


Warranty shall also include installation and finishing that may be required due to repair or2.replacement of defective doors.Warranty Period for Solid-Core Interior Doors: Life of installation.3.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."


Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.1.Ampco.2.Eggers Industries.3.Graham Wood Doors; an Assa Abloy Group company.4.Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.5.Mohawk Doors; a Masonite company.6.VT Industries, Inc.7.

Source Limitations: Obtain flush wood doors and wood paneling from single manufacturer.B.

FLUSH WOOD DOORS, GENERAL2.3Quality Standard: In addition to requirements specified, comply with AWI's, AWMAC's, and WI'sA."Architectural Woodwork Standards WDMA I.S.1-A, "Architectural Wood Flush Doors."

Provide AWI Quality Certification Labels indicating that doors comply with requirements of grades1.specified.Contract Documents contain selections chosen from options in quality standard and additional2.requirements beyond those of quality standard. Comply with those selections and requirements inaddition to quality standard.

WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.B.Fire-Rated Wood Doors: Doors complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and labeled by a qualified testingC.agency, for fire-protection ratings indicated, based on testing at positive pressure according to NFPA 252or UL 10C.

Oversize Fire-Rated Door Assemblies: For units exceeding sizes of tested assemblies, provide1.certification by a qualified testing agency that doors comply with standard constructionrequirements for tested and labeled fire-rated door assemblies except for size.Temperature-Rise Limit: At vertical exit enclosures and exit passageways, provide doors that have2.a maximum transmitted temperature end point of not more than 450 deg F (250 deg C) aboveambient after 30 minutes of standard fire-test exposure.Cores: Provide core specified or mineral core as needed to provide fire-protection rating indicated.3.Edge Construction: Provide edge construction with intumescent seals concealed by outer stile.4.Comply with specified requirements for exposed edges.Pairs: Provide fire-retardant stiles that are listed and labeled for applications indicated without5.formed-steel edges and astragals. Provide stiles with concealed intumescent seals. Comply withspecified requirements for exposed edges.Pairs: Provide formed-steel edges and astragals with intumescent seals.6.

Finish steel edges and astragals with baked enamel[same color as doors].a.Finish steel edges and astragals to match door hardware (locksets or exit devices).b.

Smoke- and Draft-Control Door Assemblies: Listed and labeled for smoke and draft control, based onD.testing according to UL 1784.Particleboard-Core Doors:E.

Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-1.1.Particleboard: Straw-based particleboard complying with ANSI A208.1, Grade LD-2 or M-2, except2.for density.Blocking: Provide wood blocking in particleboard-core doors as needed to eliminate3.through-bolting hardware.Provide doors with cores instead of particleboard cores for doors indicated to receive exit devices.4.

Mineral-Core Doors:F.Core: Noncombustible mineral product complying with requirements of referenced quality standard1.and testing and inspecting agency for fire-protection rating indicated.












Blocking: Provide composite blocking with improved screw-holding capability approved for use in2.doors of fire-protection ratings indicated asneeded to eliminate through-bolting hardware.

5-inch top-rail blocking.a.5-inch bottom-rail blocking, in doors indicated to have protection plates.b.5-inch midrail blocking, in doors indicated to have armor plates.c.4-1/2-by-10-inch lock blocks, in doors indicated to have exit devices.d.

Edge Construction: At hinge stiles, provide laminated-edge construction with improved3.screw-holding capability and split resistance. Comply with specified requirements for exposededges.

Screw-Holding Capability: 475 lbf per WDMA T.M.-10.a.

PLASTIC-LAMINATE-FACED DOORS2.4Interior Solid-Core Doors:A.

Grade: Custom.1.Plastic-Laminate Faces: High-pressure decorative laminates complying with NEMA LD 3, Grade2.HGS.Colors, Patterns, and Finishes: As scheduled.3.Core: Particleboard.4.Construction: Five plies. Stiles and rails are bonded to core, then entire unit is abrasive planed5.before faces and crossbands are applied. Faces are bonded to core using a hot press.WDMA I.S.1-A Performance Grade: Extra Heavy Duty.6.

LIGHT FRAMES AND LOUVERS2.5Wood Beads for Light Openings in Wood Doors: Provide manufacturer's standard wood beads unlessA.otherwise indicated.

Wood Species: Same species as door faces.1.Profile: Manufacturer's standard shape.2.At wood-core doors with 20-minute fire-protection ratings, provide wood beads and metal glazing3.clips approved for such use.

Metal Louvers:B.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.

Air Louvers, Inc.a.Anemostat; a Mestek company.b.Hiawatha Incorporated.c.McGill Architectural Products.d.

Blade Type: Vision-proof, inverted V.2.Metal and Finish: Extruded aluminum with [light bronze] [medium bronze] [dark bronze] [black],3.Class II, color anodic finish, AA-M12C22A32/A34.

Louvers for Fire-Rated Doors: Metal louvers with fusible link and closing device, listed and labeled for useC.in doors with fire-protection rating of 1-1/2 hours and less.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Air Louvers Inc.a.Anemostat; a Mestek company.b.McGill Architectural Products.c.

Metal and Finish: Hot-dip galvanized steel, 0.040 inch thick, finish.2.

FABRICATION2.6Factory fit doors to suit frame-opening sizes indicated. Comply with clearance requirements of referencedA.quality standard for fitting unless otherwise indicated.

Comply with NFPA 80 requirements for fire-rated doors.1.Factory machine doors for hardware that is not surface applied. Locate hardware to comply withB.DHI-WDHS-3. Comply with final hardware schedules, door frame Shop Drawings, BHMA-156.115-W, andhardware templates.

Coordinate with hardware mortises in metal frames to verify dimensions and alignment before1.factory machining.Metal Astragals: Factory machine astragals and formed-steel edges for hardware for pairs of2.fire-rated doors.

Transom and Side Panels: Fabricate matching panels with same construction, exposed surfaces, andC.finish as specified for associated doors. Finish bottom edges of transoms and top edges of rabbeteddoors same as door stiles.

Fabricate door and transom panels with full-width, solid-lumber[, rabbeted,] meeting rails. Provide1.factory-installed spring bolts for concealed attachment into jambs of metal door frames.












Openings: Factory cut and trim openings through doors.D.Light Openings: Trim openings with moldings of material and profile indicated.1.Glazing: Factory install glazing in doors indicated to be factory finished. Comply with applicable2.requirements in Section 088000 "Glazing."Louvers: Factory install louvers in prepared openings.3.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine doors and installed door frames, with Installer present, before hanging doors.A.

Verify that installed frames comply with indicated requirements for type, size, location, and swing1.characteristics and have been installed with level heads and plumb jambs.Reject doors with defects.2.


INSTALLATION3.2Hardware: For installation, see Section 087100 "Door Hardware."A.Installation Instructions: Install doors to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and referencedB.quality standard, and as indicated.

Install fire-rated doors according to NFPA 80.1.Install smoke- and draft-control doors according to NFPA 105.2.

Factory-Fitted Doors: Align in frames for uniform clearance at each edge.C.Factory-Finished Doors: Restore finish before installation if fitting or machining is required at Project site.D.

ADJUSTING3.3Operation: Rehang or replace doors that do not swing or operate freely.A.Finished Doors: Replace doors that are damaged or that do not comply with requirements. Doors may beB.repaired or refinished if Work complies with requirements and shows no evidence of repair or refinishing.





SECTION 083113 - ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES

GENERALPART 1 -



Access doors and frames for walls and ceilings.1.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product.A.Shop Drawings:B.

Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachments to other work.1.Detail fabrication and installation of access doors and frames for each type of substrate.2.

Product Schedule: Provide complete access door and frame schedule, including types, locations, sizes,C.latching or locking provisions, and other data pertinent to installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content so that post-consumer recycledA.content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 35 percent.Regional Content: Products shall be extracted or recovered, as well as manufactured, within 500 miles ofB.project site.

ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES FOR WALLS AND CEILINGS2.2Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

Acudor Products, Inc.1.Babcock-Davis.2.Jensen Industries; Div. of Broan-Nutone, LLC.3.J. L. Industries, Inc.; Div. of Activar Construction Products Group.4.Karp Associates, Inc.5.Larsen's Manufacturing Company.6.Milcor Inc.7.Nystrom, Inc.8.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of access door and frame from single source from singleB.manufacturer.Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:C.

Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide manufacturer's standard-width1.exposed flange, proportional to door size.Locations: .2.Door Size: As indicated.3.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage.4.

Finish: Factory prime.a.Frame Material: Same material, thickness, and finish as door.5.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.6.Hardware: Latch.7.

Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:D.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame. Provide frame with beads for concealed1.flange installation.Locations: .2.Door Size: As indicated.3.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage.4.

Finish: Factory prime.a.Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.5.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.6.Hardware: Latch.7.


ACCESS DOORS AND FRAMES 083113 - 1










Recessed Access Doors:E.Assembly Description: Fabricate door in the form of a pan recessed for infill. Provide frame with1.gypsum board bead for concealed flange installation.Locations: Ceiling.2.Door Size: As indicated.3.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.060 inch, 16 gage.4.

Finish: Factory prime.a.Frame Material: Same material and thickness as door.5.Hinges: Manufacturer's standard.6.Hardware: Latch.7.

Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Exposed Flanges:F.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation1.enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release.Provide manufacturer's standard-width exposed flange, proportional to door size.Locations: Wall.2.Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than that of adjacent construction.3.Temperature-Rise Rating: .4.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage.5.


Fire-Rated, Flush Access Doors with Concealed Flanges:G.Assembly Description: Fabricate door to fit flush to frame, with a core of mineral-fiber insulation1.enclosed in sheet metal. Provide self-latching door with automatic closer and interior latch release.Provide frame with gypsum board beads for concealed flange installation.Locations: .2.Fire-Resistance Rating: Not less than 1 hour.3.Temperature-Rise Rating: 250 deg F at the end of 30 minutes.4.Uncoated Steel Sheet for Door: Nominal 0.036 inch, 20 gage.5.


Hardware:H.Latch: Cam latch operated by flush key with interior release.1.

MATERIALS2.3Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.A.Steel Sheet: Uncoated or electrolytic zinc coated, ASTM A 879/A 879M, with cold-rolled steel sheetB.substrate complying with ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), exposed.Frame Anchors: Same type as door face.C.Inserts, Bolts, and Anchor Fasteners: Hot-dip galvanized steel according to ASTM A 153/A 153M or ASTMD.F 2329.

FABRICATION2.4General: Provide access door and frame assemblies manufactured as integral units ready for installation.A.Metal Surfaces: For metal surfaces exposed to view in the completed Work, provide materials withB.smooth, flat surfaces without blemishes. Do not use materials with exposed pitting, seam marks, rollermarks, rolled trade names, or roughness.Doors and Frames: Grind exposed welds smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Furnish attachmentC.devices and fasteners of type required to secure access doors to types of supports indicated.

For concealed flanges with drywall bead, provide edge trim for securely attached to perimeter of1.frames.Provide mounting holes in frames for attachment of units to metal or wood framing.2.Provide mounting holes in frame for attachment of masonry anchors.3.

Recessed Access Doors: Form face of panel to provide recess for application of applied finish. ReinforceD.panel as required to prevent buckling.Latching Mechanisms: Furnish number required to hold doors in flush, smooth plane when closed.E.




FINISHES2.5Comply with NAAMM's "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products" for recommendationsA.for applying and designating finishes.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a strippable, temporaryB.protective covering before shipping.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations inC.appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples andare assembled or installed to minimize contrast.Steel and Metallic-Coated-Steel Finishes:D.

Factory Prime: Apply manufacturer's standard, fast-curing, lead- and chromate-free, universal1.primer immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditionsA.affecting performance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

INSTALLATION3.2Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing access doors and frames.A.Install doors flush with adjacent finish surfaces or recessed to receive finish material.B.

ADJUSTING3.3Adjust doors and hardware, after installation, for proper operation.A.Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise damaged.B.





SECTION 084113 - ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

GENERALPART 1 -



Exterior and interior storefront framing.1.Storefront framing for window walls.2.Exterior and interior manual-swing entrance doors and door-frame units.3.



Include construction details, material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and1.profiles, and finishes.

Shop Drawings: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts. Include plans, elevations, sections,B.full-size details, and attachments to other work.

Include details of provisions for assembly expansion and contraction and for draining moisture1.occurring within the assembly to the exterior.Include full-size isometric details of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of aluminum-framed2.entrances and storefronts, showing the following:

Joinery, including concealed welds.a.Anchorage.b.Expansion provisions.c.Glazing.d.Flashing and drainage.e.

Show connection to and continuity with adjacent thermal, weather, air, and vapor barriers.3.Samples for Initial Selection: For units with factory-applied color finishes.C.Fabrication Sample: Of each vertical-to-horizontal intersection of assemblies, made from 12-inch lengthsD.of full-size components and showing details of the following:

Joinery, including concealed welds.1.Anchorage.2.Expansion provisions.3.Glazing.4.Flashing and drainage.5.

Delegated-Design Submittal: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts indicated to comply withE.performance requirements and design criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualifiedprofessional engineer responsible for their preparation.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Preconstruction Laboratory Mockup Testing Submittals:A.

Testing Program: Developed specifically for Project.1.Test Reports: Prepared by a qualified preconstruction testing agency for each mockup test.2.Record Drawings: As-built drawings of preconstruction laboratory mockups showing changes3.made during preconstruction laboratory mockup testing.

Qualification Data: For Installer.B.Energy Performance Certificates: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, accessories, andC.components, from manufacturer.

Basis for Certification: NFRC-certified energy performance values for each aluminum-framed1.entrance and storefront.

Product Test Reports: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts, for tests performed by a qualifiedD.testing agency.Sample Warranties: For special warranties.E.


ALUMINUM-FRAMED ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS

084113 - 1


CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.6Maintenance Data: For aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to include in maintenance manuals.A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.7Installer Qualifications: An entity that employs installers and supervisors who are trained and approved byA.manufacturer.Product Options: Information on Drawings and in Specifications establishes requirements for aestheticB.effects and performance characteristics of assemblies. Aesthetic effects are indicated by dimensions,arrangements, alignment, and profiles of components and assemblies as they relate to sightlines, to oneanother, and to adjoining construction.

Do not change intended aesthetic effects, as judged solely by Architect, except with Architect's1.approval. If changes are proposed, submit comprehensive explanatory data to Architect for review.

MOCKUPS1.8Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticA.effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

Build mockup of typical wall area as shown on Drawings or, if not shown on Drawings, as directed1.by Architect.Testing shall be performed on mockups according to requirements in "Field Quality Control" Article.2.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents3.contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed4.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

WARRANTY1.9Special Warranty: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of aluminum-framed entrancesA.and storefronts that do not comply with requirements or that fail in materials or workmanship withinspecified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.Structural failures including, but not limited to, excessive deflection.a.Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.b.Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal weathering.c.Water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas.d.Failure of operating components.e.

Warranty Period: Two years from date of Substantial Completion.2.Special Finish Warranty: Standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair finishes or replaceB.aluminum that shows evidence of deterioration of factory-applied finishes within specified warranty period.

Deterioration includes, but is not limited to, the following:1.Color fading more than 5 Hunter units when tested according to ASTM D 2244.a.Chalking in excess of a No. 8 rating when tested according to ASTM D 4214.b.Cracking, checking, peeling, or failure of paint to adhere to bare metal.c.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.2Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "QualityA.Requirements," to design aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.General Performance: Comply with performance requirements specified, as determined by testing ofB.aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts representing those indicated for this Project without failuredue to defective manufacture, fabrication, installation, or other defects in construction.

Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts shall withstand movements of supporting structure1.including, but not limited to, story drift, twist, column shortening, long-term creep, and deflectionfrom uniformly distributed and concentrated live loads.Failure also includes the following:2.



084113 - 2


Thermal stresses transferring to building structure.a.Glass breakage.b.Noise or vibration created by wind and thermal and structural movements.c.Loosening or weakening of fasteners, attachments, and other components.d.Failure of operating units.e.

Structural Loads:C.Wind Loads: As indicated on Drawings.1.Other Design Loads: As indicated on Drawings.2.

Deflection of Framing Members: At design wind pressure, as follows:D.Deflection Normal to Wall Plane: Limited to edge of glass in a direction perpendicular to glass1.plane not exceeding 1/175 of the glass edge length for each individual glazing lite or an amountthat restricts edge deflection of individual glazing lites to 3/4 inch, whichever is less.Deflection Parallel to Glazing Plane: Limited to 1/360 of clear span or 1/8 inch, whichever is2.smaller.Cantilever Deflection: Where framing members overhang an anchor point, as follows:3.

Perpendicular to Plane of Wall: No greater than 1/240 of clear span plus 1/4 inch for spansa.greater than 11 feet 8-1/4 inches or 1/175 times span, for spans less than 11 feet 8-1/4inches.

Structural: Test according to ASTM E 330 as follows:E.When tested at positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies do not evidence1.deflection exceeding specified limits.When tested at 150 percent of positive and negative wind-load design pressures, assemblies,2.including anchorage, do not evidence material failures, structural distress, or permanentdeformation of main framing members exceeding 0.2 percent of span.Test Durations: As required by design wind velocity, but not less than 10 seconds.3.

Air Infiltration: Test according to ASTM E 283 for infiltration as follows:F.Fixed Framing and Glass Area:1.

Maximum air leakage of 0.06 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential of 1.57 lbf/sq. ft..a.Entrance Doors:2.

Pair of Doors: Maximum air leakage of 1.0 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential ofa.1.57 lbf/sq. ft..Single Doors: Maximum air leakage of 0.5 cfm/sq. ft. at a static-air-pressure differential ofb.1.57 lbf/sq. ft..

Water Penetration under Static Pressure: Test according to ASTM E 331 as follows:G.No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested according to1.a minimum static-air-pressure differential of 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, butnot less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..

Water Penetration under Dynamic Pressure: Test according to AAMA 501.1 as follows:H.No evidence of water penetration through fixed glazing and framing areas when tested at dynamic1.pressure equal to 20 percent of positive wind-load design pressure, but not less than 6.24 lbf/sq. ft..Maximum Water Leakage: No uncontrolled water penetrating assemblies or water appearing on2.assemblies' normally exposed interior surfaces from sources other than condensation. Waterleakage does not include water controlled by flashing and gutters, or water that is drained toexterior.

Energy Performance: Certify and label energy performance according to NFRC as follows:I.Thermal Transmittance (U-factor): Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have U-factor of not more1.than 0.57 Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F as determined according to NFRC 100.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have a solar heat gain2.coefficient of no greater than 0.40 as determined according to NFRC 200.Condensation Resistance: Fixed glazing and framing areas shall have an NFRC-certified3.condensation resistance rating of no less than as determined according to NFRC 500.

Thermal Movements: Allow for thermal movements resulting from ambient and surface temperatureJ.changes:

Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.1.Thermal Cycling: No buckling; stress on glass; sealant failure; excess stress on framing, anchors,2.and fasteners; or reduction of performance when tested according to AAMA 501.5.

High Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: That which produces an exterior metal-surfacea.temperature of 180 deg F.Low Exterior Ambient-Air Temperature: 0 deg F.b.Interior Ambient-Air Temperature: 75 deg F.c.



084113 - 3



EFCO Corporation.1.Kawneer North America.2.Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.3.United States Aluminum.4.YKK AP America Inc.5.

FRAMING2.4Framing Members: Manufacturer's extruded- or formed-aluminum framing members of thickness requiredA.and reinforced as required to support imposed loads.

Construction: Thermally broken.1.Glazing System: Retained mechanically with gaskets on four sides.2.Glazing Plane: Front.3.Finish: High-performance organic finish.4.Fabrication Method: Field-fabricated stick system.5.

Backer Plates: Manufacturer's standard, continuous backer plates for framing members, if not integral,B.where framing abuts adjacent construction.Brackets and Reinforcements: Manufacturer's standard high-strength aluminum with nonstaining,C.nonferrous shims for aligning system components.Materials:D.

Aluminum: Alloy and temper recommended by manufacturer for type of use and finish indicated.1.Sheet and Plate: ASTM B 209.a.Extruded Bars, Rods, Profiles, and Tubes: ASTM B 221.b.Extruded Structural Pipe and Tubes: ASTM B 429/B 429M.c.Structural Profiles: ASTM B 308/B 308M.d.

Steel Reinforcement: Manufacturer's standard zinc-rich, corrosion-resistant primer complying with2.SSPC-PS Guide No. 12.00; applied immediately after surface preparation and pretreatment. Selectsurface preparation methods according to recommendations in SSPC-SP COM, and preparesurfaces according to applicable SSPC standard.

Structural Shapes, Plates, and Bars: ASTM A 36/A 36M.a.Cold-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M.b.Hot-Rolled Sheet and Strip: ASTM A 1011/A 1011M.c.

ENTRANCE DOOR SYSTEMS2.5Entrance Doors: Manufacturer's standard glazed entrance doors for manual-swing operation.A.

Door Construction: 1-3/4-inch overall thickness, with minimum 0.125-inch- thick,1.extruded-aluminum tubular rail and stile members. Mechanically fasten corners with reinforcingbrackets that are deeply penetrated and fillet welded or that incorporate concealed tie rods.Glazing Stops and Gaskets: Beveled, snap-on, extruded-aluminum stops and preformed gaskets.2.

Provide nonremovable glazing stops on outside of door.a.

ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE2.6Entrance Door Hardware: Hardware not specified in this Section is specified in Section 087100 "DoorA.Hardware."General: Provide entrance door hardware and entrance door hardware sets indicated in "Entrance DoorB.Hardware Sets" Article for each entrance door to comply with requirements in this Section.

Entrance Door Hardware Sets: Provide quantity, item, size, finish or color indicated, and products1.complying with BHMA standard referenced.Sequence of Operation: Provide electrified door hardware function, sequence of operation, and2.interface with other building control systems indicated.Opening-Force Requirements:3.

Egress Doors: Not more than 15 lbf to release the latch and not more than 30 lbfto set thea.door in motion and not more than 15 lbf to open the door to its minimum required width.Accessible Interior Doors: Not more than 5 lbf to fully open door.b.

Designations: Requirements for design, grade, function, finish, size, and other distinctive qualities of eachC.type of entrance door hardware are indicated in "Entrance Door Hardware Sets" Article. Products areidentified by using entrance door hardware designations as follows:

References to BHMA Standards: Provide products complying with these standards and1.requirements for description, quality, and function.



084113 - 4







Thresholds: BHMA A156.21, raised thresholds beveled with a slope of not more than 1:2, with maximumD.height of 1/2 inch.

GLAZING2.7Glazing: Comply with Section 088000 "Glazing."A.Glazing Gaskets: Manufacturer's standard sealed-corner pressure-glazing system of black, resilientB.elastomeric glazing gaskets, setting blocks, and shims or spacers.Glazing Sealants: As recommended by manufacturer.C.Weatherseal Sealants: ASTM C 920 for Type S; Grade NS; Class 25; Uses NT, G, A, and O; chemicallyD.curing silicone formulation that is compatible with structural sealant and other system components withwhich it comes in contact; recommended by structural-sealant, weatherseal-sealant, andstructural-sealant-glazed storefront manufacturers for this use.

Color: Match structural sealant.1.

ACCESSORIES2.8Fasteners and Accessories: Manufacturer's standard corrosion-resistant, nonstaining, nonbleedingA.fasteners and accessories compatible with adjacent materials.

Use self-locking devices where fasteners are subject to loosening or turning out from thermal and1.structural movements, wind loads, or vibration.Reinforce members as required to receive fastener threads.2.Use exposed fasteners with countersunk Phillips screw heads, fabricated from 300 series stainless3.steel.

Anchors: Three-way adjustable anchors with minimum adjustment of 1 inch that accommodate fabricationB.and installation tolerances in material and finish compatible with adjoining materials and recommended bymanufacturer.

Concrete and Masonry Inserts: Hot-dip galvanized cast-iron, malleable-iron, or steel inserts1.complying with ASTM A 123/A 123M or ASTM A 153/A 153M requirements.

Concealed Flashing: Dead-soft, 0.018-inch- thick stainless steel, ASTM A 240/A 240M of typeC.recommended by manufacturer.Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied asphalt-mastic paint complying with SSPC-Paint 12 requirements exceptD.containing no asbestos, formulated for 30-milthickness per coat.

FABRICATION2.9Form or extrude aluminum shapes before finishing.A.Fabricate components that, when assembled, have the following characteristics:B.

Profiles that are sharp, straight, and free of defects or deformations.1.Accurately fitted joints with ends coped or mitered.2.Physical and thermal isolation of glazing from framing members.3.Accommodations for thermal and mechanical movements of glazing and framing to maintain4.required glazing edge clearances.Provisions for field replacement of glazing from .5.Fasteners, anchors, and connection devices that are concealed from view to greatest extent6.possible.

Mechanically Glazed Framing Members: Fabricate for flush glazing without projecting stops.C.Structural-Sealant-Glazed Framing Members: Include accommodations for using temporary supportD.device to retain glazing in place while structural sealant cures.Storefront Framing: Fabricate components for assembly using screw-spline system.E.Entrance Door Frames: Reinforce as required to support loads imposed by door operation and forF.installing entrance door hardware.

At exterior doors, provide compression weather stripping at fixed stops.1.At interior doors, provide silencers at stops to prevent metal-to-metal contact. Install three silencers2.on strike jamb of single-door frames and two silencers on head of frames for pairs of doors.

Entrance Doors: Reinforce doors as required for installing entrance door hardware.G.At pairs of exterior doors, provide sliding-type weather stripping retained in adjustable strip and1.mortised into door edge.At exterior doors, provide weather sweeps applied to door bottoms.2.

Entrance Door Hardware Installation: Factory install entrance door hardware to the greatest extentH.possible. Cut, drill, and tap for factory-installed entrance door hardware before applying finishes.After fabrication, clearly mark components to identify their locations in Project according to Shop Drawings.I.



084113 - 5


ALUMINUM FINISHES2.10Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, 0.018 mm or thicker.A.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine areas, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances andA.other conditions affecting performance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

INSTALLATION3.2General:A.

Comply with manufacturer's written instructions.1.Do not install damaged components.2.Fit joints to produce hairline joints free of burrs and distortion.3.Rigidly secure nonmovement joints.4.Install anchors with separators and isolators to prevent metal corrosion and electrolytic5.deterioration and to prevent impeding movement of moving joints.Seal perimeter and other joints watertight unless otherwise indicated.6.

Metal Protection:B.Where aluminum is in contact with dissimilar metals, protect against galvanic action by painting1.contact surfaces with materials recommended by manufacturer for this purpose or by installingnonconductive spacers.Where aluminum is in contact with concrete or masonry, protect against corrosion by painting2.contact surfaces with bituminous paint.

Set continuous sill members and flashing in full sealant bed as specified in Section 079200 "JointC.Sealants" to produce weathertight installation.Install components plumb and true in alignment with established lines and grades.D.Install operable units level and plumb, securely anchored, and without distortion. Adjust weather-strippingE.contact and hardware movement to produce proper operation.Install glazing as specified in Section 088000 "Glazing."F.Entrance Doors: Install doors to produce smooth operation and tight fit at contact points.G.

Exterior Doors: Install to produce weathertight enclosure and tight fit at weather stripping.1.Field-Installed Entrance Door Hardware: Install surface-mounted entrance door hardware2.according to entrance door hardware manufacturers' written instructions using concealed fastenersto greatest extent possible.

ERECTION TOLERANCES3.3Erection Tolerances: Install aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts to comply with the followingA.maximum tolerances:

Plumb: 1/8 inch in 10 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.1.Level: 1/8 inch in 20 feet; 1/4 inch in 40 feet.2.Alignment:3.

Where surfaces abut in line or are separated by reveal or protruding element up to 1/2 incha.wide, limit offset from true alignment to 1/16 inch.Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element from 1/2 to 1 inch wide, limitb.offset from true alignment to 1/8 inch.Where surfaces are separated by reveal or protruding element of 1 inch wide or more, limitc.offset from true alignment to 1/4 inch.

Location: Limit variation from plane to 1/8 inch in 12 feet; 1/2 inch over total length.4.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.4Testing Agency: Engage a qualified testing agency to perform tests and inspections.A.Field Quality-Control Testing: Perform the following test on representative areas of aluminum-framedB.entrances and storefronts.

Water-Spray Test: Before installation of interior finishes has begun, areas designated by Architect1.shall be tested according to AAMA 501.2 and shall not evidence water penetration.

Perform a minimum of two tests in areas as directed by Architect.a.



084113 - 6


Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts will be considered defective if they do not pass tests andC.inspections.Prepare test and inspection reports.D.

MAINTENANCE SERVICE3.5Entrance Door Hardware:A.

Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and maintenance1.instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance, and removal andreplacement of entrance door hardware.Initial Maintenance Service: Beginning at Substantial Completion, provide six months' full2.maintenance by skilled employees of entrance door hardware Installer. Include quarterlypreventive maintenance, repair or replacement of worn or defective components, lubrication,cleaning, and adjusting as required for proper entrance door hardware operation at rated speedand capacity. Use parts and supplies that are the same as those used in the manufacture andinstallation of original equipment.

ENTRANCE DOOR HARDWARE SETS3.6Refer to architectural drawings.A.




084113 - 7


SECTION 088000 - GLAZING

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes:A.

Glass for storefront framing and doors.1.Glazing sealants and accessories.2.

DEFINITIONS1.3Glass Manufacturers: Firms that produce primary glass, fabricated glass, or both, as defined in referencedA.glazing publications.Glass Thicknesses: Indicated by thickness designations in millimeters according to ASTM C 1036.B.IBC: International Building Code.C.Interspace: Space between lites of an insulating-glass unit.D.

COORDINATION1.4Coordinate glazing channel dimensions to provide necessary bite on glass, minimum edge and faceA.clearances, and adequate sealant thicknesses, with reasonable tolerances.


Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials, Installer's personnel,1.equipment, and facilities needed to make progress and avoid delays.Review temporary protection requirements for glazing during and after installation.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.6Product Data: For each type of product.A.Glass Samples: For each type of glass product other than clear monolithic vision glass; 12 inches square.B.

Tinted glass.1.Coated glass.2.Laminated glass.3.Insulating glass.4.

Glazing Accessory Samples: For sealants and colored spacers, in 12-inch lengths. Install sealant SamplesC.between two strips of material representative in color of the adjoining framing system.Glazing Schedule: List glass types and thicknesses for each size opening and location. Use sameD.designations indicated on Drawings.Delegated-Design Submittal: For glass indicated to comply with performance requirements and designE.criteria, including analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible fortheir preparation.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.7Qualification Data: For Installer manufacturers of insulating-glass units with sputter-coated, low-E coatingsA.glass testing agency and sealant testing agency.Product Certificates: For glass.B.Preconstruction adhesion and compatibility test report.C.Sample Warranties: For special warranties.D.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.8Manufacturer Qualifications for Insulating-Glass Units with Sputter-Coated, Low-E Coatings: A qualifiedA.insulating-glass manufacturer who is approved and certified by coated-glass manufacturer.Installer Qualifications: A qualified installer who employs glass installers for this Project who are certifiedB.under the National Glass Association's Certified Glass Installer Program.Glass Testing Agency Qualifications: A qualified independent testing agency accredited according to theC.NFRC CAP 1 Certification Agency Program.


GLAZING 088000 - 1


Sealant Testing Agency Qualifications: An independent testing agency qualified according to ASTM CD.1021 to conduct the testing indicated.

PRECONSTRUCTION TESTING1.9Preconstruction Adhesion and Compatibility Testing: Test each glass product, tape sealant, gasket,A.glazing accessory, and glass-framing member for adhesion to and compatibility with elastomeric glazingsealants.

Testing is not required if data are submitted based on previous testing of current sealant products1.and glazing materials matching those submitted.Use ASTM C 1087 to determine whether priming and other specific joint-preparation techniques are2.required to obtain rapid, optimum adhesion of glazing sealants to glass, tape sealants, gaskets, andglazing channel substrates.Test no fewer than eight Samples of each type of material, including joint substrates, shims, sealant3.backings, secondary seals, and miscellaneous materials.Schedule enough time for testing and analyzing results to prevent delaying the Work.4.For materials failing tests, submit sealant manufacturer's written instructions for corrective5.measures including the use of specially formulated primers.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.10Protect glazing materials according to manufacturer's written instructions. Prevent damage to glass andA.glazing materials from condensation, temperature changes, direct exposure to sun, or other causes.Comply with insulating-glass manufacturer's written instructions for venting and sealing units to avoidB.hermetic seal ruptures due to altitude change.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.11Environmental Limitations: Do not proceed with glazing when ambient and substrate temperatureA.conditions are outside limits permitted by glazing material manufacturers and when glazing channelsubstrates are wet from rain, frost, condensation, or other causes.

Do not install glazing sealants when ambient and substrate temperature conditions are outside1.limits permitted by sealant manufacturer or are below 40 deg F.

WARRANTY1.12Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Coated-Glass Products: Manufacturer agrees to replace coated-glassA.units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of coated glass is defined as defectsdeveloped from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaning coatedglass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include peeling, cracking, and otherindications of deterioration in coating.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.1.Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Laminated Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace laminated-glassB.units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of laminated glass is defined asdefects developed from normal use that are not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaninglaminated glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Defects include edge separation,delamination materially obstructing vision through glass, and blemishes exceeding those allowed byreferenced laminated-glass standard.

Warranty Period: Five years from date of Substantial Completion.1.Manufacturer's Special Warranty for Insulating Glass: Manufacturer agrees to replace insulating-glassC.units that deteriorate within specified warranty period. Deterioration of insulating glass is defined as failureof hermetic seal under normal use that is not attributed to glass breakage or to maintaining and cleaninginsulating glass contrary to manufacturer's written instructions. Evidence of failure is the obstruction ofvision by dust, moisture, or film on interior surfaces of glass.

Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113.

MANUFACTURERS2.2 Subject to compliance with requirements, provide product indicated in glass schedules or comparableA.product by one of the following:


GLAZING 088000 - 2


Cardinal Glass Industries.1.Guardian Industries Corp.2.Oldcastle BuildingEnvelope.3.Pilkington North America Inc.4.PPG Industries, Inc.5.Viracon, Inc.6.

Source Limitations for Glass: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for each glass type.B.Obtain tinted glass from single source from single manufacturer.1.Obtain reflective-coated glass from single source from single manufacturer.2.

Source Limitations for Glazing Accessories: Obtain from single source from single manufacturer for eachC.product and installation method.

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.3General: Installed glazing systems shall withstand normal thermal movement and wind and impact loadsA.(where applicable) without failure, including loss or glass breakage attributable to the following: defectivemanufacture, fabrication, or installation; failure of sealants or gaskets to remain watertight and airtight;deterioration of glazing materials; or other defects in construction.Delegated Design: Engage a qualified professional engineer, as defined in Section 014000 "QualityB.Requirements," to design glazing.Structural Performance: Glazing shall withstand the following design loads within limits and underC.conditions indicated determined according to the IBC and ASTM E 1300.

Design Wind Pressures: As indicated on Drawings.1.Vertical Glazing: For glass surfaces sloped 15 degrees or less from vertical, design glass to resist2.design wind pressure based on glass type factors for short-duration load.Maximum Lateral Deflection: For glass supported on all four edges, limit center-of-glass deflection3.at design wind pressure to not more than 1/50 times the short-side length or 1 inch, whichever isless.Differential Shading: Design glass to resist thermal stresses induced by differential shading within4.individual glass lites.

Safety Glazing: Where safety glazing is indicated, provide glazing that complies with 16 CFR 1201,D.Category II.Thermal and Optical Performance Properties: Provide glass with performance properties specified, asE.indicated in manufacturer's published test data, based on procedures indicated below:

For monolithic-glass lites, properties are based on units with lites .1.For laminated-glass lites, properties are based on products of construction indicated.2.For insulating-glass units, properties are based on units of thickness indicated for overall unit and3.for each lite.U-Factors: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 100 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.24.computer program, expressed as Btu/sq. ft. x h x deg F.Solar Heat-Gain Coefficient and Visible Transmittance: Center-of-glazing values, according to5.NFRC 200 and based on LBL's WINDOW 5.2 computer program.Visible Reflectance: Center-of-glazing values, according to NFRC 300.6.

GLASS PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.4Glazing Publications: Comply with published recommendations of glass product manufacturers andA.organizations below unless more stringent requirements are indicated. See these publications for glazingterms not otherwise defined in this Section or in referenced standards.

GANA Publications: "Laminated Glazing Reference Manual" and "Glazing Manual."1.AAMA Publications: AAMA GDSG-1, "Glass Design for Sloped Glazing," and AAMA TIR A7,2."Sloped Glazing Guidelines."IGMA Publication for Sloped Glazing: IGMA TB-3001, "Guidelines for Sloped Glazing."3.IGMA Publication for Insulating Glass: SIGMA TM-3000, "North American Glazing Guidelines for4.Sealed Insulating Glass Units for Commercial and Residential Use."

Safety Glazing Labeling: Where safety glazing is indicated, permanently mark glazing with certificationB.label of the SGCC or another certification agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Label shallindicate manufacturer's name, type of glass, thickness, and safety glazing standard with which glasscomplies.Insulating-Glass Certification Program: Permanently marked either on spacers or on at least oneC.component lite of units with appropriate certification label of IGCC.Thickness: Where glass thickness is indicated, it is a minimum. Provide glass that complies withD.performance requirements and is not less than the thickness indicated.

Minimum Glass Thickness for Exterior Lites: 6 mm.1.


GLAZING 088000 - 3








Thickness of Tinted Glass: Provide same thickness for each tint color indicated throughout Project.2.Strength: Where annealed float glass is indicated, provide annealed float glass, heat-strengthened floatE.glass, or fully tempered float glass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article Whereheat-strengthened float glass is indicated, provide heat-strengthened float glass or fully tempered floatglass as needed to comply with "Performance Requirements" Article. Where fully tempered float glass isindicated, provide fully tempered float glass.

GLASS PRODUCTS2.5Clear Annealed Float Glass: ASTM C 1036, Type I, Class 1 (clear), Quality-Q3.A.Fully Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT (fully tempered), Condition A (uncoated) unlessB.otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom1.edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

Heat-Strengthened Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind HS (heat strengthened), Type I, Condition AC.(uncoated) unless otherwise indicated, Type I, Class 1 (clear) or Class 2 (tinted) as indicated, Quality-Q3.

Fabrication Process: By horizontal (roller-hearth) process with roll-wave distortion parallel to bottom1.edge of glass as installed unless otherwise indicated.

Ceramic-Coated Spandrel Glass: ASTM C 1048, Type I, Condition B, Quality-Q3.D.

LAMINATED GLASS2.6Laminated Glass: ASTM C 1172. Use materials that have a proven record of no tendency to bubble,A.discolor, or lose physical and mechanical properties after fabrication and installation.

Construction: Laminate glass with polyvinyl butyral interlayer to comply with interlayer1.manufacturer's written instructions.Interlayer Thickness: Provide thickness not less than that indicated and as needed to comply with2.requirements.Interlayer Color: Clear unless otherwise indicated.3.

INSULATING GLASS2.7Insulating-Glass Units: Factory-assembled units consisting of sealed lites of glass separated by aA.dehydrated interspace, qualified according to ASTM E 2190.

Sealing System: Dual seal, with manufacturer's standard primary and secondary sealants.1.Spacer: Manufacturer's standard spacer material and construction.2.Desiccant: Molecular sieve or silica gel, or a blend of both.3.

GLAZING SEALANTS2.8General:A.

Compatibility: Compatible with one another and with other materials they contact, including glass1.products, seals of insulating-glass units, and glazing channel substrates, under conditions ofservice and application, as demonstrated by sealant manufacturer based on testing and fieldexperience.Suitability: Comply with sealant and glass manufacturers' written instructions for selecting glazing2.sealants suitable for applications indicated and for conditions existing at time of installation.Colors of Exposed Glazing Sealants: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range.3.

Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,B.Class 100/50, Use NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Dow Corning Corporation; 790.a.GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; SilPruf LM SCS2700.b.Pecora Corporation; 890NST.c.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 1.d.

Glazing Sealant: Neutral-curing silicone glazing sealant complying with ASTM C 920, Type S, Grade NS,C.Class 50, Use NT.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Dow Corning Corporation; 795.a.GE Advanced Materials - Silicones; .b.Pecora Corporation; 864.c.Polymeric Systems, Inc.; PSI-641.d.Tremco Incorporated; Spectrem 2.e.


GLAZING 088000 - 4













GLAZING TAPES2.9Back-Bedding Mastic Glazing Tapes: Preformed, butyl-based, 100 percent solids elastomeric tape;A.nonstaining and nonmigrating in contact with nonporous surfaces; with or without spacer rod asrecommended in writing by tape and glass manufacturers for application indicated; and complying withASTM C 1281 and AAMA 800 for products indicated below:

AAMA 804.3 tape, where indicated.1.AAMA 806.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is subject to continuous pressure.2.AAMA 807.3 tape, for glazing applications in which tape is not subject to continuous pressure.3.

MISCELLANEOUS GLAZING MATERIALS2.10General: Provide products of material, size, and shape complying with referenced glazing standard, withA.requirements of manufacturers of glass and other glazing materials for application indicated, and with aproven record of compatibility with surfaces contacted in installation.Cleaners, Primers, and Sealers: Types recommended by sealant or gasket manufacturer.B.Setting Blocks: Elastomeric material with a Shore, Type A durometer hardness of 85, plus or minus 5.C.Spacers: Elastomeric blocks or continuous extrusions of hardness required by glass manufacturer toD.maintain glass lites in place for installation indicated.Edge Blocks: Elastomeric material of hardness needed to limit glass lateral movement (side walking).E.Cylindrical Glazing Sealant Backing: ASTM C 1330, Type O (open-cell material), of size and density toF.control glazing sealant depth and otherwise produce optimum glazing sealant performance.

FABRICATION OF GLAZING UNITS2.11Fabricate glazing units in sizes required to fit openings indicated for Project, with edge and faceA.clearances, edge and surface conditions, and bite complying with written instructions of productmanufacturer and referenced glazing publications, to comply with system performance requirements.

Allow for thermal movements from ambient and surface temperature changes acting on glass1.framing members and glazing components.

Temperature Change: 120 deg F, ambient; 180 deg F, material surfaces.a.Clean-cut or flat-grind vertical edges of butt-glazed monolithic lites to produce square edges with slightB.chamfers at junctions of edges and faces.Grind smooth and polish exposed glass edges and corners.C.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine framing, glazing channels, and stops, with Installer present, for compliance with the following:A.

Manufacturing and installation tolerances, including those for size, squareness, and offsets at1.corners.Presence and functioning of weep systems.2.Minimum required face and edge clearances.3.Effective sealing between joints of glass-framing members.4.


PREPARATION3.2Clean glazing channels and other framing members receiving glass immediately before glazing. RemoveA.coatings not firmly bonded to substrates.Examine glazing units to locate exterior and interior surfaces. Label or mark units as needed so thatB.exterior and interior surfaces are readily identifiable. Do not use materials that leave visible marks in thecompleted Work.

GLAZING, GENERAL3.3Comply with combined written instructions of manufacturers of glass, sealants, gaskets, and other glazingA.materials, unless more stringent requirements are indicated, including those in referenced glazingpublications.Protect glass edges from damage during handling and installation. Remove damaged glass from ProjectB.site and legally dispose of off Project site. Damaged glass includes glass with edge damage or otherimperfections that, when installed, could weaken glass, impair performance, or impair appearance.Apply primers to joint surfaces where required for adhesion of sealants, as determined by preconstructionC.testing.


GLAZING 088000 - 5


Install setting blocks in sill rabbets, sized and located to comply with referenced glazing publications,D.unless otherwise required by glass manufacturer. Set blocks in thin course of compatible sealant suitablefor heel bead.Do not exceed edge pressures stipulated by glass manufacturers for installing glass lites.E.Provide spacers for glass lites where length plus width is larger than 50 inches.F.

Locate spacers directly opposite each other on both inside and outside faces of glass. Install1.correct size and spacing to preserve required face clearances, unless gaskets and glazing tapesare used that have demonstrated ability to maintain required face clearances and to comply withsystem performance requirements.Provide 1/8-inch minimum bite of spacers on glass and use thickness equal to sealant width. With2.glazing tape, use thickness slightly less than final compressed thickness of tape.

Provide edge blocking where indicated or needed to prevent glass lites from moving sideways in glazingG.channel, as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer and according to requirements in referencedglazing publications.Set glass lites in each series with uniform pattern, draw, bow, and similar characteristics.H.Set glass lites with proper orientation so that coatings face exterior or interior as specified.I.Where wedge-shaped gaskets are driven into one side of channel to pressurize sealant or gasket onJ.opposite side, provide adequate anchorage so gasket cannot walk out when installation is subjected tomovement.Square cut wedge-shaped gaskets at corners and install gaskets in a manner recommended by gasketK.manufacturer to prevent corners from pulling away; seal corner joints and butt joints with sealantrecommended by gasket manufacturer.

TAPE GLAZING3.4Position tapes on fixed stops so that, when compressed by glass, their exposed edges are flush with orA.protrude slightly above sightline of stops.Install tapes continuously, but not necessarily in one continuous length. Do not stretch tapes to make themB.fit opening.Cover vertical framing joints by applying tapes to heads and sills first, then to jambs. Cover horizontalC.framing joints by applying tapes to jambs, then to heads and sills.Place joints in tapes at corners of opening with adjoining lengths butted together, not lapped. Seal joints inD.tapes with compatible sealant approved by tape manufacturer.Do not remove release paper from tape until right before each glazing unit is installed.E.Apply heel bead of elastomeric sealant.F.Center glass lites in openings on setting blocks, and press firmly against tape by inserting denseG.compression gaskets formed and installed to lock in place against faces of removable stops. Start gasketapplications at corners and work toward centers of openings.Apply cap bead of elastomeric sealant over exposed edge of tape.H.

SEALANT GLAZING (WET)3.5Install continuous spacers, or spacers combined with cylindrical sealant backing, between glass lites andA.glazing stops to maintain glass face clearances and to prevent sealant from extruding into glass channeland blocking weep systems until sealants cure. Secure spacers or spacers and backings in place and inposition to control depth of installed sealant relative to edge clearance for optimum sealant performance.Force sealants into glazing channels to eliminate voids and to ensure complete wetting or bond of sealantB.to glass and channel surfaces.Tool exposed surfaces of sealants to provide a substantial wash away from glass.C.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.6Immediately after installation remove nonpermanent labels and clean surfaces.A.Protect glass from contact with contaminating substances resulting from construction operations. ExamineB.glass surfaces adjacent to or below exterior concrete and other masonry surfaces at frequent intervalsduring construction, but not less than once a month, for buildup of dirt, scum, alkaline deposits, or stains.

If, despite such protection, contaminating substances do come into contact with glass, remove1.substances immediately as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer. Remove and replaceglass that cannot be cleaned without damage to coatings.

Remove and replace glass that is damaged during construction period.C.Wash glass on both exposed surfaces not more than four days before date scheduled for inspections thatD.establish date of Substantial Completion. Wash glass as recommended in writing by glass manufacturer.

MONOLITHIC GLASS SCHEDULE3.7Clear fully tempered float glass.A.


GLAZING 088000 - 6


Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.1.Safety glazing required.2.

Clear heat-strengthened float glass.B.Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.1.

Clear annealed float glass.C.Minimum Thickness: 6 mm.1.

INSULATING GLASS SCHEDULE3.8Low-E-coated, tinted insulating glass.A.

Basis-of-Design Product: <Insert manufacturer's name; product name or designation>.1.Overall Unit Thickness: 1 inch.2.Minimum Thickness of Each Glass Lite: 6 mm.3.Outdoor Lite: Tinted heat-strengthened or fully tempered float glass as required by code.4.Tint Color: [Blue] [Blue-green] [Bronze] [Green] [Gray] <Insert color>.5.Interspace Content: Air.6.Indoor Lite: Clear heat-strengthened or fully tempered float glass as required by code.7.Low-E Coating: Sputtered on second surface.8.Winter Nighttime U-Factor: _____ maximum.9.Summer Daytime U-Factor: _____ maximum.10.Visible Light Transmittance: ______percent minimum.11.Solar Heat Gain Coefficient: _____maximum.12.Safety glazing required.13.



GLAZING 088000 - 7


SECTION 092216 - NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING

GENERALPART 1 -



Non-load-bearing steel framing systems for interior gypsum board assemblies.1.Suspension systems for interior gypsum ceilings, soffits, and grid systems.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product.A.Shop Drawings: For cold-formed metal framing indicated to comply with design loads, include structuralB.analysis data signed and sealed by the qualified professional engineer responsible for their preparation.UL Listings: Provide UL listing data for Head of Wall conditions.C.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Evaluation Reports: For firestop tracks, from ICC-ES.A.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies that incorporateA.non-load-bearing steel framing, provide materials and construction identical to those tested in assemblyindicated, according to ASTM E 119 by an independent testing agency.STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to thoseB.tested in assembly indicated, according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by anindependent testing agency.

FRAMING SYSTEMS2.2Framing Members, General: Comply with ASTM C 754 for conditions indicated.A.

Steel Sheet Components: Comply with ASTM C 645 requirements for metal unless otherwise1.indicated.Protective Coating: ASTM A 653/A 653M, G40, hot-dip galvanized unless otherwise indicated.2.

Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.B.Steel Studs and Runners:1.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 25 gage unless indicated otherwise on Drawings or below.a.Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies, Typical Locations: Withstand lateral1)loading (air pressure) of 5 psf with deflection limit not more than L/240 of partitionheight.Interior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Atriums, Lobbies, Service2)Corridors, Exit Corridors, Elevator Lobbies, Vertical Shafts, and walls receivingplaster veneer: Withstand lateral loading (air pressure) of 7.5 psf with deflection limitnot more than L/360 of partition heightInterior Metal Stud/Gypsum Board Assemblies at Locations with Ceramic Tile or3)Other Hard Surface Finishes: Withstand typical lateral loading (air pressure) withdeflection limit not more than L/360 of partition height, minimum 22 gage studs at 16inches on center.Where wall mounted equipment, woodwork, and casework items are indicated or4)elsewhere as shown on Drawings, provide minimum 16 gage studsAt jambs of openings provide two minimum 20 gage studs.5)Ceilings: At ceilings using mold-mildew resistant gypsum framing to be 16 inches6)o.c. for 5/8 inches gypsumRefer to Division 5 for stud framing which is exposed to wind loads and for studs7)carrying heavy vertical loads (cement plaster, manufactured stone masonry, stonetile thicker than 3/4 inch, etc)


NON-STRUCTURAL METAL FRAMING 092216 - 1


Where partition heights exceed stud manufacturer’s recommended spans, provide one ofb.the following:

Heavier stud gage.1)Closer stud spacing.2)Deeper stud size (space permitting); As approved by Architect.3)Above ceiling bracing, anchored to structure above.4)

Depth: As indicated on Drawings.c.Slip-Type Head Joints: Where indicated, provide[ one of] the following:C.

Deflection Track: Steel sheet top runner manufactured to prevent cracking of finishes applied to1.interior partition framing resulting from deflection of structure above; in thickness not less thanindicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:a.Dietrich Metal Framing; SLP-TRK Slotted Deflection Track.1)MBA Building Supplies; FlatSteel Deflection Track Slotted Deflecto Track.2)Steel Network Inc. (The); VertiClip SLD Series.3)

Firestop Tracks: Top runner manufactured to allow partition heads to expand and contract with movementD.of the structure while maintaining continuity of fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated; in thickness notless than indicated for studs and in width to accommodate depth of studs.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Fire Trak Corp.; Fire Trak System attached to studs with Fire Trak Posi Klip.a.Metal-Lite, Inc.; The System.b.

Flat Strap and Backing Plate: Steel sheet for blocking and bracing in length and width indicated.E.Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.1.

Cold-Rolled Channel Bridging: Steel, 0.053-inch minimum base-metal thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch-F.wide flanges.

Depth: As indicated on Drawings.1.Clip Angle: Not less than 1-1/2 by 1-1/2 inches, 0.068-inch- thick, galvanized steel.2.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645.G.Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.1.Depth: 7/8 inch.2.

Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inchdeep, steel sheet members designed to reduce sound transmission.H.Configuration: Asymmetrical.1.

Cold-Rolled Furring Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges.I.Depth: 3/4 inch.1.Furring Brackets: Adjustable, corrugated-edge type of steel sheet with minimum uncoated-steel2.thickness of 0.033 inch.Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or3.double strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.

SUSPENSION SYSTEMS2.3Tie Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.062-inch- diameter wire, or doubleA.strand of 0.048-inch- diameter wire.Hanger Attachments to Concrete:B.

Anchors: Fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials with holes or loops for attaching wire1.hangers and capable of sustaining, without failure, a load equal to 5 times that imposed byconstruction as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488 by an independent testing agency.

Type: Postinstalled, expansion anchor.a.Powder-Actuated Fasteners: Suitable for application indicated, fabricated from corrosion-resistant2.materials with clips or other devices for attaching hangers of type indicated, and capable ofsustaining, without failure, a load equal to 10 times that imposed by construction as determined bytesting according to ASTM E 1190 by an independent testing agency.

Wire Hangers: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, 0.16 inch in diameter.C.Flat Hangers: Steel sheet, 1 by 3/16 inch by length indicated.D.Furring Channels (Furring Members):E.

Cold-Rolled Channels: 0.053-inch uncoated-steel thickness, with minimum 1/2-inch- wide flanges,1.3/4 inch deep.Steel Studs and Runners: ASTM C 645.2.

Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.a.Depth: 1-5/8 inches.b.

Hat-Shaped, Rigid Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, 7/8 inch deep.3.Minimum Base-Metal Thickness: 0.018 inch.a.

Resilient Furring Channels: 1/2-inchdeep members designed to reduce sound transmission.4.











Configuration: Asymmetrical.a.Grid Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings: ASTM C 645, direct-hung system composed ofF.main beams and cross-furring members that interlock.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Armstrong World Industries, Inc.; Drywall Grid Systems.a.Chicago Metallic Corporation; Drywall Grid System.b.USG Corporation; Drywall Suspension System.c.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS2.4General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards.A.Fasteners for Metal Framing: Of type, material, size, corrosion resistance, holding power, and otherB.properties required to fasten steel members to substrates.Isolation Strip at Exterior Walls: Provide[ one of] the following:C.

Foam Gasket: Adhesive-backed, closed-cell vinyl foam strips that allow fastener penetration1.without foam displacement, 1/8 inch thick, in width to suit steel stud size.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-inA.anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Suspended Assemblies: Coordinate installation of suspension systems with installation of overheadA.structure to ensure that inserts and other provisions for anchorages to building structure have beeninstalled to receive hangers at spacing required to support the Work and that hangers will develop their fullstrength.

Furnish concrete inserts and other devices indicated to other trades for installation in advance of1.time needed for coordination and construction.

Coordination with Sprayed Fire-Resistive Materials:B.Before sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, attach offset anchor plates or ceiling runners1.(tracks) to surfaces indicated to receive sprayed fire-resistive materials. Where offset anchor platesare required, provide continuous plates fastened to building structure not more than 24 inches o.c.After sprayed fire-resistive materials are applied, remove them only to extent necessary for2.installation of non-load-bearing steel framing. Do not reduce thickness of fire-resistive materialsbelow that required for fire-resistance ratings indicated. Protect adjacent fire-resistive materialsfrom damage.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.3Installation Standard: ASTM C 754.A.

Gypsum Board Assemblies: Also comply with requirements in ASTM C 840 that apply to framing1.installation.

Install supplementary framing, and blocking to support fixtures, equipment services, heavy trim, grab bars,B.toilet accessories, furnishings, or similar construction.Install bracing at terminations in assemblies.C.Do not bridge building control and expansion joints with non-load-bearing steel framing members. FrameD.both sides of joints independently.

INSTALLING FRAMED ASSEMBLIES3.4Install framing system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacings requiredA.by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Single-Layer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.1.Multilayer Application: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.2.Tile Backing Panels: 16 inches o.c. unless otherwise indicated.3.

Where studs are installed directly against exterior masonry walls or dissimilar metals at exterior walls,B.install isolation strip between studs and exterior wall.Install studs so flanges within framing system point in same direction.C.








Install tracks (runners) at floors and overhead supports. Extend framing full height to structural supports orD.substrates above suspended ceilings except where partitions are indicated to terminate at suspendedceilings. Continue framing around ducts penetrating partitions above ceiling.

Slip-Type Head Joints: Where framing extends to overhead structural supports, install to produce1.joints at tops of framing systems that prevent axial loading of finished assemblies.Door Openings: Screw vertical studs at jambs to jamb anchor clips on door frames; install runner2.track section (for cripple studs) at head and secure to jamb studs.

Install two studs at each jamb unless otherwise indicated.a.Install cripple studs at head adjacent to each jamb stud, with a minimum 1/2-inch clearanceb.from jamb stud to allow for installation of control joint in finished assembly.Extend jamb studs through suspended ceilings and attach to underside of overheadc.structure.

Other Framed Openings: Frame openings other than door openings the same as required for door3.openings unless otherwise indicated. Install framing below sills of openings to match framingrequired above door heads.Fire-Resistance-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with fire-resistance-rated assembly4.indicated and support closures and to make partitions continuous from floor to underside of solidstructure.

Firestop Track: Where indicated, install to maintain continuity of fire-resistance-rateda.assembly indicated.

Sound-Rated Partitions: Install framing to comply with sound-rated assembly indicated.5.Direct Furring:E.

Screw to wood framing.1.Attach to concrete or masonry with stub nails, screws designed for masonry attachment, or2.powder-driven fasteners spaced 24 inches o.c.

Installation Tolerance: Install each framing member so fastening surfaces vary not more than 1/8 inchF.from the plane formed by faces of adjacent framing.

INSTALLING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS3.5Install suspension system components according to spacings indicated, but not greater than spacingsA.required by referenced installation standards for assembly types.

Hangers: 48 inches o.c.1.Carrying Channels (Main Runners): 48 inches o.c.2.Furring Channels (Furring Members): 16 inches o.c.3.

Isolate suspension systems from building structure where they abut or are penetrated by building structureB.to prevent transfer of loading imposed by structural movement.Suspend hangers from building structure as follows:C.

Install hangers plumb and free from contact with insulation or other objects within ceiling plenum1.that are not part of supporting structural or suspension system.

Splay hangers only where required to miss obstructions and offset resulting horizontala.forces by bracing, countersplaying, or other equally effective means.

Where width of ducts and other construction within ceiling plenum produces hanger spacings that2.interfere with locations of hangers required to support standard suspension system members,install supplemental suspension members and hangers in the form of trapezes or equivalentdevices.

Size supplemental suspension members and hangers to support ceiling loads withina.performance limits established by referenced installation standards.

Wire Hangers: Secure by looping and wire tying, either directly to structures or to inserts, eye3.screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for substrate, and in amanner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.Flat Hangers: Secure to structure, including intermediate framing members, by attaching to inserts,4.eye screws, or other devices and fasteners that are secure and appropriate for structure andhanger, and in a manner that will not cause hangers to deteriorate or otherwise fail.Do not attach hangers to steel roof deck.5.Do not attach hangers to permanent metal forms. Furnish cast-in-place hanger inserts that extend6.through forms.Do not attach hangers to rolled-in hanger tabs of composite steel floor deck.7.Do not connect or suspend steel framing from ducts, pipes, or conduit.8.

Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Wire tie furring channels to supports.D.Grid Suspension Systems: Attach perimeter wall track or angle where grid suspension systems meetE.vertical surfaces. Mechanically join main beam and cross-furring members to each other and butt-cut to fitinto wall track.




Installation Tolerances: Install suspension systems that are level to within 1/8 inch in 12 feet measuredF.lengthwise on each member that will receive finishes and transversely between parallel members that willreceive finishes.





SECTION 092400 - CEMENT PLASTERING

GENERALPART 1 -



Exterior portland cement plasterwork (stucco) on metal lath, sheathing and metal stud backup.1.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product indicated.A.Shop Drawings: Show locations and installation of control and expansion joints including plans, elevations,B.sections, details of components, and attachments to other work.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of factory-prepared finish coat indicated.C.Samples for Verification: For each type of [factory-prepared] [colored] [textured] finish coat indicated; 12D.by 12 inches, and prepared on rigid backing.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Fire-Resistance Ratings: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assemblies identical to those ofA.assemblies tested for fire resistance per ASTM E 119 by a qualified testing agency. Identify products withappropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


Sound-Transmission Characteristics: Where indicated, provide portland cement plaster assembliesB.identical to those of assemblies tested for STC ratings per ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E413 by a qualified testing agency.Mockups: Before plastering, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surface area to demonstrate aestheticC.effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Install mockups for each type of finish indicated.1.For interior plasterwork, simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.2.Approved mockups may become part of the completed Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial3.Completion.

Preinstallation Conference: Conduct conference at Project site.D.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.5Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against damage from weather, directA.sunlight, surface contamination, corrosion, construction traffic, and other causes.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.6Comply with ASTM C 926 requirements.A.Interior Plasterwork: Maintain room temperatures at greater than 40 deg F for at least 48 hours beforeB.plaster application, and continuously during and after application.

Avoid conditions that result in plaster drying out during curing period. Distribute heat evenly;1.prevent concentrated or uneven heat on plaster.Ventilate building spaces as required to remove water in excess of that required for hydrating2.plaster in a manner that prevents drafts of air from contacting surfaces during plaster applicationand until plaster is dry.

Exterior Plasterwork:C.Apply and cure plaster to prevent plaster drying out during curing period. Use procedures required1.by climatic conditions, including moist curing, providing coverings, and providing barriers to deflectsunlight and wind.Apply plaster when ambient temperature is greater than 40 deg F.2.Protect plaster coats from freezing for not less than 48 hours after set of plaster coat has occurred.3.

Factory-Prepared Finishes: Comply with manufacturer's written recommendations for environmentalD.conditions for applying finishes.


CEMENT PLASTERING 092400 - 1


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

METAL LATH2.1Expanded-Metal Lath: ASTM C 847 with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc coating.A.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.a.CEMCO.b.Clark Western Building Systems.c.Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.d.MarinoWARE.e.Phillips Manufacturing Co.f.

Diamond-Mesh Lath: Self-furring, 3.4 lb/sq. yd..2.Paper Backing: FS UU-B-790, Type I, Grade D, Style 2 vapor-permeable paper.B.

Provide paper-backed lath at exterior locations.1.

ACCESSORIES2.2General: Comply with ASTM C 1063 and coordinate depth of trim and accessories with thicknesses andA.number of plaster coats required.Metal Accessories:B.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.a.CEMCO.b.Clark Western Building Systems.c.Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.d.MarinoWARE.e.Phillips Manufacturing Co.f.

Foundation Weep Screed: Fabricated from hot-dip galvanized-steel sheet, ASTM A 653/A 653M,2.G60 zinc coating.Cornerite: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip galvanized zinc3.coating.External-Corner Reinforcement: Fabricated from metal lath with ASTM A 653/A 653M, G60, hot-dip4.galvanized zinc coating.Cornerbeads: Fabricated from zinc.5.

Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges; use unless otherwise indicated.a.Small nose cornerbead with perforated flanges; use on curved corners.b.Small nose cornerbead with expanded flanges reinforced by perforated stiffening rib; use onc.columns and for finishing masonry corners.Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum, with expanded flanges; use at locationsd.indicated on Drawings.

Casing Beads: Fabricated from zinc; square-edged style; with expanded flanges.6.Control Joints: Fabricated from zinc; one-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in7.M-shaped configuration; with perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face ofcontrol joint.Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped8.configuration; with expanded flanges.Two-Piece Expansion Joints: Fabricated from zinc; formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged9.reveal that is adjustable from 1/4 to 5/8 inch wide; with perforated flanges.

Plastic Accessories: Fabricated from high-impact PVC.C.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.

Alabama Metal Industries Corporation; a Gibraltar Industries company.a.Dietrich Metal Framing; a Worthington Industries company.b.Phillips Manufacturing Co.c.Plastic Components, Inc.d.Vinyl Corp.e.

Cornerbeads: With perforated flanges.2.Small nose cornerbead; use unless otherwise indicated.a.Bull nose cornerbead, radius 3/4 inch minimum; use at locations indicated on Drawings.b.

Casing Beads: With perforated flanges in depth required to suit plaster bases indicated and flange3.length required to suit applications indicated.

Square-edge style; use unless otherwise indicated.a.Bull-nose style, radius 3/4 inch minimum; use at locations indicated on Drawings.b.
























Control Joints: One-piece-type, folded pair of unperforated screeds in M-shaped configuration; with4.perforated flanges and removable protective tape on plaster face of control joint.Expansion Joints: Two-piece type, formed to produce slip-joint and square-edged 1-inch- wide5.reveal; with perforated concealed flanges.

MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS2.3Water for Mixing: Potable and free of substances capable of affecting plaster set or of damaging plaster,A.lath, or accessories.Fiber for Base Coat: Alkaline-resistant glass or polypropylene fibers, 1/2 inch long, free of contaminants,B.manufactured for use in portland cement plaster.Steel Drill Screws: For metal-to-metal fastening, ASTM C 1002 or ASTM C 954, as required by thicknessC.of metal being fastened; with pan head that is suitable for application; in lengths required to achievepenetration through joined materials of no fewer than three exposed threads.Fasteners for Attaching Metal Lath to Substrates: Complying with ASTM C 1063.D.Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper, not less than 0.0475-inch diameter, unlessE.otherwise indicated.

PLASTER MATERIALS2.4Portland Cement: ASTM C 150, Type I.A.

Color for Finish Coats: [White] [Gray].1.Masonry Cement: ASTM C 91, Type N.B.

Color for Finish Coats: [White] [Gray].1.Colorants for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: Colorfast mineral pigments that produce finish plaster color to matchC.Architect's sample.Sand Aggregate: ASTM C 897.D.

Color for Job-Mixed Finish Coats: [White] [In color matching Architect's sample].1.Perlite Aggregate: ASTM C 35.E.Ready-Mixed Finish-Coat Plaster: Mill-mixed portland cement, aggregates, coloring agents, andF.proprietary ingredients.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.LaHabra, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Exterior Stucco Color Coat.a.SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Thoro Stucco.b.USG Corporation; Oriental Exterior Finish Stucco.c.

Color: As scheduled.2.Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Factory-mixed acrylic-emulsion coating systems, formulated with colorfastG.mineral pigments and fine aggregates; for use over portland cement plaster base coats. Includemanufacturer's recommended primers and sealing topcoats for acrylic-based finishes.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.California Stucco Products Corp.; Texture Flex.a.Dryvit Systems, Inc.; Dryvit TAFS.b.El Rey Stucco Company, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Prema-Flex.c.Finestone, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; PebbleTex.d.Parex, Inc., a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; e-lastic.e.Senergy, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; Senerflex.f.Sto Corp.; Powerwall Finish.g.Surewall, a brand of ParexLaHabra, Inc.; Acrylic Finish.h.SonoWall, BASF Wall Systems, Inc.; StuccoTex Finish.i.

Color: As scheduled.2.

PLASTER MIXES2.5General: Comply with ASTM C 926 for applications indicated.A.

Fiber Content: Add fiber to base-coat mixes after ingredients have mixed at least two minutes.1.Comply with fiber manufacturer's written instructions for fiber quantities in mixes, but do not exceed1 lb of fiber/cu. yd. of cementitious materials.

Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork as follows:B.Portland and Masonry Cement Mixes:1.

Scratch Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonrya.cement. Use 2-1/2 to 4 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material.Brown Coat: For cementitious material, mix 1 part portland cement and 1 part masonryb.cement. Use 3 to 5 parts aggregate per part of cementitious material, but not less thanvolume of aggregate used in scratch coat.


















Factory-Prepared Finish-Coat Mixes: For acrylic-based finish coatings, comply with manufacturer's writtenC.instructions.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine areas and substrates, with Installer present, and including welded hollow-metal frames, cast-inA.anchors, and structural framing, for compliance with requirements and other conditions affectingperformance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Protect adjacent work from soiling, spattering, moisture deterioration, and other harmful effects caused byA.plastering.Prepare solid substrates for plaster that are smooth or that do not have the suction capability required toB.bond with plaster according to ASTM C 926.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.3Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: Install components according to requirements for design designationsA.from listing organization and publication indicated on Drawings.

INSTALLING METAL LATH3.4Expanded-Metal Lath: Install according to ASTM C 1063.A.

Partition Framing and Vertical Furring: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.1.Flat-Ceiling and Horizontal Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.2.Curved-Ceiling Framing: Install flat diamond-mesh lath.3.On Solid Surfaces, Not Otherwise Furred: Install self-furring, diamond-mesh lath.4.

INSTALLING ACCESSORIES3.5Install according to ASTM C 1063 and at locations indicated on Drawings.A.Reinforcement for External Corners:B.

Install lath-type, external-corner reinforcement at exterior locations.1.Install cornerbead at interior and exterior locations.2.

Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings or in specific locations approved byC.Architect for visual effect as follows:

As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) of the following maximum sizes:1.Vertical Surfaces: 144 sq. ft..a.Horizontal and other Nonvertical Surfaces: 100 sq. ft..b.

At distances between control joints of not greater than 18 feet o.c.2.As required to delineate plasterwork into areas (panels) with length-to-width ratios of not greater3.than 2-1/2:1.Where control joints occur in surface of construction directly behind plaster.4.Where plasterwork areas change dimensions, to delineate rectangular-shaped areas (panels) and5.to relieve the stress that occurs at the corner formed by the dimension change.

PLASTER APPLICATION3.6General: Comply with ASTM C 926.A.

Do not deviate more than plus or minus 1/4 inch in 10 feet from a true plane in finished plaster1.surfaces, as measured by a 10-foot straightedge placed on surface.Finish plaster flush with metal frames and other built-in metal items or accessories that act as a2.plaster ground unless otherwise indicated. Where casing bead does not terminate plaster at metalframe, cut base coat free from metal frame before plaster sets and groove finish coat at junctureswith metal.Provide plaster surfaces that are ready to receive field-applied finishes indicated.3.

Walls; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork;B.3/4-inch thickness.

Portland and masonry cement mixes.1.Ceilings; Base-Coat Mixes for Use over Metal Lath: Scratch and brown coats for three-coat plasterwork;C.3/4 inch thick on concrete.

Portland and masonry cement mixes.1.




Acrylic-Based Finish Coatings: Apply coating system, including primers, finish coats, and sealing topcoats,D.according to manufacturer's written instructions.Concealed Exterior Plasterwork: Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhered finishes,E.omit finish coat.Concealed Interior Plasterwork:F.

Where plaster application will be concealed behind built-in cabinets, similar furnishings, and1.equipment, apply finish coat.Where plaster application will be concealed above suspended ceilings and in similar locations,2.finish coat may be omitted.Where plaster application will be used as a base for adhesive application of tile and similar finishes,3.omit finish coat.

PLASTER REPAIRS3.7Repair or replace work to eliminate cracks, dents, blisters, buckles, crazing and check cracking, dry outs,A.efflorescence, sweat outs, and similar defects and where bond to substrate has failed.

PROTECTION3.8Remove temporary protection and enclosure of other work. Promptly remove plaster from door frames,A.windows, and other surfaces not indicated to be plastered. Repair floors, walls, and other surfaces stained,marred, or otherwise damaged during plastering.





SECTION 092900 - GYPSUM BOARD

GENERALPART 1 -



Interior gypsum board.1.Tile backing panels.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product.A.Samples: For the following products:B.

Trim Accessories: Full-size Sample in 12-inch- long length for each trim accessory indicated.1.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Mockups: Before beginning gypsum board installation, install mockups of at least 100 sq. ft. in surfaceA.area to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Install mockups for the following:1.Each level of gypsum board finish indicated for use in exposed locations.a.

Apply or install final decoration indicated, including painting and wallcoverings, on exposed2.surfaces for review of mockups.Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of mockups.3.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed4.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING1.5Store materials inside under cover and keep them dry and protected against weather, condensation, directA.sunlight, construction traffic, and other potential causes of damage. Stack panels flat and supported onrisers on a flat platform to prevent sagging.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.6Environmental Limitations: Comply with ASTM C 840 requirements or gypsum board manufacturer'sA.written recommendations, whichever are more stringent.Do not install paper-faced gypsum panels until installation areas are enclosed and conditioned.B.Do not install panels that are wet, those that are moisture damaged, and those that are mold damaged.C.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,1.sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface2.contamination and discoloration.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1VOC Limits for Adhesives, Sealants, Paints, and Coatings: Meet VOC limits indicated in Section 018113A.'Sustainable Design Requirements."Fire-Resistance-Rated Assemblies: For fire-resistance-rated assemblies, provide materials andB.construction identical to those tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 119 by an independenttesting agency.STC-Rated Assemblies: For STC-rated assemblies, provide materials and construction identical to thoseC.tested in assembly indicated according to ASTM E 90 and classified according to ASTM E 413 by anindependent testing agency.

GYPSUM BOARD, GENERAL2.2VOC Limits: Any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings used inside the weatherproofing system andA.applied on site shall meet the VOC limits indicated in Section 018113 ““Sustainable Design Requirements.”


GYPSUM BOARD 092900 - 1


Size: Provide maximum lengths and widths available that will minimize joints in each area and thatB.correspond with support system indicated.

INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD2.3Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

CertainTeed Corp.1.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC.2.National Gypsum Company.3.USG Corporation.4.

Gypsum Wallboard: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.B.Thickness: 5/8 inch.1.Long Edges: Tapered.2.

Gypsum Board, Type X: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.C.Thickness: 5/8 inch.1.Long Edges: Tapered.2.

Flexible Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to bend to fit radii and to be more flexibleD.than standard regular-type gypsum board of same thickness.

Thickness: 1/4 inch.1.Long Edges: Tapered.2.

Gypsum Ceiling Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M.E.Thickness: 5/8 inch.1.Long Edges: Tapered.2.

SPECIALTY GYPSUM BOARD2.4Gypsum Board, Type C: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Manufactured to have increased fire-resistive capability.A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.American Gypsum; Firebloc Type C.a.CertainTeed Corp.; CertainTeed Type C Gypsum Board.b.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; Fireguard C.c.National Gypsum Company; Gold Bond Fire-Shield C.d.USG Corporation; Firecode C Core.e.

Thickness: As required by fire-resistance-rated assembly indicated on Drawings.2.Long Edges: Tapered.3.

Glass-Mat Interior Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1658/C 1658M. With fiberglass mat laminated to both sides.B.Specifically designed for interior use.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensArmour Plus.a.

Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.2.Long Edges: Tapered.3.Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.4.

Acoustically Enhanced Gypsum Board: ASTM C 1396/C 1396M. Multilayer products constructed of twoC.layers of gypsum boards sandwiching a viscoelastic sound-absorbing polymer core.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.CertainTeed; SilentFX.a.National Gypsum Company; Sound Break.b.Quiet Solution, Quiet Rock.c.

Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.2.Long Edges: Tapered.3.

TILE BACKING PANELS2.5Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Board: ASTM C 1178/C 1178M, with manufacturer's standard edges.A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.CertainTeed Corp.; DiamondBack GlasRoc Tile Backer.a.Georgia-Pacific Gypsum LLC; DensShield Tile Backer.b.National Gypsum; e2XP Tile Backer.c.

Core: 5/8 inch, Type X.2.Mold Resistance: ASTM D 3273, score of 10 as rated according to ASTM D 3274.3.

TRIM ACCESSORIES2.6Interior Trim: ASTM C 1047.A.

Material: Galvanized or aluminum-coated steel sheet or rolled zinc.1.Shapes:2.






















Cornerbead.a.Bullnose bead.b.LC-Bead: J-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.c.L-Bead: L-shaped; exposed long flange receives joint compound.d.U-Bead: J-shaped; exposed short flange does not receive joint compound.e.Expansion (control) joint.f.

Aluminum Trim: Extruded accessories of profiles and dimensions indicated.B.Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.

Fry Reglet Corp.a.Gordon, Inc.b.Pittcon Industries.c.

Aluminum: Alloy and temper with not less than the strength and durability properties of ASTM B2.221, Alloy 6063-T5.Finish: Corrosion-resistant primer compatible with joint compound and finish materials specified.3.

JOINT TREATMENT MATERIALS2.7General: Comply with ASTM C 475/C 475M.A.Joint Tape:B.

Interior Gypsum Board: Paper.1.Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: 10-by-10 glass mesh.2.Tile Backing Panels: As recommended by panel manufacturer.3.

Joint Compound for Interior Gypsum Board: For each coat use formulation that is compatible with otherC.compounds applied on previous or for successive coats.

Prefilling: At open joints, rounded or beveled panel edges, and damaged surface areas, use1.setting-type taping compound.Embedding and First Coat: For embedding tape and first coat on joints, fasteners, and trim flanges,2.use drying-type, all-purpose compound.

Use setting-type compound for installing paper-faced metal trim accessories.a.Fill Coat: For second coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.3.Finish Coat: For third coat, use drying-type, all-purpose compound.4.

Joint Compound for Tile Backing Panels:D.Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panel: As recommended by backing panel manufacturer.1.

AUXILIARY MATERIALS2.8General: Provide auxiliary materials that comply with referenced installation standards and manufacturer'sA.written recommendations.Acoustical Joint Sealant: Manufacturer's standard nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant complyingB.with ASTM C 834. Product effectively reduces airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints andopenings in building construction as demonstrated by testing representative assemblies according toASTM E 90.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR or AIS-919.a.Specified Technologies, Inc.; Smoke N Sound Acoustical Sealant.b.USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.c.

Acoustical joint sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to2.40 CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine areas and substrates including welded hollow-metal frames and framing, with Installer present,A.for compliance with requirements and other conditions affecting performance.Examine panels before installation. Reject panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.B.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

APPLYING AND FINISHING PANELS, GENERAL3.2Comply with ASTM C 840.A.Install ceiling panels across framing to minimize the number of abutting end joints and to avoid abuttingB.end joints in central area of each ceiling. Stagger abutting end joints of adjacent panels not less than oneframing member.












Install panels with face side out. Butt panels together for a light contact at edges and ends with not moreC.than 1/16 inch of open space between panels. Do not force into place.Locate edge and end joints over supports, except in ceiling applications where intermediate supports orD.gypsum board back-blocking is provided behind end joints. Do not place tapered edges against cut edgesor ends. Stagger vertical joints on opposite sides of partitions. Do not make joints other than control jointsat corners of framed openings.Form control and expansion joints with space between edges of adjoining gypsum panels.E.Cover both faces of support framing with gypsum panels in concealed spaces (above ceilings, etc.),F.except in chases braced internally.

Unless concealed application is indicated or required for sound, fire, air, or smoke ratings, coverage1.may be accomplished with scraps of not less than 8 sq. ft. in area.Fit gypsum panels around ducts, pipes, and conduits.2.Where partitions intersect structural members projecting below underside of floor/roof slabs and3.decks, cut gypsum panels to fit profile formed by structural members; allow 1/4- to 3/8-inch- widejoints to install sealant.

Isolate perimeter of gypsum board applied to non-load-bearing partitions at structural abutments, exceptG.floors. Provide 1/4- to 1/2-inch- wide spaces at these locations and trim edges with edge trim where edgesof panels are exposed. Seal joints between edges and abutting structural surfaces with acoustical sealant.STC-Rated Assemblies: Seal construction at perimeters, behind control joints, and at openings andH.penetrations with a continuous bead of acoustical sealant. Install acoustical sealant at both faces ofpartitions at perimeters and through penetrations. Comply with ASTM C 919 and with manufacturer'swritten recommendations for locating edge trim and closing off sound-flanking paths around or throughassemblies, including sealing partitions above acoustical ceilings.Install sound attenuation blankets before installing gypsum panels unless blankets are readily installedI.after panels have been installed on one side.

APPLYING INTERIOR GYPSUM BOARD3.3Install interior gypsum board in the following locations:A.

Wallboard Type: As indicated on Drawings.1.Type X: Vertical surfaces unless otherwise indicated.2.Flexible Type: Apply in double layer at curved assemblies.3.Ceiling Type: Ceiling surfaces.4.Abuse-Resistant Type: As indicated on Drawings.5.Glass-Mat Interior Type: Behind wall tile except where tile backer board is scheduled.6.Acoustically Enhanced Type: As indicated on Drawings.7.

Single-Layer Application:B.On ceilings, apply gypsum panels before wall/partition board application to greatest extent possible1.and at right angles to framing unless otherwise indicated.On partitions/walls, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) unless otherwise indicated2.or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly, and minimize end joints.

Stagger abutting end joints not less than one framing member in alternate courses ofa.panels.At stairwells and other high walls, install panels horizontally unless otherwise indicated orb.required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.

On Z-furring members, apply gypsum panels vertically (parallel to framing) with no end joints.3.Locate edge joints over furring members.Fastening Methods: Apply gypsum panels to supports with steel drill screws.4.

Multilayer Application:C.On ceilings, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers before applying base layers on1.walls/partitions; apply face layers in same sequence. Apply base layers at right angles to framingmembers and offset face-layer joints one framing member, 16 inches minimum, from parallelbase-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required by fire-resistance-rated assembly.On partitions/walls, apply gypsum board indicated for base layers and face layers vertically (parallel2.to framing) with joints of base layers located over stud or furring member and face-layer joints offsetat least one stud or furring member with base-layer joints, unless otherwise indicated or required byfire-resistance-rated assembly. Stagger joints on opposite sides of partitions.On Z-furring members, apply base layer vertically (parallel to framing) and face layer either3.vertically (parallel to framing) or horizontally (perpendicular to framing) with vertical joints offset atleast one furring member. Locate edge joints of base layer over furring members.Fastening Methods: Fasten base layers and face layers separately to supports with screws.4.




APPLYING TILE BACKING PANELS3.4Glass-Mat, Water-Resistant Backing Panels: Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructionsA.and install at showers, tubs, and where indicated. Install with 1/4-inch gap where panels abut otherconstruction or penetrations.Where tile backing panels abut other types of panels in same plane, shim surfaces to produce a uniformB.plane across panel surfaces.

INSTALLING TRIM ACCESSORIES3.5General: For trim with back flanges intended for fasteners, attach to framing with same fasteners used forA.panels. Otherwise, attach trim according to manufacturer's written instructions.Control Joints: Install control joints at locations indicated on Drawings, according to ASTM C 840 and inB.specific locations approved by Architect for visual effect, and as follows:

Wall: Control joints shall be installed where a wall or partition runs in an uninterrupted straight plane1.exceeding 30 linear feet, or 900 sq ft.Ceiling with Perimeter Relief: Control joints in interior ceilings with perimeter relief shall be installed2.so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 50 ft or 2500 sq. ftCeiling, without Perimeter Relief: Control joints in interior ceilings without perimeter relief shall be3.installed so that linear dimensions between control joints do not exceed 30 ft

Interior Trim: Install in the following locations:C.Cornerbead: Use at outside corners unless otherwise indicated.1.Bullnose Bead: Use where indicated.2.LC-Bead: Use at exposed panel edges.3.L-Bead: Use where indicated.4.U-Bead: Use where indicated.5.

Aluminum Trim: Install in locations indicated on Drawings.D.

FINISHING GYPSUM BOARD3.6General: Treat gypsum board joints, interior angles, edge trim, control joints, penetrations, fastener heads,A.surface defects, and elsewhere as required to prepare gypsum board surfaces for decoration. Promptlyremove residual joint compound from adjacent surfaces.Prefill open joints, rounded or beveled edges, and damaged surface areas.B.Apply joint tape over gypsum board joints, except for trim products specifically indicated as not intended toC.receive tape.Gypsum Board Finish Levels: Finish panels to levels indicated below and according to ASTM C 840:D.

Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas, concealed areas, and where indicated.1.Level 2: Panels that are substrate for tile and where indicated on Drawings.2.Level 4: All exposed interior surfaces requiring paint.3.

Primer and its application to surfaces are specified in Section 099100 "Painting."a.Glass-Mat Gypsum Sheathing Board: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions for use asE.exposed soffit board.Glass-Mat Faced Panels: Finish according to manufacturer's written instructions.F.

PROTECTION3.7Protect adjacent surfaces from drywall compound and promptly remove from floors and other non-drywallA.surfaces. Repair surfaces stained, marred, or otherwise damaged during drywall application.Protect installed products from damage from weather, condensation, direct sunlight, construction, andB.other causes during remainder of the construction period.Remove and replace panels that are wet, moisture damaged, and mold damaged.C.

Indications that panels are wet or moisture damaged include, but are not limited to, discoloration,1.sagging, or irregular shape.Indications that panels are mold damaged include, but are not limited to, fuzzy or splotchy surface2.contamination and discoloration.






TILING 093013 - 1

SECTION 093013

TILING

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions and

Division 01 Specification Sections, apply to this Section. B.

1.2 SUMMARY A. Section Includes:

1. Ceramic and Porcelain tile. 2. Thresholds. 3. Waterproof membrane. 4. Crack isolation membrane. 5. Metal edge strips.

1.3 DEFINITIONS A. General: Definitions in the ANSI A108 series of tile installation standards and in ANSI A137.1 apply to

Work of this Section unless otherwise specified. B. ANSI A108 Series: ANSI A108.01, ANSI A108.02, ANSI A108.1A, ANSI A108.1B, ANSI A108.1C, ANSI

A108.4, ANSI A108.5, ANSI A108.6, ANSI A108.8, ANSI A108.9, ANSI A108.10, ANSI A108.11, ANSI A108.12, ANSI A108.13, ANSI A108.14, ANSI A108.15, ANSI A108.16, and ANSI A108.17, which are contained in "American National Standard Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile."

C. Module Size: Actual tile size plus joint width indicated. D. Face Size: Actual tile size, excluding spacer lugs.

1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS A. Static Coefficient of Friction: For tile installed on walkway surfaces, provide products with the following

values as determined by testing identical products per ASTM C 1028: 1. Level Surfaces: Minimum 0.60. 2. Step Treads: Minimum 0.60. 3. Ramp Surfaces: Minimum 0.80.

1.5 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated. B. Shop Drawings: Show locations of each type of tile and tile pattern. Show widths, details, and locations of

expansion, contraction, control, and isolation joints in tile substrates and finished tile surfaces. C. Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of tile and grout indicated. Include Samples of accessories

involving color selection. D. Product Certificates: For each type of product, signed by product manufacturer. E. Material Test Reports: For each tile-setting and -grouting product. F. Sustainable Submittals:

1. Product data for adhesives, including printed statement of VOC content. 2. Product data for flooring compliant with FloorScore standard. 3. Product data for products having recycled content, documentation indicating percentages by weight

of postconsumer and preconsumer recycled content 3. Product certificates for products and materials required to comply with requirements for regional

materials, certificates indicating location of material manufacturer and point of extraction, harvest, or recovery for each raw material. Include statement indicating distance to Project, cost for each regional material, and fraction by weight that is considered regional.

1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Source Limitations for Tile: Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from one source or producer.

1. Obtain tile of each type and color or finish from same production run and of consistent quality in appearance and physical properties for each contiguous area.

B. Source Limitations for Setting and Grouting Materials: Obtain ingredients of a uniform quality for each mortar, adhesive, and grout component from one manufacturer and each aggregate from one source or



TILING 093013 - 2

producer. C. Source Limitations for Other Products: Obtain each of the following products specified in this Section from

a single manufacturer for each product: 1. Thresholds. 2. Waterproof membrane. 3. Crack isolation membrane. 4. Joint sealants. 5. Metal edge strips.

D. Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aesthetic effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation. 1. To set quality standards for installation, install mockup of not less than 100 s.f. of floor area in

location as directed by Architect. 2. Prepare finished mockup of floor area as shown on Drawings to set quality standards for

installation. 3. Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents

contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.

1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver and store packaged materials in original containers with seals unbroken and labels intact until time

of use. Comply with requirements in ANSI A137.1 for labeling tile packages. B. Store tile and cementitious materials on elevated platforms, under cover, and in a dry location. C. Store aggregates where grading and other required characteristics can be maintained and contamination

can be avoided. D. Store liquid materials in unopened containers and protected from freezing. E. Handle tile that has temporary protective coating on exposed surfaces to prevent coated surfaces from

contacting backs or edges of other units. If coating does contact bonding surfaces of tile, remove coating from bonding surfaces before setting tile.

1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Limitations: Do not install tile until construction in spaces is complete and ambient

temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated in referenced standards and manufacturer's written instructions.

1.9 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish extra materials that match and are from same production runs as products installed and that are

packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents. 1. Tile and Trim Units: Furnish quantity of full-size units equal to 3 percent of amount installed for

each type, composition, color, pattern, and size indicated.

PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 PRODUCTS, GENERAL A. ANSI Ceramic Tile Standard: Provide tile that complies with ANSI A137.1 for types, compositions, and

other characteristics indicated. 1. Provide tile complying with Standard grade requirements unless otherwise indicated.

B. ANSI Standards for Tile Installation Materials: Provide materials complying with ANSI A108.02, ANSI standards referenced in other Part 2 articles, ANSI standards referenced by TCA installation methods specified in tile installation schedules, and other requirements specified.

C. Factory Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations within ranges, blend tile in factory and package so tile units taken from one package show same range in colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples.

D. Mounting: For factory-mounted tile, provide back- or edge-mounted tile assemblies as standard with manufacturer unless otherwise indicated. 1. Where tile is indicated for installation in wet areas, do not use back- or edge-mounted tile

assemblies unless tile manufacturer specifies in writing that this type of mounting is suitable for installation indicated and has a record of successful in-service performance.

2.2 PORCELAIN AND CERAMIC TILE PRODUCTS A. Basis of Design Products: Refer to Master Schedule. B. Acceptable Manufacturers:

1. Daltile.



TILING 093013 - 3

2. Crossville Ceramics. 3. Inteceramic. 4. Caesar. 5. Walker Zanger.

2.3 THRESHOLDS A. General: Fabricate to sizes and profiles indicated or required to provide transition between adjacent floor

finishes. 1. Bevel edges at 1:2 slope, with lower edge of bevel aligned with or up to 1/16 inch above adjacent

floor surface. Finish bevel to match top surface of threshold. Limit height of threshold to 1/2 inch or less above adjacent floor surface.

B. Thresholds: Minimum abrasion resistance of 10 per ASTM C 1353 or ASTM C 241 and with honed finish. 1. Acceptable Product: Thornton Tile and Marble, Cultured Marble Threshold. 2. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full available range. 3. Size: 2 inch, double bevel, thickness to match height of adjacent flooring material.

2.4 WATERPROOF MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.10

and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with non-woven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal TS. C. Polyethylene Sheet: Polyethylene faced on both sides with fleece webbing; 0.008-inch nominal thickness:

1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following: a. Schluter Systems L.P.; KERDI.

D. Fabric-Reinforced, Fluid-Applied Membrane: System consisting of liquid-latex rubber or elastomeric polymer and continuous fabric reinforcement: 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Laticrete International; 9235 Waterproofing and Anti-Fracture Membrane.

2.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE A. General: Manufacturer's standard product, selected from the following, that complies with ANSI A118.12

for high performance and is recommended by the manufacturer for the application indicated. Include reinforcement and accessories recommended by manufacturer.

B. Chlorinated Polyethylene Sheet: Non-plasticized, chlorinated polyethylene faced on both sides with non-woven polyester fabric; 0.030-inch nominal thickness. 1. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:

a. Noble Company (The); Nobleseal CIS. b. Schuler; Ditra.

2.6 SETTING MATERIALS A. Portland Cement Mortar (Thickset) Installation Materials: ANSI A108.02.

1. Reinforcing Wire Fabric: Galvanized, welded wire fabric, 2 by 2 inches by 0.062-inch diameter; comply with ASTM A 185 and ASTM A 82 except for minimum wire size.

2. Latex Additive: Manufacturer's standard water emulsion, serving as replacement for part or all of gaging water, of type specifically recommended by latex-additive manufacturer for use with field-mixed portland cement and aggregate mortar bed.

B. Latex-Portland Cement Mortar (Thin Set): ANSI A118.4. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Bonsal American; an Oldcastle company. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation.

2. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix containing dry, redispersible, vinyl acetate or acrylic additive to which only water must be added at Project site.

3. Provide prepackaged, dry-mortar mix combined with acrylic resin and liquid-latex additive at Project site.

4. For wall applications, provide mortar that complies with requirements for non-sagging mortar in addition to the other requirements in ANSI A118.4.




TILING 093013 - 4

5. Behind glass mosaic tile, provide white mortar.

2.7 GROUT MATERIALS A. Polymer-Modified Tile Grout: ANSI A118.7.

1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following: a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Tex-Rite.

2. Polymer Type: Acrylic resin or styrene-butadiene rubber in liquid-latex form for addition to prepackaged dry-grout mix. Basis of Design: a. GRT-1: (Wall Tile Grout, with joint width 1/8” or less) Laticrete 1600 Unsanded Grout with

Laticrete 1776 Grout Enhancer b. GRT-2: (Wall / Floor Tile, with joint with 1/8” to ½”) Laticrete 1500 Sanded Grout with

Laticrete 1776 Grout Enhancer c. GRT-3: (Wall / Floor Tile Consistent Color) Laticrete PermaColor Grout

B. Water-Cleanable Epoxy Grout: ANSI A118.3. 1. Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:

a. Bostik, Inc. b. Custom Building Products. c. Laticrete International, Inc. d. MAPEI Corporation. e. Tex-Rite.

2. Basis of Design: a. GRT-4: (Wall / Floor Tile - High Performance Stain Resistant) Laticrete SpectraLOCK PRO

(Part AB Liquid) with Laticrete SpectraLOCK Powder (Part C) b. GRT-5: (Wall / Floor Tile – Industrial Grade) Laticrete 2000 Industrial Grout, if used on

vertical joints ½” or greater LATAPOXY Part D Non-Sag Additive

2.8 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS A. General: Provide sealants, primers, backer rods, and other sealant accessories that comply with the

following requirements and with the applicable requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint Sealants." 1. Use sealants that have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 40 CFR 59,

Subpart D (EPA Method 24). 2. Refer to Section 079500 for specific acceptable sealants.

2.9 MISCELLANEOUS MATERIALS A. Trowelable Underlayments and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement-based formulation

provided or approved by manufacturer of tile-setting materials for installations indicated. B. Tile Cleaner: A neutral cleaner capable of removing soil and residue without harming tile and grout

surfaces, specifically approved for materials and installations indicated by tile and grout manufacturers.

2.10 MIXING MORTARS AND GROUT A. Mix mortars and grouts to comply with referenced standards and mortar and grout manufacturers' written

instructions. B. Add materials, water, and additives in accurate proportions. C. Obtain and use type of mixing equipment, mixer speeds, mixing containers, mixing time, and other

procedures to produce mortars and grouts of uniform quality with optimum performance characteristics for installations indicated.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION A. Examine substrates, areas, and conditions where tile will be installed, with Installer present, for compliance

with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of installed tile. 1. Verify that substrates for setting tile are firm, dry, clean, free of coatings that are incompatible with

tile-setting materials including curing compounds and other substances that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone; and comply with flatness tolerances required by ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated.

2. Verify that concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar comply with surface finish



TILING 093013 - 5

requirements in ANSI A108.01 for installations indicated. a. Verify that surfaces that received a steel trowel finish have been mechanically scarified. b. Verify that protrusions, bumps, and ridges have been removed by sanding or grinding.

3. Verify that installation of grounds, anchors, recessed frames, electrical and mechanical units of work, and similar items located in or behind tile has been completed.

4. Verify that joints and cracks in tile substrates are coordinated with tile joint locations; if not coordinated, adjust joint locations in consultation with Architect.

B. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

3.2 PREPARATION A. Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in concrete substrates for tile floors installed with thin-set mortar with

trowelable leveling and patching compound specifically recommended by tile-setting material manufacturer.

B. Where indicated, prepare substrates to receive waterproofing by applying a reinforced mortar bed that complies with ANSI A108.1A and is sloped 1/4 inch per foot toward drains.

C. Blending: For tile exhibiting color variations, verify that tile has been factory blended and packaged so tile units taken from one package show same range of colors as those taken from other packages and match approved Samples. If not factory blended, either return to manufacturer or blend tiles at Project site before installing.

3.3 TILE INSTALLATION A. Comply with TCA's "Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation" for TCA installation methods specified in tile

installation schedules. Comply with parts of the ANSI A108 Series "Specifications for Installation of Ceramic Tile" that are referenced in TCA installation methods, specified in tile installation schedules, and apply to types of setting and grouting materials used. 1. For the following installations, follow procedures in the ANSI A108 Series of tile installation

standards for providing 95 percent mortar coverage: a. Exterior tile floors. b. Tile floors in wet areas. c. Tile swimming pool decks. d. Tile floors in laundries. e. Tile floors composed of tiles 8 by 8 inches or larger. f. Tile floors composed of rib-backed tiles.

B. Extend tile work into recesses and under or behind equipment and fixtures to form complete covering without interruptions unless otherwise indicated. Terminate work neatly at obstructions, edges, and corners without disrupting pattern or joint alignments.

C. Accurately form intersections and returns. Perform cutting and drilling of tile without marring visible surfaces. Carefully grind cut edges of tile abutting trim, finish, or built-in items for straight aligned joints. Fit tile closely to electrical outlets, piping, fixtures, and other penetrations so plates, collars, or covers overlap tile.

D. Jointing Pattern: Lay tile in pattern as indicated on Drawings. Lay out tile work and center tile fields in both directions in each space or on each wall area. Lay out tile work to minimize the use of pieces that are less than half of a tile, or as otherwise indicted on Drawings. Provide uniform joint widths unless otherwise indicated. 1. For tile mounted in sheets, make joints between tile sheets same width as joints within tile sheets

so joints between sheets are not apparent in finished work. 2. Where adjoining tiles on floor, base, walls, or trim are specified or indicated to be same size, align

joints. 3. Where tiles are specified or indicated to be whole integer multiples of adjoining tiles on floor, base,

walls, or trim, align joints unless otherwise indicated. E. Joint Widths: Refer to Schedule. F. Lay out tile wainscots to dimensions indicated or to next full tile beyond dimensions indicated. G. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints and other sealant-filled joints, including control, contraction,

and isolation joints, where indicated. Form joints during installation of setting materials, mortar beds, and tile. Do not saw-cut joints after installing tiles. 1. Where joints occur in concrete substrates, locate joints in tile surfaces directly above them. 2. Prepare joints and apply sealants to comply with requirements in Division 07 Section "Joint

Sealants." H. Thresholds: Install stone thresholds in same type of setting bed as adjacent floor unless otherwise

indicated. I. Metal Edge Strips: Install in locations indicated or where exposed edge of tile flooring meets carpet, wood,



TILING 093013 - 6

or other flooring that finishes flush with top of tile. J. Grout Sealer: Apply grout sealer to cementitious grout joints in tile floors according to grout-sealer

manufacturer's written instructions. As soon as grout sealer has penetrated grout joints, remove excess sealer and sealer from tile faces by wiping with soft cloth.

3.4 WATERPROOFING INSTALLATION A. Install waterproofing to comply with ANSI A108.13 and manufacturer's written instructions to produce

waterproof membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over waterproofing until waterproofing has cured and been tested to

determine that it is watertight.

3.5 CRACK ISOLATION MEMBRANE INSTALLATION A. Install crack isolation membrane to comply with ANSI A108.17 and manufacturer's written instructions to

produce membrane of uniform thickness and bonded securely to substrate. B. Do not install tile or setting materials over crack isolation membrane until membrane has cured.

3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTING A. Cleaning: On completion of placement and grouting, clean all ceramic tile surfaces so they are free of

foreign matter. 1. Remove latex-portland cement grout residue from tile as soon as possible. 2. Clean grout smears and haze from tile according to tile and grout manufacturer's written

instructions but no sooner than 10 days after installation. Use only cleaners recommended by tile and grout manufacturers and only after determining that cleaners are safe to use by testing on samples of tile and other surfaces to be cleaned. Protect metal surfaces and plumbing fixtures from effects of cleaning. Flush surfaces with clean water before and after cleaning.

3. Remove temporary protective coating by method recommended by coating manufacturer and that is acceptable to tile and grout manufacturer. Trap and remove coating to prevent drain clogging.

B. Protect installed tile work with kraft paper or other heavy covering during construction period to prevent staining, damage, and wear. If recommended by tile manufacturer, apply coat of neutral protective cleaner to completed tile walls and floors.

C. Prohibit foot and wheel traffic from tiled floors for at least seven days after grouting is completed. D. Before final inspection, remove protective coverings and rinse neutral protective cleaner from tile surfaces.

3.7 TILE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE A. Interior Floor Installations, Concrete Subfloor:

1. Tile Installation F113: Thin-set mortar; TCA F113. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

2. Tile Installation F115: Thin-set mortar; epoxy grout; TCA F115. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

3. Tile Installation F122: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA F122. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

4. Tile Installation F125A: Thin-set mortar on crack isolation membrane; TCA F125A. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded grout.

B. Interior Wall Installations, on Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation W243: Thin-set mortar on gypsum board; TCA W243.

a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded grout.

2. Tile Installation W245: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant gypsum backer board; TCA W245. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded Water-cleanable epoxy grout.

C. Bathtub/Shower Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation B419: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; TCA

B419. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified unsanded Water-cleanable epoxy grout.



TILING 093013 - 7

D. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Concrete or Masonry: 1. Tile Installation B421: Thin-set mortar on waterproof membrane; TCA B421.

a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex-portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded grout.

E. Shower Receptor and Wall Installations, Metal Studs or Furring: 1. Tile Installation B420: Thin-set mortar on coated glass-mat, water-resistant backer board; TCA

B420. a. Thin-Set Mortar: Latex- portland cement mortar. b. Grout: Polymer-modified sanded Polymer-modified unsanded grout.

F. Color and Styles: As scheduled.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 095113 - ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes acoustical panels and exposed suspension systems for ceilings.A.Products furnished, but not installed under this Section, include anchors, clips, and other ceilingB.attachment devices to be cast in concrete.

DEFINITIONS1.3AC: Articulation Class.A.CAC: Ceiling Attenuation Class.B.LR: Light Reflectance coefficient.C.NRC: Noise Reduction Coefficient.D.


ACTION SUBMITTALS1.5Product Data: For each type of product.A.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, 6 inches in size.B.Samples for Initial Selection: For components with factory-applied color finishes.C.Samples for Verification: For each component indicated and for each exposed finish required, preparedD.on Samples of size indicated below.

Acoustical Panel: Set of 6-inch- square Samples of each type, color, pattern, and texture.1.Exposed Suspension-System Members, Moldings, and Trim: Set of 6-inch- long Samples of each2.type, finish, and color.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.6Coordination Drawings: Reflected ceiling plans, drawn to scale, on which the following items are shownA.and coordinated with each other, using input from installers of the items involved:

Suspended ceiling components.1.Structural members to which suspension systems will be attached.2.Size and location of initial access modules for acoustical panels.3.Items penetrating finished ceiling including the following:4.

Lighting fixtures.a.Air outlets and inlets.b.Speakers.c.Sprinklers.d.Access panels.e.

Perimeter moldings.5.Qualification Data: For testing agency.B.Product Test Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling, for tests performed by manufacturer andC.witnessed by a qualified testing agency.Evaluation Reports: For each acoustical panel ceiling suspension system and anchor and fastener type,D.from ICC-ES.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.7Maintenance Data: For finishes to include in maintenance manuals.A.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.8Furnish extra materials that match products installed and that are packaged with protective covering forA.storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Acoustical Ceiling Panels: Full-size panels equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.1.Suspension-System Components: Quantity of each exposed component equal to 2 percent of2.quantity installed.


ACOUSTICAL PANEL CEILINGS 095113 - 1


Hold-Down Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.3.Impact Clips: Equal to 2 percent of quantity installed.4.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.9Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticA.effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Build mockup of typical ceiling area as shown on Drawings.1.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed2.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.10Deliver acoustical panels, suspension-system components, and accessories to Project site in original,A.unopened packages and store them in a fully enclosed, conditioned space where they will be protectedagainst damage from moisture, humidity, temperature extremes, direct sunlight, surface contamination,and other causes.Before installing acoustical panels, permit them to reach room temperature and a stabilized moistureB.content.Handle acoustical panels carefully to avoid chipping edges or damaging units in any way.C.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.11Environmental Limitations: Do not install acoustical panel ceilings until spaces are enclosed andA.weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambienttemperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied forits intended use.

Pressurized Plenums: Operate ventilation system for not less than 48 hours before beginning1.acoustical panel ceiling installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency. IdentifyA.products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: Comply with ASTM E 1264 for Class A materials.1.Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.2.

Fire-Resistance Ratings: Comply with ASTM E 119; testing by a qualified testing agency. IdentifyB.products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.


ACOUSTICAL PANELS, GENERAL2.2Source Limitations:A.

Acoustical Ceiling Panel: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.1.Suspension System: Obtain each type from single source from single manufacturer.2.

Source Limitations: Obtain each type of acoustical ceiling panel and supporting suspension system fromB.single source from single manufacturer.Recycled Content: Postconsumer recycled content plus one-half of preconsumer recycled content not lessC.than 30 percent.Glass-Fiber-Based Panels: Made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.D.Acoustical Panel Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard panels of configuration indicated that complyE.with ASTM E 1264 classifications as designated by types, patterns, acoustical ratings, and lightreflectances unless otherwise indicated.

Mounting Method for Measuring NRC: Type E-400; plenum mounting in which face of test1.specimen is 15-3/4 inches away from test surface according to ASTM E 795.

Acoustical Panel Colors and Patterns: Match appearance characteristics indicated for each product type.F.Where appearance characteristics of acoustical panels are indicated by referencing pattern1.designations in ASTM E 1264 and not manufacturers' proprietary product designations, provideproducts selected by Architect from each manufacturer's full range that comply with requirementsindicated for type, pattern, color, light reflectance, acoustical performance, edge detail, and size.

ACOUSTICAL PANELS2.3Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.




Armstrong World Industries, Inc.1.CertainTeed Corp.2.Chicago Metallic Corporation.3.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.4.

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEMS, GENERAL2.4Metal Suspension-System Standard: Provide manufacturer's standard direct-hung metal suspensionA.systems of types, structural classifications, and finishes indicated that comply with applicable requirementsin ASTM C 635/C 635M.

High-Humidity Finish: Comply with ASTM C 635/C 635M requirements for "Coating Classification1.for Severe Environment Performance" where high-humidity finishes are indicated.

Attachment Devices: Size for five times the design load indicated in ASTM C 635/C 635M, Table 1, "DirectB.Hung," unless otherwise indicated. Comply with seismic design requirements.

Anchors in Concrete: Anchors of type and material indicated below, with holes or loops for1.attaching hangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal tofive times that imposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 488or ASTM E 1512 as applicable, conducted by a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Type: Cast-in-place anchors.a.Corrosion Protection: Carbon-steel components zinc plated to comply with ASTM B 633,b.Class Fe/Zn 5 (0.005 mm) for Class SC 1 service condition.Corrosion Protection: Stainless-steel components complying with ASTM F 593 and ASTM Fc.594, Group 1 Alloy 304 or 316 for bolts; Alloy 304 or 316 for anchor.Corrosion Protection: Components fabricated from nickel-copper-alloy rods complying withd.ASTM B 164 for UNS No. N04400 alloy.

Power-Actuated Fasteners in Concrete: Fastener system of type suitable for application indicated,2.fabricated from corrosion-resistant materials, with clips or other accessory devices for attachinghangers of type indicated and with capability to sustain, without failure, a load equal to 10 times thatimposed by ceiling construction, as determined by testing according to ASTM E 1190, conductedby a qualified testing and inspecting agency.

Wire Hangers, Braces, and Ties: Provide wires complying with the following requirements:C.Zinc-Coated, Carbon-Steel Wire: ASTM A 641/A 641M, Class 1 zinc coating, soft temper.1.Size: Select wire diameter so its stress at three times hanger design load (ASTM C 635/C 635M,2.Table 1, "Direct Hung") will be less than yield stress of wire, but provide not less than 0.106-inch-diameter wire.

Hold-Down Clips: Where indicated, provide manufacturer's standard hold-down clips spaced 24 inchesD.o.c. on all cross tees.

METAL SUSPENSION SYSTEM2.5Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.1.CertainTeed Corp.2.Chicago Metallic Corporation.3.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.4.

Wide-Face, Capped, Double-Web, Steel Suspension System: Main and cross runners roll formed fromB.cold-rolled steel sheet; prepainted, electrolytically zinc coated, or hot-dip galvanized according to ASTM A653/A 653M, not less than G30 coating designation; with prefinished 02/11-inch- wide metal caps onflanges.

Structural Classification: Intermediate-duty system.1.End Condition of Cross Runners: Override (stepped) or butt-edge type.2.Face Design: Flat, flush.3.Cap Material: Steel cold-rolled sheet.4.Cap Finish: Painted white.5.

Extra-Wide-Face, -Web, Metal Suspension System: Main and cross runners formed from to produceC.structural members with [1-1/2-inch-] [2-inch-] wide flanges.

Structural Classification: -duty system.1.Face Design: Flat, flush.2.Face Finish: [Painted white] [Satin anodized according to AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31].3.Gasket System: Clean-room type.4.

METAL EDGE MOLDINGS AND TRIM2.6Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.1.Delivery Pavilion, El Monte, Ca.Ware Malcomb PN IRV15-0103-00












CertainTeed Corp.2.Chicago Metallic Corporation.3.Fry Reglet Corporation.4.Gordon, Inc.5.USG Interiors, Inc.; Subsidiary of USG Corporation.6.

Extruded-Aluminum Edge Moldings and Trim: Where indicated, provide manufacturer'sB.extruded-aluminum edge moldings and trim of profile indicated or referenced by manufacturer'sdesignations, including splice plates, corner pieces, and attachment and other clips, complying withseismic design requirements and the following:

Aluminum Alloy: Alloy and temper recommended by aluminum producer and finisher for type of1.use and finish indicated, and with not less than the strength and durability properties of aluminumextrusions complying with ASTM B 221 for Alloy and Temper 6063-T5.Clear Anodic Finish: AAMA 611, AA-M12C22A31, Class II, 0.010 mm or thicker.2.Baked-Enamel or Powder-Coat Finish: Minimum dry film thickness of 1.5 mils. Comply with ASTM3.C 635/C 635M and coating manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning, conversion coating, andapplying and baking finish.

ACOUSTICAL SEALANT2.7Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:A.

Acoustical Sealant for Exposed and Concealed Joints:1.Pecora Corporation; AC-20 FTR Acoustical and Insulation Sealant.a.USG Corporation; SHEETROCK Acoustical Sealant.b.

Acoustical Sealant for Concealed Joints:2.Pecora Corporation; AIS-919.a.

Acoustical Sealant: Manufacturer's standard sealant complying with ASTM C 834 and effective inB.reducing airborne sound transmission through perimeter joints and openings in building construction asdemonstrated by testing representative assemblies according to ASTM E 90.

Exposed and Concealed Joints: Nonsag, paintable, nonstaining latex sealant.1.Concealed Joints: Nondrying, nonhardening, nonskinning, nonstaining, gunnable, synthetic-rubber2.sealant.Acoustical sealant shall have a VOC content of 250 g/L or less when calculated according to 403.CFR 59, Subpart D (EPA Method 24).

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, including structural framing to which acoustical panel ceilingsA.attach or abut, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements specified in this and other Sectionsthat affect ceiling installation and anchorage and with requirements for installation tolerances and otherconditions affecting performance of acoustical panel ceilings.Examine acoustical panels before installation. Reject acoustical panels that are wet, moisture damaged,B.or mold damaged.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

PREPARATION3.2Measure each ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical panels to balance border widths at oppositeA.edges of each ceiling. Avoid using less-than-half-width panels at borders, and comply with layout shownon reflected ceiling plans.

INSTALLATION3.3General: Install acoustical panel ceilings to comply with ASTM C 636/C 636M and seismic designA.requirements indicated, according to manufacturer's written instructions and CISCA's "Ceiling SystemsHandbook."

Fire-Rated Assembly: Install fire-rated ceiling systems according to tested fire-rated design.1.Secure bracing wires to ceiling suspension members and to supports with a minimum of four tight turns.B.Suspend bracing from building's structural members as required for hangers, without attaching topermanent metal forms, steel deck, or steel deck tabs. Fasten bracing wires into concrete withcast-in-place or postinstalled anchors.Install edge moldings and trim of type indicated at perimeter of acoustical ceiling area and whereC.necessary to conceal edges of acoustical panels.














Apply acoustical sealant in a continuous ribbon concealed on back of vertical legs of moldings1.before they are installed.Screw attach moldings to substrate at intervals not more than 16 inches o.c. and not more than 32.inches from ends, leveling with ceiling suspension system to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 12 feet.Miter corners accurately and connect securely.Do not use exposed fasteners, including pop rivets, on moldings and trim.3.

Install suspension-system runners so they are square and securely interlocked with one another. RemoveD.and replace dented, bent, or kinked members.Install acoustical panels with undamaged edges and fit accurately into suspension-system runners andE.edge moldings. Scribe and cut panels at borders and penetrations to provide a neat, precise fit.

Arrange directionally patterned acoustical panels as follows:1.As indicated on reflected ceiling plans.a.

For square-edged panels, install panels with edges fully hidden from view by flanges of2.suspension-system runners and moldings.For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system runners, install panels with bottom of reveal in firm3.contact with top surface of runner flanges.For reveal-edged panels on suspension-system members with box-shaped flanges, install panels4.with reveal surfaces in firm contact with suspension-system surfaces and panel faces flush withbottom face of runners.Paint cut edges of panel remaining exposed after installation; match color of exposed panel5.surfaces using coating recommended in writing for this purpose by acoustical panel manufacturer.Install hold-down clips in areas indicated, in areas required by authorities having jurisdiction, and6.for fire-resistance ratings; space as recommended by panel manufacturer's written instructionsunless otherwise indicated.Protect lighting fixtures and air ducts to comply with requirements indicated for fire-resistance-rated7.assembly.

CLEANING3.4Clean exposed surfaces of acoustical panel ceilings, including trim, edge moldings, andA.suspension-system members. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and touchup ofminor finish damage. Remove and replace ceiling components that cannot be successfully cleaned andrepaired to permanently eliminate evidence of damage.





SECTION 096116 - CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2This Section includes:A.

Sealing of concrete floor areas not otherwise scheduled to receive finish floor covering.1.Cleaning and sealing of existing concrete floors not scheduled to receive finish floor covering.2.


Include data to indicate chemical, solvent, and detergent resistance.1.Include information for primer, sealants, accessories and other required components.2.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.4Maintenance Data: For fluid-applied floor sealer to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:A.

Manufacturer's instructions on maintenance renewal of applied treatments.1.Protocols and product specifications for joint filing, crack repair and/or surface repair.2.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing Products specified in this Section withA.minimum 10 years documented experience.Installer Qualifications: An installer (applicator) who is approved, trained, or certified by fluid-applied floorB.sealer manufacturer.Source Limitations: Furnish products from one manufacturer for entire Project, unless otherwiseC.acceptable to Architect.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Deliver materials in manner to prevent damage to containers and bags.A.Store materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions in clean and dry location with temperatureB.between 60 deg F and 90 deg F.Keep products away from fire or open flame.C.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.7Environmental Limitations: Comply with flooring manufacturer's written instructions for substrateA.temperature, ambient temperature, humidity, ventilation, and other conditions affecting flooring application.

Do not apply flooring until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof; wet work in spaces is complete1.and dry; and overhead work, including installing mechanical systems, lighting, and athleticequipment, is complete.

Conditioning Period: Begins not less than 7 days before flooring application, is continuous throughB.application, and continues not less than 3 days after application.

After conditioning period, maintain relative humidity and ambient temperature planned for building1.occupants.

Ventilate area where flooring is being installed. Post and enforce no smoking and no open flame signs untilC.flooring has cured.Lighting: Provide permanent lighting or, if permanent lighting is not in place, simulate permanent lightingD.conditions during floor sealer application.Close spaces to traffic during floor sealer application and for not less than 24 hours after application unlessE.manufacturer recommends a longer period.

SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING1.8Sequence work under provisions of Division 01 Section “Construction Progress Documentation.”A.


CONCRETE FLOOR SEALING 096116 - 1


WARRANTY1.9Provide written warranty signed by manufacturer warranting work to be free from defective materials andA.workmanship, and agreeing to replace components which fail within 2 years from date of SubstantialCompletion.

Failed materials and workmanship includes spalling, cracking, and delamination.1.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of theA.following:

Dayton Superior Specialty Chemical Corp.1.L & M Construction Chemicals, Inc.2.Euclid Chemical.3.

CONCRETE FLOOR SEALER2.2VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."Acrylic: Super Diamond Clear VOX.B.

ACCESSORIES2.3Joint Sealant Materials: Manufacturer's recommended sealant compatible with flooring system for type ofA.service and joint condition indicated.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, with Installer (Applicator) present, for conditions affecting performance of flooringA.including substrate moisture content.Examine areas to receive flooring for:B.

Defects in substrate that may affect proper execution of flooring work.1.Deviations beyond allowable tolerance for concrete slab work.2.Surface curing agents or sealers that would inhibit bond.3.Surface defects such as cracks that could transfer through to finished flooring surface if not4.corrected.

Do not begin flooring work until concrete has cured a minimum of 28 days.C.Do not begin work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.D.

PREPARATION3.2Prepare Substrate: Tests concrete substrate for pH, contaminants, and moisture content in accordanceA.with manufacturer's recommendations. Ensure concrete is within manufacturers recommended limits priorto installation.Concrete Sub-floors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:B.

Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that1.may interfere with adhesive bond.Repair cracks, divots and surface imperfections according to manufacturer's instructions.2.Vacuum to remove dust and debris.3.

Protect walls, floor openings, equipment, electrical openings, door frames, and other obstructions duringC.installation. Cover floor and wall areas at mixing stations.

APPLICATION3.3General: Mix and apply flooring components according to manufacturer's written instructions.A.Apply a minimum of 2 coats in accordance with manufacturer's recommended coverage rates.B.

CURING3.4Cure flooring materials according to manufacturer's directions, taking care to prevent contamination duringA.application stages and before completing curing process.

Indoor Air Quality Procedures: Ventilate in accordance with Division 01 Section “Environmental1.Project Procedures.”




CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.5Clean as recommended by manufacturer. Do not use materials or methods which may damage surface orA.surrounding construction.

Cleaner, Maximum VOC Content: In accordance with applicable codes.1.Remove temporary covering and clean flooring prior to final inspection. Use cleaning materials andB.procedures recommended by flooring manufacturer.Protect finished work in accordance with Division 01 Section “Common Execution Requirements.”C.Do not permit traffic over finished flooring surfaces.D.Protect flooring materials from damage and wear during construction operation.E.





SECTION 096513 - RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES

GENERALPART 1 -



Resilient base.1.Resilient molding accessories.2.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product.A.Samples: For each exposed product and for each color and texture specified, not less than 12 inchesB.long.Samples for Initial Selection: For each type of product indicated.C.Samples for Verification: For each type of product indicated and for each color, texture, and patternD.required in manufacturer's standard-size Samples, but not less than 12 inches long.Product Schedule: For resilient base and accessory products. Use same designations indicated onE.Drawings.


Furnish not less than 10 linear feet for every 500 linear feet or fraction thereof, of each type, color,1.pattern, and size of resilient product installed.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.5Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticA.effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Coordinate mockups in this Section with mockups specified in other Sections.1.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.6Store resilient products and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambientA.temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or morethan 90 deg F.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.7Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F orA.more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive resilient products during the following time periods:

48 hours before installation.1.During installation.2.48 hours after installation.3.

After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within rangeB.recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.Install resilient products after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.C.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


THERMOSET-RUBBER BASE2.2Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

Burke Mercer Flooring Products, Division of Burke Industries Inc.1.Flexco.2.


RESILIENT BASE AND ACCESSORIES 096513 - 1





Roppe Corporation, USA.3.Product Standard: ASTM F 1861, Type TS (rubber, vulcanized thermoset), Group I (solid, homogeneous).B.

Style and Location:1.Style A, Straight: Provide in areas with carpet.a.Style B, Cove: Provide in areas with resilient flooring.b.Style C, Butt to: Provide in areas indicated.c.

Thickness: 0.125 inch.C.Height: As scheduled.D.Lengths: Coils in manufacturer's standard length.E.Outside Corners: Job formed.F.Inside Corners: Job formed.G.Colors: As scheduled.H.

RUBBER MOLDING ACCESSORY2.3Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:A.

Roppe Corporation, USA.1.VPI, LLC, Floor Products Division.2.

Description: Rubber nosing for carpet and resilient flooring.B.Profile and Dimensions: As indicated.C.Locations: Provide rubber molding accessories in areas indicated.D.Colors and Patterns: As scheduled.E.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS2.4Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blendedA.hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by resilient-product manufacturer forapplications indicated.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by resilient-product manufacturer for resilient products andB.substrate conditions indicated.Stair-Tread Nose Filler: Two-part epoxy compound recommended by resilient stair-tread manufacturer toC.fill nosing substrates that do not conform to tread contours.Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by resilient stair-treadD.manufacturer.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moistureA.content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other1.Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign depositsthat might interfere with adhesion of resilient products.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.Installation of resilient products indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.1.

PREPARATION3.2Prepare substrates according to manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilientA.products.Concrete Substrates for Resilient Stair Accessories: Prepare horizontal surfaces according to ASTM FB.710.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.1.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that2.contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by manufacturer. Donot use solvents.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by manufacturer. Proceed with3.installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended bymanufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to4.manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed witha.installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb ofwater/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.








Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed withb.installation only after substrates have maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.

Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; removeC.bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.Do not install resilient products until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to beD.installed.

At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient products and installation materials into1.spaces where they will be installed.

Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient products.E.

RESILIENT BASE INSTALLATION3.3Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient base.A.Apply resilient base to walls, columns, pilasters, casework and cabinets in toe spaces, and otherB.permanent fixtures in rooms and areas where base is required.Install resilient base in lengths as long as practical without gaps at seams and with tops of adjacent piecesC.aligned.Tightly adhere resilient base to substrate throughout length of each piece, with base in continuous contactD.with horizontal and vertical substrates.Do not stretch resilient base during installation.E.On masonry surfaces or other similar irregular substrates, fill voids along top edge of resilient base withF.manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler material.

RESILIENT ACCESSORY INSTALLATION3.4Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing resilient accessories.A.Resilient Molding Accessories: Butt to adjacent materials and tightly adhere to substrates throughoutB.length of each piece. Install reducer strips at edges of floor covering that would otherwise be exposed.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.5Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting resilient products.A.Perform the following operations immediately after completing resilient-product installation:B.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.1.Sweep and vacuum horizontal surfaces thoroughly.2.Damp-mop horizontal surfaces to remove marks and soil.3.

Protect resilient products from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operationsC.and placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.Floor Polish: Remove soil, visible adhesive, and surface blemishes from resilient stair treads beforeD.applying liquid floor polish.

Apply three coat(s).1.Cover resilient products subject to wear and foot traffic until Substantial Completion.E.





SECTION 096519 - RESILIENT TILE FLOORING

GENERALPART 1 -



Vinyl composition floor tile.1.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product.A.Shop Drawings: For each type of floor tile. Include floor tile layouts, edges, columns, doorways, enclosingB.partitions, built-in furniture, cabinets, and cutouts.

Show details of special patterns.1.Samples: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.C.Samples for Verification: Full-size units of each color and pattern of floor tile required.D.Product Schedule: For floor tile. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.E.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Qualification Data: For Installer.A.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.5Maintenance Data: For each type of floor tile to include in maintenance manuals.A.


Floor Tile: Furnish one box for every 50 boxes or fraction thereof, of each type, color, and pattern1.of floor tile installed.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.7Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticA.effects and set quality standards for materials and execution.

Build mockups for floor tile including[ resilient base and] accessories.1.Size: Minimum 100 sq. ft. for each type, color, and pattern in locations directed by Architect.a.

Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents2.contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed3.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.8Store floor tile and installation materials in dry spaces protected from the weather, with ambientA.temperatures maintained within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 50 deg F or morethan 90 deg F. Store floor tiles on flat surfaces.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.9Maintain ambient temperatures within range recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 70 deg F orA.more than 95 deg F, in spaces to receive floor tile during the following time periods:

48 hours before installation.1.During installation.2.48 hours after installation.3.

After installation and until Substantial Completion, maintain ambient temperatures within rangeB.recommended by manufacturer, but not less than 55 deg F or more than 95 deg F.Close spaces to traffic during floor tile installation.C.Close spaces to traffic for 48 hours after floor tile installation.D.Install floor tile after other finishing operations, including painting, have been completed.E.


RESILIENT TILE FLOORING 096519 - 1


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1Recycled Content: Provide products with an average recycled content so that post-consumer recycledA.content plus one-half of pre-consumer recycled content is not less than 30 percent.VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionB.018113.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: For resilient tile flooring, as determined by testing identical productsC.according to ASTM E 648 or NFPA 253 by a qualified testing agency.

Critical Radiant Flux Classification: Class I, not less than 0.45 W/sq. cm.1.

VINYL COMPOSITION FLOOR TILE2.2Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:A.

Armstrong World Industries, Inc.1.Felxco, Inc.2.Johnsonite; A Tarkett Company.3.Roppe Corporation USA.4.

Tile Standard: ASTM F 1066, Class 2, through-pattern tile.B.Wearing Surface: Smooth.C.Thickness: 0.125 inch.D.Size: 12 by 12 inches.E.Colors and Patterns: As scheduled.F.

INSTALLATION MATERIALS2.3Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, portland cement based or blendedA.hydraulic-cement-based formulation provided or approved by floor tile manufacturer for applicationsindicated.Adhesives: Water-resistant type recommended by floor tile and adhesive manufacturers to suit floor tileB.and substrate conditions indicated.Floor Polish: Provide protective, liquid floor-polish products recommended by floor tile manufacturer.C.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for maximum moistureA.content and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.

Verify that finishes of substrates comply with tolerances and other requirements specified in other1.Sections and that substrates are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign depositsthat might interfere with adhesion of floor tile.


PREPARATION3.2Prepare substrates according to floor tile manufacturer's written instructions to ensure adhesion of resilientA.products.Concrete Substrates: Prepare according to ASTM F 710.B.

Verify that substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, and hardeners.1.Remove substrate coatings and other substances that are incompatible with adhesives and that2.contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, using mechanical methods recommended by floor tilemanufacturer. Do not use solvents.Alkalinity and Adhesion Testing: Perform tests recommended by floor tile manufacturer. Proceed3.with installation only after substrate alkalinity falls within range on pH scale recommended bymanufacturer in writing, but not less than 5 or more than 9 pH.Moisture Testing: Proceed with installation only after substrates pass testing according to floor tile4.manufacturer's written recommendations, but not less stringent than the following:

Perform anhydrous calcium chloride test according to ASTM F 1869. Proceed witha.installation only after substrates have maximum moisture-vapor-emission rate of 3 lb ofwater/1000 sq. ft. in 24 hours.Perform relative humidity test using in situ probes according to ASTM F 2170. Proceed withb.installation only after substrates have a maximum 75 percent relative humidity level.






Fill cracks, holes, and depressions in substrates with trowelable leveling and patching compound; removeC.bumps and ridges to produce a uniform and smooth substrate.Do not install floor tiles until they are the same temperature as the space where they are to be installed.D.

At least 48 hours in advance of installation, move resilient floor tile and installation materials into1.spaces where they will be installed.

Immediately before installation, sweep and vacuum clean substrates to be covered by resilient floor tile.E.

FLOOR TILE INSTALLATION3.3Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for installing floor tile.A.Lay out floor tiles from center marks established with principal walls, discounting minor offsets, so tiles atB.opposite edges of room are of equal width. Adjust as necessary to avoid using cut widths that equal lessthan one-half tile at perimeter.

Lay tiles in pattern indicated.1.Match floor tiles for color and pattern by selecting tiles from cartons in the same sequence asC.manufactured and packaged, if so numbered. Discard broken, cracked, chipped, or deformed tiles.

Lay tiles in pattern of colors and sizes indicated.1.Scribe, cut, and fit floor tiles to butt neatly and tightly to vertical surfaces and permanent fixtures includingD.built-in furniture, cabinets, pipes, outlets, and door frames.Extend floor tiles into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, and similar openings. Extend floor tiles to centerE.of door openings.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeatingF.on floor tiles as marked on substrates. Use chalk or other nonpermanent marking device.Adhere floor tiles to flooring substrates using a full spread of adhesive applied to substrate to produce aG.completed installation without open cracks, voids, raising and puckering at joints, telegraphing of adhesivespreader marks, and other surface imperfections.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.4Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for cleaning and protecting floor tile.A.Perform the following operations immediately after completing floor tile installation:B.

Remove adhesive and other blemishes from exposed surfaces.1.Sweep and vacuum surfaces thoroughly.2.Damp-mop surfaces to remove marks and soil.3.

Protect floor tile from mars, marks, indentations, and other damage from construction operations andC.placement of equipment and fixtures during remainder of construction period.Floor Polish: Remove soil, adhesive, and blemishes from floor tile surfaces before applying liquid floorD.polish.

Apply three coat(s).1.Cover floor tile until Substantial Completion.E.





SECTION 096816 - SHEET CARPETING

GENERALPART 1 -



Review methods and procedures related to carpet installation including, but not limited to, the1.following:

Review delivery, storage, and handling procedures.a.Review ambient conditions and ventilation procedures.b.Review subfloor preparation procedures.c.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For the following, including installation recommendations for each type of substrate:A.

Carpet: For each type indicated. Include manufacturer's written data on physical characteristics,1.durability, and fade resistance.

Shop Drawings: Show the following:B.Columns, doorways, enclosing walls or partitions, built-in cabinets, and locations where cutouts are1.required in carpet.Carpet type, color, and dye lot.2.Locations where dye lot changes occur.3.Seam locations, types, and methods.4.Type of subfloor.5.Type of installation.6.Pattern type, repeat size, location, direction, and starting point.7.Pile direction.8.Type, color, and location of insets and borders.9.Type, color, and location of edge, transition, and other accessory strips.10.Transition details to other flooring materials.11.

Samples: For each of the following products and for each color and texture required. Label each SampleC.with manufacturer's name, material description, color, pattern, and designation indicated on Drawings andin schedules.

Carpet: 12-inch- square Sample.1.Exposed Edge, Transition, and Other Accessory Stripping: 12-inch-long Samples.2.Carpet Seam: 6-inch Sample.3.Mitered Carpet Border Seam: 12-inch- square Sample. Show carpet pattern alignment.4.

Product Schedule: For carpet. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.D.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.4Product Test Reports: For carpet, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.A.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.5Maintenance Data: For carpet to include in maintenance manuals. Include the following:A.

Methods for maintaining carpet, including cleaning and stain-removal products and procedures and1.manufacturer's recommended maintenance schedule.Precautions for cleaning materials and methods that could be detrimental to carpet.2.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.6Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packagedA.with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Carpet: Full-width rolls equal to 5 percent of amount installed for each type indicated, but not less1.than 10 sq. yd..

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.7Installer Qualifications: An experienced Installer who is certified by the International CertifiedA.Floorcovering Installers Association at the Commercial II certification level.


SHEET CARPETING 096816 - 1


Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticB.effects and set quality standards for fabrication and installation.

Build mockups at locations and in sizes shown on Drawings.1.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed2.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.8Comply with CRI 104.A.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.9Comply with CRI 104 for temperature, humidity, and ventilation limitations.A.Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install carpet until spaces are enclosed and weathertight, wetB.work in spaces is complete and dry, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained atoccupancy levels during the remainder of the construction period.Do not install carpet over concrete slabs until slabs have cured, are sufficiently dry to bond with adhesive,C.and have pH range recommended by carpet manufacturer.Where demountable partitions or other items are indicated for installation on top of carpet, install carpetD.before installing these items.

WARRANTY1.10Special Warranty for Carpet: Manufacturer agrees to repair or replace components of carpet installationA.that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Warranty does not include deterioration or failure of carpet due to unusual traffic, failure of1.substrate, vandalism, or abuse.Failures include, but are not limited to, more than 10 percent loss of face fiber, edge raveling,2.snags, runs, loss of tuft bind strength, excess static discharge, and delamination.Warranty Period: 10 years from date of Substantial Completion.3.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113.Flammability: Meet requirements of applicable building codes and fire codes.B.

WOVEN CARPET2.2Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, [provide the following] [provide one of the following]A.[available products that may be incorporated into the Work include, but are not limited to, the following]:

Bentley.1.Shaw.2.Lees.3.

Color: As scheduled.B.Pattern: As indicated.C.

INSTALLATION ACCESSORIES2.3Trowelable Leveling and Patching Compounds: Latex-modified, hydraulic-cement-based formulationA.provided or recommended by carpet manufacturer.Adhesives: Water-resistant, mildew-resistant, nonstaining type to suit products and subfloor conditionsB.indicated, that complies with flammability requirements for installed carpet and is recommended orprovided by carpet manufacturer.

Use adhesives that comply with the product requirements of the California Department of Health1.Services' "Standard Practice for the Testing of Volatile Organic Emissions from Various SourcesUsing Small-Scale Environmental Chambers."

Seam Adhesive: Hot-melt adhesive tape or similar product recommended by carpet manufacturer forC.sealing and taping seams and butting cut edges at backing to form secure seams and to prevent pile lossat seams.




EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.maximum moisture content, alkalinity range, installation tolerances, and other conditions affecting carpetperformance. Examine carpet for type, color, pattern, and potential defects.Concrete Subfloors: Verify that concrete slabs comply with ASTM F 710 and the following:B.

Slab substrates are dry and free of curing compounds, sealers, hardeners, and other materials that1.may interfere with adhesive bond. Determine adhesion and dryness characteristics by performingbond and moisture tests recommended by carpet manufacturer.Subfloor finishes comply with requirements specified in Section 033000 "Cast-in-Place Concrete"2.for slabs receiving carpet.Subfloors are free of cracks, ridges, depressions, scale, and foreign deposits.3.

Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.C.

PREPARATION3.2General: Comply with CRI 104, Section 7.3, "Site Conditions; Floor Preparation," and with carpetA.manufacturer's written installation instructions for preparing substrates.Use trowelable leveling and patching compounds, according to manufacturer's written instructions, to fillB.cracks, holes, depressions, and protrusions in substrates. Fill or level cracks, holes and depressions 1/8inch wide or wider, and protrusions more than 1/32 inch, unless more stringent requirements are requiredby manufacturer's written instructions.Remove coatings, including curing compounds, and other substances that are incompatible with adhesivesC.and that contain soap, wax, oil, or silicone, without using solvents. Use mechanical methodsrecommended in writing by carpet manufacturer.Broom and vacuum clean substrates to be covered immediately before installing carpet.D.

INSTALLATION3.3Comply with CRI 104 and carpet manufacturer's written installation instructions for the following:A.

Direct-Glue-Down Installation: Comply with CRI 104, Section 9, "Direct Glue-Down Installation."1.Comply with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations and Shop Drawings for seam locations andB.direction of carpet; maintain uniformity of carpet direction and lay of pile. At doorways, center seamsunder the door in closed position.Do not bridge building expansion joints with carpet.C.Cut and fit carpet to butt tightly to vertical surfaces, permanent fixtures, and built-in furniture includingD.cabinets, pipes, outlets, edgings, thresholds, and nosings. Bind or seal cut edges as recommended bycarpet manufacturer.Extend carpet into toe spaces, door reveals, closets, open-bottomed obstructions, removable flanges,E.alcoves, and similar openings.Maintain reference markers, holes, and openings that are in place or marked for future cutting by repeatingF.on finish flooring as marked on subfloor. Use nonpermanent, nonstaining marking device.Install pattern parallel to walls and borders to comply with CRI 104, Section 15, "Patterned CarpetG.Installations" and with carpet manufacturer's written recommendations.Comply with carpet cushion manufacturer's written recommendations.H.

CLEANING AND PROTECTING3.4Perform the following operations immediately after installing carpet:A.

Remove excess adhesive, seam sealer, and other surface blemishes using cleaner recommended1.by carpet manufacturer.Remove yarns that protrude from carpet surface.2.Vacuum carpet using commercial machine with face-beater element.3.

Protect installed carpet to comply with CRI 104, Section 16, "Protecting Indoor Installations."B.Protect carpet against damage from construction operations and placement of equipment and fixturesC.during the remainder of construction period. Use protection methods indicated or recommended in writingby carpet manufacturer .





SECTION 097200 - WALL COVERINGS

GENERALPART 1 -



Textile wall covering.1.



Include data on physical characteristics, durability, fade resistance, and fire-test-response1.characteristics.

Shop Drawings: Show location and extent of each wall-covering type. Indicate seams and terminationB.points.Samples for Verification: For each type of wall covering and for each color, pattern, texture, and finishC.specified, full width by 36-inch- long in size.

Wall-Covering Sample: From same production run to be used for the Work, with specified1.treatments applied. Show complete pattern repeat.

Product Schedule: For wall coverings. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.D.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Qualification Data: For testing agency.A.Product Test Reports: For each wall covering, for tests performed by a qualified testing agency.B.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.6Maintenance Data: For wall coverings to include in maintenance manuals.A.

MAINTENANCE MATERIAL SUBMITTALS1.7Furnish extra materials, from the same product run, that match products installed and that are packagedA.with protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.

Wall-Covering Materials: For each type, color, texture, and finish, full width by length to equal to 51.percent of amount installed.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.8Mockups: Build mockups to verify selections made under Sample submittals and to demonstrate aestheticA.effects and to set quality standards for installation.

Build mockups for each type of wall covering on each substrate required. Comply with requirements1.in ASTM F 1141 for appearance shading characteristics.Approval of mockups does not constitute approval of deviations from the Contract Documents2.contained in mockups unless Architect specifically approves such deviations in writing.Subject to compliance with requirements, approved mockups may become part of the completed3.Work if undisturbed at time of Substantial Completion.

FIELD CONDITIONS1.9Environmental Limitations: Do not deliver or install wall coverings until spaces are enclosed andA.weathertight, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and temporaryHVAC system is operating and maintaining ambient temperature and humidity conditions at levelsintended for occupants after Project completion during the remainder of the construction period.Lighting: Do not install wall covering until lighting that matches conditions intended for occupants afterB.Project completion is provided on the surfaces to receive wall covering.Ventilation: Provide continuous ventilation during installation and for not less than the time recommendedC.by wall-covering manufacturer for full drying or curing.


WALL COVERINGS 097200 - 1


PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: As determined by testing identical wall coverings applied withB.identical adhesives to substrates according to test method indicated below by a qualified testing agency.Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: Comply with ASTM E 84; testing by a qualified testing agency.1.Identify products with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.

Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less.a.Smoke-Developed Index: 50 or less.b.

Fire-Growth Contribution: No flashover and heat and smoke release according to NFPA 265.2.

TEXTILE WALL COVERING2.2As scheduled.A.

ACCESSORIES2.3Adhesive: Mildew-resistant, nonstaining, strippable adhesive, for use with specific wall covering andA.substrate application indicated and as recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.

Adhesive shall have a VOC content of 50 g/L or less.1.Primer/Sealer: Mildew resistant, complying with requirements in Section 099100 "Painting" andB.recommended in writing by primer/sealer and wall-covering manufacturers for intended substrate.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for levelness,A.wall plumbness, maximum moisture content, and other conditions affecting performance of the Work.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for surface preparation.A.Clean substrates of substances that could impair bond of wall covering, including dirt, oil, grease, mold,B.mildew, and incompatible primers.Prepare substrates to achieve a smooth, dry, clean, structurally sound surface free of flaking, unsoundC.coatings, cracks, and defects.

Moisture Content: Maximum of 5 percent on new plaster, concrete, and concrete masonry units1.when tested with an electronic moisture meter.Plaster: Allow new plaster to cure. Neutralize areas of high alkalinity. Prime with primer2.recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.Metals: If not factory primed, clean and apply primer recommended in writing by primer/sealer3.manufacturer and wall-covering manufacturer.Gypsum Board: Prime with primer as recommended in writing by primer/sealer manufacturer and4.wall-covering manufacturer.Painted Surfaces: Treat areas susceptible to pigment bleeding.5.

Check painted surfaces for pigment bleeding. Sand gloss, semigloss, and eggshell finish with fineD.sandpaper.Remove hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similarE.items.Acclimatize wall-covering materials by removing them from packaging in the installation areas not lessF.than 24 hours before installation.

WALL-COVERING INSTALLATION3.3Comply with wall-covering manufacturers' written installation instructions applicable to products andA.applications indicated.Cut wall-covering strips in roll number sequence. Change the roll numbers at partition breaks and corners.B.Install strips in same order as cut from roll.C.

For solid-color, even-texture, or random-match wall coverings, reverse every other strip.1.Install wall covering without lifted or curling edges and without visible shrinkage.D.




Match pattern 72 inches above the finish floor.E.Install seams vertical and plumb at least 6 inches from outside corners and 3 inches from inside cornersF.unless a change of pattern or color exists at corner. Horizontal seams are not permitted.Trim edges and seams for color uniformity, pattern match, and tight closure. Butt seams without overlapsG.or gaps between strips.Fully bond wall covering to substrate. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters, and other defects.H.

CLEANING3.4Remove excess adhesive at seams, perimeter edges, and adjacent surfaces.A.Use cleaning methods recommended in writing by wall-covering manufacturer.B.Replace strips that cannot be cleaned.C.Reinstall hardware and hardware accessories, electrical plates and covers, light fixture trims, and similarD.items.





SECTION 098116 - ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1This Section includes the following:A.

Concealed building insulation.1.


QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3Source Limitations: Obtain each type of building insulation through one source.A.Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Provide insulation and related materials with the fire-test-responseB.characteristics indicated, as determined by testing identical products per test method indicated below byUL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction. Identify materialswith appropriate markings of applicable testing and inspecting agency.

Surface-Burning Characteristics: ASTM E 84.1.Fire-Resistance Ratings: ASTM E 119.2.Combustion Characteristics: ASTM E 136.3.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.4Protect insulation materials from physical damage and from deterioration by moisture, soiling, and otherA.sources. Store inside and in a dry location. Comply with manufacturer's written instructions for handling,storing, and protecting during installation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113.


Glass-Fiber Insulation:1.CertainTeed Corporation.a.Johns Manville Corporation.b.Owens Corning.c.

Slag-Wool-/Rock-Wool-Fiber Insulation:2.Fibrex Insulations Inc.a.Owens Corning.b.Thermafiber.c.

INSULATING MATERIALS2.3General: Provide insulating materials that comply with requirements and with referenced standards.A.

Preformed Units: Sizes to fit applications indicated; selected from manufacturer's standard1.thicknesses, widths, and lengths.

Unfaced, Flexible Glass-Fiber Board Insulation (above ceilings): ASTM C 612, Type IA; ASTM C 553,B.Types I, II, and III; or ASTM C 665, Type I; with maximum flame-spread and smoke-developed indices of25 and 50, respectively; and of the following properties:

Nominal density of 1.0 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 3.7 deg F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.1.Nominal density of not less than 1.5 lb/cu. ft. nor more than 1.7 lb/cu. ft., thermal resistivity of 4 deg2.F x h x sq. ft./Btu x in. at 75 deg F.Combustion Characteristics: Passes ASTM E 136.3.


ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION 098116 - 1


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements for Sections inA.which substrates and related work are specified and other conditions affecting performance.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Clean substrates of substances harmful to insulations or vapor retarders, including removing projectionsA.capable of puncturing vapor retarders or of interfering with insulation attachment.

INSTALLATION, GENERAL3.3Comply with insulation manufacturer's written instructions applicable to products and application indicated.A.Install insulation that is undamaged, dry, and unsoiled and that has not been left exposed at any time toB.ice and snow.Extend insulation in thickness indicated to envelop entire area to be insulated. Cut and fit tightly aroundC.obstructions and fill voids with insulation. Remove projections that interfere with placement.Water-Piping Coordination: If water piping is located on inside of insulated exterior walls, coordinateD.location of piping to ensure that it is placed on warm side of insulation and insulation encapsulates piping.Apply single layer of insulation to produce thickness indicated, unless multiple layers are otherwise shownE.or required to make up total thickness.

INSTALLATION OF GENERAL BUILDING INSULATION3.4Install mineral-fiber blankets in cavities formed by framing members according to the followingA.requirements:

Use blanket widths and lengths that fill the cavities formed by framing members. If more than one1.length is required to fill cavity, provide lengths that will produce a snug fit between ends.Place blankets in cavities formed by framing members to produce a friction fit between edges of2.insulation and adjoining framing members.For metal-framed wall cavities where cavity heights exceed 96 inches, support unfaced blankets3.mechanically and support faced blankets by taping stapling flanges to flanges of metal studs.

PROTECTION3.5Protect installed insulation and vapor retarders from damage due to harmful weather exposures, physicalA.abuse, and other causes. Provide temporary coverings or enclosures where insulation is subject to abuseand cannot be concealed and protected by permanent construction immediately after installation.



ACOUSTICAL BLANKET INSULATION 098116 - 2


SECTION 099100 - PAINTING

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1Related Documents: General and Supplementary Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 GeneralA.Requirements, and Drawings are applicable to this Section.Section Includes:B.

Complete surface preparation and finishing for field application of coatings and requirements for1.field finishing mechanical and electrical equipment.Examine specifications for various other trades and their provisions regarding their painting.2.Surfaces that are left unfinished by other sections of the specifications shall be painted or finishedas a part of this Section.Colors, including deep tones, will be selected by the Architect. Number of colors to be used on job3.will be determined by Architect.

SURFACES NOT TO RECEIVE FIELD FINISHING1.2Do not paint copper, bronze, chrome plated items, nickel, stainless steel, Monel metal, lead, face brick,A.prefinished wall, ceiling, and floor coverings, items with factory applied final finish (except where exposedon roofs and in finished spaces), elevator shafts, crawl spaces, chases, and plenums above suspendedceilings unless otherwise specified or scheduled.

DEFINITIONS1.3Conform to ASTM D16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section.A.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Product Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing quality paint and finish products with 3A.years' experience.Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting and finishing with 2 years' experience.B.Product Labels: Include manufacturer's name, type of paint, stock number, color and label analysis onC.label of containers.

REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS1.5Conform to applicable building code for flame spread/fuel contribution/smoke development ratingA.requirements for finishes.Comply with applicable city, county, state, and federal requirements and ordinances regarding maximumB.VOC (Volatile Organic Compound) content of all coatings.

TESTS1.6Provide periodic testing with Wet Film Thickness gage to verify that proper thickness of finish coatings areA.being applied.

SUBMITTALS1.7Provide product data describing physical performance criteria and composition on all finishing products.A.Submit 2 samples, 12 by 12 inches in size illustrating range of colors and textures selected for eachB.surface finishing product scheduled.Submit certification from manufacturer of coatings listing all products proposed for each. Certify that eachC.product meets current applicable regulations and ordinances regarding maximum VOC content.

FIELD SAMPLES1.8Provide field sample panel, 96 inches long by 96 inches wide, illustrating each coating color, texture, andA.finish intended for use.Locate where directed.B.Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work.C.

DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING1.9Deliver, store, and protect products under provisions of Division 01 section “Product Requirements”A.Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance.B.


PAINTING 099100 - 1


Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, brand code, coverage,C.surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing.Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F,D.in well-ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion.E.

ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS1.10Do not apply materials when surface and ambient temperatures are outside the ranges required by paintA.manufacturer.Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures aboveB.45 degrees F for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, unless requiredotherwise by manufacturer's instructions.Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 75 percent, unlessC.required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.Minimum Application Temperatures for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees F for exterior;D.unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.Minimum Application Temperature for Varnish and Finishes: 65 degrees F for interior or exterior, unlessE.required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions.Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid- height at substrate surface.F.

EXTRA STOCK1.11Provide a 5 gallon container of each color to Owner.A.Label each container with color, color number, texture, and room locations, in addition to theB.manufacturer's label.Furnish under provisions of Section 017800.C.

SCAFFOLDS AND PROTECTION1.12Provide adequate safe ladders, scaffolds, and stages necessary to complete work.A.Protect completed finish and paint work, and protect adjacent finish surfaces from paint splatter, spills andB.stains. Use adequate drop cloths and masking procedures during progress of work.

PRECAUTIONS1.13Do not store paints, oils, thinners and other flammable items inside the building and shall be stored inA.approved containers when not in actual use during the painting job. The fire hazard shall be kept at aminimum.Precaution shall be taken to protect the public and construction workers during the progress of the work.B.Furnish a temporary fire extinguisher of suitable chemicals and capacity, located near flammableC.materials.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURERS2.1Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements indicated, provide products of one ofA.the following:

Sherwin-Williams.1.P.P.G. Industries.2.Benjamin Moore.3.

Materials selected for coating systems for each type surface shall be product of a single manufacturerB.unless otherwise specified. Secondary products such as linseed oil, turpentine and shellacs shall be firstquality products of a reputable manufacturer.Products specified in Schedule are those of Glidden Professional as a standard of quality unless otherwiseC.noted.

MATERIALS2.2VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113 "Sustainable Design Requirements."Coatings: Ready mixed. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily andB.uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating with good flow and brushing properties; capable of dryingor curing free of streaks or sags.Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specificallyC.indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality.


PAINTING 099100 - 2


Patching Materials: Latex filler.D.

FINISHES2.3Color and Sheen: As scheduled.A.

INTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE2.4Drywall (Gypsum):A.

Acrylic Latex:1.Glidden: 1 coat Glidden Professional PVA Wall 1030 primer, 2 coats Glidden Professionala.Ultra-Hide 250Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat High Build Latex Primer B28W8601, 2 coats Sherwin-Williamsb.ProMar 200 Zero VOC.

Shop Primed Ferrous Metal:B.High Performance Coating, Water-Based Acrylic:1.

Glidden: Eggshell: 2 topcoats Devoe Coatings DEVFLEX High Performance WB Acrylica.4212 over prepared substrate.2 topcoats Sherwin-Williams Zero VOC Acrylic Eg-Shel B66-660 Series.b.

Handrails, Stairs, and Guardrails:C.High Performance Coating, Epoxy:1.

Glidden: 1 coat Devoe Coatings TRU GLAZE WB Epoxy 4030 Primer, 2 coats Devoea.Coatings TRU GLAZE Chemical Resistant Epoxy topcoat.

EXTERIOR PAINT SCHEDULE2.5Shop Primed Metal Doors, Trim, Panels and Miscellaneous Surfaces:A.

High Performance Coating, Urethane: (rust inhibitive, UV stable)1.Glidden: Gloss: 1 coat Devoe Coatings DEVRAN Universal Epoxy 201H primer, 2 coatsa.Devoe Coatings DEVTHANE Aliphatic Urethane Enamel 379.Sherwin-Williams: 1 coat Recoatable Epoxy Primer B67A5, 2 coats Acrolon 218 HSb.Polyurethane B65W611.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Verify that surfaces and substrate conditions are ready to receive work as instructed by the productA.manufacturer.Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report to Architect anyB.condition that may potentially affect proper application.Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unlessC.moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums

Plaster and Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent.1.Masonry, Concrete, and Concrete Unit Masonry: 12 percent.2.Interior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.3.Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016.4.Concrete Floors: 8 percent.5.

Test shop applied primers for compatibility with subsequent cover materials.D.Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate.E.

PREPARATION3.2Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or finishing.A.Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. Remove existing coatingsB.which exhibit loose surface defects.Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes.C.Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri-sodium phosphate and bleach.D.Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry.Aluminum Surfaces Scheduled for Paint Finish: Remove surface contamination by steam or high pressureE.water. Remove oxidation with acid etch and solvent washing. Apply etching primer immediately followingcleaning.Insulated Coverings: Remove dirt, grease, and oil from canvas and cotton.F.Concrete Floors: Remove contamination, acid etch, and rinse floors with clear water. Verify required acid-G.alkali balance is achieved. Allow to dry.Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair.H.


PAINTING 099100 - 3


Galvanized Surfaces: Remove surface contamination and oils and wash with solvent. Apply coat of etchingI.primer.Concrete and Unit Masonry Surfaces Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Remove dirt, loose mortar, scale,J.salt or alkali powder, and other foreign matter. Remove oil and grease with a solution of tri-sodiumphosphate; rinse well and allow to dry. Remove stains caused by weathering of corroding metals with asolution of sodium metasilicate after thoroughly wetting with water. Allow to dry.Plaster Surfaces: Fill hairline cracks, small holes, and imperfections with latex patching plaster. MakeK.smooth and flush with adjacent surfaces. Wash and neutralize high alkali surfaces.Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Remove grease, scale, dirt, and rust. Where heavy coatings of scaleL.are evident, remove by wire brushing or sandblasting; clean by washing with solvent. Apply a treatment ofphosphoric acid solution, ensuring weld joints, bolts, and nuts are similarly cleaned. Spot prime paint afterrepairs.Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Sand and scrape to remove loose primer and rust. Feather edges to makeM.touch-up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces with solvent. Prime bare steel surfaces.Aluminum with Alodine Finish: Clean by lightly scuff with sandpaper. Remove all dust.N.Interior Wood Items Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots,O.pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sandbetween coats.Interior Wood Items Schedule to Receive Transparent Finish: Wipe off dust and grit prior to sealing, sealP.knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after sealer has dried; sandlightly between coats.Exterior Wood Scheduled to receive Paint Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter. Seal knots, pitchQ.streaks, and sappy sections. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compound after prime coat hasbeen applied.Exterior Wood Scheduled to Receive Transparent Finish: Remove dust, grit, and foreign matter; sealR.knots, pitch streaks, and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes with tinted exterior caulking compoundafter sealer has been applied.Shop Finished Items: Finish in accordance with AWI standards and guide lines.S.Glue-Laminated Beams: Prior to finishing, wash surfaces with solvent, remove grease and dirt.T.Wood and Metal Doors Scheduled for Painting: Seal top and bottom edges with primer.U.

SURFACE PREPARATION OF PREVIOUSLY COATED SURFACES3.3General:A.

Remove cracked and deteriorated sealants and calking.1.Remove chalk deposits and loose, blistered, peeling, scaling, or crazed finish to bare base material2.or sound substrate by scraping and sanding.Wash surfaces with solution of TSP to remove wax, oil, grease, and other foreign material; rinse,3.and allow to dry. Exercise caution that TSP solution does not soften existing coating.Abrade glossy surfaces by sanding or wiping with liquid de-glosser.4.Remove mildew as specified above.5.Test compatibility of existing coatings by applying new coating to small, inconspicuous area. If new6.coatings lift or blister existing coatings, request recommendation from Architect.Apply specified primer to surfaces scheduled to receive coatings.7.

Gypsum Wallboard:B.Fill cracks and voids with spackling compound.1.Apply primer over bare surfaces and newly applied texture coatings.2.

Metal:C.Remove rust from surfaces to bare metal in accordance with SP3 "Power Tool Cleaning".1.Exercise care not to remove galvanizing.2.Complete preparation as specified for new work.3.

Wood:D.Fill cracks, crevices and nail holes with putty or wood filler.1.Apply primer over bare surfaces and filler material.2.

PROTECTION3.4Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration.A.Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section.B.Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring otherC.surfaces.Remove empty paint containers from site.D.


PAINTING 099100 - 4


APPLICATION3.5The intent of these Specifications is to produce the highest quality appearance of paint and finish surfaces.A.Employ skilled mechanics only. The proper preparation of all surfaces will be strictly enforced andwherever finished surfaces show any defects due to improper preparation, workmanship, etc., the defectsshall be removed and the work refinished at the expense of the Contractor.Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Final finish coats shall have visualB.evidence of solid hiding and uniform appearance, and shall be free and smooth of brush marks, streaks,sags, runs, laps, or skipped areas.Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry.C.Apply each coat to uniform finish and thickness.D.Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved.E.Sand lightly between coats on wood and metal items to achieve required finish.F.Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied.G.Where clear finishes are required, tint fillers to match wood. Work fillers into the grain before set. WipeH.excess from surface.Prime back surfaces of interior and exterior woodwork scheduled to be painted with primer paint.I.Prime back surfaces of interior woodwork scheduled to receive stain or varnish finish with gloss varnishJ.reduced 25 percent with mineral spirits.Edges of paint adjoining other materials or colors shall be sharp and clean with no overlapping.K.

FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT3.6Paint all shop primed equipment. Paint shop prefinished items where exposed to view in finished spaces.A.In mechanical rooms, repair shop pre-finished coatings which have been scratched or otherwise damagedwith identical touch-up paint. Sand prior to touching up as required.Remove unfinished louvers, grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical componentsB.and paint separately.Paint all grilles, registers, diffusers, and speaker grilles to match adjacent wall and ceiling surfaces, exceptC.that factory pre-finished items need not be painted if installed in a suspended acoustical ceiling systemwhere the acoustical panels match the mechanical or electrical item color.In all finished spaces, prime and paint exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, ducts, hangers, brackets, collarsD.and supports. Paint to match adjacent surfaces.Repair or replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally.E.Paint interior surfaces of air ducts and convectors that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coatF.of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector tomatch face panels.Paint all surfaces of plywood backboards for electrical and telephone equipment before installingG.equipment.Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing.H.Paint exposed air handlers, roof ventilators, goose necks, exhaust fans and other items on the roof with 2I.coats exterior enamel. Prepare surfaces in accordance with the base metal or primer as specified herein.Paint concrete support bases with gray floor deck enamel.J.Pipe hangers and other supports need not be painted except where installed in crawl spaces, where theyK.shall be painted with a thick coat of asphaltic paint.

CLEANING/TOUCH-UP3.7As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered.A.During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplusB.materials, and debris.Collect cotton waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metalC.containers and remove daily from site.Spot painting will be allowed to correct soiled or damaged paint surfaces only when touch-up spot willD.blend into surrounding finish and is invisible to normal viewing (as determined by the Architect). Otherwise,re-coat entire section to corners or to a visible stopping point.

V.O.C. (VOLATILE ORGANIC COMPOUND) COMPLIANCE3.8Products listed in following schedule and/or substitutes proposed for use by Contractor must be formulatedA.to meet all applicable ordinances and regulations regarding maximum V.O.C. content. Utilize productswhich have been specially formulated to meet such requirements.


PAINTING 099100 - 5




PAINTING 099100 - 6



ARCHITECTURAL FINISH FILMS 099410 - 1

SECTION 099410 - ARCHITECTURAL FINISH FILMS

PART 1 - GENERAL

1.1 SECTION INCLUDES

A. 3M™ DI-NOC™ architectural Finish film.

1.2 SUBMITTALS

A. Manufacturer's Product Data for specified products.

B. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components, including dimensions, anchorage, and accessories.

C. Samples: 4 inch by 4 inch Samples of specified color and pattern for verification.

D. Submit operation and maintenance data for installed products, including precautions against harmful cleaning materials and methods.

1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE

A. Obtain all products in this section from a single supplier.

B. Installer: Installation shall be performed by a trained and qualified installer, specialized and experienced in work required for this project. A list of 3M Endorsed installers is available at 3M.com/AMD or 3M Commercial Solutions, 1-888-650-3497.

1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING

A. Deliver products in manufacturer's original, unopened, undamaged containers with identification labels intact.

B. Store products protected from weather, temperature, and other harmful conditions as recommended by supplier.

C. Product must remain in original plastic bag and boxes and have storage conditions as follows: 1. 40 °F – 90 °F (4 °C – 32 °C) 2. Out of direct sunlight 3. Clean dry area 4. Original container 5. Do not stack boxes over six (6) units high. Excessive weight can damage the film 6. Relative humidity below 80 percent 7. Handle products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 8. Total pre-installation shelf life: 2 years. Up to 2 years unprocessed, OR process within 1 year and apply

within 1 year of processing.

1.5 PROJECT/SITE CONDITIONS

A. Confirm appropriate substrate is suitable for mounting of architectural finish components prior to start of installation.

B. Apply materials when environmental conditions are continuously heated. Application temperature range is 60 °F - 100 °F (16 °C - 38 °C).

C. Environmental Limitations: Do not install until spaces are enclosed and weatherproof, wet work in spaces is complete and dry, work above ceilings is complete, and ambient temperature and humidity conditions are maintained at the levels indicated for Project when occupied for its intended use.

1.6 WARRANTY

A. Manufacturer's Warranty: Submit manufacturer's standard warranty document by authorized manufacturer.

B. Standard Product Warranty: See the 3M™ DI-NOC™ Technical Data Sheet.

1.7 EXTRA MATERIALS

A. Furnish 2 percent extra material at time of installation. Deliver in protective packaging for storage and label contents appropriately.

Architectural Finish Films 09-9425 - 2 issue date Company Name, Proj. No. XXXXX


PART 2 - PRODUCTS

2.1 MANUFACTURER

A. 3M Company - Commercial Solutions Division, 3M Center, Building 0220-12-E-04 St. Paul, MN 55144-1000, USA, 1-888-650-3497.

B. Material Standard: Design based upon 3M™ DI-NOC™ Architectural Finishes with pressure-sensitive adhesive and air release channels depending on individual part number specified.

C. Design Standard: based upon DI-NOC™ Architectural Finishes material.

2.2 MATERIAL PROPERTIES

A. General: Wood grain appearance and texture graphic film field applied application.

B. Film: Vinyl 8 mil (200 microns) thickness (thickness includes film and adhesive, excludes liner).

C. Liner: Silicone-coated poly paper, 6.2 mils (157 microns).

D. Adhesive: Pressure-sensitive with air release channels, recommended by manufacturer.

E. Fire-Test-Response Characteristics: Most patterns of 3M™ DI-NOC™ finishes have the following fire-test- response characteristics as determined by testing Products applied to substrates per test method indicated below by UL or another testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

1. Surface-Burning Characteristics: As follows, per ASTM E84: a. Flame-Spread Index: 25 or less. b. Smoke-Developed Index: 450 or less.

F. Abrasion Resistance Taber® Abraser Abrasion wheel

1. CS-17 Abrasion Wheel: 1kg loading weight, 7,000 cycles with no wear-through of surface finish.

G. Chemical and stain resistance: Contaminant was in contact with the film surface for 24 hours and then removed using water or mild detergent. Results may vary. The following contaminants were tested: Coffee, Tea, Cola, Milk, Red Wine, Ketchup, Soy Sauce, Cooking Oil, Vinegar, Mustard, Crayon, Shoe Polish (a little stain remained), Betadine Iodine, Soap Solution (1%), Ammonia solution (10%), Citrate solution (10%), Ethyl Alcohol (50%).

H. Application: As indicated on architectural drawings.

PART 3 - EXECUTION

3.1 EXAMINATION

A. Examine substrate(s) for compliance with requirements for non-porous, smooth surface and other conditions affecting the performance of work in this section. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

B. Reference 3M™ DI-NOC™ Technical Data Sheet and 3M™ DI-NOC™ Installation Guide to determine compatibility of finish to substrate.

C. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.

D. Responsibility for state of surfaces prior to installation to be pre-determined by installation specialist.

E. Scheduling of installation by Owner or its representative implies that substrate and conditions are prepared and ready for product installation per the recommendations of the installation specialist.

F. Proceeding with installation implies installer’s acceptance of substrate and conditions.

3.2 SURFACE PREPARATION

A. Comply with all manufacturers’ instructions for surface preparation. Consider these factors in determining the suitability of the Product:

1. Substrate texture affects Product adhesion and application ease. a. Unless the substrate is very smooth, its texture may be visible through Product. b. Compounds used to smooth a textured substrate permanently change that substrate. c. Product removal may damage the substrate or its finish.



ARCHITECTURAL FINISH FILMS 099410 - 3

2. Application surface conditions affect Product adhesion. a. Ensure that the existing paint, surface finish, or wall covering has excellent bond to the substrate

area where Product will be applied. b. Repair, prime and paint the substrate, as needed. c. An adhesion promoter may be required to increase Product adhesion.

3. Human and environmental conditions affect Product. a. Temperature and humidity in recommended range. b. Direct UV light (sunlight). c. Heating or cooling ducts in close proximity. d. Unsealed substrates in front of water sources. e. People or equipment that will be in contact with the Product.

4. The Product may contain a splice. The location of the splices is marked with a tab along the edge of the Product. The installer will need to determine the impact of the splice and work around it to make the best use of the material layout.

B. Test and prepare application surfaces per instructions in the 3M™ DI-NOC™ Installation Guide. 1. Use the 3M™ Wall Adhesion Test to determine the compatibility of the application surface with the Product. 2. Use the 3M™ Enhanced Cleaning Method to ensure that the application surface is ready to receive and

hold the Product.

C. Repair damaged application surfaces per instructions in the 3M™ DI-NOC™ Installation Guide

D. Re-clean application surfaces with a lint-free cloth and 70/30 IPA cleaning solution, or use the 3M™ Enhanced Cleaning Method in the 3M™ DI-NOC™ Installation Guide.

3.3 APPLICATION

A. Refer to the 3M™ DI-NOC™ Installation Guide for specific application instructions.

B. Application must be performed by a qualified installer. Refer to 3M.com/AMD for a list of 3M-endorsed installers.

C. Do not proceed with installation until all finishing work has been completed in and around the work area.

D. Measure the application surface and cut film to size with a minimum ½ in. extra on all sides for trimming.

E. Install substrates with no gaps, wire seams, or overlaps. Form smooth, wrinkle-free, bubble-free surface for finished installation.

F. No exposed joints on corners or other “open” type joints permitted.

G. Verify pattern prior to material acquisition as some part numbers do not allow three-dimensional forming.

H. Comply with manufacturer’s installation instructions applicable to products and applications indicated, except where more stringent requirements apply.

I. Apply 3M™ DI-NOC™ over properly prepared substrates.

J. Remove air bubbles, wrinkles, and blisters. Use approved procedures to prevent the formation of air bubbles, wrinkles, blisters and other defects.

3.4 CLEANING AND PROTECTION

A. Use cleaning methods recommended by architectural surfacing manufacturer for applicable environment.

B. Protect completed graphic film during remainder of construction period.

C. Consult with authorized installation specialist for project specifics.

END OF SECTION


SECTION 101400 - SIGNAGE

GENERALPART 1 -

SUMMARY1.1Related Documents: Provisions established in Conditions of the Contract, Division 01 - GeneralA.Requirements, and the Drawings are collectively applicable to this Section.Section IncludesB.

Identifying devices where shown on the Drawings complete and as specified including the1.following:

Parking signs indicating accessible spaces.a.Directional and traffic signs.b.Pin mounted building identification signs.c.Interior code required signs.d.

Coordination for installation of signage provided by others.2.

SUBMITTALS1.2Product Data: Include manufacturer's construction details relative to materials, dimensions of individualA.components, profiles, and finishes for each type of sign required.Shop Drawings: Provide shop drawings for fabrication and erection of signs. Include plans, elevations, andB.large-scale sections of typical members and other components. Show anchors, accessories, layout, andinstallation details.Samples for Verification:C.

Physical: Submit samples of one competed sign for review and approval. Approved sample may be1.incorporated into Project.Color: Submit manufacturer's standard color selection chart. Do not proceed until colors have been2.selected.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.3Single-Source Responsibility: For each separate type of sign required, obtain signs from one source fromA.a single manufacturer.Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years' experience in the manufacturing of signs specified.B.Codes and Standards:C.

Panel signs shall have 1/32-inch raised copy and grade 2 Braille, and shall comply with all existing1.federal, state, and local accessibility standards.Code and Standards: Comply with American with Disabilities Act of 1990, Title 3 Provisions, Public2.Accommodations and Commercial Facilities. Updated March 15, 2012.Comply with the State of Texas Accessibility Standards, 2012 edition, as administered by the Texas3.Department of Licensing and Regulation.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PRODUCTS, GENERAL2.1VOC Limits: any adhesives, sealants, paints, or coatings shall meet the VOC limits indicated in SectionA.018113.

MANUFACTURERS2.2Acceptable Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements herein, provide products from one ofA.the following:

Best Manufacturing Company, Montrose, Colorado.1.Mohawk Sign Systems, Schenectady, New York.2.Nelson-Harkins, Chicago, Illinois.3.ASI Signs, Dallas, Texas.4.

Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 012500.B.

HANDICAPPED PARKING2.3Screen Printed Signs:A.

18 gauge bonderized steel with blue baked enamel finish and white screen printed copy.1.Copy and Size:2.

"Handicapped Parking Only" - 12 inches by 18 inches.a.Delivery Pavilion, El Monte, Ca.Ware Malcomb PN IRV15-0103-00

SIGNAGE 101400 - 1


"Van Accessible" - 12 inches by 6 inches.b.Acceptable Product: Best Traffic Signs No. SS04 with SS52 as required.3.

Post: Galvanized pipe column minimum 9 feet long.B.

DIRECTIONAL SIGNS2.4Screen Printed Signs:A.

Extruded aluminum panels with anodic finish and white screen printed copy.1.Size and Configuration: As indicated on Drawings.2.Copy: As indicated on Drawings.3.Acceptable Product: Best Post and Plank as detailed on Drawings.4.

BUILDING IDENTIFICATION SIGNAGE2.5Acceptable Manufacturers:A.

ASI Sign Systems, 3890 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 102, Dallas, TX 75220; (214) 352 91401.telephone; (214) 352 9741 facsimile; (800) ASI-SPEC (274-7446).Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 01600.2.

Acceptable Product: ASI Series LC Cast Metal Dimensional Letters.B.Material:C.

Cast Aluminum in Satin Anodized finish.1.Fabricated Letters:D.

Letter Style: Refer to Drawings.1.Letter Cap Height: Refer to Drawings.2.Letter Depth: 1 inch.3.

Mounting Method: Projected Mount.E.

ROOM SIGNAGE SYSTEMS2.6Acceptable Manufacturers:A.

ASI Sign Systems, 3890 W. Northwest Highway, Suite 102, Dallas, TX 75220; (214) 352 91401.telephone; (214) 352 9741 facsimile; (800) ASI-SPEC (274-7446).Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 016000.2.

Acceptable Product: ASI Unframed SP Series Signs with requirements indicated for materials, thickness,B.finish colors, designs, shapes, sizes and details.Sign Face: Clear acrylic, 0.080 inch thick, matte first surface.C.

Adhesive: Pressure sensitive adhesive film, second surface.1.Tactile Graphics and Text:D.

Fabrication: Provide tactile copy and grade 2 Braille raised 1/32 inch minimum from plaque first1.surface by manufacturer's stratification process as follows:

ASI Intouch™, photo-mechanical method.a.Provide lettering and graphics precisely formed, uniformly opaque to comply with relevant ADA2.regulations and requirements indicated for size, style, spacing, content, position, and colors.

Non-Tactile Graphics and Text:E.Fabrication options:1.

Series SPE/SPJ: Non-tactile graphic plaque, no back plate.a.Text or graphic technique:2.

Screen process using subsurface method.a.Provide lettering and graphics precisely formed, uniformly opaque, and consistent in size, style,3.spacing, content, position, and colors.

Overall panel size: Refer to Drawings.F.Panel colors: As selected by Architect.G.Text or graphic colors: As selected by Architect.H.Letter styles, colors, letter sizes and layout position: As selected by Architect.I.Installation Method: System SA, silicone adhesiveJ.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

DELIVERY AND STORAGE3.1Deliver and store identifying devices in protective wrappings until ready for installation. Install letters inA.protective wrappings and remove wrappings just prior to substantial completion.


SIGNAGE 101400 - 2


INSTALLATION3.2Install signs plumb, level and square and in proper planes with other work, at heights required byA.accessibility codes and standards.Anchor each plastic laminate sign with adhesive.B.Install signs with sufficient amount of foam tape for proper installation.C.Attach as recommended by sign manufacturer.D.Anchor each sign with adhesive.E.Coordinate arrival and installation of graphic signs with hardware installation. Graphic signs function asF.and are coordinated with the hardware as shown on the Drawings.Room name signs shall be placed on the public side of the door except where noted otherwise.G.Single Door Sign: Provide one sign as specified above, mounted to wall adjacent to door on knob side.H.Pair of Doors: Provide one sign as specified above, mounted to adjacent wall closest to active leaf of door.I.Do not install sign where it will be obstructed by door when door is in the 'open' position.Attachment: Mounting to surfaces shall be done by pressure sensitive frame double-faced tape. SignsJ.shall be delivered to the project site with the tape in place and trimmed on each sign, but with theprotective paper layer not removed. Paper layer shall be removed just prior to installation of signs.

EXTERIOR INSTALLATION - PARKING AND DIRECTIONAL SIGNS3.3Mount posts in 12 inch round by 2'-6" deep concrete footing.A.Handicapped Signs: Mount signs at height to comply with accessibility codes.B.

COORDINATION3.4Coordinate the installation of the identifying devices with the hardware manufacturer for lockset and knobA.leave outs as detailed and scheduled.

DAMAGE3.5Any identifying device which is scratched or defaced will be rejected.A.

CLEANING3.6Remove protective materials and clean all signs. Clean surfaces with plain water or water with soap orA.household detergent.



SIGNAGE 101400 - 3


SECTION 104413 - FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS

GENERALPART 1 -



Fire-protection cabinets for the following:1.Portable fire extinguishers.a.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For each type of product. Show door hardware, cabinet type, trim style, and panel style.A.Include roughing-in dimensions and details showing recessed-, semirecessed-, or surface-mountingmethod and relationships of box and trim to surrounding construction.Shop Drawings: For fire-protection cabinets. Include plans, elevations, sections, details, and attachmentsB.to other work.Samples for Verification: For each type of exposed finish required, prepared on Samples 6 by 6 inchesC.square.

COORDINATION1.4Coordinate size of fire-protection cabinets to ensure that type and capacity of fire extinguishers indicatedA.are accommodated.Coordinate sizes and locations of fire-protection cabinets with wall depths.B.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1Fire-Rated Fire-Protection Cabinets: Listed and labeled to comply with requirements in ASTM E 814 forA.fire-resistance rating of walls where they are installed.Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in NFPA 70, by aB.qualified testing agency, and marked for intended location and application.

FIRE-PROTECTION CABINET2.2Cabinet Type: Suitable for fire extinguisher.A.

Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the following:1.JL Industries, Inc.; a division of the Activar Construction Products Group.a.Kidde Residential and Commercial Division, Subsidiary of Kidde plc.b.Larsens Manufacturing Company.c.Potter Roemer LLC.d.

Cabinet Construction: Non-rated in non-rated walls; 1or 2 hour fire rated in rated walls to match rating ofB.wall.

Fire-Rated Cabinets: Construct fire-rated cabinets with double walls fabricated from 0.043-inch-1.thick cold-rolled steel sheet lined with minimum 5/8-inch- thick fire-barrier material. Providefactory-drilled mounting holes.

Cabinet Material: Cold-rolled steel sheet.C.Shelf: Same metal and finish as cabinet.1.

Semirecessed Cabinet: One-piece combination trim and perimeter door frame overlapping surroundingD.wall surface with exposed trim face and wall return at outer edge (backbend).

Rolled-Edge Trim: 2-1/2-inch backbend depth.1.Cabinet Trim Material: Same material and finish as door.E.Door Material: Steel sheet.F.Door Style: Vertical duo panel with frame.G.Door Glazing: Tempered float glass (clear).H.Door Hardware: Manufacturer's standard door-operating hardware of proper type for cabinet type, trimI.style, and door material and style indicated.

Provide continuous hinge, of same material and finish as trim, permitting door to open 180 degrees.1.Accessories:J.


FIRE PROTECTION CABINETS 104413 - 1






Mounting Bracket: Manufacturer's standard steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to1.fire-protection cabinet, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, withplated or baked-enamel finish.Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing,2.and location. Locate as directed by Architect.

Identify fire extinguisher in fire-protection cabinet with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER."a.Location: Applied to cabinet door.1)Application Process: Silk-screened.2)Lettering Color: Black.3)Orientation: Vertical.4)

In addition to providing cabinet identification, provide triangular signage above eachb.extinguisher identifying the device from both sides.

Materials:K.Cold-Rolled Steel: ASTM A 1008/A 1008M, Commercial Steel (CS), Type B.1.

Finish: Baked enamel or powder coat.a.Color: As selected by Architect from full range of industry colors and color densities.b.

Tempered Float Glass: ASTM C 1048, Kind FT, Condition A, Type I, Quality q3, 3 mm thick, Class2.1 (clear).

FABRICATION2.3Fire-Protection Cabinets: Provide manufacturer's standard box (tub) with trim, frame, door, and hardwareA.to suit cabinet type, trim style, and door style indicated.

Weld joints and grind smooth.1.Provide factory-drilled mounting holes.2.Prepare doors and frames to receive locks.3.Install door locks at factory.4.

Cabinet Doors: Fabricate doors according to manufacturer's standards, from materials indicated andB.coordinated with cabinet types and trim styles.

Fabricate door frames with tubular stiles and rails and hollow-metal design, minimum 1/2 inch thick.1.Miter and weld perimeter door frames.2.

Cabinet Trim: Fabricate cabinet trim in one piece with corners mitered, welded, and ground smooth.C.

GENERAL FINISH REQUIREMENTS2.4Comply with NAAMM's AMP 500, "Metal Finishes Manual for Architectural and Metal Products," forA.recommendations for applying and designating finishes.Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces of fire-protection cabinets from damage by applying aB.strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.Finish fire-protection cabinets after assembly.C.Appearance of Finished Work: Noticeable variations in same piece are not acceptable. Variations inD.appearance of adjoining components are acceptable if they are within the range of approved Samples andare assembled or installed to minimize contrast.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine roughing-in for cabinets to verify actual locations of piping connections before cabinet installation.A.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Prepare recesses for fire-protection cabinets as required by type and size of cabinet and trim style.A.

INSTALLATION3.3General: Install fire-protection cabinets in locations and at mounting heights indicated or, if not indicated, atA.heights acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.Fire-Protection Cabinets: Fasten cabinets to structure, square and plumb.B.

Unless otherwise indicated, provide recessed fire-protection cabinets. If wall thickness is1.inadequate for recessed cabinets, provide semirecessed fire-protection cabinets.Provide inside latch and lock for break-glass panels.2.Fasten mounting brackets to inside surface of fire-protection cabinets, square and plumb.3.Fire-Rated Cabinets:4.




Install cabinet with not more than 1/16-inch tolerance between pipe OD and knockout OD.a.Center pipe within knockout.Seal through penetrations with firestopping sealant as specified in Section 078413b."Penetration Firestopping."

ADJUSTING AND CLEANING3.4Remove temporary protective coverings and strippable films, if any, as fire-protection cabinets are installedA.unless otherwise indicated in manufacturer's written installation instructions.Adjust fire-protection cabinet doors to operate easily without binding. Verify that integral locking devicesB.operate properly.On completion of fire-protection cabinet installation, clean interior and exterior surfaces as recommendedC.by manufacturer.Touch up marred finishes, or replace fire-protection cabinets that cannot be restored to factory-finishedD.appearance. Use only materials and procedures recommended or furnished by fire-protection cabinet andmounting bracket manufacturers.Replace fire-protection cabinets that have been damaged or have deteriorated beyond successful repairE.by finish touchup or similar minor repair procedures.





SECTION 104416 - FIRE EXTINGUISHERS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section includes portable, hand-carried fire extinguishers and mounting brackets for fire extinguishers.A.


Review methods and procedures related to fire extinguishers including, but not limited to, the1.following:

Schedules and coordination requirements.a.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.4Product Data: For each type of product. Include rating and classification, material descriptions, dimensionsA.of individual components and profiles, and finishes for fire extinguisher and mounting brackets.Product Schedule: For fire extinguishers. Coordinate final fire-extinguisher schedule with fire-protectionB.cabinet schedule to ensure proper fit and function. Use same designations indicated on Drawings.

INFORMATIONAL SUBMITTALS1.5Warranty: Sample of special warranty.A.

CLOSEOUT SUBMITTALS1.6Operation and Maintenance Data: For fire extinguishers to include in maintenance manuals.A.

COORDINATION1.7Coordinate type and capacity of fire extinguishers with fire-protection cabinets to ensure fit and function.A.

WARRANTY1.8Special Warranty: Manufacturer's standard form in which manufacturer agrees to repair or replace fireA.extinguishers that fail in materials or workmanship within specified warranty period.

Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:1.Failure of hydrostatic test according to NFPA 10.a.Faulty operation of valves or release levers.b.

Warranty Period: Six years from date of Substantial Completion.2.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS2.1NFPA Compliance: Fabricate and label fire extinguishers to comply with NFPA 10, "Portable FireA.Extinguishers."Fire Extinguishers: Listed and labeled for type, rating, and classification by an independent testing agencyB.acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction.

Provide fire extinguishers approved, listed, and labeled by FM Global.1.

PORTABLE, HAND-CARRIED FIRE EXTINGUISHERS2.2Fire Extinguishers: Type, size, and capacity for each fire-protection cabinet and mounting bracketA.indicated.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by the following:1.Amerex Corporation.a.

Valves: Manufacturer's standard.2.Handles and Levers: Manufacturer's standard.3.Instruction Labels: Include pictorial marking system complying with NFPA 10, Appendix B, and bar4.coding for documenting fire-extinguisher location, inspections, maintenance, and recharging.


FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 1



Multipurpose Dry-Chemical Type: UL-rated, 10 lb capacity, with monoammonium phosphate-based dryB.chemical in manufacturer's standard enameled container.

MOUNTING BRACKETS2.3Mounting Brackets: Manufacturer's standard galvanized steel, designed to secure fire extinguisher to wallA.or structure, of sizes required for types and capacities of fire extinguishers indicated, with plated or redbaked-enamel finish.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.Amerex Corporation.a.

Identification: Lettering complying with authorities having jurisdiction for letter style, size, spacing, andB.location. Locate as indicated by Architect.

Identify bracket-mounted fire extinguishers with the words "FIRE EXTINGUISHER" in red letter1.decals applied to mounting surface.

Orientation: Vertical.a.

EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine fire extinguishers for proper charging and tagging.A.

Remove and replace damaged, defective, or undercharged fire extinguishers.1.Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

INSTALLATION3.2General: Install fire extinguishers and mounting brackets in locations indicated and in compliance withA.requirements of authorities having jurisdiction.

Mounting Brackets: 54 inches above finished floor to top of fire extinguisher.1.Mounting Brackets: Fasten mounting brackets to surfaces, square and plumb, at locations indicated.B.



FIRE EXTINGUISHERS 104416 - 2



SECTION 123661 - SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS

GENERALPART 1 -



Solid-surface-material countertops and backsplashes.1.

ACTION SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: For countertop materials and sinks.A.Shop Drawings: For countertops. Show materials, finishes, edge and backsplash profiles, methods ofB.joining, and cutouts for plumbing fixtures.Samples for Verification: For the following products:C.

Countertop material, 6 inches square.1.

PROJECT CONDITIONS1.4Field Measurements: Verify dimensions of countertops by field measurements after base cabinets areA.installed but before countertop fabrication is complete.

COORDINATION1.5Coordinate locations of utilities that will penetrate countertops or backsplashes.A.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -


SOLID-SURFACE-MATERIAL COUNTERTOPS2.2Configuration: Provide countertops with the following front and backsplash style:A.

Front: Configuration as indicated.1.Backsplash: Match countertop.2.Endsplash: Matching backsplash.3.

Countertops: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material with front edge built up with same material.B.Backsplashes: 1/2-inch- thick, solid surface material.C.Fabrication: Fabricate tops in one piece with shop-applied edges[ and backsplashes] unless otherwiseD.indicated. Comply with solid-surface-material manufacturer's written instructions for adhesives, sealers,fabrication, and finishing.

Fabricate with loose backsplashes for field assembly.1.

COUNTERTOP MATERIALS2.3Particleboard: ANSI A208.1, , made with binder containing no urea formaldehyde.A.Plywood: Exterior softwood plywood complying with DOC PS 1, Grade C-C Plugged, touch sanded.B.Adhesives: Adhesives shall not contain urea formaldehyde.C.Solid Surface Material: Homogeneous solid sheets of filled plastic resin complying with ANSI SS1.D.

Manufacturers: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide products by one of the following:1.E. I. du Pont de Nemours and Company.a.Formica Corporation.b.LG Chemical, Ltd.c.Swan Corporation (The).d.Wilsonart International.e.

Type: Provide Standard Type unless Special Purpose Type is indicated.2.Colors and Patterns: As scheduled.3.


SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 1


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

INSTALLATION3.1Install countertops level to a tolerance of 1/8 inch in 8 feet.A.Fasten countertops by screwing through corner blocks of base units into underside of countertop. Pre-drillB.holes for screws as recommended by manufacturer. Align adjacent surfaces and, using adhesive in colorto match countertop, form seams to comply with manufacturer's written instructions. Carefully dress jointssmooth, remove surface scratches, and clean entire surface.

Install backsplashes and endsplashes to comply with manufacturer's written instructions for1.adhesives, sealers, fabrication, and finishing.Seal edges of cutouts in particleboard subtops by saturating with varnish.2.



SIMULATED STONE COUNTERTOPS 123661 - 2


SECTION 129313 - BICYCLE RACKS

GENERALPART 1 -


SUMMARY1.2Section Includes: Providing metal bicycle racks where indicated.A.Related Sections include the following:B.

Concrete for foundations: Section 033000.1.

SUBMITTALS1.3Product Data: Manufacturer's data for each type of bicycle rack indicated. Include construction details,A.material descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, finishes, field-assemblyrequirements, and installation details.Manufacturer's installation instructions, for information only.B.

QUALITY ASSURANCE1.4Manufacturer shall have a minimum of five years' experience in the manufacturing of metal bicycle racks ofA.the type specified for this Project.Source Limitations: Obtain each type of bicycle rack through one source from a single manufacturer.B.Codes and Standards: Comply with the City of Denton Building Code, latest edition.C.

PRODUCT DELIVERY1.5Deliver materials in factory packages with factory labels attached.A.Cover and protect material in transit and at job site. Damaged or defaced material will be rejected andB.replaced at no cost to the Owner.

PRODUCTSPART 2 -

MANUFACTURER2.1Basis of Design for Bicycle Racks: Provide Model No. RB-07-I-S Ribbon bicycle racks as manufactured byA.AAA Ribbon Rack Co., Inc.Substitutions: Submit in accordance with Section 012500.B.

MATERIALS2.2Stainless Steel: Free from surface blemishes and complying with the following:A.

Pipe: Schedule 40 steel pipe complying with ASTM A 312.1.2.375-inch OD pipe, with No. 4 satin finish.2.

Concrete for foundations: 2500 psi minimum, complying with Section 033000.B.

FABRICATION2.3Metal Components: Form to required shapes and sizes with true, consistent curves, lines, and angles.A.Separate metals from dissimilar materials to prevent electrolytic action.Pipes and Tubes: Form simple and compound curves by bending members in jigs to produce uniformB.curvature for each repetitive configuration required; maintain cylindrical cross section of memberthroughout entire bend without buckling, twisting, cracking, or otherwise deforming exposed surfaces ofcomponents.Fabricate bicycle racks with the following attributes and features:C.

Style: Serpentine or Ribbon.1.Overall Length: Nominal 5 feet.2.Capacity: Seven bicycles.3.Security: Designed to lock wheel and frame.4.Installation: Cast in concrete footing.5.


BICYCLE RACKS 129313 - 1


EXECUTIONPART 3 -

EXAMINATION3.1Examine substrates, areas, and conditions, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements forA.installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of work.Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.B.

PREPARATION3.2Foundation Excavation: Excavate to neat clean lines in undisturbed soil. Remove loose soil and foreignA.matter from excavation and moisten earth before placing concrete.Provide forms where required due to unstable soil conditions and for perimeter of pipe base at grade.B.Secure and brace forms and bicycle rack in position, to prevent displacement during concreting. Protectportion of posts above footing from concrete splatterPlace concrete immediately after mixing. Consolidate concrete in place by using vibrators. Moist-cureC.exposed concrete for not less than seven days or use non-staining curing compound.Trowel exposed concrete surfaces to a smooth, dense finish, free of trowel marks, and uniform in textureD.and appearance. Provide positive slope for water runoff to perimeter of concrete base.

INSTALLATION3.3Comply with manufacturer's written installation instructions, shop drawings, and specifications unless moreA.stringent requirements are indicated.Install bicycle rack posts plumb, level, and square with other work, and at the height recommended by theB.manufacturer.

FIELD QUALITY CONTROL3.4Verify that bicycle racks are installed in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.A.Tolerances:B.

Out of level: ± 1/4".1.Out of plumb: ± 1/8".2.

CLEANING AND PROTECTION3.5After installation, clean soiled surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Protect bicycleA.racks from damage until acceptance by Owner.



BICYCLE RACKS 129313 - 2